Home

Lotus Domino for AS/400 R4.6: Installation

1. Figure 168 PPP Connection Properties Window 9 Click on Configure to open the Modem Properties On the General tab set the maximum speed appropriate for your modem Click OK 10 From the PPP Connection Properties window Click on Server Type Server Types 2 x Type of Dial Up Server ws NT 3 5 Internet m Advanced options Log on to network IV Enable software compression I Require encrypted password m Allowed network protocols M NetBEUI M IPX SPX Compatible M ICPAP TCP IP Settings cme Figure 169 Server Types Window 11 Select PPP Windows 95 Windows NT 3 5 Internet from the pull down box 12 Click on Require encrypted password to put a check mark next to it 13 Click on the TCP IP Settings button and specify the IP address to use for the dial connection from this PC or specify server assigned IP address to allow management of IP addresses from the AS 400 system 14 Click OK to close the TCP IP Settings dialog box 292 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration 15 Click OK to close the Server Types dialog box 16 Click OK to close the PPP Connection Properties window Testing the PPP Connection To use the newly configured AS 400 PPP connection you must have a modem connected to the hardware adapter that the PPP line description is using To test this connection prior to investing in modem hardware or possibly making a dial
2. Source server AcmeDS1 Acme Destination server All Intenet Hosts Connect via Direct connection Destination domain Thelntermet Relay host Scheduled Routing and Connection Replication Connection ENABLED Tasks SMTP Mail Routing Call at times 08 00 4M 10 00 PM each day Route at once if 5 messages pending Repeat interval of 360 minutes Routing cast 5 Days of week an Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Figure 73 The SMTP Connection Document Chapter 4 Mail Integration Through the SMTP MIME MTA 169 The Server Document In addition to adding new documents to the Public Address Book as described above the contents of the Basics section and the Internet Message Transfer Agent SMTP MTA section Figure 75 in the server document are modified with the configuration parameters for the SMTP MIME MTA The Basics section of the Server Document You can see the Basics section of the server document on top of the form when you open the document The configuration porcess for the SMTP MTA adds the task name SMTP Mail Routing to the field Routing tasks as shown in Figure 74 Ey Save and Close SERVER RchASm02 ITSO_Test Basics Server name T A cmeDS1 ACME a Server build number Release 4 6 2 Intl Server title P J Administrators Wilfried Blankertz ACME ee eee eee Domain name ITSO_TestACME J Routing tasks r Mail Routing SMTP Mail Routing a J Cluster name Server s phone number s s Master address
3. ing Credit Card Adapter II and compatibles TCP IP gt 3Com Etherlink Ill PCMCIA 30589 3C589B TCPAIP gt Dial Up Adapter Figure 163 Network Configuration Window Dial Up Adapter Selected 8 Click on the Bindings tab Make sure that TCP IP is checked and click OK Dial Up Adapter Properties TCP IP gt Dial Up Adapter Figure 164 Dial Up Adapter Properties Bindings Tab Chapter 7 Dial Up Connectivity 289 9 From the Network Configuration Window highlight TCP IP gt Dial Up Adapter and click on Properties 3Com Etherlink Ill PCMCIA 30589 3C589B Dial Up Adapter IBM Token Ring Credit Card Adapter Il and compatibles TCP IP gt 3Com Etherlink Ill PCMCIA 30589 3C589B TCP IP gt Dial U er Figure 165 Network Configuration Window TCP IP gt Dial Up Adapter 10 Set the IP address that will be used for the dial connection from this particular workstation In our example we used 10 1 2 200 TCP IP Properties Figure 166 TCP IP Properties Window 290 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration The address specified in the TCP IP Properties dialog box Figure 166 must match the remote IP address specified in the TCP IP Settings Tab of the Point to Point Profile Figure 155 on page 297 when you configured the PPP connection profile on the AS 400 system Reboot the Workstation To activate the changes in the previous steps you n
4. Chapter 7 Dial Up Connectivity 303 The AS 400 user profiles may already exist If not you can create them using the Create User Profile CRTUSRPRF command before you add their names to the authorization list The password included with the connection dialog must match the password specified for the AS 400 user profile In our example we created an authorization list with the name DOMSLIP and added the user profile name DOMUSER to it The authorization list must be created before referring to it here Press Enter to submit the command Note You are allowed to set both Use connection script to N and System access authorization list to a value other than NONE Providing the name of an existing authorization list forces Use connection script to Y An informational message is issued to explain why this change was made Creating and Changing Connection Scripts You cannot change the content of the default connection script file QATOCPPSCR in Library QUSRSYS If you want to use a modified script you must first create your own connection script file Do this by copying the default file using the Copy File CPYF command as follows CPYF FROMFILE QUSRSYS QATOCPPSCR TOFILE lib file FROMMER ALL TOMBR FROMMBR MBROPT ADD CRTFILE YES In the example above lib file represents your own new file Now you may modify the copy of the script file FigureFigure 179 shows an example of a script file
5. Open the list of connection profiles by clicking the icon named Connection Profiles 6 Select and right click your PPP connection profile to open its Properties window Click on the Connection tab Click the Open button to edit the specified line description Click the Modem tab in the line description s properties Open the pull down list of modem information entries and select the name of the new entry you created in step earlier 10 Click OK to save this change to the line description 11 Click OK again to save and close the PPP connection profile Starting the PPP Connection To start the newly created PPP connection profile with Operations Navigator perform the following steps 1 expand the tree under your AS 400 system 2 then the one next to Network 3 then Point to Point and then Connection Profiles 4 Find your profile name in the list right click on it and click Start To connect to the AS 400 system from a remote Windows 95 workstation double click the Dial Up Networking connection icon you created This code may prompt you for a user ID and password if you have not already logged on to the workstation 298 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration SLIP Dial In Example This section guides you through the configuration needed to have a remote SLIP client connect to your AS 400 system Configuring the SLIP Connection Profile on the AS 400 System The configuration of
6. PING by Address Verify the connection by IP address Use the following command in a command line on your workstation not in an AS 400 command line to find out if the AS 400 system responds to your connection attempt using the numerical TCP IP address 10 1 2 3 in our example ping 10 1 2 3 You should see a response similar to the example in Figure 31 a gt C WINDOWS gt ping 10 1 2 3 Pinging 10 1 2 3 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 10 1 2 3 bytes 32 time 4ms TTL 254 Reply from 10 1 2 3 bytes 32 time 4ms TTL 254 Reply from 10 1 2 3 bytes 32 time 4ms TTL 254 Reply from 10 1 2 3 bytes 32 time 4ms TTL 254 C WINDOWS gt Y J Figure 31 Ping by Address If you see an error message instead correct your TCP IP configuration on either the AS 400 system or the workstation It is beyond the scope of this book to explain the details and different possibilities of TCP IP configuration Here are a couple of tips e Try to ping in the opposite direction that is from your AS 400 system to your workstation If this works repeat testing the other direction again e Try to ping to other systems in your network first from your workstation and if that works from your AS 400 system This may isolate where the problem is in the AS 400 configuration or the workstation e If you still cannot isolate the source of the problem try to ping the loop back interface ping 127 0 0 1 If this is not successful on eithe
7. Scalability Within a single architecture the AS 400 system family spans a vast performance spectrum On the high end running on the new 12 way AS 400e series model Domino for AS 400 provides processing strength of up to 16 partitions which allows the capability of accommodating 10 400 active mail users in a NotesBench comparison Note that you cannot necessarily relate the number of NotesBench users to the users that can be supported in a real life environment The NotesBench numbers should only be used to compare different server platforms 16 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Reliability and Availability Domino for AS 400 takes advantage of the reliability and availability features of the AS 400 system such as RAID 5 mirrored disk units and integrated backup capability Each Lotus Domino server runs as an OS 400 application in its own subsystem The unique AS 400 architecture makes it safe to run the Domino server and mission critical business applications on the same machine Integration Domino for AS 400 includes integration between Domino and DB2 400 databases Domino for AS 400 maximizes its integrated access to OS 400 allowing direct real time access to DB2 400 Data can be accessed through several methods providing tight integration between Domino and DB2 400 For example a feature of the Lotus Notes client known as DB2 Import Library allows an SQL query to be run and the resu
8. TSI SNDDOC TSI FILED F3 Exit F5 Refresh Type option press Enter 4 Remove entry F6 Create Work with Routing Entries ALBANY GREAT DANES DEFAULT 5079871234 Description File received fax as GENERATE in RCVFAX Send fax as document to PKENNEDY SYSASD2V File received fax as GENERATE in RCVFAX F12 Cancel Rant ina antru tuna TST FTT RN hae hean creatad os Bottom J Figure 239 Work with Routing Entries 390 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Press the F6 key to create a routing entry The Work with Routing Entries display appears as shown in Figure 240 work with Routing Entries N Select Routing Entry Type Select one of the following Print received fax File received fax Send notification Send fax as a document Run user receive program OO PBWNEF Selection F3 Exit F12 Cancel Bottom F3sExit F5 Refresh F6 Create F12 Cancel J Figure 240 Select Routing Type Select option 4 Send fax as a document and press Enter The Send Document display appears as shown in Figure 241 Ha Send Document N Document s s s s LASTFILED F ldet ss r s oas a LASTFILED Type distribution list or addresses then press Enter Distrib tion LISE ae ear s rsrsrs F4 for list Addressees User ID Address Description PKENNEDY SYSTEMA More F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel to COPYRIGHT IBM COR
9. A printable version of this database is included on the product CD You can view or print it from a workstation using Adobe Acrobat The database file name AS400HLP PDF and is located on the CD in the subdirectory called OS400 Table 2 lists the languages supported by Domino for AS 400 North American English Norwegian International English Swedish French Canadian Danish 24 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration German Finnish French Japanese Italian Simplified Chinese Spanish Traditional Chinese Brazilian Portuguese Korean Dutch Thai Table 2 Languages Supported by Domino Note The difference between North American English and International English is not the language A North American license uses a longer encryption key than an international license As a result you cannot use an international key to decrypt data that was encrypted with a North American key However you can use either an international or North American key to decrypt data that was encrypted with an international key Multi national users who need to exchange encrypted documents should always use an international encryption key except when signing documents which should always use the longer encryption key This difference also applies to user ID files and server ID files as well as to the Notes client software Several restrictions apply if you have a mix of North American and International servers us
10. F4 Prompt F9 Retrieve F12 Cancel F13 Information Assistant F3 Exit Fiaa ann Main menn oe Figure 59 Save Menu on AS 400 To back up only product libraries and directories that contain information for AS 400 licensed programs including Domino for AS 400 perform the following steps 1 Type the following command on any AS 400 command line GO SAVE 2 Press Enter 3 Press Page Down PgDn to see the second page of the menu 4 Enter option 22 Save system data only Option 22 of the SAVE menu includes saving all QNOTESxx libraries as well as the QIBM ProdData Lotus Notes directory Saving Domino Databases Develop a plan to back up all Domino databases including users mail databases and system databases such as the Public Address Book When you configure a Domino server you specify the directory for that server such as NOTES DATA By default all the databases for the server are in that path Your Domino administrators may have the authority to place a Domino database in another path by using an integrated file system command Typically users cannot create Domino databases in any location except the default path for the server If you are responsible for backing up a Domino for AS 400 server you should develop a backup strategy that matches your policy for where information is stored Chapter 3 Backup and Recovery 135 Saving a Specified Location of Domino Databases Use a combination of policies and s
11. From a Domino server availability standpoint we have gone from nightly reboots of our PC servers to weekly recycles of our Domino for AS 400 servers to allow compaction of the Public Address Book Many of our servers have been running for more than twenty days without a glitch a record previously unheard of in our network of PC servers On the occasions though rare where we have experienced Domino server panics the error monitoring and automatic server recycling feature of Domino for AS 400 have worked very well for us in minimizing administrator intervention and down time Another interesting trend which we are experiencing is seen when comparing our May 98 to November 97 server outage numbers We have cut the duration of our prime shift outages by 70 and our off shift outages by 82 Also we have cut the average length of our outages during prime shift from 32 minutes per outage in November 97 to 12 minutes per outage in May 98 and our off shift outages have gone from 61 minutes per outage to 13 minutes per outage Finally Performance This characteristic is what really got us excited when we first started testing Domino for AS 400 Our implementation is part of the IBM United States Notes deployment This Notes domain is probably one of the largest and most complex in existence Our Public Address Book has more than 150 000 documents and is over 1 3GB in size As you can imagine managing a Public Address Book of that s
12. Office Phone Office Fax Cell Phone Home Phone Home Fax Pager Email address jx I HomeTem E Figure 82 Enter a Person s Business Card To get assistance entering an SMTP address click the twisty on the right of the field and the Mail Address Assistant will be opened Figure 83 Mail ddress Assistant Choose the type of mail system the person uses Figure 83 Mail Address Assistant 186 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Click Internet Mail and then OK This will open the window as shown in Figure 84 5 7 OK Cam Internet Mail Address Address e g smith acme com ebender system01 sypstem01 domland acme cor Internet mail domain Figure 84 Enter an Internet Mail Address for a Business Card Key in the full SMTP address for the recipient In Figure 84 we used the example of an Office Vision 400 user as defined on page 183 Note that you have a choice of address formats as described in Default SMTP Address for OS 400 Based Mail Users on page 187 We choose the format having the SDD user ID and address at the left of separated by a question mark The reason is that this format is most likely to be a unique address and does not require an SMTP alias to be defined in OS 400 Note Do not enter anything in the field Internet mail gateway domain unless the MTA is in a different Notes domain In that case you would enter th
13. e The latest Quarterly Maintenance Update QMU can be obtained free of charge from the Internet at http www as400 ibm com notes or http www notes net downgmr nsf Download File The QMU for Domino for AS 400 is basically an AS 400 Save file containing PTFs to be loaded for the 5769 LNT product Please follow the latest instructions on the Web page for additional information Note even though the fixes are implemented as AS 400 PTFs those PTFs cannot be ordered via IBM support Note Future releases of Domino called Quarterly Maintenance Releases QMR have to be purchased unless the customer buys the Software Subscription maintenance This applies especially if customers did not purchase a license in the first place but used the Demo amp Evaluation package In this case the full 4 PTF stands for Program Temporary Fix a program package allowing to apply corrections to applications and operating system functions installed on the AS 400 A cumulative PTF package also called CUM tape is a collection of important PTFs for OS 400 and other IBM licensed programs being delivered to customers on request or on a periodic basis 38 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration server license needs to be purchased in order to receive a new release Optional Software to Install on the AS 400 System Depending on your needs and how you want to use and administer the Domino for AS 400 s
14. Chapter 7 Dial Up Connectivity 299 a Work with Point to Point TCP IP Type option press Enter 1 Add 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Remove 5 Display details 6 Print 9 Start 10 End 12 Work with line status 14 Work with job Line Line Job Opt Name Mode Type Status Description Type Name al WIN95DOM ANS No configuration profiles Bottom F8 Work with modems F9 Command line F10 Local interface status FllsDisplay text F12 Cancel F14 Work with active jobs F24 More keys D Figure 176 Work with Point to Point TCP IP WRKTCPPTP Select option 1 Add enter a name for the new configuration profile in our example it is WIN95DOM and then type ANS as mode Press Enter and you will see the prompt shown in Figure 176 a Add TCP IP Point to Point ANS Profile System RCHASMO1 Name WIN95DOM Text Type choices press Enter TCP IP information Protocol type Se eid dee aes A SLIP Local interface address yaan BAW BO 1 Oe Tee 25 Address F4 for list Remote IP address bee cad asi oes 10 1 2 200 Address Maximum transmission init E gia goa 1006 576 1006 Allow proxy ARP N Y Yes N No Add default route N Y Yes N No Physical line information Line description ASCDOM Name Line type oe amp ASYNC Autocreate controller and device X Y Yes N No Remote location name Name To modem information F3 Exit F4 List F9 Command line P19 Cancral More Figure 177 Add a TCP IP Point to Point
15. From the Setup Complete window click Yes I want to restart my computer now then click Finish Note If you are installing Operations Navigator for the first time reboot your workstation Verifying Operations Navigator for Domino on Your Workstation After you have installed the Domino plug in for Operations Navigator you can verify that it was installed correctly From your Windows 95 or Windows NT desktop perform the following steps D 1 2 3 Ei Double click the JBM AS 400 Client Access icon The IBM AS 400 Client Access folder will open Double click on the AS400 Operations Navigator icon Chapter 6 The Graphical User Interface of Operations Navigator 247 You should see an AS400 Operations Navigator window similar to the one shown in Figure 122 _ AS 400 Operations Navigator 0 x File Edit View Options Help telel xe at 4 minutes old Ba AS 400 Network B System01 E Database AS 400 Database og File Systems 4S 400 File Systems Gy Internet 45 400 Internet Functions Jobs AS 400 Jobs g Messages 4S 400 Messages ra Multimedia 4S 400 Multimedia Objects Ch Network 4S 400 Networking By Printer Qutput 4S 400 Printer Output Printers AS 400 Printers System 4S 400 System Folders ae Users and Groups 45 400 Users and Groups For Help press F1 4a Figure 122 AS 400 Operations Navigator Initial Window In the left panel of the window you should see the AS 4
16. On any AS 400 command line type the following DSPMSG QSYSOPR Chapter 5 Directory Synchronization 239 During normal processing all messages are logged in the Notes Logging database NNDILOG NSF only For severe errors messages are logged in NNDILOG NSF and or in the OS 400 message queue QSYSOPR The OS 400 message queue QNNDIMSG is an intermediary for logging to the Notes Database NNDILOG NSF The OS 400 directory synchronization programs log messages to QNNDIMSG A batch job transfers these messages to the Notes database NNDILOG NSF and then deletes the messages from QNNDIMSG afterwards If for some reason the batch job cannot process the messages from the message queue batch jobs end etc the messages remain on the message queue In errors where jobs end messages are logged to the Notes databases NNDILOG NSF and QSYSOPR 240 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Chapter 6 The Graphical User Interface of Operations Navigator AS 400 Operations Navigator is a powerful user graphical interface for Windows 95 and Windows NT clients that allows you to manage and administer your AS 400 systems using a graphical user interface very similar to Windows 95 NT It is included with AS 400 Client Access AS 400 Operations Navigator for Domino is a separately installed sub component for Operations Navigator that allows you to e Create set up Domino servers on your AS 400 system e Access the NOTES INI
17. type the required information Register Servers x Server Name Domsrv2 Password Minimum password length Password fo Domain Pa Administrator Pomsrd Admin Next Delete Register Cancel Help e 2r ema ee Figure 48 Register Servers Dialog Box Server Name Enter the name of the new server For more information see the Naming a Domino Server section earlier in this chapter Password You can enter a password to protect server s ID file The password is mandatory if you want the ID file to be attached to the server document in the address book see step 14 Attaching the file to the server document seems to make the server configuration on the AS 400 system easier However after having successfully configured the server you either need to enter the password manually every time you start the server in the future or you clear the password see Clearing the Password of a Server ID File on page 112 Having said this it becomes clear that the entire process is shorter if you do not specify a password and consequently not attach the ID file to the address book To do so you also need to specify a minimum password length of zero see step 11 Domain Enter the name of the existing Domino domain Administrator Type the name of the local Notes administrator This name must match the name of an existing Notes user otherwise several administration functions cannot be per
18. you should have read and understood the explanations about the AS 400 implementation of the MTA in chapter 4 Mail Integration Through the SMTP MIME MTA on page 157 Especially important is the fact that the SMTP server in OS 400 is configured correctly The general approach is to delete configuration documents generated by the original SMTP MIME MTA configuration process and allow them to be reconfigured by Domino for AS 400 You begin by following the basic migration process either the server transplantation method or server consolidation method As described earlier in this chapter the migration procedure essentially involves copying your Domino files from the original platform to a data directory on the AS 400 system changing ownership and configuring the new Domino for AS 400 server When you run CFGDOMSVR you should first run it without specifying the SMTPMTA parameter as described in the previous sections Then as the rest of the process outlines you will want to delete the SMTP MIME MTA configuration information you brought over from the original platform before letting Domino for AS 400 configure it Otherwise you will have duplicate configuration documents and it may be difficult to tell which one is correct The detailed steps in the process are as follows 1 Start the new Domino for AS 400 server 2 Open the Public Address Book that you have migrated from the original platform To do this double click on the
19. 4 optional Figure 136 Set Up Domino for AS 400 Panel 4 Advanced Setup 19 Again because you chose Advanced Setup in panel 2 Figure 128 panel 4 shows more parameters than before This time no changes are needed and you can click the Finish button 20 After 5 to 20 minutes you see a panel reporting that the server was successfully created 260 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Congratulations Se es You have successfully completed setting up your Domino Server Listed below is some information about your new server Name Server name AcmeDS4 Acme Domain name Acme Identification amp Passwords The following IDs have been created and are located in notes AcmeDS4 on the Server and in d notes data AcmeDS4 on your PC Server s ID server id Certifier ID certid Administrator s ID userid Admin Password lotusnotes Make sure to write down this password Create another Server Figure 136 Successful Setup of a Domino for AS 400 Server Now when you switch to the AS 400 Operations Navigator window you should see an icon representing your new server in the right pane If you do not see it choose View Refresh As the next step you can exit to the workspace and start your server Deleting a Domino Server If you right click on a server icon and select Delete you will delete the server This is the equivalent of executing the Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSV
20. 9 Set up your AS 400 for integrating the Facsimile Support for AS 400 product with the AnyMail 400 Mail Server Framework product For more information see the AnyMail 400 Mail Server Framework Development Guide SG24 4449 The section Setting Up Your System Distribution Directory Entry gives an example of how to set up System Directory entries for faxing Using the AnyMail 400 Mail Server Framework Before using the AnyMail 400 Mail Server Framework product you need to add fields to the system directory attributes that are used by the AnyMail 400 Mail Server Framework product Facsimile Support for AS 400 requires these user defined fields Use the Change Fax System Directory Attributes CHGFAXSDA command to add these fields For details on this command see the Facsimile Support for AS 400 Programmer s Guide and Reference SC41 0656 00 Setting Up Your System Distribution Directory Entry The system distribution directory is similar to an address book Electronic mail support uses the system distribution directory on the AS 400 system If you use the system distribution directory add a directory entry for each fax recipient for whom you want to use this function The system distribution directory entries associate the mail addresses with the fax telephone numbers master list entries or distribution lists The contents of the user defined fields in the directory entry should match the fax master list or fax distribution list entries that
21. ANS Profile Enter the parameters according to the following descriptions 300 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration TCP IP Information Local interface address is the IP address of the Domino for AS 400 server you will contact with this SLIP connection This value is the local IP address to use as the gateway address for the remote clients It is used as a next hop value for a route or default route to the AS 400 system Use F4 to get a list of already defined local addresses to use or enter a new address If an already defined local address is chosen then it can be used for Proxy ARP on behalf of the remote system dialing in The Proxy ARP flag has to be set to Y for this to occur Remote IP address is the address the remote client will use for this SLIP connection This is the address that the remote client should use as its local interface address It is the IP address used to allow the remote system and the local AS 400 system to communicate If the local IP address chosen already exists and is being used for Proxy ARP then the remote IP address that you choose must be defined on the same subnet as the local IP address defined by its subnet mask Maximum transmission unit should be set to 1006 The MAXBUFFER parameter of the Create Asynchronous Line Description CRTLINASC command can be used to specify the maximum size of the line s inbound and outbound data buffers The default f
22. C API provides the header files and modules allowing ILE C applications to call functions of a Domino for AS 400 server Option 4 C API provides header files modules and service programs for creating and running C applications which call functions of a Domino for AS 400 server Option 5 Lotus Script Extensions Toolkit is the source code and files for creating LSX applications that can run on the Domino for AS 400 server Option 6 HiTest C API is the header files for creating Notes HiTest C applications that can interface with a Domino for AS 400 server Option 7 Advanced Services allows you to use partitioned servers server clusters and the billing features of Domino servers If you plan to have more than one server on your AS 400 you may want to install Advanced Services immediately even if you want to start by using a single server only 52 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Note The code for Advanced Services is provided with every CD ROM However to actually use Domino Advanced Services you must purchase the Lotus Domino Enterprise Server License 6 Press Enter to proceed with the installation Note It may take up to 30 minutes to complete 7 After the installation completes successfully you can use the Display Software Resources DSPSFWRSC command to verify the software was installed Enter the command DSPSFWRSC on any command line and you will see a display like the on
23. Domino for AS 400 Advanced Services Administering and Using Domino for AS 400 Domino for AS 400 Users Setting Up Domino for AS 400 Users Database Integration Integration of Notes Mail and OS 400 Based Mail Backup and Recovery of Lotus Notes Objects Application Development and Add ins Packaging of Domino for AS 400 Domino Documentation AS 400 System Architecture AS 400 System Concepts Summary Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 Useful Publications 11 12 13 13 14 15 16 18 19 20 20 21 22 22 23 24 26 28 30 33 35 35 Changes in this Chapter Overview Prerequisites for Domino for AS 400 Pre installation Tasks Apply and Activate the PTF to Support EDTF and DSPSTMF Configure TCP IP on Your AS 400 System Naming the Domino Server Installation Setup and Configuration Installing the Domino for AS 400 Product on Your AS 400 System Using the Load and Run LODRUN Command National Language Considerations Running Domino Using a Secondary Language Additional Considerations for Double Byte Languages Setting Up the First Server in a New Domino Domain Using the Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR Command Work with Domino Servers Starting the Domino for AS 400 Server Ending the Domino Server Identify the AS 400 Jobs for Your Server Working with the Domino Console Verify TCP IP Connectivity for Your Administration Client Copy ID Files to Your Client Workstati
24. Error 425 can t open data connection On the AS 400 FTP command line type sendpa Press Enter and FTP issues a confirmation SENDPASV is off Change the name format to 1 This allows us to work with the entire AS 400 Integrated File System IFS or in other words the root file system instead of the library file system QSYS LIB which is only a subset On the AS 400 FTP command line type na 1 Press the Enter key FTP issues a confirmation Client NAMEFMT is 1 Working from your identified list of files to be migrated use the appropriate FTP commands to copy individual files multiple files of the same type from a particular directory or all files from a particular directory Tip Use LCD Local Change Directory to change directory on the local AS 400 system Use CD Change Directory to change directory on the original system which may be an Integrated PC Server Use GET for individual files and MGET for multiple files More specific examples with command syntax are included below To copy all files from a particular subdirectory of this Domino data directory in our example from the mail subdirectory with the option to replace existing files of the same name in the target directory type the following commands on the AS 400 FTP command line LCD notes data mail CD k notes data mail MGET replace To copy multiple files of the same type for example with extension NSF from a user subdirectory of this Domino
25. Here we describe an example scenario with a Domino for AS 400 server called AcmeA Acme running on an AS 400 system named SYSTEMO1 and a Domino for AS 400 server called AcmeB Acme running on an AS 400 system named SYSTEMO2 In this example both servers are in the same Domino domain called Acme with an organization of the same name SYSTEMO1 the calling system has IP address 10 1 2 3 SYSTEMO2 the answering system has IP address 10 1 2 4 Creating a DIAL PPP Profile on the Calling System On a Windows 95 or NT workstation connected to the calling AS 400 system perform the following steps using Operations Navigator 1 In the Operations Navigator window find the name of the AS 400 system for which you want to create the calling PPP profile Click the plus sign to expand the directory Click the plus sign next to Network Click the plus sign next to Point to Point and you will see the existing connection profiles if any in the right pane of the window as shown in Figure 180 AS 400 Operations Navigator of x File Edit View Options Help O minutes old B System01 Status Connection type Database 2 Inactive Switched line answer Hog File Systems 2 Inactive Switched line answer Gg Intenet i Inactive Leased line terminator Jobs Ne Win3Sdom Inactive Leased line terminator A Messages Ne Win3Sppp Inactive Switched line answer a m By panoi Ne Win35slip Inactive Switched line answer vy Connec
26. Inc 1997 white paper Domino for AS 400 Uniting Two Hall of Fame Technologies attempts to give a concise explanation of Domino Domino defies easy definition because Domino is so many things all at once It is electronic mail it is workflow based computing it is a productive visual client server programming tool it is database and document management it is highly secure it is platform neutral and it is the standard by which all other groupware solutions are measured To read the complete white paper refer to the Web site http www as400 ibm com notes Application Development and Domino Domino makes developing applications that automate business processes easy For an organization with heterogeneous platforms and operating systems use the seamless cross platform design of application databases created with the Lotus Notes Designer for Domino client With the Notes Designer for Domino client you can start creating applications from a graphical user interface GUI with no knowledge of programming or scripting languages On the other hand experienced application developers can create complex workflow or other GUI based client server applications with much less effort compared to traditional computer systems Templates make setting up and configuring applications fast and easy Applications on Domino can e Route information automatically e Alert users that an item is overdue or needs attention e Exchange
27. N a KKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK SERVER CONNECTION SCRIPT EXAMPLE WITH LOGIN AND PASSWORD WIN95 PROMPT amp Userid USERID amp Password PASSWORD amp Internet LR E gt PROMPT amp IPGATE IS AS 400 IP ADDRESS amp IPADDR IS IP ADDRESS OF SYSTEM CALLING AS 400 END OF SERVER CONNECTION SCRIPT EXAMPLE C se SESE Se ae Se i So Se Sh Se EE Sea i Eaha e ak nka Se ia ak de SE Se Sek MOR Se Se ea e eika Figure 180 Example AS 400 Server Script for a Windows 95 Connection Please refer to the latest version of TCP IP Configuration and Reference SC41 3420 for detailed script information SLIP with a PPP Line Description To use a PPP line description your AS 400 system must have one of the I O adapters described in Prerequisites for Using PPP on an AS 400 System on page 288 304 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration In order to establish a SLIP connection over a PPP line type with another system you need to provide your AS 400 system with the information that allows it to do this This information is stored in a connection profile You need to use Operations Navigator to create a connection profile Note If your AS 400 system supports PPP line descriptions the use of the PPP protocol is highly recommended over SLIP The only environment in which SLIP would be used over a PPP line description
28. NOTES DATA MAIL DTAAUT EXCLUDE OBJAUT NONE CHGOWN NOTES DATA doc NEWOWN QNOTES CHGOWN NOTES DATA 1space NEWOWN QNOTES CHGOWN NOTES DATA MAIL NEWOWN QNOTES SBMNWSCMD XFTPD ON SERVER IPCS1 SVRTYPE BASE CMDTYPE 0S2 OVRDBF FILE INPUT TOFILE LIBL QCLSRC MBR FTPINPUT OVRDBF FILE OUTPUT TOFILE LIBL QCLSRC MBR FTPOUTPUT FIP RMTSYS 192 168 3 2 SBMNWSCMD XFTPD OFF SERVER IPCS1 SVRTYPE BASE CMDTYPE 0S2 ENDPGM F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F9 Retrieve F10 Cursor F11l Toggle F16 Repeat find F17 Repeat change F24 More keys Figure 198 CL Program to Automate Data Transfer Through FTP Before coding the FTP command you need to use an Override with Data Base File OVRDBF command to redirect the standard input file by default the keyboard to the source file member FTP INPUT line 11 00 in Figure 198 Figure 199 338 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration shows the content of the file member 1 71 Edit WBL QCLSRC FTPINPUT Adee sf suelo ehcp As E Ste oH aves OAM wished siane Oy sare te erase sO ekede d se ayat oa KKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Beginning of data KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK admin adminpwd cD bin send NA LCD NOTES DATA doc cd k notes data doc MGET replace LCD NOTES DATA 1space cd k notes data lspace MGET replace LCD NOTES DATA MAIL cd k notes data MAIL MGET replace QUIT KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK End OF
29. Note AS 400 provides disk protection options mirrored protection and device parity protection both to increase availability and to ensure that failures of a single disk unit do not cause loss of data You can find out more about disk protection in the book OS 400 Backup and Recovery SC41 5304 Sometimes you must recover your entire server Other times you must restore a specific directory or a single database The following topics provide general information about recovery steps for Domino for AS 400 Chapter 3 Backup and Recovery 143 e Recovering an entire Domino server e Recovering Domino mail e Recovering Domino databases e Restoring changed objects to a Domino server For complete procedures and considerations see the AS 400 Backup and Recovery book and the Domino documentation Recovering the Entire Domino for AS 400 Server If you are faced with a system disaster such as a site loss or the failure of an unprotected disk unit you must restore your entire AS 400 system from a backup Because AS 400 is a highly integrated system you must recover objects in the correct sequence to rebuild the proper links between objects The book OS 400 Backup and Recovery SC41 5304 provides complete instructions for performing a full system recovery If you are faced with a problem that requires recovering only your Domino for AS 400 server not your entire AS 400 system you can use the Restore Object RST command to reload your Domino
30. OBJ notes data CHGPERIOD lastsave updhst yes Continue using the same command every night until your next full backup Backing Up One Day s Changes To perform a nightly incremental backup of what has changed since the previous incremental backup you need to adjust the CHGPERIOD parameter each night Following is an example 1 On Saturday evening at 8 PM perform a complete backup for example by using option 23 from the Save menu Make sure that you specify UPDHST YES on the SAV command so that the system updates the object information with the time and day of the most recent backup On Sunday evening November 9 at 10 PM use the following command SAV DEV qsys 1lib tap01 devd OBJ notes data CHGPERIOD 11 08 97 200000 updhst yes On Monday evening November 10 at 9 PM use the following command SAV DEV qsys 1lib tap01 devd OBJ notes data CHGPERIOD 11 09 97 220000 updhst yes On Tuesday evening November 11 at 8 PM use the following command SAV DEV qsys 1lib tap01 devd OBJ notes data CHGPERIOD 11 10 97 210000 updhst yes Each evening run the SAV command Alter the Change Period parameter to the time and date of the previous backup Reduce the Downtime of Your Servers To reduce the downtime of your servers during backups you can use one or both of the following methods Use clustered servers AS 400 can support clustered servers on the same s
31. PPP profile can optionally be configured with system authentication Domino has built in security that ensures users must have a proper ID to access the server Phone number Type the phone number of the modem attached to the answering system If it does not match the information in the PPP profile the phone number specified on this window overrides what was originally in the profile 10 Click the OK button to return to the Connection form 11 If you want to set up a schedule for this connection fill in the Scheduled Connection section and select Enabled in the Schedule field 12 In the Routing and Replication section choose Replication Mail Routing or both of these in the Tasks field If necessary fill in or modify any of the other parameters related to routing or replication behavior 13 Click Save and Close Setting up the Server Document In order for two Domino servers to communicate for purposes of mail routing or replication the Public Address Book of the calling Domino server must contain a server document for the answering Domino server Since Domino for AS 400 communicates using the TCP IP protocol that server document must have a Domino port enabled for TCP IP communications If both servers are in the same domain a server document for the answering Domino server will already exist in the Public Address Book In this case you simply need to verify that a Domino port has been enabled on that server to use the TCP
32. QBATCH 0 QCMN 0 QCTL 0 QINTER 0 QSERVER 0 QSNADS 0 OSPL 0 OSYSWRK 0 NNNNNNNNNE Bottom Parameters or command gt F3 Exit F5 Refresh F1l Display system data F12 Cancel Fl4 Work with svstem status ie Figure 68 Work with Subsystems WRKSBS Chapter 4 Mail Integration Through the SMTP MIME MTA 163 If the QSNADS is not active you can start it by entering the following command on any AS 400 command line STRSBS QSNADS Set Up a Domino for AS 400 Server with the SMTP MIME MTA At this point we assume you already installed the Domino for AS 400 product as described in Chapter 2 The SMTP MIME MTA is an integrated part of the server software that is it will be installed automatically with the base part of Domino for AS 400 However when you set up a server you need to specify if you want the MTA to be configured or not Note If you set up multiple partitioned servers only one of them can have the MTA started To set up a server and enable the mail integration you need to specify SMTPMTA or ALL with the Internet mail packages MAIL parameter of the Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR command If you use Operations Navigator to configure the server you have to select one of the following e Internet Mail Packages in form 3 as shown in Figure 69 if you selected Quick and Easy Setup in form 2 In addition to Notes users who else will be the audience for this server C Web Browsers for examp
33. TELNBR1 Office phone number TELNBR2 Phone number TEXT Text TITLE Job title USRADDR User address USRD User Description USRID UserID v Literal we Literal denoting one space Literal denoting sign v User Defined SMTPDMN SMTP Domain SMTPRTE SMTP route SMTPUSRID SMTP UserID Figure 115 Fields View for AS 400 Fields Fields in the System Distribution Directory and Address Book The Directory Synchronization Functions map fields between the AS 400 system distribution directory SDD and the fields in a Domino Public Address Book If Chapter 5 Directory Synchronization 231 you want to change the default mapping you must know which fields are defined in the SDD and the PAB IBM Defined Fields in the SDD To locate all IBM defined fields contained in the system distribution directory you can use the Change Directory Entry CHGDIRE command 1 Type the following command in any AS 400 command line CHGDIRE do not press Enter 2 Press F4 prompt 3 Press F9 All Parameters 4 Press F11 Keywords You see the field names in the center of your display along with a description on the left and the input fields on the right Press the PgDn key to see the next set of fields If you receive the error message Parameter USRID required press the PgDn key a second time The purpose here is not to enter any information You are using the command prompter to see which field names are available User Defined Fields
34. al International Technical Support Organization Lotus Domino for AS 400 R4 6 Installation Customization and Administration November 1998 Take Note Before using this information and the product it supports be sure to read the general information in the Special Notices section at the back of this book Draft for Second Edition November 1998 This edition applies to Lotus Domino for AS 400 Release 4 6 2 Comments may be addressed to IBM Corporation International Technical Support Organization Dept HZ8 Building 678 P O Box 12195 Research Triangle Park NC 27709 2195 When you send information to IBM you grant IBM a non exclusive right to use or distribute the information in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you International Business Machines Corporation 1998 All rights reserved Note to U S Government Users Documentation related to restricted rights Use duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp 2 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Contents Contents Preface Summary of Changes for the Second Edition The Team That Wrote This Redpaper Comments Welcome Chapter 1 Overview of Lotus Domino for AS 400 What Is Lotus Domino for AS 400 Application Development and Domino History of Lotus Notes and Domino Integration with AS 400 System Domino for AS 400 Solution
35. and takes advantage of the integrated OS 400 TCP IP support Backup and Recovery of Lotus Notes Objects A Domino server often contains important business information that may not exist elsewhere in your organization For example users may rely on e mail for important communications that are not documented anywhere else Similarly an on line customer service application may contain records that do not exist in printed form To protect the data from disasters such as a site loss or hardware loss and from human error such as accidentally deleting a critical database develop a good strategy for regularly backing up the information on your Domino server Make a plan to back up the following e Objects that change infrequently such as programs for the Domino product The Backing Up the Domino Programs and Product Files section in the Domino for AS 400 Help database AS400HLP NSF or Chapter 5 of the book Installing and Managing Domino for AS 400 Lotus Part No 12999 describes options for backing up the relatively static unchanging parts of your Domino server e Objects that change regularly such as Domino databases Backing up all Domino databases in the Domino for AS 400 Help database AS400HLP NSF or Chapter 5 of the book Installing and Managing Domino for AS 400 Lotus Part No 12999 describes the options for backing up the dynamic changing parts of your Domino server Domino for AS 400 takes advantage of t
36. command and enter the correct password This has to be done every time you start the server Clearing the Password of a Server ID File Provided you did specify minimum password length 0 in step 11 on page 109 you can clear the password at a later time Following is the process to do so 1 Copy the file server id to a directory on the Administrator workstation For more details see Using FTP to Copy the ID Files to the Administrator Workstation on page 87 earlier in this chapter Or Map the Domino data directory on the AS 400 IFS as a network drive to your workstation 2 From the Notes Client workstation click File Tools Server Administration The server administration panel appears 3 From the menu bar choose Administration Id file 4 Inthe Choose ID File to Examine dialog box select the server ID file from the directory where it was copied to or which is mapped to your workstation and click Open The User ID dialog box will appear 5 Click Clear Password This will remove the password from the ID file Remember however that this is only possible if you specified a minimum password length of zero when you registered the server 6 If you did not use a network drive use FTP to copy the ID file back to the AS 400 IFS Important After having changed the ID file in the AS 400 IFS no matter whether you copied it or used a network drive the ownership for this IFS object has chang
37. consult your network administrator to obtain an appropriate new IP address for your installation If an Internet address is defined for port 2 type in a new Internet address for TCP IP port 2 In our example the original address was 10 5 67 72 and we changed it to 10 5 67 74 Note An Integrated PC Server configured for Domino always has one internal port showing INTERNAL in the Port parameter and one or two external ports There is no need to change the internal IP address depending on the future usage of the Integrated PC Server the internal port may or may not be needed If the Domino server uses both external ports you need to change each as in our example If only one port was used it will be port 1 in most cases but could as well be port 2 gt A reason for using two ports would be one port connects to a Token Ring the other one to an Ethernet or you may have 4 MB and a 16MB Token Ring For example if the Integrated PC Server is used to implement a firewall the internal port needs to be used If the Integrated PC Server is used as a LAN adapter for AS 400 applications the internal port is no longer needed 344 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Press the Enter key A message appears indicating Operation in progress please wait The Work with Network Server Descriptions display will reappear A message at the bottom of the display should confirm your action In
38. in the configuration document 1 Double click the icon for Directory Sync Configuration database Bw Directory Sync Configuration on AcmeDS1 Proceed with step 6 or 2 On the Notes desktop choose File Database Open from the menu bar Select or key in the name of the Domino for AS 400 server Select Directory Sync Configuration database NNDIRSYC NSF Click the Open button Click the Configurations button aA RY Select the configuration document that you want to enable and click Edit Configuration 8 Change the status of the configuration to Enabled 9 Click Save and Close Note If you enabled directory synchronization and chose to populate the directories the first synchronization can take a while expect each directory entry to take 2 4 seconds to be processed This depends on the amount of data and the synchronization type It is possible to check the progress and the result of the synchronization directly from the configurations menu To do so check the Directory Synchronization Log NNDILOG NSF database by clicking Logging Entries To view the contents of the Domino Address Book which is being synchronized click View Address Book This is only possible when a configuration is enabled Chapter 5 Directory Synchronization 233 The Directory Synchronization function runs as a stand alone application Therefore a shutdown of the server doesn t end directory synchronization For more info
39. press Enter 4 End subsystem 5 Display subsystem description 8 Work with subsystem jobs Opt Subsystem Storage DOMINOO8 QBATCH QCMN QCTL QINTER OSERVER QSNADS QSPL OSYSWRK Parameters or command gt Work with Subsystems System SYSTEMO1 Tote o TARARE Subsystem Pogls 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 K 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 POD IO ID O RN REA A Bottom F3 Exit F5 Refresh Fll Display system data F12 Cancel RPIASWark with evwetam etatie exh Figure 26 Work with Subsystems WRKSBS 2 Watch for the subsystem name used by your new Domino for AS 400 server It is a name in the form DOMINOxx that you wrote down from the completion message shown in Figure 24 on page 77 Type the number 8 Work with subsystem jobs into the option field next to the correct subsystem name and press Enter You will see the Work with Subsystems Jobs panel Figure 27 Depending on the configuration of your server and how soon you entered this command after starting the server you may see more or fewer jobs compared to those shown in Figure 27 However at least two jobs must be active QNNINSTS and SERVER to see the latter you may have to press the PgDn key S If you know the name of the subsystem there is also a fast path to this point Just enter command WRKSBSJOB DOMNINOxx on any command line Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 77 Subsystem Work with Subsystem Job
40. you will need to follow the steps under Use a 5250 Display to Create Customized Modem Information on page 310 Note Operations Navigator Version 3 Release 2 can be used with either OS 400 Version 4 Release 2 or Version 4 Release 3 To create the customized modem information using Operations Navigator Version 3 Release 2 perform the following steps 1 From the Windows 95 or Windows NT desktop start Operations Navigator 2 Click on the plus sign next to the icon showing the name of your AS 400 system to expand the tree Click on the plus sign next to Network Click on the plus sign next to Point to Point Click on the icon named Modems A list of modems appears in the right pane of the navigator as in Figure 170 AS 400 Operations Navigator of x File Edit View Options Help sl AE Re 1 minutes old Primary Environment System01 Modems Gf Systemi a Creation type lt H E Database BM Default ag File Systems BM Default Intemet BM Default Sy Jobs BM Default i a sabi m BM Default etwor 2 P BM Default Point to Point iii Connection P BM Default a gepe BM Default En Protocols j BM 7852 400 2609 or 2612 EIA 232 V 24 adapter BM Default Fy Servers E IBM 7857 017 BM Default Fy Printer Output E MaxTech 28800 BM Default E EN Printers MultiTech 28800 Multimodem BM Default H A System E USRobotics 14400 Sportster BM Default E e Users and Groups 29 USRoboti
41. 00 MONMSG CPF0000 0007 00 STRDOMSVR AcmeDS1 0008 00 MONMSG CPF0000 0009 00 ENDPGM Figure 60 Example CL Program to Backup Domino for AS 400 The idea of the program shown in Figure 60 shows how to end the Domino server in a controlled way before starting the save process The difficulty is that it may take an unknown amount of time for all server functions to actually end One solution is to delay the execution of the program for a predefined time interval after submitting the End Domino Server ENDDOMSVR command Ending the Domino Subsystem Caution Do not end the Domino subsystem using the End Subsystem ENDSBS as part of your backup procedure This may cause the server to restart immediately after the End Domino Server ENDDOMSVR command has been executed Recovery of Domino for AS 400 Objects Domino for AS 400 programs and product files reside in libraries in the QSYS LIB file system on your AS 400 Domino databases reside in the integrated file system in a directory path that you specify when you configure your server Your backup strategy for Domino for AS 400 should include backing up both the libraries infrequently and the database directories frequently You might need to recover Domino for a variety of reasons for example e User or operator error such as deleting a database or running a month end procedure twice e Damage to your server such as fire or flood e Hardware problems such as a disk failure
42. 10 1 2 3 took 6 ms 256 bytes TTL 64 request 4 from 10 1 2 3 took 6 ms 256 bytes TTL 64 request 5 from 10 1 2 3 took 7 ms 256 bytes TTL 64 Round trip in milliseconds min avg max 6 7 11 Connection verification statistics 5 of 5 successful 100 Bottom Type command press Enter gt F3 Exit F4 Prompt F9 Retrieve F10 Include detailed messages F11 Displav full F12 Cancel F13 Information Assistant F24 More kevs A Figure 5 Result of using the PING utility to verify TCP IP connection Note Verifying the connection by using the numerical IP address is normally not sufficient to ensure that the Notes clients or other Domino servers will be able to connect to your Domino for AS 400 server By default the Notes clients assume that the name of the Domino server to connect to is known as a TCP IP host name Therefore we talk about some naming considerations in the following section Naming the Domino Server The close relationship between the TCP IP host names and Domino server names makes it very important to think about the Domino server name A Domino server may have a long name even with embedded spaces For example Acme Domino Server One would be a valid name for a Domino server This type of naming is possible in Notes environments however the example given above is not a valid TCP IP host name By default when a Notes client or another Domino server tries to connect to a Domino serve
43. 133 138 Work Domino jobs 181 WRKENVVAR 129 WRKNAMSMTP 197 WRKSPLF 132 340 WRKTCPPTP 314 315 326 WRKUSRJOB 138 X X PC 380 Index 421 423
44. 135 Set Up Domino for AS 400 Panel 3 for Advanced Setup 18 This is the only way to select partitioned server clustering or billing For our example select Partition and click the greater than sign to continue to panel 4 Chapter 6 The Graphical User Interface of Operations Navigator 259 Please review and complete the following information Most of the default values come from your For Help click on the machine settings Information you provided during installation supplies the rest blue labels Organization Identity Porbetter xeourky PBA please provide your Organization Name Acme own passwords Domain Name F IBMITSO Rochester PE ER on aga Ince the information Certifier ID Allow Setup to create new certifier ID is satisfactory click Use existing certifier ID the Finish button above to create your New Server Identity new server Server Name T AcmeDs4 Allow Setup to create new server ID Server ID Use existing server ID Administrator s Identity Administrator s First Wifried g d P Mi g Last Blankertz 3 Password aes J Administrator s ID Allow Setup to create new administrator ID Use existing administrator ID Data files location Server s Directory inotes AcmeDs4 Replace existing configuration files Replace Server Files Do not replace existing configuration files Copy ID files to T dinotestdata Network information Network Name T NETWORK1 optional Country Code
45. 182 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration For example the address Erika_Bender SYSTEMO01 would be a valid address in the sense that it would be accepted by OS 400 SMTP support because SYSTEMO1 is the AS 400 system s local TCP IP host name However the Domino mail router would search for a Notes domain called SYSTEMO1 rather than forwarding the mail to the SMTP MTA Therefore one of the period delimited SMTP addresses needs to be specified Erika_Bender SYSTEM01 domland acme com EBENDER SYSTEMO1 domland acme com EBENDER SYSTEMO1 SYSTEM01 domland acme com There are several ways to specify a mail recipient s address in Lotus Notes e Enter the mail address manually e Use a stored address for recipients on foreign mailing systems Entering the Mail Address Manually When sending mail from a Notes client you can always enter an SMTP Internet mail address instead or in addition to Notes mail addresses into the To cc or bec fields as shown in Figure 80 New Memo Lotus Notes ioi x File Edit View Create Actions ee eie Help SPATE UE Hans Neugebauer 06 25 98 09 24 4M To T EBENDER SYSTEMO1 SYSTEMO1 domland acme com ce ry bee ra Subject Letters from a happy Notes user to somebody using OfficeVision 400 Dear Erika 4 Rich4Sm021 ED Figure 80 Entering the Mail Address Manually Using a Stored Address for Recipients on Foreign Mail Systems Keying in such a l
46. 20 seconds due to listen errors gt sh port tcpip TCP IP Port Driver Transport Provider TCP Enter a Domino subcommand gt F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Print F9 Retrieve F17 Top F18 Bottom F21 Command line J Figure 39 TCPIP Port Not Listening to Any IP Address The most likely reason for this is that another partitioned server is already active and is listening to all interfaces on the AS 400 system thus not allowing this server to use the same port However you may find this error message Error on Listen function The TCP IP stack can t bind a network address to a TCP socket please verify that the TCP stack has been properly initialized The message may be caused by one of the following reasons e TCP IP support on your AS 400 system was not started The IP interface was not started After verifying that the server is listening to only one specific IP address repeat the same procedure for other partitioned servers on your AS 400 system Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 95 All Servers Use the Same IP Address Port Mapping Multiple partitioned servers on the AS 400 system can also use the same IP address probably the only one configured on the AS 400 system You can use TCP IP port mapping to configure multiple partitioned servers to share the same line and the same IP address TCP IP port mapping requires you to assign a unique IP port number to each partitioned server that s
47. 3 Mount the tape that has the most recent backup of the mail databases Use the appropriate Restore Object RST command for the mail databases that you want to recover For example to restore all the databases to the MAIL subdirectory from device TAPO1 use the following command RST DEV qsys lib tap01 devd OBJ notes data mail Chapter 3 Backup and Recovery 145 Examples The name of a user s mail database is usually the user ID short name with the NSF extension The Domino administrator has the option to use different names for mail database files e To recover a specific user s mail database such as the mail database for user GNELSON use the RST command and specify the database name RST DEV qsys lib tap01 devd OBJ notes data mail gnelson nsf e You can specify more than one file on the RST command To restore mail databases for GNELSON LSMITH and JPETERS use the following command RST DEV qsys lib tap01 devd OBJ notes data mail gnelson nsf notes data mail lsmith nsf notes data mail jpeters nsf Notes About the Examples e In this example we do not end the server However you cannot restore a database that is in use by a Notes user All users must close the database before you can restore a backup copy e All of the examples assume that the directory for your Domino server is NOTES DATA e Substitute the name of your AS 400 tape device for TAPO1 Recovering Domino Data
48. 307 More details about this and optional connection scripts can be found in the manual AS 400 Client Access for Windows 95 NT Setup V4R2 SC41 3512 04 in section 3 3 1 entitled Setting up to Connect to AS 400 and on the Web on this page Http www microsoft com windows downloads contents admintools w95scriptsup default asp Testing the SLIP connection SLIP uses a modem in the asynchronous mode The modem information described in the section entitled Testing the PPP Connection on page 308 applies to SLIP as well as PPP SLIP and PPP connection profiles can be started and stopped using either an AS 400 CL command from a 5250 display or using Operations Navigator You may be more comfortable using the interface that was used for configuration and setup 5250 when using an asynchronous line description or Operations Navigator when using a PPP line description Using an AS 400 CL Command to Start a SLIP Profile If you are using a 5250 session you need to issue the Work with Point to Point TCP IP Profiles WRKTCPPTP command Type the following command on any AS 400 command lime and press Enter WRKTCPPTP From the Work with Point to Point TCP IP WRKTCPPTP panel select Option 9 Start to start the profile After the profile has successfully started the status of the profile should be RINGW ring waiting It is necessary to press F5 for Refresh to update the display If the status stays in STRSSN there may be a message
49. 400 software on your AS 400 system using a 5250 terminal or 5250 emulation session and set up Operations Navigator and its Domino plug ins as described in the previous sections you have to create at least one Domino server to use Lotus Domino for AS 400 The terminology for this process varies While the similar task for other Domino platforms is often called setup it is called configuration when you use an AS 400 CL command as described in Chapter 2 of this book and create when you use the graphical user interface of Operations Navigator as described in the sections that follow 252 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Overview The basic concept for creating a new server using Operations Navigator is a two step process 1 You enter all necessary parameters into a Notes configuration database 2 A job is submitted to the AS 400 for you to perform the configuration process The first step is very similar to setting up a Domino server for other platforms such as OS 2 Windows NT or UNIX using the Domino Server Setup database SETUP NSF which is new in Domino 4 6 Note however that even though the user interface is very similar you cannot use the same database and you have to start the process from the Operations Navigator as described in the following steps To be able to use this process you need to have a Lotus Notes Designer client with the Designer license installed on your administ
50. 65 Press the PgDn key to see the next set of parameters a Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR 5 Type choices press Enter Administrator ID GEN Server LU ss ss lt ed e ve de code sede a GEN Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display C F24 More keys J Figure 13 CFGDOMSVR for a First Server 4 Prompt Keyword Description ADMID Administrator ID Specifies that a new administrator ID file by the name of USER ID should be created GEN within the data directory as defined in parameter DTADIR or whether it already exists Example GEN Default GEN SVRID Server ID Specifies the server ID file by the name of SERVER ID should be created GEN within the data directory as defined in parameter DTADIR or whether it already exists Example GEN Default GEN If you need to add additional selections for WEB NEWS MAIL or ADVSRV after the server has been configured you can do so by reconfiguring the server that is by performing the Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR command again but this time specifying the actual name and path for the CERT ID USER ID and SERVER ID file in the parameters CERTID ADMID and SVRID as well as RPLCFG NO This will just add the additional support requested in the WEB NEWS MAIL or ADVSRV parameters without configuring a complete new server See Reconfiguring the Domino Server on page
51. 95 NT Setup V4R2 SC41 3512 04 These manuals are also available on the Web at http as400bks rochester ibm com For more information about dial concentrator configuration please refer to the documentation provided with the specific device As mentioned before Domino for AS 400 supports PPP and SLIP for dial up connections with Point to Point TCP IP The following sections give a brief overview of those protocols What Is SLIP Serial Line Internet Protocol SLIP is the result of early attempts to connect two systems using TCP IP over an asynchronous line SLIP is a simple protocol for transmission of IP datagrams over serial lines described in Request for Comment RFC 1055 SLIP has several deficiencies that are discussed in the RFC Some of those deficiencies are as follows e No standardized mechanism for hosts to communicate addressing information e No support for network protocols other than TCP IP e No support for system authentication e No support for packet error detection error correction or compression The terminology may be somewhat confusing Point to Point includes both PPP and SLIP as well as switched and non switched connections Chapter 7 Dial Up Connectivity 275 Despite these deficiencies SLIP is still used today It is provided as part of OS 400 IBM does not encourage use of SLIP However its support for an asynchronous line type allows the use of some of the older adapters and I O processors
52. AS 400 Installation Customization Administration document which defines how the user s mail is sent and received We devised a detailed process for managing the end user changes described below under Managing user communications On Friday morning of the migration week we would modify the Public Address Book to change the mail server and if necessary the mail file path for each user being migrated If you were migrating all users from a given server this could be done with a simple agent In a case like ours with a pilot group of users migrating from different servers a manual approach might be more straightforward We would perform 400 600 Public Address Book updates in one weekend It would take us approximately 4 to 5 hours to perform these updates by hand Managing User Communications The most important aspect of a migration or any major change is managing the impact to the end user We ve discussed how we migrated our data without impacting our users We also need to explain how we implemented the changes required on the users own workstations to use their new Domino mail server On Wednesday morning we would send out the first of three memos to the users who were to be migrated This communication included an announcement of the imminent migration who what where when and why We included a button in this memo which added icons for key databases on the new Domino server such as the Public Address Book and
53. AS 400 91 1 Double click My Computer 2 Double click Control Panel 3 Double click Add Remove Programs 4 Click the tab named Windows Setup 5 Double click Accessories 6 Scroll down till you see WordPad 7 Click WordPad and make sure the check mark appears on the left 8 Click OK to close the Accessories dialog box 9 Click OK to close the Add Remove Programs properties box Do not try to start any partitioned server unless you have added the TCPIP_TcpIpAddress statement Also make sure that the statement is typed correctly If you make a mistake the statement will be ignored and no error message will occur Start the Partitioned Server Use the Start Domino Server STRDOMSVR command to start the new server Completion message LNT0925 as shown in Figure 36 will tell you the name of the subsystem that the server jobs are running in and which partition it will use C gt strdomsvr acmeds1 gt Starting Domino server acmedsl in subsystem DOMINOO3 Bottom Type command press Enter gt F3 Exit F4 Prompt F9 Retrieve F10 Include detailed messages F1l Display full F12 Cancel F13 Information Assistant F24 More keys Pi Figure 36 Starting Domino Server Completion Message LNT0925 You can use the Work with Domino Servers WRKDOMSVR command to find out which of the partitioned servers is running in which subsystem Verify the Server Is Listening to Only One IP Address If you start a partit
54. AS 400 server We started with this approach for three reasons W It is the correct supported approach for mail migration w It matched our end goal of a smaller number of logical servers as well as physical machines W It gave us the opportunity to test the optimum number of registered mail users for a Domino server Our initial goal with this method was to assign 1 100 to 1 200 registered mail users to each partitioned Domino server on our AS 400s However we encountered stability problems with this many users assigned to a single server Because our CPU utilization typically ran at less than 35 we suspected this was an inherent limitation in the scalability of Domino not an AS 400 limitation Other large scale Domino users on other platforms have experienced similar limitations We gradually reduced the number of registered users on our Domino servers and Appendix B The IBM Rochester Experience 397 discovered that a maximum of 700 to 800 registered users in a partition provided the best performance and stability We now use this as our guideline Here are the basic steps for the server consolidation method Ww WwW Configure a new Domino server on AS 400 with a unique TCP IP address and server identity different from the existing Intel server Use File Transfer Protocol FTP to copy the appropriate users mail files from the existing server to the new Identify any mail files with local encryption which require spe
55. Administration Local batch where the installation command is submitted on the same system where the software is to be installed Remote batch where the installation command is sent to a remote system where the software is to be installed Local batch installation To install all the options for Domino for AS 400 place the Domino for AS 400 CD in the CD ROM device of your AS 400 system Type the following command or include the following command in a CL program lodrun dev opt dir os400 intleng batch Note INTLENG is the directory on the CD that contains international English If desired replace INTLENG with the name of the directory that contains the language you want to install To install only certain options specify the subdirectory that contains the option you want to install You need to run the LODRUN command once for each option that you want to install For example to install the BASE option option 00 option 1 option 4 and option 6 type the following commands or run them from a CL program lodrun dev opt dir os400 intleng batch opt00 lodrun dev opt dir os400 intleng batch opt01 lodrun dev opt dir os400 intleng batch opt04 lodrun dev opt dir os400 intleng batch opt06 Remote batch installation without remote CD To install Domino for AS 400 at remote locations without requiring the CD at the remote location do the following 1 2 Install Domino for AS 400 on the cen
56. Australia Ruth Webster IBM Lotus Integration Center Dallas Texas Felix Zalcmann IBM Austria O a a E S O S O S Graphic Services Lotus North Reading Comments Welcome We want our redbooks to be as helpful as possible Should you have any comments about this or other redbooks please send us your comments about this or other redbooks in one of the following ways Ww Fax the evaluation form found at the back of this book to the fax number shown on the form Ww Use the electronic evaluation form found on the Redbooks Web sites For Internet users http www redbooks ibm com For IBM Intranet users http w3 itso ibm com W Send us a note at the following address redbook us ibm com 12 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Chapter 1 Overview of Lotus Domino for AS 400 This chapter describes Domino for AS 400 the history of Lotus Notes and Domino integration with the AS 400 system What Is Lotus Domino for AS 400 Domino for AS 400 is the implementation of a Lotus Domino server on the AS 400 platform Lotus Domino on any of the supported platforms is a combination of several different server types Some of these server types are as follows e Mail server or Notes POP3 or IMAP4 clients e Database server e Database replication server e HTTP server e Many other servers for example LDAP In supporting these servers Domino supports many protocols These protoc
57. Before adding a Domino server to an existing Domino domain you must register the server in the Public Address Book on a registration server The registration server that is the Domino server from which you register other servers must be up and running on your network To register a new server from your workstation you must have access to the registration server and have at least Author access to the Public Address Book with the appropriate role in the access control list of the Public Address Book From the Notes administrator workstation perform the following steps 1 Click File Tools Server Administration 2 Click the Servers button in the right pane of the administration panel Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 103 3 Select Register Server from the pull down menu as shown in Figure 46 Figure 46 Register a Server Pull Down Menu 4 Select the Registration server where the new server will be created If your registration server is not listed you can type the name in 5 Select the Certifier ID file of the organization Your workstation needs access to the certifier ID and you need to know the correct password Register Servers m International 01709 2098 09 17 57 PM Figure 47 Register a New Domino Server 6 Click the Continue button 104 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration 10 11 In the Register Servers dialog box Figure 48
58. Client Access see one of the following e Getting Your AS 400 Working for You SC41 5161 01 e Client Access for Windows 95 NT Setup SC41 3512 04 or later You can access these books from the AS 400 Online Library Web site at http as400bks rochester ibm com e The Welcome Center CD that is provided with your AS 400 system e The AS 400 Technical Studio Web page at http www as400 ibm com tstudio ca400 caindex htm 242 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration 2 Double click the JBM AS 400 Client Access icon as shown in the following graphic to open the JBM AS 400 Client Access folder B4 Selecting the Correct Managing System For the following steps it is important that the managing system for AS 400 Client Access is the AS 400 system that has Domino for AS 400 installed Therefore you should check first to see if your Client Access workstation has a connection defined to the correct AS 400 system 3 Double click the AS400 Connections icon E 4 Verify that the name of your AS 400 system which must have Domino for AS 400 installed appears in the right pane of the folder If it does not click Connection and then New from the menu bar and follow the instructions to define a new connection 5 Right click the icon representing your AS 400 system and choose Connect A dialog appears requesting a valid AS 400 user ID and password 6 Close or minimize the AS400 Connections window and open
59. D2 amp C1V1Q0 amp K2 amp E1 amp U4 amp S1 Modem reset string AT amp F Modem dial command ATDT Modem answer command ATS0 2S57 30 F3 Exit F9 Command line F12 Cancel Ka e Figure 173 Copy TCP IP Point to Point Modem Information 6 Change the value of the Modem answer command field from ATS0 2S7 30 to ATSO 2 That is remove S7 30 The display should look like Figure 174 fe Copy TCP IP Point to Point Modem Information N Modem information name User defined 7857 017 Type changes press Enter Modem initialization string AT amp MO amp AO0 amp D2 amp C1V1Q0 amp K2 amp E1 amp U4 amp S1 Modem reset string AT amp F Modem dial command ATDT Modem answer command ATS0 2 F3 Exit F9 Command line F12 Cancel J a Figure 174 Copy TCP IP Point to Point Modem Information after change 7 Press Enter to save your new modem setting entry Chapter 7 Dial Up Connectivity 297 Change the PPP Connection Profile to Use the New Modem Entry Now you must use Operations Navigator to change your PPP connection profile to refer to the new modem entry created in the previous section The following steps describe how to do this 1 From the Windows 95 or Windows NT desktop start Operations Navigator 2 Click on the plus sign next to the icon showing the name of your AS 400 system Click on the plus sign next to Network Click on the plus sign next to Point to Point
60. DTACPR YES specifies that data compression should be used This needs more processor resources and may take more time but the amount of disk storage needed is much less Avoiding Object Locks When Saving Notes Databases To back up a database the AS 400 must be able to lock the database so that no changes occur during the backup operation To successfully back up Notes mail do one of the following before you use the Save Object SAV command e Stop activity on the database file by using the Domino console commands drop all and dbcache flush However with this method any attempted mail delivery during the backup operation results in the mail being returned to the user with a message that the server is busy or in use e Stop the Domino for AS 400 server that contains the mail databases Use the End Domino Server ENDDOMSVR command to stop the server The advantage of the latter method is that you can automate the process by writing a CL program and running it nightly under the control of the OS 400 job scheduler Figure 60 shows an example of such a CL program 142 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration a gt 0001 00 PGM 0002 00 ENDDOMSVR AcmeDS1 CNTRLD 0003 00 MONMSG CPF0000 0004 00 DLYJOB DLY 600 0005 06 SAV DEV QYSS 1lib NIGHTSAVES 1lib DOMINOSAVF file 0005 07 OBJ Notes AcmeDS1 CLEAR ALL DTACPR YES 0005 08 DLCOBJ OBJ QUSRNOTES DOMINO01 SBSD EXCL 0006
61. Domino Server STRDOMSVR command Changing the Size of the Domino Console With the AS 400 implementation of the Domino console support is a limit to the number of console entries allowed in the file The default limit is 2000 entries and the maximum is 100 000 entries When the limit is reached the console file will start to wrap The WRKDOMCSL DSPDOMCSL support will handle this wrapping but there are times when 2000 entries is not enough An environment variable is used to increase the amount of entries in the console file The variable is NOTES_AS400_CONSOLE_ENTRIES This variable must be set prior to starting the server If the value of the variable is greater that the maximum then it is set to the maximum value Running Domino Tasks While the Server is Not Running Many times it is useful to run a task while the server is not running For example you may want to fixup or compact the Domino directory without having the server up Domino on the AS 400 is integrated with the AS 400 security system Therefore there are some unique requirements for running a Domino task outside the server that is not through the load command in the Domino console Essentially there are three requirements e The correct environment variables must be set The two environment variables that need to be set are the PATH and NOTESPARTITION environment variables e The job must run under the QNOTES user profile e The current IFS directory must be the appropr
62. Domino Servers N System SYSTEMA Type options press Enter 1 Start Domino server 5 Display Domino console 6 End Domino server 8 Work Domino console 9 Work Domino jobs 11 Change current directory 12 Work object links Domino Domino Opt Subsystem Server Status 1 DOMINOO1 AcmeDS1 ENDED Parameters or command F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F9 Retrieve F1ll Display path F12 Cancel F17 Top F18 Bottom F24 More keys eae Domino server ACMEDS1 in subsystem DOMINOO1 J Figure 21 Work with Domino Servers Start a Server Using the Start Domino Server STRDOMSVR Command To start a Domino for AS 400 server from the AS 400 command line use the Start Domino Server STRDOMSVR command To do so perform the following steps 1 Type the following command in any AS 400 command line and press the F4 key STRDOMSVR You will see the prompt for the Start Domino Server STRDOMSVR command as shown in Figure 22 This command needs one parameter Server name SERVER A Start Domino Server STRDOMSVR N Type choices press Enter Server name Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display S F24 More keys J Figure 22 Prompt Panel for STRDOMSVR Command Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 73 2 The command prompt allows you to see a list of all configured Domino servers on your AS 400 system To do so make sure your cursor is placed in the input f
63. Domino server e Option 8 Work with the Domino console e Option 9 Work with Domino jobs e Option 11Change the current directory to the server data directory e Option 12 Work with object links in the data directory The following sections explain some of these functions and describe how you can use them either in the Work with Domino Servers list panel or by entering the appropriate commands individually Starting the Domino for AS 400 Server After you have verified that no error messages were logged during the server configuration you can start the server for the first time There are three ways to start the server e Use the Work with Domino Servers WRKDOMSVR command e Use the AS 400 CL commands directly e Use Operations Navigator This method is covered in Chapter 6 of this book The following sections explain how to start a server using the AS 400 green screen command interface 72 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Using the Work with Domino Servers WRKDOMSVR Command In the Work with Domino Servers list panel type the number 1 into the option field next to the server name you want to start as shown in Figure 21 You should see a completion message immediately however this does not necessarily indicate that the server was started successfully Press F5 Refresh repeatedly and you will see the status indicator change to STARTING and finally to STARTED a Work with
64. Extending the Domino System Maintaining the Domino System and Configuring the Domino Network The online database file name for Release 4 6 Administration Help is HELPADMN NSF e Lotus Domino 4 6 Release Notes provides end of release information about new Domino features software platform requirements known limitations and restrictions interoperability issues and updates for the documentation set The online database file name for the Release Notes is READMES NSF Application Development e Roadmap to Lotus Notes Application Developer s Documentation provides a task oriented overview of the Notes application development documentation e Lotus Notes Designer for Domino 4 6 Application Developer s Guide provides guidelines for new and experienced application developers on how to plan create and test a Notes application 26 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Lotus Notes 4 6 Database Manager s Guide focuses on the tasks involved in managing Notes databases rolling out new databases managing the access control list setting up replication and monitoring database activity Lotus Notes Designer for Domino 4 6 Programmer s Guide Part I and Part II provides guidelines for writing scripts and formulas This book also contains a complete reference for the Notes formula language functions commands and LotusScript Notes classes Lotus Notes Designer for Domino 4 6 Java Programmer s Guide provi
65. File Database Open W Select or type in the name of your Domino for AS 400 server W Specify NNDIRSYC NSF in the Filename section or select the database named Directory Sync Configuration as shown in Figure 96 Open Database x Server Done Forum01 z Help Database Database Catalog Open Add Icon Domino 4 6 Samples FAQ Domino 4 6 Samples Frameset Domino 4 6 Samples Registration Domino 4 6 Samples Site 1 Domino 4 6 Samples Site 2 Filename NNDIRSYC NSF Browse About i teek Figure 96 Open the Directory Sync Configuration NNDIRSYC NSF Database W Click Open 2 If you are opening this database for the first time you will see the About this Database document After reading it close it by pressing the Esc 2 key When opening the Directory Sync Configuration database you must always start with the Directory Synchronization Configuration Main Menu as shown in Figure 92 on page 219 the navigator for this database It allows you to easily go to any of the important configuration functions or even to open the address book that is being synchronized The About this Database document opens automatically only when you open the database for the very first time If you want to read the document again at a later time click Help and then About this database There is also useful information in the Using this database document which can be reached from the
66. IP address or host name known to a Domain Name Server of the answering server All four columns must be filled in The name of the port is not required to be TCPIP but TCPIP is acommonly used name that is the default for most Domino implementations If a port is listed but is not enabled click on Enabled in the rightmost column for that row 5 Click the Save and Close button Validating the Connection In order for a successful connection to be made using Remote LAN Service the ANS PPP profile must be active on the answering system waiting for an incoming call To start the ANS PPP profile using Operations Navigator on the answering system click on Network then Point to Point and then click on Connection Profiles Find your profile name in the list right click on it and click Start If you click View then Refresh to refresh the screen the status should change to Session job starting and then Waiting for incoming call Tip You can also use the F5 key to refresh the status shown on your display On the calling system Domino for AS 400 should automatically start the DIAL PPP profile when replication or mail routing is initiated This happens either according to the schedule if schedule is enabled in the connection document or using Domino console commands In either case if the connection document has type Remote LAN Service and replication or mail routing is specified as a task Domino for AS 400 automatically invokes a
67. IP protocol with the correct IP address If the answering server is in a different domain you need to create a server document for it in the calling server domain s Public Address Book If the answering server is in a different organization you will also need to cross certify the server ids For more information on replication refer to the chapter Setting Up Replication in the book Getting Started with the Domino Server For more information on mail routing refer to the chapter Setting Up Mail in the book Extending the Domino System The same information on both functions can also be found in the Domino Administration Help database HELPADMN NSF Use a Notes administrator workstation to set up a Server document for the answering server in the Public Address Book of the calling server 322 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration From the Notes workspace choose File Tools Server Administration Click Servers and choose Servers View If a server document for the answering server already exists open it in edit mode and continue with step 4 Otherwise choose Create Server Server 4 Specify the server settings for the answering server Make sure you provide information for the Network Configuration For an example of the Network Configuration settings see the table below Port Notes Network Net Address Enabled TCPIP NETWORK1 10 1 2 4 ENABLED One named port must be enabled with the correct
68. If for some reason your system has two optical devices and you have put your CD in the wrong one then try DEV OPT02 The first function this program performs is presenting a menu like the one shown in Figure 8 to select which of the product options you want to install Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 51 ia Install Lotus Domino For AS 400 Licensed Program S769LNT Type options press Enter 1 Install Product Installed Option Option Status Description 1 BASE NO Domino 4 6 Server 1 1 NO AS 400 Integration L 3 NO C API Release 4 5 T 4 NO C API Release 4 1 1 5 NO LotusScript Extension Toolkit 1 6 NO HiTest C API Release 4 5 1 7 NO Advanced Services F3 Exit ENTER To Continue C COPYRIGHT IBM CORP 1980 1998 ye COPYRIGHT LOTUS DEVELOPMENT CORP 1998 ot Figure 8 Select Product Options to install 5 Type the number 1 beside each product option you want to install The following list describes the mandatory BASE and optional parts of the product BASE Domino Server is the base code that must be installed programs data and template files SMTP MTA and all Help files Option 1 AS 400 Integration is the code that allows directory synchronization and the Operations Navigator to be used Note Directory synchronization also requires the HiTest C API option 6 to be installed and Operations Navigator has Client Access for Windows 95 NT 5763 XD1 as a prerequisite Option 3
69. Job Attributes setting on the QNOTES user profile by using the Change User Profile CHGUSRPRF command For the DateOrder value in the NOTES INI file specify DateOrder xxx where xxx is one of the following e DMY for day month year e YMD for year month day e MDY for month day year Running Domino Using a Secondary Language If the national language version NLV of the Domino for AS 400 software does not match the NLV of your primary language the Domino for AS 400 language version is installed as a secondary language To use Domino for AS 400 you must add the secondary language library to the system library list You need to determine the feature number of the NLV for the primary language and any installed secondary languages on your system 1 Enter the following AS 400 CL command go licpgm 2 On the resulting Work with Licensed Programs menu type 20 to display installed secondary languages 3 On the Display Installed Secondary Languages panel determine the primary language and the library containing each installed secondary language Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 57 If the primary language of the system does not match the NLV of Domino for AS 400 add the secondary language library to the top of the system part of the user s library list For details on the steps to ensure that the secondary language can be used see the AS 400 National Language Support SC41 5101 book Code Page Conver
70. Line Job Opt Name Mode Type Status Description Type Name IN ANS PPP INACTIVE IN PPP T PPPDOMANS ANS PPP INACTIVE PPPDOMASC PPP SAKAIPPP ANS PEP INACTIVE SAKAIPPP PPP OUT DIAL PPP INACTIVE OUT PPP PPPDOMSVR DIAL PPP OUTQ PPPDOMASC PPP QTPPDIAL09 Bottom Ka F8 Work with modems F9 Command line F10 Local interface status Figure 194 Work with Point to Point TCP IP list display If the status is OUTQ there are job logs or other print output in the output queue for the most recent job that started a Point to Point session Unless the status of the profile is INACTIVE you may type option 14 next to your DIAL profile and press the Enter key to work with that job The Work with Job display shown in Figure 195 appears a x Work with Job System SYSTEMO1 Job QTPPDIALO9 User QTCP Number 160833 Select one of the following L Display job status attributes 2 Display job definition attributes 3 Display job run attributes if active 4 Work with spooled files 10 Display job log if active or on job queue 11 Display call stack if active 12 Work with locks if active 13 Display library list if active 14 Display open files if active 15 Display file overrides if active 16 Display commitment control status if active More Selection or command gt CFSsExit F4 Prompt F9 Retrieve F12 Cancel ot Figure 195 Work with Job Then type option 4 and pres
71. MIME MTA 159 Interface ADDTCPIFC command to define additional logical IP addresses to a physical line Once you ve defined an IP address for each company you ll need to define a distinct SMTP domain name of the form hhh ddd where hhh is a TCP IP host name and ddd is a TCP IP domain name to each IP address for example acmeA com acmeB com acmeC com etc The association of names with addresses should be done using a DNS domain naming service server if one is present in the network Otherwise the host table can be used to accomplish it see previous topic Once the AS 400 has been defined to have multiple IP addresses and hhh ddd names then mail can be sent to any of these hhh ddd names and it will be routed to and processed as local on that AS 400 system When local POP3 users are defined in the SDD they can use any of the nnn ddd names that are defined for an AS 400 system The SMTP user name must be unique for that host domain name Restated using this approach allows distinct POP3 users that all might just happen to have the same SMTP user name Smith to receive SMTP MIME messages addressed to different hhh ddd names for example smith acmeA com smith acmeB com smith acmeC com etc even though they are actually local POP3 users on the same physical AS 400 server Although as explained above more than one user can have the same SMTP user name provided they have different hhh ddd names it is important to note t
72. Management Services 382 Baltic Rim Character Set for SMTP MTA 179 BRMS 382 420 C Central Europe Character Set for SMTP MTA 179 CERT ID 106 password 65 certifier 106 certifier ID 87 281 CFGDOMSVR 61 171 173 Changes in 4 6 2 61 Change Directory Entries 377 Change Directory Entry 379 Change Distribution Attributes 170 210 Change Domino Server 373 Change name for SMTP 187 Change Network Server Description 363 Change Owner 94 95 113 114 Change POP Server Attributes 209 Change User Profile 21 Changed objects backing up 144 recovery 151 Changes in 4 6 2 CFGDOMSVR 61 CHGAUT 351 CHGDIRE 377 379 CHGDOMSVR 373 CHGDSTA 170 210 CHGNWSD 360 363 CHGOWN 94 95 113 114 351 CHGPOPA 209 CHGUSRPRF 21 Chinese Character Set for SMTP MTA 179 clear the password of the server ID 112 Clustered servers 19 Clustering 383 Code page conversion problems WRKDOMCSL 59 Command RST 148 150 151 RSTOBJ 149 SAV 139 142 143 144 command line 42 Configure Domino Server Internet mail packages 171 Connect via 176 connection document 176 for remote LAN services 326 Server Replication 105 SMTP 176 Connection profile for PPP line 320 starting 326 Consolidation Method 344 415 Conversion Sytem Distribution Directory 196 Convert Names SMTP 188 198 Convert SMTP Names CVTNAMSMTP 395 417 Country ID 66 CPF89A4 199 CPFAF98 210 Create 264 Create Network S
73. N Type choices press Enter USER Mh Mee aTa A ACCTS AOAKSS S e per ee tasta amp FAX SMIP user TDT 2 58 ses accts SMTP domain test name ibm com SMTP route F3 Exit F4 Promot F12 Cancel p Figure 219 Add Name for SMTP If SDD Was Not Converted 376 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration If you converted the SDD on your AS 400 system using the Convert SMTP Names CVTNAMSMTP command the Specify User Defined Fields prompt appears as shown in Figure 220 a Specify User Defined Fields N Type choices press Enter SMTPAUSRID SMTP accts SMTPDMN SMTP test name ibm com More PaeRxit F5 Refresh F12 Cancel Pr Figure 220 Add Name for SMTP if SDD was Converted Note While the SMTP user ID accts in our example can be an arbitrary yet unique name the SMTP domain test name ibm com is not a random name It must resolve via DNS or local hosts table to an IP address of one of the interfaces on your AS 400 most likely the AS 400 system s fully qualified TCP IP host name For more information about SMTP and the CVTNAMSMTP command see the TCP IP Configuration and Reference book SC41 5420 or the redbook AS 400 Electronic Mail Capabilities SG24 4703 Additional information is available via the AS 400 Online Library at http as400bks rochester ibm com Faxing From Lo
74. Name LOOPBACK Subnet Mask a a de See es eS gt 255 255 255 192 Type of service NORMAL MINDELAY MAXTHRPUT Maximum transmission unit LIND 576 16388 LIND Autostart Be ad fare cde tah he inca YES YES NO PVC logical channel identifier os 001 FFF for more values SSON X 25 idle circuit timeout 60 1 600 X 25 maximum virtual circuits 64 0 64 X 25 DDN interface NO YES NO TRLAN bit sequencing MSB MSB LSB Bottom F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display J Figure 35 Add TCP IP Interface ADDTCPIFC Prompt Panel Only the first three parameters of the Add TCP IP Interface ADDTCPIFC command are mandatory For more information on configuring TCP IP on the AS 400 system see Chapter 3 of the book TCP IP Fastpath Setup SC41 5430 For more in depth information on the TCP IP support and TCP IP applications on the AS 400 system see TCP IP Configuration and Reference SC41 5420 Run the Configure Domino Server Command for Partitioning Make sure that when setting up the server you specify either ALL or PARTITION for the Advanced Services ADVSRV parameter If any Domino server was already set up on the AS 400 system without specifying this parameter you need to reconfigure the server that is run the Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR command again Modify the NOTES INI File for the Partitioned Server Before the server can be successfully started the IP address to be used must be d
75. Name in the Host Table The SMTP server needs to know which of the mail it receives on port 25 is destined for which user on this system The way it does this is parsing the recipient address of the incoming mail and looking at the part to the right of the sign called the SMTP domain A piece of mail will be accepted if the SMTP domain can be resolved to any IP address which is assigned to a local IP interface This can only be done if this name is registered in either the AS 400 system s local host table one or more name servers or both A part of the TCP IP configuration often forgotten if local host tables on the clients or Notes connection documents are being used is to add the AS 400 system s own simple and fully qualified host name to the host table on the AS 400 system This is only necessary if there is no name server or the AS 400 host name is not registered on a name server However especially when setting up for SMTP mail it is a good idea to add this entry to the host table To add a name to the local host name you can either use the Configure TCP IP CFGTCP command and then option 10 followed by option 1 or by typing the Add TCP IP Host Table Entry ADDTCPHTE command in any command line and pressing F4 In either case you will see the prompt as shown in Figure 63 a Add TCP IP Host Table Entry ADDTCPHTE D Type choices press Enter Internet address 10 1 2 217 Host names 2s Nane Din nd 4380 th
76. Network server ius Online at IPL Vary on wait Language version Country code Code page 2 NetBIOS descuiption Server message queue Library Configuration file Library Start NetBIOS Start TCP IP F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F24 More keys VVVVVVVV VV BASE NOWAIT 1 LNGVER QNTBIBM JOBLOG NONE YES CHGNWSD DOMINO1 cco07 Name Name Character value YES NO NOWAIT PRIMARY NO 1 15 minutes 2963 2966 2980 004Y 0027 0315 0 330 LNGVER 437 850 852 857 Name QNTBIBM Name JOBLOG NONE Name LIBL CURLIB Name NONE Name LIBL YES NO NO YES 2924 850 CURLIB YES More F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display Figure 205 Change Network Server Description CHGNWSD 3 Page down A second prompt as shown in Figure 206 appears Change Network Server Type choices press Enter TCP IP port configuration Port Internet ddress Subnet mask Maximum Cransmission unit Port Internet adds Subnet mask 4 Maximum Ernane Sion unie Port Internet address Subnet mask s Maximum transmissi n nie F3 Exit F4 Prompt F24 More keys F5 Refresh Desc CRTNWSD NONE wt 3 INTERNAL 1 2 3 ORRE EYA 2 INTERNAL Number Ly 2y 10 5 67 74 i 20g Zoey Zee 0 INTERNAL a Aa cls ee 1500 Number INTERNAL 1 2 2554299729500 1 15400 Number More F12 Cancel F13 Ho
77. Notes user also needs to access AS 400 applications other than Domino for AS 400 an AS 400 Chapter 5 Directory Synchronization 235 administrator must to register a user with the Create User Profile CRTUSRPRF command e For Bidirectional Synchronization When any entry that satisfies the selection criteria is added to deleted from or changed in either the AS 400 system distribution directory or the Domino Address Book the corresponding entry is immediately added to deleted from or changed in the other directory The key mapping fields in the configuration document define the corresponding entries in the AS 400 system distribution directory and the Domino Address Book If you chose Yes for the Populate Directories option entries from the master directory that satisfy the selection criteria are copied to the secondary directory as new or changed entries Next entries from the secondary directory that satisfy the selection criteria are copied to the master directory as new or changed entries These population operations occur at the specified day and time Coexistence of Directory Synchronization Replication and Shadowing Domino for AS 400 directory synchronization is one of several functions that synchronizes information with the system distribution directory and the Domino address book In an environment consisting of one or more Domino servers and one or more AS 400 systems you could actually use a combination of the follo
78. OfficeVison 400 to Domino Chapter 5 On page 248 Section Coexistence of Directory Synchronization Replication and Shadowing describes how different types of directory synchronization and shadowing function can produce an endless loop and how his can be avoided Chapter 7 On page 298 Configuring the Remote PC Workstation for PPP Dial in contains more complete examples on how to set up a Windows 95 workstation to connect to a Lotus Domino for AS 400 server through a dial up connection On page 324 Server to Server Dial Connections with Remote LAN Service explains how to set up the Lotus Domino for AS 400 server to initiate the dialing process to connect to another server for replication or mail routing using OS 400 Version 4 Release 2 or later Chapter 8 On page 343 Chapter 8Migration From Other Domino Platforms shows methods to migrate Domino form the Integrated PC Server or other platforms to Lotus Domino for AS 400 Appendix B On page 413 Appendix B The IBM Rochester Experience provides a short report of the migration to Lotus Domino for AS 400 at the IBM Rochester Development Laboratory and Manufacturing Plant Many minor corrections have been made in chapter 7 chapter 8 and appendix B are new therefore the changes or not inidividually marked 10 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration The Team That Wrote This Redpaper This redpaper was produced by a t
79. Point to Point Profile Properties TCP IP Settings tab 18 Click the Authentication tab New Point to Point Profile Properties System01 Figure 189 New Point to Point Profile Properties Authentication tab 318 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration If the answering system is an AS 400 system local system identification is optional However if the answering system is a Windows NT system running the RAS server component you must enable local system identification In addition the option must be set to PAP only You would then specify the User name and Password of a RAS enabled user on the Windows NT system for example the administrator 19 Click OK to finish creation of the DIAL PPP profile Creating a ANS PPP Profile on the Answering System Use the same procedure that you used to create the DIAL profile except e On the General tab choose a mode of Switched line answer e For the TCP IP Settings specify an IP address for both the Local IP Address and the Remote IP address Local refers to the IP address of the Domino server to be contacted on the answering system In our example this is 10 1 2 4 Remote refers to the IP address of the Domino server on the calling system in our example 10 1 2 3 For step by step instructions for creating a switched line answer profile please see Configuring the PPP Connection Profile on the AS 400 System on page 290 Creating the C
80. Profiles You see the existing profiles in the right pane of the navigator as shown in Figure 148 Chapter 7 Dial Up Connectivity 277 AS 400 Operations Navigator of x File Edit View Options Help aS XE S O minutes old Primary Environment System01 Connection Profiles M SystemO1 il Status Connection type H Database 2 Inactive Switched line answer a File Systems 2 Inactive Switched line answer Internet Inactive Leased line terminator Q Jobs eS Wi Inactive Leased line terminator SG Messages Inactive Switched line answer a a Bests i Inactive Switched line answer H 2 Point to Point y ee P ine E Mode Fr Protocols 6 Servers EF Printer Output El Sy Printers BB System El a Users and Groups B A Systema 1 6 of 6 object s Figure 148 AS 400 Operations Navigator Window Connection profiles To check for existing Point to Point profiles look for icons with the Protocol type PPP and a connection type of switched line answer If PPP line profiles exist you can view them by right clicking the individual names and selecting Properties from the resulting context menu Note If asynchronous line profiles exist you can only start stop or delete these Point to Point profiles by right clicking the individual names and selecting Start Stop or Delete from the resulting context menu Creating a New PPP Connection Profile 1 Right click on Connection Profiles to open a context menu 2 Choose New Prof
81. QSYSWRK subsystem by issuing the following AS 400 command CALL QNOTESINT QNNDIEND Alternatively you can enter the following Domino command on the Domino console command line load qnndiend The program QNNDIEND does not end the job QNNDILCK To end this job too you may use an undocumented function by using the following command CALL QNOTESINT QNNDIEND ALL 234 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration You can restart the jobs by issuing the following command call qnotesint qnndistj A user profile that has JOBCTL special authority is required to either stop or start the directory synchronization jobs What Happens After Enabling Directory Synchronization When you specify a status of Enabled in a directory synchronization configuration document and then save the configuration document the following events occur For AS 400 to Domino unidirectional synchronization When any entry that satisfies the selection criteria is added to deleted from or changed in the AS 400 system distribution directory the corresponding entry is immediately changed in the Domino address book The key mapping fields in the configuration document define the corresponding entry in the Domino Address Book If you chose Yes for the Populate Directories option entries from the AS 400 system distribution directory that satisfy the selection criteria and that have a value in every key field are copied to the Domino Ad
82. Restoring the AS 400 System Distribution Directory If you use directory synchronization between your Domino Public Address Book and your AS 400 system distribution directory special considerations apply during recovery If possible you should restore both the Domino Public Address Book and the AS 400 system distribution directory from backup tapes that were created at the same time If you cannot recover them both from a matching backup you need to use the populate capability of directory synchronization to ensure that they match To restore the AS 400 system distribution directory do the following 1 Stop the directory synchronization function using the following command call qnotesint qnndiend 2 Use the following restore command RSTobj OBJ qaok SAVLIB qusrsys OBJTYPE file DEV tap01 3 When your recovery is complete use the following command to restart directory synchronization call qnotesint qnndistj For more information on directory synchronization see What is Directory Synchronization in Chapter 5 Recovering Domino Mail If you need to reload one or more mail databases from your backup tapes use the Restore Object RST command Following is an example of the steps 1 Start an AS 400 session with a user profile that has SAVSYS and JOBCTL special authorities 2 Stop the server that contains the mail databases that you want to recover for example use the End Domino Server ENDDOMSVR command
83. Since there is only a single loopback address each server must listen to a different TCP IP port In our example we use the port numbers 1353x whereas x is a number between 0 and 9 thus providing a unique TCP IP port number for each server e The new port LOOPBACK needs also to be defined and activated in the server document in the PAB e For each connection between any two servers a pair of connection documents need to be added to the PAB In the following example we show what needs to be done to connect the partitioned servers AcmeDS1 acme and AcmeDS2 OrgA assuming that both servers use unique IP addresses that is no port mapper is involved Add the following statements to the NOTES INI file for AcmeDS1 LOOPBACK TCP 1 15 0 Ports TCPIP LOOPBACK LOOPBACK_TcpIPAddress 0 127 0 0 1 13530 The first line defines a new Domino port called LOOPBACK We then make sure that port will be activated and finally this port is limited to IP address 127 0 0 1 the loopback listening the TCP IP port 13530 For the server AcmeDS2 NOTES INI file we do the same except that we use a different TCP IP port 13531 LOOPBACK TCP 1 15 0 Ports TCPIP LOOPBACK LOOPBACK_TcpIPAddress 0 127 0 0 1 13531 The term port maybe misleading or confusing because it is used for two different things in this context 1 In this sentence This is a definition in Domino or Notes of how to connect to any of the supported networks
84. Two line WAN IOA You must also have the following software e OS 400 Version 4 Release 2 or higher with the latest cumulative PTF package applied Specific required PTFs include SF46406 and SF48968 Chapter 7 Dial Up Connectivity 309 e AS 400 Client Access for Windows 95 NT Version 3 Release 1 Modification 3 or higher Use the Operations Navigator component of Client Access to create the Point to Point Protocol PPP connection profiles e The latest version of Domino for AS 400 with the most recent quarterly maintenance update QMU is recommended We tested with Domino for AS 400 4 6 2 and initially experienced some problems that have been resolved with QMU 4 6 2a Setting Up Remote LAN Service Domino for AS 400 Remote LAN Service supports server to server dial up communications using PPP connection profiles and associated PPP line descriptions The answering system may be another Domino for AS 400 server or may be a Domino server on another platform that supports dial up using the PPP protocol Setting up Remote LAN Service for Lotus Domino for AS 400 is similar to setting up Remote LAN Service for Domino in a Windows 95 or Windows NT environment You need to perform four tasks 1 Create a PPP connection profile on the calling system The calling Domino for AS 400 server requires a PPP connection profile of type DIAL Domino for AS 400 Remote LAN Service will start the DIAL connection to initiate dialing 2 Create a co
85. URL http www rfc editor org Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 97 Entries in NOTES INI for Port Mapper AcmeDS1 Bait File Notes AcmeDS1 notes ini N Record 54 of 86 by 9 Column 1 of 55 by _74 Control CMD A FM de IP ae Pe ES BD ete A ee es bE Ne es FO ee eT ee BillingAddinOutput 1 MailClusterFailover 1 KillProcess 1 ServerName AcmeDS1 acme Ports TCPIP TCPIP TCP 0 15 0 TCPIP_TcpIpAddress 0 10 6 70 217 1352 TCPIP_PortMapping00 CN AcmeDS3 0 OrgA 10 6 70 217 13520 TCPIP_PortMapping01 CN AcmeDS4 0 OrgB 10 6 70 217 13521 TCPIP_PortMapping02 CN AcmeDS5 O0 OrgB 10 6 70 217 13522 S HasLANPort 1 SPX SPX 0 15 0 Seriall XPC 1 15 0 Serial2 XPC 2 15 0 DisabledPorts SPX Seriall Serial2 LOG_REPLICATION 1 ossave F3 Save Exit F10 11l Left Right F12 Cancel F16 Find F17 Chg F15 Copy p Figure 40 Statements in NOTES INI for the Port Mapper Server The statements in the NOTES INI file for the port mapper AcmeDS1 not only need to define the file IP address in line TCPIP_TcpIpAddress along with the default port 1352 The addresses and unique port numbers for each of the other servers are also defined All other servers need to define only their own IP address the same as for the port mapper along with a unique port number as shown in the following figures Entries in NOTES INI for AcmeDS3 ___s ServerName AcmeDS3 OrgA Ports TCPIP TCPIP TCP 0 15 0 TCPIP_TcpIp
86. a Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR N Type choices press Enter Server name gt acmeds1 OPEO a a sees Ge ta for tere lar far far face la oe RELRST FIRST ADD REMOVE Data directory ems arol oe eels notes data Organigatvon 2 gsr gs ewe eS a Acme Administrator Last name gt Blankertz First name ge wo ie a A gt WEL Eried Middle initial La Character value PAS SWOT a tet Bete tects Foto Dena XXXXXXXX Minimum password length 8 0 31 More F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display Roos keys vw Figure 53 Reconfigure First Server 2 Prompt Caution Make sure to make backup copies of your critical Domino files such as your ID files Public Address Book and Domino databases before you begin the reconfiguration process There is one difference between Notes on an Integrated PC Server IPCS and Domino for AS 400 When you configure a Domino server on IPCS if the Public Address Book PAB exists the configuration process deletes the PAB and creates anew one Domino for AS 400 as well as Lotus Notes and Domino on other platforms will use the existing one Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 117 Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR Type choices press Enter Time zone Se isB jai is _ GMT EST CST MST PST CET Daylight savings time YES YES NO Domain name O
87. a file is if they want to use it they simply name it e Hierarchy of microprocessors In addition to the main System Processor the AS 400 system has a large number of microprocessors Every microprocessor is called input output processor IOP This means that requests for data to be written to or read from any I O device can be delegated to a specialized processor while the main system processor executes other applications e OS 400 is much more than just an operating system for the AS 400 system which is a single entity that fully integrates all of the software components needed for most commercial computing environments For example e Security e Relational database e Network capabilities The book AS 400 System Concepts GC41 9802 introduces the basic concepts of AS 400 architecture For more information see the AS 400e series Handbook GA19 5486 It introduces the AS 400 system architecture and provides an overview to all hardware and software capabilities For a more detailed description see Inside the AS 400 by Frank G Soltis SR28 5910 01 published by Duke Press ISBN No 1 882419 13 8 In this book the AS 400 system s chief architect provides an in depth look at the system s 28 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration design architecture and history Included are detailed looks at the AS 400 system s Advanced Application Architecture Technology independent Machine Interface Object
88. accessing Domino servers Network connection via LAN Remote connection via modem Quit C Network and remote connections No connection to a Domino server f What type of mail server are you accessing Domino mail server C Intenet POP3 SMTP mail server No mail server Figure 34 Notes Workstation Setup Since you need to use the new server administrator s user ID which you downloaded as described in Copy ID Files to Your Client Workstation on page 86 select Your Notes User ID has been supplied to you in a file and click OK When you are prompted to type the name of your ID file select the file user id from the directory on your PC you copied it to The password is the one you specified in the last part of parameter ADM of the CFGDOMSVR command Figure 11 on page 64 Tip Remember the password is case sensitive Check the status of your Caps Lock key After completing the remaining steps of the setup for your administration worksta tion use the Domino server in the same way as any other platform The following sections cover more complex topics such as configuring multiple logical servers see Configuring Partitioned Domino for AS 400 Servers page 90 and integrating a new Domino for AS 400 server with an existing Notes or Domino environment see Configure an Additional Server in an Existing Domino Domain on page 106 Configuring Partitioned Domino for AS 400 Se
89. address needs to be assigned to each partitioned server and defined in the OS 400 TCP IP configuration Since the AS 400 TCP IP implementation supports multi homing you may use the same line description for more than one IP interface However if you have more than one communications adapter for example one Token Ring and one Ethernet each physical adapter is represented by one line description and the IP addresses may be assigned to different line descriptions For example we assign the following names and IP addresses to three partitioned servers DOMASVRI1 10 1 2 217 DOM4SVR2 10 1 2 218 DOM4SVR3 10 1 2 219 The maximum number of IP addresses that can be assigned to one line description is 128 while the total number of IP interfaces on the entire AS 400 system cannot exceed 512 Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 89 Assuming that you want to use the same physical Token Ring line of the AS 400 system you need to add all three interfaces to the appropriate line description either by using the Configure TCP IP CFGTCP menu option 1 Work with TCP IP interfaces and then option 1 Add or by entering the Add TCP IP Interface ADDTCPIFC command on any AS 400 command line You will see a prompt as shown in Figure 35 a Type choices S Add TCP IP Interface ADDTCPIFC press Enter gt 10 1 2 217 Internet address o iit Line description gt TRNLINE
90. all information stored in the AS 400 system The key features of the Integrated File System are the following e Support for storing information in stream files that can contain long continuous strings of data These strings of data might be for example the text of a document or the picture elements in a picture The stream file support is designed for efficient use in client server applications e A hierarchical directory structure that allows objects to be organized like fruit on the branches of a tree An object is accessed by specifying the path through the directories to locate the object e A common interface that allows users and applications to access not only the stream files but also database files documents and other objects stored in the AS 400 system Backing Up Domino for AS 400 Objects When considering saving and restoring for a Domino for AS 400 server you need to distinguish two different areas of information e Programs and configuration data enabling the server to function properly e Notes databases containing the actual user data While it is easy to understand that the user data needs to be saved frequently the need to have recent backup copies of the product data is sometimes overlooked Even though programs and configuration data change very infrequently it is still possible that administrators make mistakes or that software failures corrupt information Even though a total loss of the entire disk sto
91. and specify the appropriate line speed Click the Modem tab and select the appropriate modem type from the pull down box If you are using an IBM 7857 017 modem a customized modem information entry may need to be created first using a 5250 interface Refer to Use a 5250 Display to Create Customized Modem Information on page 310 for details Click OK to save the line description and return to the connection profile properties Click the TCP IP Settings tab Local IP address Select IP address 10 1 2 3 in our example Remote IP address Select IP address 10 1 2 200 in our example Click the Script tab Specify script information if desired For more details about scripts on the AS 400 system please refer to Creating and Changing Connection Scripts on page 319 Click the Authentication tab Remote system authentication If desired select the Require remote system identification box Validation list name Specify a new one or select one from the pull down list Click OK to finish the SLIP Profile configuration 306 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Configuring the Remote PC Workstation for SLIP Dial in Although the use of TCP IP dial up is not limited to the Windows 95 platform this example is based on Windows 95 Setup of other 32 bit Windows environments such as Windows NT should be similar With OS 2 the TCP IP Network Dialer can be used Setup of the remote workstation involves
92. are valid for the Field name To use a fax distribution list enter QFAXDIST You must also specify the preferred address of FAXDISTA To use a fax master list entry enter QFAXDEST You must also specify a preferred address of FAXDESTA Product ID Enter QFAX Appendix A Using Facsimile Support for AS 400 375 Value Use this field to specify the fax distribution list or the fax master list entry Enter the value as it appears on the fax distribution list or the fax master list in the following format destination identifier entry For our example we enter ABC Office Furniture Co 9876 Accounts Receivable You must specify the Destination Identifier and Entry If you omit one of these values you must specify the corresponding delimiter For example to omit the Identifier specify the entry as follows ABC Office Furniture Co Accounts Receivable To omit the Identifier and Entry for a simple destination specify the entry as follows ABC Office Furniture Co Defining an Address for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Press the F19 key to add the name for SMTP In our example we are creating an ACCTS FAX entry Depending on whether or not you converted the format of the SMTP names in your system distribution directory SDD one of two different looking panels will appear If you did not convert the SDD on your AS 400 system the Add Name for SMTP display appears as shown in Figure 219 E Add Name for SMTP
93. availability there are various approaches to mirroring your data One is to use the Domino clustering capability available with a specialized server license that includes advanced functions A second is to use some sort of data replication scheme In our case we set up a Domino partitioned server on each AS 400 specifically for backup Twice a day all user data is replicated to this backup partition from the live Domino server partitions on the AS 400 Nightly we bring down this specific partition and back it up via BRMS The administration team are the only users who have access to these backup servers Unlike the clustering approach this does not provide failover but this provides online hot backup which is accessible on demand if needed We also maintain up to thirty days of backup on offline media At this time we are not using clustering because this feature is not currently part of the blueprint for the IBM deployment of Lotus Notes of which we are a part Migrating to Domino for AS 400 the Results If you have seen the hype surrounding Domino for AS 400 you undoubtedly have heard about the major benefits of this product scalability reliability and performance The results of our migration project represent a real life testimonial to these claims First Scalability It has been our experience that Domino for AS 400 scales in multiple ways We have scaled the total number of registered users per AS 400 to over 3 5
94. bold are the commands to be entered the normal text is the system output 8 See topic Examples Using FTP to copy the ID files to the administrator workstation 84 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Ve WINDOWS gt ed ay C gt md notes idfiles C gt md notes idfiles server1 C gt cd notes idfiles server1 C notes idfiles serverl gt ftp system01 Connected to system01 220 QTCP at SYSTEMO1 220 Connection will close if idle more than 5 minutes User system01 none myas4usr 331 Enter password Password 230 MYAS4USR logged on ftp gt bin 200 Representation type is binary IMAGE ftp gt ed 250 NAMEFMT set to 1 250 Current directory changed to ftp gt ed notes data 250 Current directory changed to notes data ftp gt get cert id 200 PORT subcommand request successful 150 Retrieving file notes data cert id 250 File transfer completed successfully 2113 bytes received in 0 22 seconds 9 60 Kbytes sec ftp gt get user id 200 PORT subcommand request successful 150 Retrieving file notes data user id 250 File transfer completed successfully 2423 bytes received in 0 16 seconds 15 14 Kbytes sec sep quit ot Figure 32 Example for Using FTP to Transfer ID Files Tip The line cd is very important It not only changes the current directory to the root of the IFS from whatever is specified as the home directory in your AS 400 user p
95. box 12 In the Networks dialog box select OK The main user dialog box displays Troubleshooting This section contains a description of some common problems and tips on how to solve those problems Domino Icon Not Showing in Navigator Window If you do not see the Domino icon under Servers after successfully installing the plug in this my be caused by a problem in the Windows 95 registry To correct this you have to follow these steps from the Windows 95 desktop 1 Click Start 2 Select Run 3 Type regedit and click OK The Registry Editor shown below appears z Registry Editor Registry Edit View Help w HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT H E HKEY_CURRENT_USER HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE HKEY_USERS HKEY_CURRENT_CONFIG G HKEY_DYN_DATA My Computer 4 Figure 146 Registry Editor 4 Press F3 Find and type the following search string Lotus Domino Chapter 6 The Graphical User Interface of Operations Navigator 269 5 Repeat the search by pressing F3 until the complete path shown at the bottom of the window is My Computer KEY_CLASSES_ROOT IBM AS 400 NETWORK SYSTEMS SYSTEMO1 Lotus Domino The string shown in the example above appears on a single line where SYSTEMO1 is the name of your AS 400 system a Registry Editor ol x Registry Edit View Help C Software Inventory E SYSTEMS SYSTEMO1 E IBM Internet E IBMJva a m GA_tyore My Computer HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT IBM AS400 Networ
96. by clicking one of the following radio buttons e Bidirectional e AS 400 to Domino e Domino to AS 400 7 Select the Synchronization Status of either Enabled Disabled or Suspended Synchronization will not occur unless you choose the Enabled status You can change the status now or after you have saved the configuration by editing the document again 8 Click Next and a form called Population Information as shown in Figure 99 appears 9 Choose Yes to Populate Directories if any of the following is true w You chose AS 400 to Domino synchronization and you want the Domino address book to contain all of the selected entries that are in the AS 400 directory gt Selected refers to the selection criteria defined later in step 25 Chapter 5 Directory Synchronization 217 W You chose Domino to AS 400 synchronization and you want the AS 400 directory to contain all of the selected entries Person documents that are in the Domino Address Book w You chose bi directional synchronization and you want both the AS 400 directory and the Domino Address Book to contain the same entries ectory Synchronizatic Domino for AS 400 Directory Synchronization Figure 99 Population Information 10 11 If you choose to populate directories you must provide additional information w For bi directional synchronization select either the AS 400 system distribution directory or the Domino addre
97. concentrator decision it is also possible to use a modem provided with the AS 400 system New AS 400 systems usually come with a modem for use with the Electronic Customer Support ECS This is typically an IBM 7852 7855 or 7857 modem It uses the synchronous mode to connect to ECS for service benefits such as download of PTFs and sending information for problem analysis However many AS 400 ECS modems can also operate in the asynchronous mode Set the Modem to Asynchronous Mode AS 400 PPP can be set up to use the ECS modem in either the synchronous or asynchronous mode Modems that operate only in the asynchronous mode are more common on PC workstations Since both mode and speed of the modem must match on the dialing and answering systems we discuss how to change an AS 400 ECS modem to operate in the asynchronous mode The IBM 7852 400 modem which comes with the newer technology of many AS 400 systems has physical dip switches To enable the asynchronous mode set all switches except number 12 to the factory defaults Switch 12 controls whether the synchronous or the asynchronous mode should be used This switch should be DOWN for asynchronous mode Special considerations with the 7857 017 modem The IBM 7857 017 modem can be switched to the asynchronous mode using the following steps to enable one of the selectable factory configurations 1 On the front panel press the down arrow button until the Configuration Options D12 d
98. create a MAILO8 partitioned server on an AS 400 that represented a duplicate of the MAIL08 Domino server on a PC platform We could then move the entire MAILO08 user community without requiring any actions by the users Here are the basic steps for this method e Create the Notes data directory for the new AS 400 version of the server and copy the Public Address Book into it using FTP or the AS 400 network 398 Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization Administration neighborhood capability This avoids possible problems with duplicate active Domino servers e Configure the Domino server on AS 400 Use the same TCP IP address as the existing PC server Do not start the newly configured server or its TCP IP interface e Schedule an outage on the PC Domino server long enough to move all the mail files and verify them so mail files are not being updated while this process is taking place e Use File Transfer Protocol FTP to copy all the mail files from the existing server to the AS 400 using a different IP address for the same physical machine e After moving the files and verifying them end the existing Domino server on the PC platform e Start the TCP IP interface and the new Domino server on the AS 400 Because it has the same TCP IP address the server change should be transparent to the users Their mail will still be on MAILO8 with the same TCP IP address It will simply be on a different more available phys
99. customize these default settings at any time Advanced Setup offers experienced users the most control and customization of the server setup parameters Figure 128 Set Up Domino for AS 400 Panel 2 6 The only choice you have in this panel is to select the Quick and Easy Setup with a limited number of possible parameters or the Advanced Setup providing all possible settings In the following steps we show the Quick and Easy Setup and later in the section we show the Advanced Setup page 270 Click the button with the greater than sign and you will see the third configuration panel 3 lt gt Save amp Quit 3 Server Audience Quick and Easy Setup In addition to Notes users who else will be the audience for this server T B i i SE X Intemet Mail Packages for example Lotus Mail or Eudora T News Readers for example Netscape Navigator or MS Explorer Web Browsers This feature enables your Domino Server to be accessible by Web browsers Internet Mail Packages This feature enables your Domino Server to host mailboxes for Internet mail packages and to send and recieve mail from the Internet News Readers This feature enables your Domino Server to send and receive messages from Internet Newsgroups and to be accessible by Internet News readers Figure 129 Set Up Domino for AS 400 Panel 3 for Quick and Easy Setup 8 For the Quick and Easy Setup you see o
100. data KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F9 Retrieve F10 Cursor F11l Toggle F16 Repeat find F17 Repeat change F24 More keys C COPYRIGHT IBM CORP 1981 1998 Figure 199 Input File for FTP Utility Likewise the standard output is redirected to member FTPOUTPUT in line 12 00 of Figure 198 The content of this member can be used for debug and control purposes after transferring the data An example is shown in Figure 200 Columns 1 Hel Browse NOTESLAB QCLSRC SEU gt FTPOUTPUT FMT POE oe ee eS ee ee eee ee ee ee re bri grits S E EE 0017 SENDPASV is off 0018 Enter an FTP subcommand 0019 gt NA 1 0020 202 SITE not necessary you may proceed 0021 Client NAMEFMT is 1 0022 Enter an FTP subcommand 0023 gt LCD NOTES TEST doc 0024 Local working directory is NOTES TEST doc 0025 Enter an FTP subcommand 0026 gt cd k notes data doc 0027 250 CWD command successful 0028 Enter an FTP subcommand 0029 gt MGET replace 0030 200 Type set to A 0031 200 PORT command successful 0032 150 Opening ASCII mode data connection for 0033 226 Transfer complete F3 Exit F5 Refresh F9 Retrieve F10 Cursor F11 Toggle F12 Cancel F16 Repeat find F24 More keys Figure 200 FTP Log Redirected to Source File Member Chapter 8 Migration from Other Domino Platforms 339 004 004 004 004 004 004 004 004 004 004 005 F3 E Time Ne
101. data directory type the following commands on the AS 400 FTP command line LCD notes data johndoe CD k notes data johndoe Chapter 8 Migration from Other Domino Platforms 337 MGET nsf 9 Repeat the previous step for each subdirectory you need to copy 10 When you are finished copying files quit FTP On the AS 400 FTP command line type QUIT Press the Enter key 11 Verify that you have copied all the files to be migrated plus the certifier ID server ID and administrator user s id to the Domino data directory on the AS 400 system Automating the File Transfer with a CL Program If you need to transfer many subdirectories you may want to automate the copy process by writing a CL program While you easily may combine all CL commands to create the directory structure into a CL program as shown in lines 2 00 through 7 00 of Figure 198 it is not very obvious how to automate the FTP process The trick is to create a separate source file member containing all FTP subcommands in the sequence as they need to be entered On our example we named the member FTPINPUT and added it to the standard source file for CL programs QCLSRC 1 71 Edit WBL QCLSRC FTPFRMIPCS Poea ere DUeto 8 earthen na baie Boues auu Cole acter tee d KKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Beginning of data KKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKKKKKK KKK KK KK PGM CRIDIR NOTES DATA doc DTAAUT EXCLUDE OBJAUT NONE CRIDIR NOTES DATA lspace DTAAUT EXCLUDE OBJAUT NONE CRIDIR
102. directories from tape Following is an example of the steps 1 Sign on your AS 400 using a user profile that has SAVSYS and JOBCTL special authority 2 To make sure that no one is using the server that you plan to recover stop the server Use the End Domino Server ENDDOMSVR command 3 If you use directory synchronization stop the directory synchronization function using the following command call qnotesint qnndiend 4 Mount the tape that has the most recent backup copy of the directories for the server 5 Use the appropriate restore RST command for your Domino directory For example if your Domino directory is NOTES DATA and your tape device is TAPO1 use the following command RST DEV qsys 1lib tap01 devd OBJ notes data 6 If you use directory synchronization you should also restore the AS 400 system distribution directory from a backup created the same time as your Domino Address Book was saved This process restores the physical contents of the data directory for your server to your AS 400 disk storage Consult the Domino documentation for any special gt Note that this is not the same as the Restore Objects RSTOBJ command RSTOBJ can only be used to restore OS 400 library objects that is objects in the QYS LIB file system 144 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration recovery activities that you might need to perform after you have restored the directories
103. directory synchronization 245 an 420 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration STRDOMSVR 130 STRMSF 373 STRTCPPTP 326 Subsystem edning 78 SVRID 68 System distribution directory 18 377 description 215 synchronizing 247 T TCP IP domain 48 163 164 port mapping 99 TCP IP Utilities 162 TCP2061 168 TCP2074 169 TCP9610 198 TCP9676 210 TCPIP 286 Time zone 66 116 Transplantation Method 344 345 417 Turkish Character Set for SMTP MTA 179 U Unable to get Global domain 201 user defined fields 199 378 V Verify TCP IP Connection 114 W WEB parameter for CFGDOMSVR 67 Western Europe Character Set for SMTP MTA 179 Windows Network Neighborhood 87 Work with All Spooled Files 340 Work with Authorization Lists 319 Work with Configuration Status 358 Work with Domino Console enter server password 112 Exit 78 F3 78 Work with Domino Console WRKDOMCSL 81 Work with Domino Servers 73 discover server restarts 133 display the server status 74 ending a server 77 possible options 74 starting a server 75 Work with Domino Servers WRKDOMSVR Work with Domino jobs 181 Work with Environment Variables 129 Work with Names for SMTP 197 Work with Point to Point TCP IP 314 315 326 Work with Spool Files 132 Work with User Jobs 138 WRKAUTL 319 WRKCFGSTS 358 WRKDOMCSL 81 Code page conversion problems 59 WRKDOMSVR 73 77
104. e To use the directory synchronization configuration database you must have a Win32 workstation such as Windows 95 or NT with Notes 4 5 or higher or an OS 2 client with Notes 4 5 3 or higher If you use a VGA display you must use more than 16 colors e The Domino Address Book being synchronized must be in the Notes data directory on the Domino server e The default Domino Address Book is the Public Address Book NAMES NSF but any other address book using the same template PUBNAMES NTF can be synchronized e Only one configuration is allowed per Domino Address Book e Only one configuration per AS 400 system is allowed to be enabled Configurations may exist for other Domino Address Books but those configurations must be disabled Chapter 5 Directory Synchronization 207 e If you have more than one Domino server on your AS 400 partitioned servers each server has its own NNDIRSYC NSF and NNDILOG NSF However the initial release of directory synchronization will only synchronize one Domino Address Book with AS 400 SDD If the Domino administrator wants synchronization with other address books also on other Domino servers on the same AS 400 system to take place they can use replication or subset replication to synchronize with these other PABs e If you ever change the AS 400 user ID delimiter the AS 400 host name or the AS 400 domain name or select Domino SMTP MTA configuration fields you must edit and save the enabled
105. file and other server properties e Modify the NOTES INI file of the Domino servers on your AS 400 system e Start and stop Domino for AS 400 servers e Access the Domino administration panel e Register Notes users This chapter describes how you prepare a Windows 95 or Windows NT workstation and use Operations Navigator for Domino to set up and manage one or more Domino for AS 400 servers on one or more AS 400 systems Setting Up a Workstation for Operations Navigator for Domino Before you can use set up a workstation to create and manage Domino for AS 400 servers you must install Domino for AS 400 on your AS 400 system If you did not install Domino for AS 400 yet refer to Chapter 2 in this book on how to use the Load and Run LODRUN command to install the software The LODRUN command must be started from a 5250 terminal or a 5250 emulation window Installing Client Access Operations Navigator and Domino Plug In The prerequisite for the Operations Navigator for Domino Client Access for Windows 95 NT and the base support for Operations Navigator can be installed from a CD ROM or a network server the plug in for Domino must be downloaded from a managing AS 400 system Use the following procedure to add Operations Navigator to your Notes administrator workstation 241 Language Requirements for Using Operations Navigator To use the Operations Navigator support of Domino for AS 400 make sure the national language versio
106. fixes a data area QUSRSYS QTMSPRCNT must be created CRTDTAARA DTAARA QUSRSYS QTMSPRCNT TYPE CHAR Once the data area is created SMTP support should be stopped ENDTCPSVR SMTP and restarted STRTCPSVR SMTP QMSF job s should also be stopped ENDMSF and restarted STRMSF If the in SMTP addresses function needs to be disabled for some reason then the data area should be deleted DLTDTAARA DTAARA QUSRSYS QTMSPRCNT and these functions should be stopped and restarted again POP3 users can have a in their address ex pop user myas400 com as configured in their SDD entries and they get their mail in their POP3 mailbox POP3 users that send to addresses that have in their user ID and use the AS 400 as their sending mail server can do so OV 400 users can also have a in their address and they get their mail in their OV 400 mailbox However if Domino for AS 400 is installed this only works when the data area QUSRNOTES DOMINOSMTP is also created This is due to the Domino Address Resolution snap in that appears to take the message with a address bound for the OV 400 user into the Domino server s MTA When Domino for AS 400 is installed OV 400 users POP3 users or anyone sending SMTP mail into an AS 400 are able to send SMTP mail to a Domino user with a in their address The mail gets to that user s Domino mailbox if the address correctly identifies the Domino user in the server
107. for example applications on the Internet using SMTP MIME format Exit programs for AnyMail 400 convert the mail formats between DCA DIA and SMTP MIME A recent enhancement of OS 400 also allows POP3 clients to connect to an AS 400 system to send and receive Internet mail based on SMTP MIME POP3 clients can also exchange mail with OV 400 on the same and other AS 400 systems through AnyMail 400 Thus users of an AS 400 system can exchange mail in two different formats e DCA DIA based mail with other Office Vision systems e SMTP MIME mail with any application supporting SMTP MIME and POP3 or IMAP4 clients gt This includes also OfficeVision for VM and OfficeVision for MVS as well as other mail applications supporting DCA DIA and SNADS 152 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration For more information on AS 400 mail functions refer to the redbook AS 400 Mail Capabilities SG24 4703 Lotus Domino as a Mail Server One of the basic functions of Lotus Notes is exchange between Notes clients connected to e The same Domino server e Other Domino servers in the same domain e Domino servers in other domains Instead of using a Notes client workstation users can also send and receive mail via a Domino server using a POP3 or IMAP4 client both Internet standards for e mail Exchange of mail between Domino servers and mailing applications using different formats can be done by installing Message Transfe
108. from either the Work with Domino Console command line or a remote Domino console on a Notes client load smtptmta After pressing Enter and after a couple of seconds pressing the F5 key you should see the completion message as shown in Figure 76 Work with Domino Console i Previous subcommands and messages 05 29 98 07 04 05 PM Opened session for Wilfried Blankertz Rochester IBM Build 147 gt load smtpmta 05 29 98 07 06 06 PM SMTPMTA Starting 05 29 98 07 06 35 PM SMTPMTA MTA startup completed Enter a Domino subcommand gt F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Print F9 Retrieve F17 Top F18 Bottom F21 Command line J Figure 76 MTA Startup Completed Starting the MTA Automatically with the Server If the word SMTPMTA was added to the ServerTasks statement in the NOTES INI file the MTA will be started every time you start the Domino server For example ServerTasks Replica Router Update Stats AMgr Adminp Sched Event SMTPMTA ONNINADD Verify that the SMTP MIME MTA was Completely Started There are several ways of determining that all of the necessary MTA tasks are active e Using the Domino console command show tasks short form sh ta You see the tasks listed as shown in Figure 77 e Using CL commands you can see the same tasks as AS 400 jobs since they have the same name as the Domino tasks listed above Chapter 4 Mail Integration Through the SMTP MIME MTA 173 Note The OSESHLRn and the ISE
109. generated for each local directory entry using a combination of user ID Address and the AS 400 s local host name There are two possible forms e UserID Address SMTP domain e UserID SMTP domain The second version is only possible if the user s address is the same as the AS 400 system name You can also change the SMTP configuration on your AS 400 system to use a character other than the question mark to delimit user ID and address To do so use the Change SMTP Attributes CHGSMTPA command to set the delimiter to one of the following characters 6 amp S _ The SMTP domain must be the AS 400 system s local host name as defined in the Change TCP IP Domain CHGTCPDMN command or option 12 of the Configure TCP IP CFGTCP menu Assigning an SMTP Alias Manually You can also assign an arbitrary SMTP address to an AS 400 mail user in addition to the automatically assigned one The function to do so is called Change name for SMTP This function allows you to assign a full SMTP address that is SMTP user ID and SMTP domain to each entry in the SDD 14 You can use the Display Network Attributes DSPNETA command to find out your AS 400 system name 180 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Internally there are two different implementations possible All the SMTP addresses are stored in a database file separate from the SDD This is the implementation on every AS 400 system unless yo
110. gt lt N gt lt 135 SMTPMTA lt SMTP MTA Outbound Work Queue gt 86256628 002D4994 00 S7S TEMO1 acme com lt 8625663C 0049C74 SMTPMTA omsgeny Message 86256628 002D4994 converted for WBL us ibm com message is queued for transmissior SMTPMTA lt CN MailT est O wshop gt 86256629 002DB 468 lt 8625663C 0049C916 gt lt Server MailTest wshop gt lt N gt lt 135 SMTPMTA lt SMTP MTA Outbound Work Queue gt 86256629 002DB 468 00 SYS TEMO1 acme com lt 8625663C 0049C91 SMTPMTA omsgeny Message 86256629 002DB468 converted for WBL us ibm com message is queued for transmissior SMTPMTA osesctl oseshlr0 startup completed SMTPMTA drt Startup complete SMTPMTA lt CN MailT est O wshop gt 86256624 002DC14B8 lt 8625663C 0049CA44B gt lt Server MailTest wshop gt lt N gt lt 138 SMTPMTA lt SMTP MTA Outbound Work Queue gt 86256624 002DC14B 00 SYSTEMO1 acme com lt 8625663C 004904 SMTPMTA omsgenv Message 86256624 002DC146 converted for WBL us ibm com message is queued for transmissior SMTPMTA oseshlr0 Startup complete SMTPMTA oseshir0 Attempting SMTP session with us ibm com SMTPMTA lt CN MailTest O wshop gt 8625662B8 002DD18D lt 8625663C 0049CB91 gt lt Server MailTest wshop gt lt N gt lt 13t SMTPMTA lt SMTP MTA Outbound Work Queue gt 86256628 002DD18D 00 SYSTEMO1 acme com lt 8625663C 0049CB SMTPMTA omsgcny Message 86256628 002DD18D converted for WBL us ibm com message is queued for transmissio SMTPMTA lt CN Maill est O wshop g
111. host name used to identify the TCP IP network For example if the full host name is SYSTEMO1 DOMLAND ACME COM Then the domain name is DOMLAND ACME COM The term SMTP domain is not at all related to a Notes or Domino domain nor is it the same as the TCP IP domain although the latter can be a part of the SMTP domain name 156 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration e Lotus Notes or Domino Domain This term has absolutely nothing to do with TCP IP A Notes Domain consists of one or more Domino servers that all share that is use a replica of the same Public Address Book PAB Therefore each server knows the home mail server for all users in the same domain The Notes domain name should also not be confused with the organization or the organizational unit When installing a new Domino server the default for domain name is identical to the organization name however they don t have to be the same In Notes terminology the domain name is specified by a preceding sign while the organizational unit is preceded by a forward slash For example WBL ITSO itsc_respop specifies a user WBL in the organizational unit ITSO on the Notes domain itsc_respop Define the TCP IP Host and Domain Name for the AS 400 The first step in setting up a correct TCP IP configuration is to set the AS 400 s host name and domain name You can do so using the Configure TCP IP CFGTCP command and then entering o
112. im Add TCP IP Point to Point ANS Profile System RCHASMO1 Name WIN95DOM Text Type choices press Enter Modem information Use a modem Fee eee T Y Yes N No Modem information name F4 for list Script source information Use connection dialog script Y Y Yes N No Member 6 2 2 ew ew we ANS400 Name File Ae a a a QATOCPPSCR Name ELBLADY oe oes Sie e ee QUSRSYS Name ASCII character set identifier 00819 1 65533 DFT More _ Fizecance modem information F3 Exit F4 List F9 Command line F1 Cancel A Figure 178 Add TCP IP Point to Point ANS Profile Panel 2 Modem information Use a modem We selected Y Yes Modem information name When you add a new profile the field Modem information name is initially blank If you specify a Y in the field Use a modem you must enter a valid value for Modem information name Press F4 to display a Pop up selection list of predefined modem strings Note If you are using an IBM 7857 017 modem the default modem information may need to be modified depending upon the country setting See Special considerations with the 7857 017 modem on page 308 for details Script Source Information For this example we used a script since we wanted an exchange of user ID password and IP addresses Use connection dialog script We specified Y Yes Member file library This is the location of the connection script to use to allow remote systems to
113. in this section Depending on your own needs you may also choose to enter the optional information User ID and Address Enter the user ID and address for this entry In our example the user ID is ACCTS at address FAX A fax machine resides at this address for use by the Accounts Receivable department at ABC Office Furniture Company Description Enter a description of the user for whom you are adding this entry In our example this is Scott Jones at ABC Accounts Receivable System Name and Group For a fax entry enter FAX as the system name Do not enter the actual system name Do not use the Group field Press the Enter key and the following message appears System name and group not found Press enter to confirm This is not an error ignore this message and press the Page Down key to continue Appendix A Using Facsimile Support for AS 400 371 Fax Telephone Number Enter the fax telephone number for the fax recipient If you are using a fax distribution list or a fax master list entry you do not need to enter the Fax telephone number field Instead complete the information in the user defined fields In the example shown in Figure 215 we use a fax master list entry so leave the fax telephone number field blank a Add Directory Entry N Type choices press Enter Telephone numbers FAX telephone number Location F4 for list Building Office Mailing address More F3
114. information with enterprise software like relational databases and transaction processing systems e Push information to user desktops Domino supports a wide variety of clients e The Notes client the most feature rich client available e IMAP clients such as Lotus Mail and Qualcomm Eudora e NNTP clients such as Internet news readers 14 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration e Internet browsers such as Microsoft Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator e LDAP clients History of Lotus Notes and Domino Integration with AS 400 System In 1996 IBM began implementing Lotus Notes on the Integrated PC Server for the AS 400 system The IBM Integrated PC Server for AS 400 formerly known as File Server Input Output Processor or FSIOP is a special type of input output processor IOP inside of the AS 400 system The FSIOP is a PC Processor card that fits within the AS 400 system unit At the same time it can serve as a normal IOP providing a high performance local area network LAN adapter to AS 400 applications and its Intel 80486 DX2 processor can be used to run programs originally written for personal computers OS 400 integration of Lotus Notes provided many opportunities for the AS 400 user Although the Notes software running on the AS 400 system is the same as that running on an OS 2 server the integration with the AS 400 system provided some additional advantages e Maintenance of Notes
115. level on your backup tapes as the Domino Public Address Book Use the following command SAVOBJ OBJ qaok LIB qusrsys OBJTYPE file DEV tap01 6 If you are using directory synchronization restart the directory synchronization job after your backup procedure is complete Use the following command call qnotesint qnndistj Saving All Stream File Directories With this approach you assume that Domino databases might exist anywhere in the Integrated File System in either the root directory or the QOpenSys directory Therefore you need to back up the entire root directory and QOpenSys directory Use any of the following methods Note this is not the same as the Save Objects SAVOBJ command SAVOBJ can only be used to save OS 400 library objects that is objects in the QYS LIB file system 136 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration e Save your entire system option 21 from the Save menu e Save all user data option 23 from the Save menu e Use the Save Object SAV command to back up everything except the QSYS LIB file system the QDLS file system and directories that contain static program product information Substitute your tape device name for TAPO1 SAV DEV qsys 1lib tap01 devd OBJ qsys lib omit qdls lib omit QIBM ProdData omit QOpenSys QIBM ProdData omit updhist yes When you use option 21 or 23 from the Save menu the system automatically
116. lists commonly used Domino CL commands Command Description Verb Subject CFGDOMSVR Configure Domino Server CFG DOMSVR STRDOMSVR Start Domino Server STR DOMSVR ENDDOMSVR End Domino Server END DOMSVR WRKDOMCSL Work with Domino Console WRK DOMCSL Table 3 AS 400 CL Commands Commonly Used in Combination with Domino Table 4 lists common CL verb and subject abbreviations Once you become familiar with these abbreviations you can perform almost any function on the Chapter 1 Overview of Lotus Domino for AS 400 29 AS 400 In most cases subject abbreviations are three letters An exception to this tule are very often used subject abbreviations for example F for File Verb Description Subject Description ADD Add CSL Console CHG Change DOM Domino CFG Configure DTAARA Data Area CPY Copy F File CRT Create JOB Job DLT Delete JOBD Job Description continued DSP Display JOBQ Job Queue EDT Edit LIB Library END End MSG Message RMV Remove MSGQ Message Queue RNM Rename OBJ Object RST Restore OBJD Object Description SAV Save SBS Subsystem STR Start SBSD Subsystem Description WRK Work with SPLF Spooled File STS Status SVR Server TAP Tape USR User USRPRF User Profile Table 4 Common CL Verb and Subject Abbreviations Integrated File System AS 400 uses an object based architecture There are many types of objects and each object has certain unique characteristics Some examples of objects include files programs messag
117. may be the most obvious approach it is not always possible to use the existing AS 400 name as the Domino server name For example if you plan to configure more than one logical server a partitioned server on the same AS 400 system each server must have its own unique name Another example is when you plan to use the Lotus Calendar Connector for Office Vision LCCOV to exchange free time information between Notes calendars and Office Vision 400 calendars In such a case LCCOV needs to uniquely identify the calendar on the Domino server and the one under OfficeVision by their respective names which would not be possible if both names are the same Since all Domino for AS 400 servers as an AS 400 application use the AS 400 TCP IP interfaces the AS 400 system must be known in the network by more than one host name in order to allow Domino to use a different host name than other AS 400 applications Two concepts supported by the OS 400 TCP IP implementation can help here Multi homing and Multi hosting e Multi homing allows more than one up to 128 characters per line but not more than 512 per AS 400 system Internet address to be defined on a single network adapter represented by an AS 400 line description If you decide each Domino server will use its own unique TCP IP address then perform step 4 on page 44 more than once each time entering different Internet addresses for the same line description e Multi hosting allows you
118. must be configured and started TCP IP is a service of the operating system that Domino is using This topic is not meant to replace For easy use you may also store the tools objects in the library QGPL Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 41 AS 400 TCP IP documentation but it is intended to provide a minimum list of steps that need to be performed to activate TCP IP on your AS 400 system Before you start configuring TCP IP a line description must exist A line description is an OS 400 object of the type LIND which describes the characteristics of a physical interface to a communications network For TCP IP you can use Token ring X 25 Ethernet DDI frame relay or wireless networks The following steps describe how you configure a TCP IP interface 1 Sign on to the AS 400 with a user profile having at least all object ALLOB J security administrator SECADM and input output configuration IOCFG special authorities 2 You can use the Configure TCP IP CFGTCP command to show a menu allowing you to perform all configuration tasks related to TCP IP In any OS 400 command line indicated by the gt symbol type the following command and press Enter CFGTCP You will see the Configure TCP IP menu as shown in Figure 1 ae Configure TCP IP b System SYSTEMO1 Select one of the following Work with TCP IP interfaces 2 Work with TCP IP routes 3 Change TCP IP
119. name set to MTAGlobal The Global Domain name does not appear outside Domino It is only used to link from the server document to the Global Domain document The Internet domain suffix in the Global Domain document is set based on the AS 400 TCP IP configuration values for local host and local domain that is the fully qualified host name for the AS 400 system According to our example this would be system01 domland acme com Caution If the contents of the field Internet domain suffix do not match exactly the local host and domain as defined with option 12 of the Configure TCP IP CFGTCP menu then mail will be bounced back and forth between AnyMail and Domino many times till a maximum hop count is reached and the mail will never reach the recipient If OS 400 SMTP support accepts mail for more than one SMTP domain see Define the TCP IP Host and Domain Name for the AS 400 on page 163 you have to add all valid SMTP domain names here unless you prevent mail forwarding to Domino by creating data area DOMINOSMTP in library QUSRNOTES The MTA will accept inbound SMTP mail for all the Internet domain suffixes listed in the Internet domain suffix field For outbound SMTP mail the MTA uses the entry in this field as the right side of the return address 166 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration For example if the Internet domain suffix field contains the string system01 domland acme com the MTA w
120. our example the message states Network Server Description IPCS1 created Vary on the Integrated PC Server again using either the Vary Configuration VRYCFG command or option 8 in the Work with Network Server Descriptions display and then option 1 in the Work with Configuration Status display You may continue with on page 364 now Using the Same Network Server Description Alternatively if you have implemented interfaces or applications which rely on the original name for the NWSD e g DOMINO1 you may choose to simply assign a new IP address to the existing NWSD We expect this scenario to be relatively rare since any such interfaces or applications would probably also require the original IP address However if this situation does apply to you follow these steps to change the external IP address for your existing NWSD 1 On an AS 400 command line type WRKNWSD Press the Enter key The Work with Network Server Descriptions display will appear Find the Network Server name that matches your Integrated PC Server In our example it is DOMINO1 Tab down to the corresponding field under the Opt column and type a 2 to change the description Chapter 8 Migration from Other Domino Platforms 345 Press the Enter key and the Change Network Server Description CHGNWSD prompt as shown in Figure 205 appears Change Network Server Desc Type choices press Enter Network server pig mats Resource name
121. outbound mail queue Chapter 4 Mail Integration Through the SMTP MIME MTA 195 08 25 39 AM 08 25 42 AM 08 25 42 AM 08 25 42 AM 08 25 44 AM 08 25 44 AM 08 25 44 AM 08 25 48 AM 08 25 48 AM 08 25 48 AM 08 25 48 AM 08 25 50 AM 08 25 50 AM 08 25 51 AM 08 25 52 AM 08 25 52 AM 08 25 52 AM 08 25 56 AM 08 25 56 AM 08 25 56 AM 08 25 59 AM 08 26 00 AM 08 26 00 AM 08 26 00 AM 08 26 00 AM 08 26 00 AM 08 26 00 AM 08 26 02 AM 08 26 02 AM 08 26 03 AM 08 26 04 AM 08 26 04 AM MailT est wshop 07 09 08 23 47 AM Mail Router started for domain WSHOP Router Intenet SMTP host rchland acme com in domain acme com Router Transferring mail to SMTP box Router Transferred 1 messages to SMTP box Router Message 00494EE3 transferred to SMTP box for WBL us ibm com SMTPMTA Starting SMTPMTA omsgeny Starting SMTPMTA osesctl Startup complete SMTPMTA omsgenv Startup complete SMTPMTA omsgenv Processing 15 pending messages in SMTP BOX SMTPMTA lt CN MailT est O wshop gt 86256623 002D6952 lt 8625663C 0049BF6C gt lt Server MailT est wshop gt lt N gt lt 135t SMTPMTA lt SMTP MTA Outbound Work Queue gt 86256623 002D6952 00 SY STEMO1 acme com lt 8625663C 0049BF6 SMTPMTA omsgeny Message 86256623 002D6952 converted for WBL us ibm com message is queued for transmission SMTPMTA lt CN MailT est O wshop gt 86256624 002D 7452 lt 8625663C 0049C0244 gt lt Server MailT est wshop gt lt N gt lt 135t SMTPMTA lt SMTP MTA Outb
122. receive SMTP mail Recent extensions to the SMTP Internet standard to support dial up mail may very likely pave the way for Domino for AS 400 to support this capability in the future In the meantime the functionality can be addressed using customized services or companion products such as EverGreen 400 from Inventive Designers The protocol used for Remote LAN Service is PPP or SLIP in much the same way as client dial up connection to the server However client dial involves manual initiation of the connection at the Notes client Remote LAN Service on the other hand is a function that allows the Domino server to start the dialing without AS 400 operator intervention Note Remote LAN Service is available for Domino for AS 400 running on OS 400 Version 4 Release 2 or higher It does not require the Dial on Demand functionality that is available beginning with OS 400 Version 4 Release 3 to automatically establish the switched line connection For more details on setting up remote LAN service in general see Getting Started with the Domino Server or the Domino Administration Help database HELPADMN NSF The following information applies only to the AS 400 system AS 400 Requirements To use the Remote LAN Service your AS 400 system must have the following hardware e Modems e Modem cables e Depending on the model of your AS 400 system one of the following I O adapters e 2699 Two Line WAN IOA e 2720 PCI WAN Twinaxial IOA e 2121 PCI
123. received from the Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF or Direct Inboard Dial DID fax modems to route information The information that follows explains how to set up this kind of routing The first step in setting up the routing is to create a directory entry where the fax data mail can be sent The displays in this section provide an example of how to add a system distribution directory entry for the user PKENNEDY To add an entry use the Work With Directory Entries WRKDIRE command Type WRKDIRE from the command line and press the Enter key The following display as shown in Figure 221 appears a Work with Directory Entries N Type options press Enter 1 Add 2 Change 4 Remove 5 Display details 6 Print details 7 Rename 8 Assign different ID to description 9 Add another description Opt User ID Address Description ADMA FAX fafadfa _ ACCOUNTS FAX ACME Accounts Receivable DSCHROED NAME Dennis Schroeder a FAXDLE FAX Bad dist list E FAXGCS FAX Fax to Grand Central a FAXMLE FAX Grand Central 57574 z FAXMLE2 FAX Team Office 57574 T FAXTELN FAX Phone number 57574 _ HOCKEY FAX Test DST Entry IZZY NAME D49M Izzy POP3 ID KLUCK NAME kluck directory entry lt KPS NAME Kevin Stamschror More F3 Exit F5 Refresh F9 Work with nicknames Fll Sort by description e12 cancel F13 Work with departments F17 Position to F24 More kevs yw Figure 221 Create a Directory Entry to Route the Fax Data Mail Appendix A Using Facsimil
124. respective SMTP destinations OSESHLRn The Outbound Session Handler s child processes of the OSESCTL The handlers perform the actual tasks of connecting to the destination or next hop in the SMTP system delivering the message s and passing back any errors Note The OSESHLRn tasks will only appear when mail is being sent ISESCTL The Inbound Session Controller task controls the receiving of messages from other SMTP systems Note that this task works differently compared to the MTA running on other platforms in the sense it does not listen on SMTP port 25 directly It then notifies an Inbound Session Handler to take the connection so that it can listen for a new connection ISESHLRn The Inbound Session Handler s accept incoming connections from the ISESCTL On Domino platforms other than the AS 400 system they perform the SMTP protocol handshaking with the sending system Because of the integration with AnyMail 400 they read the incoming data from an IFS file and write it to the work queue Note The ISESHLRn tasks will only appear when mail is being received Accessing Log Information All mailing events occurring on a Domino server are logged in database log nsf To find out about configuration problems with your MTA you can open the Mail Routing Events view in log nsf and analyze the logging entries FigureFigure 87 shows an example where the MTA is being started at a time when several outbound mail items were already in the
125. same format as you entered the user ID and address When you press Enter the following message appears System name and group not found Press enter to confirm This is not an error ignore this message and press the Page Down key three times to continue A display similar to the one in Figure 223 appears 380 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration nad Directory Entry N Type choices press Enter Mail service level 4 1 User index 2 System message store 4 Lotus Domino 9 Other mail service For choice 9 Other mail service Field name F4 for list Preferred address 3 1 User ID Address 2 0 R name 3 SMTP name 9 Other preferred address Address type F4 for list For choice 9 Other preferred address Field name F4 for list More F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F18 Display location details VE Q AAA nama far QMTD BPIWN Cnani fi near dafinad fFialde y Figure 223 Complete Add Directory Entry Second Screen Mail Service Level Select option 4 Lotus Domino Preferred Address Select option 3 SMTP Name and press F19 to enter the information for the SMTP Name as shown in Figure 224 Add Name for SMTP N Type choices press Enter jois en ED on es 8 es E A E TE PKENNEDY Address 3 NAMEXXX SMTP user ID pkenned SMTP domain test name ibm com SMTP route F3sExit F4 Prompot F12 Cancel E
126. server document is also updated and information added to the following e Basics section e Internet Message Transfer Agent SMTP MTA section The following paragraphs describe in detail what kind of information is configured in those documents Caution Once you have set up a Domino for AS 400 server with the MTA configured OS 400 SMTP support will forward all incoming SMTP mail to Domino even if the server is not active if both of the following are true e The SMTP domain the name on the right of the sign of the incoming mail can be resolved to an IP address configured to an AS 400 interface e The SMTP mail box name the name on the left of the sign is not found as an alias in the SMTP names table of AS 400 system distribution directory SDD pointing to a local OV 400 or POP3 user If you do not want all incoming mail to be forwarded to Domino you can create a data area DOMINOSMTP in library QUSRNOTES This will change the function of the SMTP MTA snap ins in the AnyMail 400 Mail Server Framework so that they will only route SMTP addressed mail to Domino when the SMTP address is configured in the SDD and has a Notes Domino message service level configured in the SDD entry found To create this data area enter the following command in any AS 400 command line CRTIDTAARA QUSRNOTES DOMINOSMTP TYPE CHAR LEN 1 TEXT Prevents forwarding unknown local mail to MTA Note In this case you must add a directory for eac
127. server to an existing Domino domain Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 67 In addition many Notes databases NSF files Notes templates NTF files and other files needed for this server are placed in the data directory Note We used NOTES DATA as the data directory for this example because this is the default directory structure used on all other platforms so Notes administrators should be familiar with this name However unlike other platforms on the AS 400 system the top level directory NOTES does not contain anything other than the data directory NOTES DATA All the program objects are stored in AS 400 libraries QNOTES and links to those objects are stored in common directories QIBM USERDATA LOTUS See What Happens When the Domino Server Is Installed on page 55 for more information AS 400 Related Part of Server Setup After 5 to 15 minutes depending on the size and workload of your AS 400 system the end of this configuration phase will be indicated by the message Press ENTER to end terminal session 4 Press Enter and the very short final phase of the configuration will be performed At this time the AS 400 specific part of the configuration is done Now a subsystem name of the form DOMINOxx will be associated with the new server and the subsystem description an object of type SBSD will be created in library QUSRNOTES Caution The Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR comm
128. special authorities for the user profile If your user profile does not have the required authorities ask the security officer to either run the commands or use the Change User Profile CHGUSRPRF command to add the required authorities to your user profile Insert the Domino for AS 400 CD in the AS 400 CD ROM drive Type the following command on the AS 400 command line and press Enter LODRUN DEV OPT DIR OS400 This command starts the installation program directly from the directory OS400 on the AS 400 optical device OPT The Lotus Domino for AS 400 CD must be in the CD ROM drive of your AS 400 system at this time see Step 2 Tip If there are problems with this command they are typically one of two reasons e If you get an error message that says something like this LIBL not found in Library List The common reason is that the library QTEMP is not in your library list when you ran the LODRUN command To add QTEMP to your library list you can use the Add Library List Entry ADDLIBLE command Type the following command in any AS 400 command line ADDLIBLE QTEMP Then run the LODRUN command again e If you get an error message that says something like this Request to optical device OPTO1 failed It means you are pointing to the wrong optical CD device On AS 400 optical devices are typically named OPTO1 OPTO2 or similar The device specification of OPT indicates use the default optical device typically OPTO1
129. stops all activity goes to a restricted state When you use commands instead of the Save menu to back up your server information you must stop the server before you back up This ensures that the databases are in a known state for the backup operation You can use the End Domino Server ENDDOMSVR command to stop the server If you use directory synchronization you should also stop the directory synchronization job before you back up using commands See the instructions in the previous topic Chapter 3 Backup and Recovery 137 Saving Only Domino Mail Databases This topic describes specifically how to back up mail from your Domino for AS 400 server If you already have a strategy for backing up all the user information from your Domino server you probably do not need a separate procedure for backing up only mail However you might discover that your backup interval for your entire server is not frequent enough for e mail because mail is so volatile Your Domino server stores mail in multiple databases e The MAIL BOX database on each server contains mail for the server to route to individual user mailboxes or to another server e Each Lotus Notes user has an individual mail database The name of the mail database is typically the user ID with the NSF extension The Domino administrator has the option to use different names for mail databases For example the mail database for user GNELSON is GNELSON NSF Typically all the indiv
130. system has the ability to establish a PPP connection with another system you need to provide your AS 400 system with the information that allows it to do this This information is called a connection profile PPP connection profiles are configured using Operations Navigator a graphical interface to AS 400 network administration tasks Operations Navigator uses the industry standard Windows Explorer interface and is a component of OS 400 Client Access for Windows 95 NT which comes with the OS 400 operating system at no additional charge No additional license fees are required to use Operations Navigator It also offers convenient access to Domino administration from the same interface automatically invoking the appropriate function of a Notes client under the covers and the capability to edit the NOTES INI configuration file of the Domino for AS 400 server Configuring the PPP Connection Profile on the AS 400 System To set up a connection to the AS 400 system using the Operations Navigator perform the following steps Note The figures in this example depict Operations Navigator Version 3 Release 1 Modification Level 3 1 From the Windows 95 or Windows NT desktop start Operations Navigator 2 In the main tree of Operations Navigator click the plus sign next to the icon representing your AS 400 system to expand the tree Click the plus sign next to Network Click the plus sign next to Point to Point Click Connection
131. systems 10 Type a Name for the Line description In our example we typed DOMPPP Instead if a PPP line description already exists you may select it from the drop down list 11 If you typed a new name Click the New button A dialog box called New Line Properties will appear Figure 184 Note If you selected an existing line description from the drop down list click the Open button instead of New You will simply be referring to the next few steps to validate existing line properties instead of entering them for the first time Any parameters may be modified except those on the General tab If the General tab is not configured correctly you must create a new line description New Line Properties System01 71x General Connection Link Modem Security The settings on this page affect the settings available on the rest of the property pages Name pome Description fo m Hardware resource Interface type Connection type Switched line answer Framing Asynchronous Synchronous T Inactivity timeout 15 65535 fis seconds Figure 184 New Line Properties General Tab 12 On the page with the General tab select one of the listed Hardware resources The Interface type must be RS232 V 24 The PPP protocol supports either synchronous or asynchronous framing depending on your modem type and setup Framing type must be the same for both calling and answering servers 314 Lotus Domino for
132. the IBM AS 400 Client Access folder again 7 Double click the Client Access Properties icon JIk a Chapter 6 The Graphical User Interface of Operations Navigator 243 8 Click the Service tab as shown in Figure 117 Client Access Properties SYSTEN61 Figure 117 Define Managing System for Client Access Workstation 9 Select the name of your AS 400 system in the dialog box 10 Click the OK button Installing the Domino for AS 400 Plug In Operations Navigator now needs to be extended with Domino for AS 400 support Such an additional support function is called a plug in 11 Double click the Accessories icon to open the Accessories folder 12 Double click the Selective Setup icon A 244 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration The Selective Setup start dialog appears Selective S Selective setup allows you to add and remove components of Client Access Adding components To add a component select any component that is currently not selected Requires the CD diskettes or network drive with which you initially installed the product Removing components To remove a component deselect any component that is currently selected You will be asked to confirm the uninstall for each component you selected before the uninstall begins Figure 118 Selective Setup Start Dialog 13 Click the Next button 14 In the Setup Options dialog Figure 119 make su
133. the Network adapter that matches your hardware and then click OK If you have an installation disk for this device click Have Disk Manufacturers Network Adapters National Datacomm National Semiconductot s gt Have Disk Cancel Figure 161 AS 400 Operations Navigator Window Connection profiles 8 Click the OK button to return to the Select Network Component Type dialog box 9 Click the OK button to return to the Network Configuration dialog box Chapter 7 Dial Up Connectivity 287 Add TCP IP Protocol Support for the Dial Up Adapter If TCP IP is not already listed in the Network Configuration Window we need to add this too The follow steps start again in the Network Configuration dialog box with the configuration tab selected 1 Click on the Add button and the Select Network Component Type dialog box as shown in Figure 160 will be shown again 2 Highlight the line with the title Protocol as shown in Figure 162 Select Network Component Type Protocol is a language a computer uses Computers must use the same protocol to communicate Figure 162 Select Network Component Type Protocol 3 4 5 6 Click on the Add button Highlight Microsoft highlight TCP IP and click on the OK button 288 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration 7 From the Network Configuration Window highlight Dial Up Adapter and click on Properties
134. the exit points 5 Now we need to create the exit points with the correct exit program data From an OS 400 command line issue the following command call qtcp qtmmsnap This will create the exit points just deleted with correct exit program data 6 Now verify that the changes were made correctly e Issue the command WRKREGINF EXITPNT QIBM_QZMF from the OS 400 command line You will see the Work with Registration Information display e Enter option 8 Work with exit programs by putting an 8 in front of the two items as shown in Figure 89 in bold and press the Enter key Ve Opt Type options 5 Display exit point Exit Point QIBM_OQZMFMSF ACT QIBM_OZMFMSF ADR Work with Registration Information RSL QIBM_QZMFMSF ATT CNV QIBM_OZMFMSF ATT MGT QIBM_QZMFMSF ENL PSS QIBM_OZMFMSF LCL DEL QIBM_OZMFMSF LST EXP press Enter 8 Work with exit programs Exit Point Format MSFFO0100 MSFFO0100 MSFF0100 MSFFO100 MSFF0100 MSFFO0100 MSFFO100 Registered YES YES YES YES YES YES YES Text MSF MSF MSF MSF MSF MSF MSF Accounting Exit Address Resolution Attachment Conversion Attachment Management Envelope Processing Local Delivery List Expansion J Figure 89 Work with Registration Information Next use option 5 to display the exit program The display should be similar to the one shown in Figure 90 N
135. the job from which you start the server by using the STRDOMSVR command must also have a double byte CCSID If you start the Domino server from a job that has a single byte CCSID the server is started with the single byte CCSID instead of the double byte CCSID specified for the QNOTES user profile The job log of the job running under the Domino server contains a message that indicates the job CCSID was changed from the requested double byte CCSID to the single byte CCSID 58 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Using the Domino Server Console on Double Byte Systems The Domino console on the AS 400 system has the following limitations on systems using a double byte character set e If the job CCSID is a double byte CCSID the F9 key does not perform an action e Lowercase single byte characters may display incorrectly on the Domino console on AS 400 systems that have the Japanese Katakana double byte character set Feature 2962 as the primary language when some 5250 emulation programs are used For example the IBM Personal Communications Workstation Program displays these characters incorrectly when running over a TCP IP connection To work around the problem use one of the following alternatives e Use the remote console either from a Notes client or from the Domino Web Administration tool e Use an SNA APPC LU 6 2 connection for your Personal Communications Workstation Program and spe
136. the only user registered in the Public Address Book In order to register additional users or servers to perform administration functions or simply to test the server functions from a Notes client the ID files cert id and user id must be copied from the AS 400 Integrated File System IFS to the administrator s client workstation If the workstation already has a Notes Client installed take care not to overwrite any ID files already stored there The user ID files are typically named user id and are stored in the Notes Data directory Either copy the files to another directory for example Notes Data ServerName or rename the files with unique names for example admin id The server id is used to identify the server It should be kept in the data directory assigned to that server There are several methods of copying the ID files to and from the AS 400 for example e Use the File Transfer Protocol FTP which is a part of OS 400 TCP IP programs e Use the Windows Network Neighborhood in combination with Client Access for Windows 95 NT or AS 400 NetServer support to access the AS 400 IFS as a network drive Using FTP to Copy the ID Files to the Administrator Workstation The book Jnstalling and Managing Domino for AS 400 Part No 12999 as well as its online version as400doc nsf has an example using FTP to copy the ID files Figure 32 shows the same example as seen from the administrator s workstation The lines shown in
137. the same steps as outlined in Configuring the Remote PC Workstation for PPP Dial in on page 298 for dial up using PPP with these exceptions One difference is that the Server Type in the Dial Up Networking connection should be set to SLIP UNIX Connection The other difference is that there is an additional step between Add Windows 95 Dial Up Networking page 299 and Add Dial Up Adapter Support page 301 to install SLIP and Scripting for Dial Up Networking Additional software may need to be downloaded form the Microsoft home page and installation your workstation The following procedure details this installation process 12 13 14 15 Create a folder called SLIP on the disk of your PC Using a Web browser go to the following page http www microsoft com windows download dscrpt exe Download the file dserpt exe to the SLIP folder Run dscrpt exe which is a self extracting file Double click the icon My Computer Double click the icon Control Panel Double click the icon Add Remove Programs Click on the tab labeled Windows Setup Click on the Have Disk button Click on the Browse button Select the SLIP folder from the directory tree RNAPLUS INF should be highlighted in the left side of the Open box Click the OK button Click the OK button again Put a check mark in the box next to SLIP and Scripting for Dial Up Networking Click Install and click OK Chapter 7 Dial Up Connectivity
138. the third line to define a comparison condition 32 If you chose AS 400 to Domino synchronization unidirectional only see Figure 98 on page 228 continue with step 46 on page 238 33 Clicking on the Next button brings you to the Domino to AS 400 Directory Synchronization Configuration panel Note The Domino to AS 400 Directory Synchronization Configuration form looks very similar to the AS 400 to Domino Directory Synchronization Configuration panel as shown in Figure 100 on page 230 Make sure not to confuse these two panels or the ones following them The first set of configuration parameters was related to one direction AS 400 to Domino We are now defining the opposite direction 224 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Domino for AS 400 Directory Synchronization Figure 110 Domino to AS 400 Directory Synchronization Configuration 34 If you chose bi directional or only Domino to AS 400 synchronization you now need to provide similar information for the opposite direction 35 If you do not want to change the field mappings for the Domino to AS 400 synchronization go to step 43 on page 237 36 Click the Edit field mappings button You will see the view called Field mappings Domino to AS 400 as shown in Figure 111236 showing you which fields are mapped for the Domino to AS 400 synchronization Directory Sync Configuration Field Mappings D omino to AS 40 Oj
139. to change a user profile 20 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration For details on directory synchronization see the Domino for AS 400 Help database AS400HLP NSF or the book Installing and Managing Domino for AS 400 Lotus Part No 12999 Database Integration Integration between Domino and DB2 400 databases is an important feature of Domino for AS 400 Three methods are available for Domino applications to access and potentially update DB2 400 databases e LotusScript applications use LS DO LotusScript data object as an interface to DB2 400 data e Agents written using the Domino formula language can use Db functions to interact with a relational database including DB2 400 e The NotesPump product an add on Domino product that you can order separately provides easy to use methods for synchronizing information in Domino databases with information in DB2 400 databases All three methods for accessing DB2 400 from Domino establish a connection from Domino to AS 400 system The connection specifies both the user profile whose authority the system uses to access DB2 400 database files and a password for that user profile For details on database integration see the Domino for AS 400 Help database AS400HLP NSF or Chapter 6 of the book Installing and Managing Domino for AS 400 Lotus Part No 12999 Integration of Notes Mail and OS 400 Based Mail With an integrated approach of managing ma
140. to detach the attachment and use the Client Access 400 AFP Workbench Viewer If you followed the directions in the sections titled Routing Using Received Tones on page 400 or Routing Using the Transmitting Subscriber Identifier TSI on page 405 you can only view the fax by detaching the attachment and using the Client Access 400 AFP Workbench Viewer There is another way to be able to view the fax and use the Lotus Notes viewer You would need to load and apply Facsimile Support for AS 400 5798 TBY PTF SF49013 Note If you load and apply PTF SF49013 and use the command listed below you will not be able to have faxes routed by Facsimile Support for AS 400 to Lotus Notes using the QFFTIFFC program Automatic routing of received faxes can still be accomplished as described in Routing Using Received Tones on page 400 or Routing Using the Transmitting Subscriber Identifier TSD on page 405 If you use the QFFTIFFC program you must route the faxes to Lotus Notes yourself using the SNDDOC or SNDDST commands Once PTF SF49013 is loaded and applied you can file a received fax using the command as shown in the following example This files the received fax as a TIFF Class F format from an AS 400 command line 392 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration CALL QFAX QFFTIFFC parm QSYS LIB QUSRSYS LIB QAFFRCV FILE F123456789 MBR QDLS ACCOUNTS TIFFDOC1 t The parameters must be entere
141. to start the session is not being invoked Make sure that you are running the latest quarterly maintenance release QMU of Domino for AS 400 4 6 2 or later If you receive a Domino console message Unable to Start Connection there are a few places to check for information about what is wrong First display the QSYSOPR message queue and look for any messages relating to the communications hardware interface Next look for job logs in the list of spooled output files logged for the user QNOTES To do this issue the following Work with All Spooled Files WRKSPLF command on any AS 400 command line WRKSPLF QNOTES Display any job logs that are listed If you see the message Not authorized to command STRTCPPTP in library LIBL double check that you have PTF SF46406 installed and that you are running the latest quarterly maintenance release QMU of Domino for AS 400 4 6 2 Problem determination specifically related to the PPP profile is available using the Work with Point to Point TCP IP WRKTCPPTP command Type the following command on any AS 400 command line and press Enter WRKTCPPTP You will see the Work with Point to Point TCP IP list display as shown in Figure 194 324 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration A Work with Point to Point TCP IP PX Type option press Enter 1 Add 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Remove 5 Display details 6 Print 9 Start 10 End 12 Work with line status 14 Work with job Line
142. using a fax master list entry or a fax distribution list To enter the user defined fields press the F20 key You can use 374 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration F24 More keys to view more function keys The Specify User Designed Fields display appears as shown in Figure 218 a Specify User Defined Fields DN Type choices press Enter QDLTID QDOMINO QFAXDEST OFAX ABC office Furniture Co 9876 Accounts Receivable More wasrvit FS5 Rafrach F19 Canceal yy Figure 218 User Defined Fields The Specify User Defined Fields display allows users to access entries in the fax master list and fax distribution lists that you have already set up through the Facsimile Support for AS 400 product This simplifies the task of finding the recipient when more than one person uses the fax machine It allows you to tie the entry to a Facsimile Support for AS 400 master list entry to allow for a customized cover page The information for the User defined fields must be consistent with the field name and ID that you previously entered for the Preferred address field If you enter a fax telephone number FAXTELNB for the preferred address Facsimile Support for AS 400 does not use the user defined fields Field Name The value that you enter for the Field name depends on the information that you specified for the Preferred address field The following values
143. using option of the Work with TCP IP Network Status NETSTAT command You also need to vary off the Integrated PC Server using option 2 in the Work with Configuration Status WRKCFGSTS display or the Vary Configuration VRYCFG command Changing the network identity of the original server involves changing its IP address in the TCP IP configuration If the original server is an Integrated PC Server you can change its network identity in one of two ways W Change the external IP address on the existing Network Server Description NWSD Ww Create anew NWSD for the Integrated PC Server with a new name and a new external IP address Chapter 8 Migration from Other Domino Platforms 341 The method you choose is primarily determined by whether the Integrated PC Server also supports applications or interfaces which rely on the original NWSD name Many customers may want to change the name of the NWSD for the Integrated PC Server for administrative convenience and clarity For example you have a Domino installation on your Integrated PC Server whose NWSD is named DOMINO because it was primarily or solely intended as a Domino server After you migrate to Domino for AS 400 your Integrated PC Server is likely to be no longer used for Domino It may be used as a firewall or LAN adapter or for other network applications Thus keeping the original NWSD name for example DOMINO1 is no longer appropriate and may in fact be confusing In many
144. which activities you want the server to track by adding classes to the Billing Class setting in the NOTES INI file A server with billing enabled is referred to as a billing server Customers or users access billing information through an API An API is a set of subroutines and data structures that allows you to write programs that access databases For more information see the Lotus Notes API 4 6 User Guide and Lotus Notes API 4 6 Reference Administering and Using Domino for AS 400 Managing the Domino server includes many different tasks Depending on the task you can use the AS 400 user interface Operations Navigator Notes administration client Web administration client or even a text editor Some tasks may be managed in more than one way There are three main types of management tasks to perform e Managing the server while it is running is mainly done from the host operating system of the Domino server and the Domino console Examples of these tasks are starting the Domino server stopping the Domino server setting variables running server tasks e Configuration of the server is mainly done from a Notes client For example you would change server settings in the Server document by using the Notes client Editing the NOTES INI file however can be done from an AS 400 command line interface using the Edit File EDTF command supplied with PTF SF45296 for OS 400 V4R2 SF49052 for V4R3 or a PC based ASCII editor
145. which automatically starts the DIAL profile name specified in the Remote connection name field of the connection document When the PPP session has been successfully activated that session is used for the initiated mail routing or replication task Once the exchange of information has completed Domino should automatically end the DIAL profile Chapter 7 Dial Up Connectivity 323 Tip You may either use the replicate rep servername Domino console command to start replication manually or use the Show Schedule sh sch command to find out at what time the next replication is planned At the time of the replication or mail routing you may use the Work with Point to Point TCP IP WRKTCPPTP command from an AS 400 command line not the Domino console to watch the status of the DIAL profile Starting with the status INACTIVE or OUTQ the status should change several times till it finally stays at ACTIVE At this point replication will occur this can be seen at the Domino console or in the replication events view of the log nsf database After the replication has finished the status of the connection profile should change again several times till it stays in either OUTQ or INACTIVE Troubleshooting If Domino attempts to start the DIAL PPP profile and is unsuccessful you should see error messages on the Domino console beginning with the prefix RAS400 If no messages appear on the Domino console it is possible that the program
146. will occur and the fields from the source directory will be copied to the fields of the entry in the target directory For bi directional synchronization The master directory will copy its entries to the other directory first The additional entries from the second directory are then copied to the master directory Q What happens if you delete a key field value entry after population Because the key field no longer produces a value the change is not reflected in the other directory A value must exist in every key field to be synchronized with the other directory Problem Determination Below is a list of four places to check for synchronization problems The Notes database for directory synchronization logging information NNDILOG NSF which is located on the Domino Server Go to File Database Open select the server and specify NNDILOG NSF in the Filename section The spool files of AS 400 user QNOTES The directory synchronization jobs and programs run under the QNOTES user profile The synchronization jobs are named QNNDI2SD and QNNDI2NA On any AS 400 command line type the following WRKSPLF QNOTES Accordingly look for spool files of User Data type QNNDI2SD or QNNDI2NA The OS 400 message queue QNNDIMSG is used to log messages from the OS 400 directory synchronization programs On any AS 400 command line type the following DSPMSG QNNDIMSG The OS 400 message queue QSYSOPR may be checked for severe errors
147. with Domino Icon Chapter 6 The Graphical User Interface of Operations Navigator 249 8 If you do not see an icon named Domino do the following e Right click the icon on top for AS 400 Network and you will see a menu e Click AS 400 Objects and you will see the Select AS 400 Objects dialog box shown in Figure 124 e Make sure that All is selected and then click on the OK button Select AS 400 Objects x Select the objects that you want to work with for each of your configured 45 400 systems M All Help Figure 124 Select AS 400 Objects to be Used with Operations Navigator 9 If you still do not see the Domino icon you may have encountered a software defect Refer to Domino Icon Not Showing in Navigator Window on page 282 for more information 250 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration 10 Click the Domino icon Depending on the speed of your connection and the model and utilization of your AS 400 system it may take from a few seconds up to a minute until you see a response In the meantime you see the AS 400 icon shown in Figure 125 AS 400 Operations Navigator System01 EB Database B Client Access al NetServer ff 05 400 Fa TCPAIP FY Printer Output By Printers System E Users and Groups Figure 125 Building the List of Servers Chapter 6 The Graphical User Interface of Operations Navigator 251 11 If you did not configure any D
148. with Routing Entries N Select Routing Entry Type Select one of the following Print received fax File received fax Send notification Send fax as a document Run user receive program OBWNEH Selection F3 Exit F12 Cancel Bottom FSsExit F5 Refresh F6 Create F12 Cancel Pe Figure 237 Work with Routing Entries From this display you can create as many routing entries as you need To mail a received fax to Lotus Notes create at least two routing entries For the first routing entry select option 2 File Received Fax and press Enter The File Received Fax display appears as shown in Figure 238 Appendix A Using Facsimile Support for AS 400 389 j Destination name Identifier Entry TSI code Document Folder Document type Paper size Mapping value Delete fax F1 Cancel Facet t Type choices press Enter GENERATE Name GENERATE RCVFAX RFTDCAFAX RFTDCA MODCA LETTER LETTER LEGAL POSITION POSITION CENTER 2 1 Yes 2 No File Received Fax ALBANY GREAT DANES DEFAULT 5079871234 RFTDCAFAX MODCAFAX A Figure 238 File Received Fax You can change any of the parameters for your environment For this example we select the default parameters by pressing the Enter key You return to the Work with Routing Entries display as shown in Figure 239 Va Destination 5 Identifier Entry TSE COS is Fasi cs 2 Edit entry Opt Routing Type TSI FILED
149. you have already created using the Facsimile Support for AS 400 Enhanced Services Give each entry a unique user ID and address For example you can assign a user ID with an address of FAX to represent the person or company who uses the fax The displays in this section provide examples of how to add a system distribution directory entry for a fax machine in the Accounts Receivable department for ABC Office Furniture Company The user who receives the faxes is Scott Jones who Appendix A Using Facsimile Support for AS 400 369 works in the Accounts Receivable department In this example we use the information in the Fax Master List so we do not specify a fax telephone number The Fax Master List Entry in our example is as follows Destination ABC Office Furniture Co Identifier 9876 Entry Accounts Receivable To add an entry use the Work With Directory Entries WRKDIRE command When you press the Enter key a display similar to the one in Figure 213 appears Work with Directory Entries 4 Remove 8 Assign different ID to description Fl2 c ancel F13 Work with departments Description fafadfa ACME Accounts Receivable Dennis Schroeder Bad dist list Fax to Grand Central Grand Central 57574 Team Office 57574 Phone number 57574 Test DST Entry D49M Izzy POP3 ID kluck directory entry Kevin Stamschror Type options press Enter 1 Add 2 Change 7 Rename Opt User ID Address AAA FAX
150. you used Operations Navigator to configure the server the option SMTP MTA of the Internet Mail Packages was not checked The SMTPMTA Is Already Running on This System After trying to load the SMTP MIME MTA you may see the message The SMTPMTA is already running on this system on the Domino console or in the LOG NSF database a Work with Domino Console 2N Previous subcommands and messages 06 12 98 11 01 47 PM AMgr Agent CrossPost Articles in nntppost nsf does not have proper execution access cannot be run 06 12 98 11 21 08 PM Periodic full text indexer starting performing hourly full text indexing 06 12 98 11 21 09 PM Periodic full text indexer terminating 06 12 98 11 24 04 PM The Administration Request database admin4 nsf on AcmeDS1 Acme is currently a wildcard replica 06 12 98 11 24 04 PM The Administration Process on AcmeDS1 Acme will not work until an Administration Server has been designated for this domain s Public Address Book gt load smtpmta gt load smtpmta 06 12 98 11 35 38 PM SMTPMTA The SMTPMTA is already running on this system Enter a Domino subcommand gt F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Print F9 Retrieve FLT Top F18 Bottom F21 Command line J Figure 86 The SMTPMTA Is Already Running on This System The reason for this is only one partitioned server can have the SMTP MIME MTA active However users on all Domino servers can still send and receive SMTP if mail routing between
151. 0 overview 148 Public Address Book 149 registration server 107 108 Relay host 176 Remote LAN Service 324 requirements 324 setting up 325 Replace configuration 67 Request to optical device OPTO1 failed 52 Restore Licensed Program CL command 37 Restore Object 382 RFC Internet Request for Comments 161 Root 354 RSTLICPGM 37 S SAV 382 Save authority required 139 changed objects 144 data directory 139 databases 139 directory synchronization 139 libraries and directories 137 mail 142 143 specific database 143 stopping server 139 Save File 146 Save Licensed Program 127 Save Object 382 SAVLICPGM 127 Secondary language 58 SENDPASV 354 Server document 111 for SMTP MTA 177 Server ID 68 Server Replication connection document 105 server id 107 Server to Server Dial Connections 324 SET CONFIG 375 ShiftJIS 179 Single level storage 29 SLIP 288 SMTP 17 Connection Document 176 domain 48 163 164 SMTP address 184 SMTP Connection Document 176 SMTP server starting 168 SMTP MIME MTA migrating 371 SMTPAUSRID 199 MTPDMN 199 SMTPMTA 203 already running on this system 202 SNADS 22 Software Subscription 39 Source server 176 special authorities 51 assigning to an AS 400 user profile 51 to configure TCP IP 42 Start Domino Server 130 Start Point to Point TCP IP 326 starting SMTP server 168 Starting the Domino Server after IPL 77 Stop Domino Server 77 Stopping
152. 00 the hierarchy tree of your AS 400 network with an icon at the top representing the entire AS 400 network and one or more icons underneath for each AS 400 system 4 Click the plus sign to the left of the icon representing your AS 400 system the one which has Domino for AS 400 installed The tree under the icon will be expanded to show the major system componentsof this AS 400 system 5 Click the plus sign next to the Network icon l gnderneath your AS 400 system to expand the network components of your AS 400 system 6 Click the plus sign next to the Servers icon to see the servers branch of the tree 248 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration 7 Within the Servers branch of the hierarchy tree you should see an icon named Domino as shown in Figure 123 AS 400 Operations Navigator Iof x File Edit View Options Help jis minutes old A grem Database AS 400 Database a8 File Systems 45 400 File Systems Internet 45 400 Internet Functions 45 400 Jobs 45 400 Messages 45 400 Multimedia Obje 45 400 Networking Ay Printer Output 45 400 Printer Qutput a Printers AS 400 Printers System 45 400 System Folders frag Users and Groups AS 400 Users and Groups 9 Internet Be Jobs Messages Ry Printer Output Printers System Users and Groups l Wofttobects COCOC C O O C SGSS Figure 123 AS 400 Operations Navigator
153. 00 users Assuming that 60 70 are active at any given time this equates to over 2 500 402 Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization Administration concurrent users on a consistent basis At peak times we exceed 3 000 concurrent users These users typically route over 400 000 pieces of mail per week many with attachments Average CPU utilization on this system is 30 to 35 We have scaled the number of partitioned Domino servers up to sixteen per AS 400 This includes a mix of mail and application servers And finally we have scaled the number of registered users on a single partition to 800 with great success This scalability simply makes our lives as administrators simpler because there is less hardware to manage We moved from over 40 pieces of hardware to 3 Our monthly administration costs decreased by roughly 35 Since our administrative workload is significantly reduced we now have time to perform more consulting and perform services for our customers Next Reliability From a hardware perspective the move to AS 400 has equated to a significant improvement in operating system and hardware reliability In the past five months we have experienced no hardware failures and only one AS 400 operating system failure It is important to note that this one operating system failure occurred with pre released software Remember that we began our migration prior to general availability of either Domino for AS 400 or OS 400 V4R2
154. 10 times the server fails the Domino server will not restart again To turn off auto restart set the value of this environment variable to 1 The other environment variable is NOTES _AS400_STSDEBUG If this environment variable is set to 1 then the Domino server will dump all the environment variables and their values when the server is started This will enable you to determine if the environment variables are set to appropriate values The environment variables are written to the job log of the QNNINSTS job Note that these environment variables must be set prior to starting the Domino server Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 129 Chapter 3 Backup and Recovery The Domino server often contains important business information that may not exist elsewhere in your organization For example your users may rely on e mail for important communications that are not documented anywhere else Similarly an online customer service application might contain records that do not exist in hard copy To protect the data from disasters such as a site loss or hardware loss and from human error such as accidentally deleting a critical database develop a good strategy for regularly backing up the information on your Domino server Make a plan to back up the following e Objects that change infrequently such as programs and configuration data for the Domino for AS 400 software product e Objects that change regularly su
155. 121 Caution A problem was discovered recently when configuring a server for any time zone east of Greenwich Mean Time between ZW12 and CET and specifying Daylight savings time DAYSAVTIME YES In this case the administrator s person document was not found in the Public Address Book To circumvent this problem either specify DAYSAVTIME NO or reconfigure the server without making any changes However this problem is solved with Domino for AS 400 4 6 2 66 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Start the Configuration Process 3 Press Enter to start the configuration process Your keyboard will be locked and the display will not change for approximately 3 to 5 minutes After that you will see the Terminal Session Display as shown in Figure 14 and the keyboard will remain locked i Creating ID for Blankertz Wilfried Acme This requires 1 3 minutes of PN computation Begin certifying Blankertz Wilfried Acme Done certifying Blankertz Wilfried Acme Begin registering Acme Adding Acme to the Name and Address Book Acme successfully registered Begin registering AcmeDS1 Creating ID for AcmeDS1 Acme This requires 1 3 minutes of computation Begin certifying AcmeDS1 Acme Done certifying AcmeDS1 Acme Adding AcmeDS1 Acme to the Name and Address Book AcmeDS1 Acme successfully registered Begin registering Team00 Admin Creating mail fi
156. 2 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration If you need to make sure that the complete data directory has been deleted you can use the Work with Object Links WRKLNK command to verify whether the directory still exists For example enter the following command on any AS 400 command line WRKLNK notes data Depending on how the server was ended before removing it some or all of the files and directories within the data directory may still exists and must be deleted manually Deleting the Domino Software from the AS 400 System Note Unlike the Domino implementation on some other platforms you do not have to delete the entire Lotus Domino for AS 400 software if you just want to remove the server instance Use the Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR command to delete a Domino server from your AS 400 system Use the Delete Licensed Program DLTLICPGM command to delete Domino software from your AS 400 system You must have all objects ALLOBJ special authority to use this command Before deleting the software make sure that you disable directory synchronization and end all servers After doing so you should verify that no job under user profile QNOTES is active or in the job queue You can check for the latter by entering the following two commands on any AS 400 commands line WRKUSRJOB QNOTES STATUS ACTIVE WRKUSRJOB QNOTES STATUS JOBQ If you still see one or more jobs active make sure that al
157. 5 Refresh F12 Cancel F18 Display location details F19 add name for SMTP F20 Svecifv user defined fields Figure 217 Add Directory Entry Fourth Display Appendix A Using Facsimile Support for AS 400 373 Mail Service Level Select option 9 other mail service Specify the field name for the mail service level QFAXSRVLVL QFAX Preferred Address This is the address that represents the system distribution directory entry Select option 9 other preferred name and enter the field name The field name that you specify must be consistent with the information that you specify in the user defined fields The address type must be one of the following e FAXTELNB for a fax telephone number e FAXDESTA for a fax master list entry e FAXDISTA for a fax distribution list Field name consists of two values a field name and a product ID Complete the field name as follows e Fora fax telephone number type FAXTELNBR IBM e Fora fax master list entry type QFAXDEST QFAX e For a fax distribution list type QFAXDIST QFAX The field name matches the address type that you specified A corresponding product ID is also required The following table shows the relationship between these values Preferred Address Field Name Product ID FAXTELNB FAXTELNBR IBM FAXDEST QFAXDEST QFAX FAXDIST QFAXDIST QFAX In our example we specify FAXDESTA because we are using a fax master list entry You must specify these fields if you are
158. AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration 13 On the Connection tab accept the default values as shown in Figure 152 New Line Properties System01 Remote answer tImesut z Figure 185 New Line Properties Connection Tab Chapter 7 Dial Up Connectivity 315 14 Click on the Link tab and specify the maximum line speed supported by your hardware as shown in Figure 186 New Line Properties System01 Mononen tozen inverted recording NAZA Afa Soop VEN Figure 186 New Line Properties Link Tab 316 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration 15 Click the Modem tab and select the appropriate modem from the Name pull down box If you are using an IBM 7857 017 modem a customized modem information entry may need to be created Refer to Special considerations with the 7857 017 modem on page 308 for details New Line Properties System01 Figure 187 New Line Properties Modem Tab 16 Click the OK button to close the New Line Properties box and return to the Point to Point Profiles Properties box Chapter 7 Dial Up Connectivity 317 17 Click the TCP IP Settings tab Typically the answering system assigns an IP address to an incoming call If this is the case choose Dynamically assign for both the Local IP address and the Remote IP address New Point to Point Profile Properties System01 Route spected Figure 188 New
159. AS 400 in a TCP IP network is to allow a single AS 400 to be known by multiple host domain names For example a single mail server has POP3 users Smith acmeA com Smith acmeB com Smith acmeC com etc where these users are distinct Domino POP3 or OV 400 users that are all different local users to the AS 400 This would be done in a case where an AS 400 was serving as a mail server for multiple companies Each company might want its own distinct host domain name and also not have to be concerned about any other SMTP users named Smith defined on the same AS 400 mail server The following is the recommended approach to allow a single AS 400 system to receive mail for multiple TCP IP host domain names The method used is to define multiple IP addresses for a single AS 400 system These multiple IP addresses could each be associated with a physical interface or there can be multiple logical IP addresses defined for each physical interface You can use the Add TCP IP gt Note in this context users of a Domino for AS 400 server are also considered as local This is different to the implementation on the Integrated PC Server IPCS where the IPCS is a different TCP IP host even though it resides under the covers of the AS 400 system unit An AS 400 RISC system can support up to 128 logical IP addresses per physical interface up to a maximum of 512 logical IP addresses per system Chapter 4 Mail Integration Through the SMTP
160. AS 400 server have actually been started you can use the Work with Domino Console WRKDOMCSL command from any AS 400 workstation to verify whether the basic server functions are working 1 In any AS 400 command line type the following command and press Enter WRKDOMCSL ACMEDS1 where ACMEDS 1 should be replaced by the name of your server You can also use prompting to show the valid server names as explained for the STRDOMSVR command see the description following Figure 22 on page 76 16 The job QNNINSTS is the watch dog that is this job controls all server functions If one of them fails QNNINSTS will try to bring down all other functions and then restart the server again If the error condition persists this may happen up to 10 times unless configured otherwise before QNNINSTS also terminates 78 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration 2 You will see the Domino Console which looks similar to the screen below er Work with Domino Console N Server AcmeDS1 Previous subcommands and messages 04 22 98 01 03 14 AM Warning Cannot locate design template Online Doc R4 template used by Java Programmer s Guide 04 22 98 01 03 18 AM Warning Cannot locate design template Standalone R4 2 protoprint used by Java Programmer s Guide 04 22 98 01 03 22 AM Warning Cannot locate design template Online Doc R4 template used by Java Programmer s Guide 04 22 98 01 03 26 AM Database Design
161. AcmeDS3 0 OrgA 10 6 70 217 13520 TCPIP_PortMapping01 CN AcmeDS4 0 OrgB 10 6 70 217 13521 TCPIP_PortMapping02 CN AcmeDS5 0 OrgB 10 6 70 217 13527 The example specifies that AcmeDS3 OrgA will listen on port 13520 for IP address 10 6 70 217 and AcmeDS4 OrgB will listen on port 13521 of IP address 10 6 70 217 Note The numbers 00 01 and so on after the word Mapping do not relate to the partition numbers nor to the two digits appearing at the end of the subsystem names and they must be in ascending sequence without any gaps The NOTES INI file for each of the other servers just needs to specify its own IP address and port number For example for AcmeDS4 OrgB this would be TCPIP_TcpIpAddress 0 10 6 70 217 13521 Note that the port number 13521 in our example could be any arbitrary number provided that it is not used for other applications When you specify the number assign an available port number as specified in the Assigned Numbers RFC 1340 A good approach is to use 5 digit numbers so it is less likely the number is already used by other applications Assuming the server AcmeDS1 is the port mapper for the servers AcmeDS3 AcmeDS4 and AcmeDSS the NOTES INI files for each server must contain the statements shown in the following sections The contents of each RFC can be viewed from a Web browser For example the following Web sites describe RFC 1340 http info internet isi edu in notes rfc files rfc1340 txt or via the
162. Address 0 10 6 70 217 13520 __ SSHasLANPort 1 Figure 41 Statements in NOTES INI for AcmeDs3 Server Entries in NOTES INI for AcmeDS4 ServerName AcmeDS4 OrgB Ports TCPIP TCPIP TCP 0 15 0 TCPIP_TcpIpAddress 0 10 6 70 217 13521 __ SHasLANPort 1 Figure 42 Statements in NOTES INI for the AcmeDS4 Server 98 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Entries in NOTES INI for AcmeDS5 ___s ServerName AcmeDS5 OrgB Ports TCPIP TCPIP TCP 0 15 0 TCPIP_TcpIpAddress 0 10 6 70 217 13522 S HasLANPort 1 Figure 43 Statements in NOTES INI for the AcmeDS5 Server Note The port mapper must be active whenever a client tries to connect to one of the other partitioned servers Dedicate One Server as the Port Mapper You can also dedicate a server as a port mapper server so that it does not perform any functions other than routing clients to one of the other partitioned servers In this case you can do the following e Remove all server tasks from the ServerTasks setting in the server NOTES INI file e Remove large databases such as the Help databases from the data directory Do not remove the Public Address Book however and make sure the address book is replicated with one of the other servers Connecting Partitioned Servers Through the Loopback Interface Once you have configured multiple partitioned servers on the same AS 400 system you may need to replicate your databases
163. Agent cc Mail MTA gt gt gt gt gt gt gt v gt Contact Figure 88 Feature Not Installed In this case the MTA configuration was probably successful however the Pubic Address Book does not contain the correct forms to show you the contents of the configuration parameters The solution for this is to replace the design of the names nsf file using the Domino 4 6 Public Address Book template Mail Not Sent from OV 400 to Domino There is a problem with OV 400 mail not getting to Domino when both Domino and the OV 400 reside on the same system and the system was upgraded from a OS 400 Version 3 Release 7 or earlier The following describes the solution 1 End MSF ENDMSF from OS 400 command line 2 From the Domino console issue the show tasks command and press F5 Repeat until all of the SMTPMTA Inbound tasks are idle 3 End the Domino SMTPMTA Inbound transport tasks by entering the following Domino console command 2 Remember when adding a new server to an existing domain a replica of the existing public address book will be copied from the NAB server to the new server thus the template of the existing PAB is used Chapter 4 Mail Integration Through the SMTP MIME MTA 197 tell smtpmta stop inbound transport 4 We need to delete the exit points that have the wrong exit program data From an OS 400 command line issue the following command call qtcp qtmmsnap parm remove This will delete
164. BM CICS Gateway for Lotus Notes IBM form number SG24 45 12 00 Lotus Solutions for the Enterprise Volume 4 Lotus Notes and the MQSeries Enterprise Integrator IBM form number SG24 2217 00 Lotus part number 12992 IBM PC Server and Lotus Domino Integration Guide IBM form number SG24 2102 01 Lotus part number 12970 Lotus Domino Server Release 4 5 on AIX Systems Installation Customization and Administration IBM form number SG24 4694 01 Lotus part number 12969 Lotus Domino Server 4 5 on OS 390 Installation Customization amp Administration IBM form number SG24 2083 00 Lotus part number AA0963 Lotus Domino for S 390 Performance Tuning and Capacity Planning IBM form number SG24 5149 00 Lotus part number CT6XNIE 408 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Porting C Applications to Lotus Domino on S 390 IBM form number SG24 2092 00 Lotus part number AB1720 Managing a Notes Environment with TME 10 M IBM form number SG24 2104 00 Measuring Lotus Notes Response Times with Tivoli s ARM Agents IBM form number SG24 4787 00 Lotus part number CT6UKIE Image and Workflow Library Integrating IBM FlowMark with Lotus Notes IBM form number SG24 485 1 00 Lotus Notes Release 4 in a Multiplatform Environment IBM form number SG24 4649 00 Implementing LAN Server for MVS in a Lotus Notes Environment IBM form number SG24 4741 00 Using ADSM to Back Up Databases IBM form number SG24 4335 02 NetFinit
165. Configuration Documents at least once e Restart the AnyMail Mail Server Framework e Start the MTA on the Domino server The following topics describe each of these tasks Install the TCP IP Utilities Licensed Product 5769 TC1 The support for TCP IP communications to allow Notes clients to connect to the Domino for AS 400 is part of the AS 400 operating system OS 400 However the basic OS 400 software does not include the SMTP mail server support as needed for Domino for AS 400 mail integration To obtain the SMTP mail support you need to install the TCP IP Connectivity Utilities for AS 400 Program number 5769 TC1 To verify if the TCP IP Connectivity Utilities are installed you can use the Work with Licensed Programs GO LICPGM command and then option 10 or use the Display Software Resources DSPSFWRSC command Check for the software or resource ID 5769TC1 Use the Work with Licensed Programs GO LICPGM menu and then option 11 to install the TCP IP Connectivity Utilities from your AS 400 CD ROM See chapter 5 of the book Software Installation SC41 5120 01 for more information Chapter 4 Mail Integration Through the SMTP MIME MTA 155 Verify or Complete the TCP IP Configuration for SMTP Even though TCP IP is already working on your AS 400 system the configuration may not be complete to allow the SMTP server to work correctly Some important topics to look at are e Which SMTP domain s should the SMTP server represent
166. D field you also need to specify the product ID of the user defined field in the SDD Note that the term user defined may be somewhat misleading in the sense that some IBM products also create 230 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration user defined fields for example when you convert the SMTP names That is after performing the Convert SMTP Names CVTNAMSMTP command you will have the new user defined fields SMTPAUSRID SMTPDMN and SMTPRTE all with product ID SMTP in the system distribution directory For IBM defined fields those fields that are always defined for the SDD the product ID is already set to IBM There is no real difference between adding a Domino defined or a user defined field However for user defined fields you can add predefined properties that are included in a blank field in the Domino Address Book It can also be used to keep track of the fields that were added by the user Literal fields must be enclosed in double quotes for example AS 400 Field Name Description ADDRI1 Mailing address Line 1 ADDR2 Mailing address Line 2 ADDR3 Mailing address Line 3 ADDRA Mailing address Line 4 BLDG Building CCMAILADR cc Mail address CCMAILCMT cc Mail comment CMPNY Company DEPT Department FAXTELNBR Office FAX phone number FSTNAM First name FULNAM Full name LOC Location LSTNAM Lastname MIDNAM Middle name OFC Office PREFNAM Preferred name
167. Directory Synchronization Database Integration Backup and Recovery Capability to Submit Domino Commands from a CL Program General Considerations When Migrating Your Domino Infrastructure Appendix A Using Facsimile Support for AS 400 Setting Up Facsimile Support Steps for Installing and Configuring Facsimile Support for AS 400 6 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration 368 368 368 369 369 369 370 370 370 371 375 375 376 379 379 380 380 381 382 383 385 385 385 Using the AnyMail 400 Mail Server Framework Setting Up Your System Distribution Directory Entry Defining an Address for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Faxing From Lotus Notes Faxing From Client Access 400 Prerequisites Configuring the PC Workstation to Fax PC Output Routing Received Faxes to Domino for AS 400 Routing Using Received Tones Routing Using the Transmitting Subscriber Identifier TSD File to TIFF Class F for Viewing in Lotus Notes Appendix B The IBM Rochester Experience Migrating to Domino for AS 400 the Rationale Migrating to Domino for AS 400 the Configuration Migrating to Domino for AS 400 the Methods Mail Server Consolidation Method Mail Server Transplantation Method Migrating to Domino for AS 400 the Challenges Moving the Data Administering the Public Address Book Managing User Communications Implementing Backup and Recover
168. ES INI file or by using the Notes console command SET CONFIGURATION 14 Domino does not adjust the AS 400 system clock it only adjusts the time stamps internally If the AS 400 system clock is adjusted manually to reflect DST and you specified DAYSAVTIME YES then Domino will perform an additional adjustment resulting in a wrong internal time stamp If DAYSAVTIME is set to YES Domino assumes DST starts on the first Sunday in April and ends on the first Sunday in October You can change these dates by editing the NOTES INI file and adding a DSTlaw statement See the information about the DST and DSTlaw statements in the administrator s Help database for more information 64 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Keyword Description RPLCFG WEB NEWS ADVSRV CERTID Replace configuration Specifies whether the existing Domino server configuration files in the directory that is specified in the Data directory DTADIR parameter should be erased and replaced with the new ones These files are NOTES INI NAMES NSF and the ID files in the data directory Default YES Web browsers Specifies whether a Web server feature should be included in the Domino server configuration The Web server feature automatically starts the Domino HTTP server and enables Web browsers to access the Domino server Example HTTP Default NONE News readers Specifies whether an Internet news re
169. Entire Domino for AS 400 Server Chapter 4 Mail Integration Through the SMTP MIME MTA Changes in this Chapter Domino and AS 400 Mail Capabilities Overview AS 400 Mail Capabilities Lotus Domino as a Mail Server Combining the Mail Environments of Domino and OS 400 What Is the Domino for AS 400 SMTP MIME MTA Setting Up the OS 400 SMTP Server Install the TCP IP Utilities Licensed Product 5769 TC1 Verify or Complete the TCP IP Configuration for SMTP Start and Verify the OS 400 SMTP Server Change the Distribution Attributes Verify the QSNADS Subsystem Was Started Set Up a Domino for AS 400 Server with the SMTP MIME MTA Open and Save the MTA Configuration Documents at Least Once Restart the AnyMail Mail Server Framework Start the MTA on the Domino Server Sending Mail Between Unlike Mail Applications How Can We Reach You What Is Your Internet Mail Address Sending Mail Across the Border Using the MTA for Multiple Partitioned Servers Additional Information for Troubleshooting Where to Look if the MTA Does Not Start The SMTPMTA Is Already Running on This System Description of the SMTP MTA Tasks 4 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration 148 157 158 158 158 159 160 160 161 162 162 167 170 170 171 173 179 180 182 184 189 199 200 200 202 202 Accessing Log Information Common Problems Server Document Shows Feature not install
170. Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F18 Display location details E 9 Add name for SMTP F20 Snecifv user defined fields Figure 215 Add Directory Entry Second Display 372 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration To view the parameters in the third display as shown in Figure 216 use the Page Down key a Add Directory Entry N Type choices press Enter Indirect user N Y Yes N No For choice Y Yes Print private mail N Y Yes N No Print cover page T Y Yes N No Mail notification 4 1 Specific types of mail 2 All mail 3 No mail For choice 1 Specific types of mail Priority private important mail EA Y Yes N No Messages T Y Yes N No Text More F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F18 Display location details er 9 Add name for SMTP F20N Snecifv user defined fields j Figure 216 Add Directory Entry Third Display To view the parameters in the fourth display as shown in Figure 217 use the Page Down key Type choices press Enter N 1 User index 2 System message store 4 Lotus Domino 9 Other mail service Jo Mail service level For choice 9 Other mail service Field name F4 for list Preferred address 9 1 User ID Address 2 0 R name 3 SMTP name 9 Other preferred address Address type FAXDESTA F4 for list For choice 9 Other preferred address Field name OFAXDEST OFAX F4 for list More F3 Exit F4 Prompt F
171. F Recovery Resend the SMTP distribution Technical description If a service call is required the following information should be forwarded location ID 1141 S J Figure 91 Message TCP9676 in Job QMSF The workaround for this problem is to use the Change Distribution Attributes CHGDSTA command and specify to keep all recipients addresses Type the following command in any AS 400 command line on each AS 400 system in your network where Office Vision 400 is used to send notes to Domino users CHGDSTA KEEPRCP ALL Note Independent of this problem it is always recommended to set the KEEPRCP parameter to ALL After the error TCP9676 appeared for the first time it will always appear again because one ore more corrupted messages remain in the queue You can recover from this situation by clearing the MSF buffers At a time with low or no mail traffic key the following commands in any AS 400 command line ENDSBS QSNADS ENDTCPSVR SMTP ENDMSF STRMSF MSGOPT CLEAR STRTCPSVR SMTP STRSBS QSNADS The option MSGOPT CLEAR deletes all messages in the MSF queues Ending the QSNADS subsystem and the SMTP server before resetting MSF ensures you do not loose any other mail in transition Note The workaround shown here only solves the problem when sending notes option 4 of the OfficeVision menu if you send OfficeVision 400 messages option 3 you currently cannot use a mixed addressee list 202 Lotus D
172. Figure 224 Add Name for SMTP Appendix A Using Facsimile Support for AS 400 381 SMTP User ID Enter the name for the SMTP user ID for the system distribution directory entry that you are creating SMTP Domain Enter the correct information that pertains to your system For more information about the SMTP domain see the TCP IP Configuration and Reference book SC41 5420 Additional information is available via the AS 400 Online Library at http as400bks rochester ibm com Press Enter to add the system distribution directory entry You may need to press Enter more than once to complete the process Now that the system distribution directory entry has been created you can customize your Facsimile Support for AS 400 to route faxes by tone Transmitting Subscriber Identifier TSI or both Routing Using Received Tones To route using tone you need to configure the Facsimile Support for AS 400 Enhanced Services Create a routing entry for each tone value that you want routed You can do this by modifying the Fax Profiles that you created earlier or by creating new Fax Profiles For example we modify the existing PRENNEDY Fax Profile To do so type GO FAX at the command line The Facsimile Support for AS 400 Main Menu appears Select option 2 Fax Profiles and press Enter The Fax Profiles menu appears as shown in Figure 225 ANERE Fax Profiles N System SYSTEMA Select one of the following 1 Work with Fax Profil
173. Help pull down Chapter 5 Directory Synchronization 215 3 In the Directory Synchronization Configuration Main Menu as shown in Figure 92 on page 219 click Configurations To create a new configuration or change an existing one click the New Configuration button You will see the initially empty Configurations By Status view which shows all configuration documents defining directory synchronization as shown in Figure 97 You might want to change the size of the left pane navigator pane if you cannot completely see the navigator E Status Domino Server Address With Mappings Return to Main Menu aA Logging Entries li E View Address Book S HomeTerm ee Figure 97 Initial Look of Directory Sync Configuration View 5 Specify the file name of the Domino address book to be synchronized as shown in Figure 98 For example if you created a test address book named TESTS YNC NSF specify that name If you created the test address book in a subfolder make sure to specify the full path for example WBL TESTS YNC NSF 216 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Note The name of the address must have 8 characters or less followed by the characters NSF f _ New Directory Synchronization Configuration Lotus Notes Domino for AS 400 Directory Synchronization Figure 98 New Configuration for Directory Synchronization 6 Choose the Synchronization Type
174. IRST Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 61 Tip For more information on any of the parameters enter the command CFGDOMSVR in any AS 400 command line and press the F4 Prompt key Then place the cursor on any one of the parameters and press the F1 Help key To see all possible parameters independently on what was entered for the OPTION parameter press the F9 All parameters key Tip Press Enter and fill in the additional parameters as shown in Figure 11 a Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR N Type choices press Enter Server name gt acmeds1 Option 2 gt FIRST FIRST ADD REMOVE Data directory notes data Organization e gas Pe S Pe 3 Acme Administrator Last name gt Blankertz First name gt Wilfried Middle initial oe Character value Password Seat 2x sy ca carp fe Minimum password length 8 0 31 More F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display Cone keys e Figure 11 CFGDOMSVR for a First Server 2 Prompt Keyword Description DTADIR Data Directory Specifies the path to the Integrated File System directory where you want the Domino data files to reside If the specified directory does not exist it is automatically created Note that you cannot specify any drive letter such as C here as you would on other platforms The hierarchy o
175. In most cases in your new environment you will want documentation and configuration files specific to Domino for AS 400 In other cases you may want to carry over some of the original files For example if database templates have been customized you will wish to copy those as well The issue of templates in general is particularly important if your applications are based on design templates from an earlier release of Domino If any of your databases automatically inherit the design from the templates you should either copy the original templates along with the databases or turn off the automatic inheritance Otherwise a Domino 4 6 x template with the same name may render design changes that may potentially cause problems for client workstations running an earlier release of Lotus Notes Do Not Migrate Full Text Indexes For each Domino database set up for full text indexing the data directory also contains up to nine subdirectories with files for the indexes each of those containing several files Although you will want the indexes in the new environment it may take less time to recreate the indexes after copying the databases than to copy the full text index files This is especially true if you use FTP to transfer the database Since the content of each subdirectory has to be created and copied individually not copying the full indexes may substantially reduce the number of manual steps to be performed Directories containing full text in
176. Internet Subnet Line Line Opt Address Mask Description Type 1 10 1 2 3 ai u FA A PE 299270040 LOOPBACK NONE Bottom F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Print list Fll Display interface status F12 Cancel F17 Top F18 Bottom e Figure 2 Work with TCP IP Interfaces 4 To add a TCP IP interface type the number 1 Add in the Option Opt field and the Internet address to be used in the field titled Internet Address as shown in Figure 2 and press Enter The Add TCP IP Interface ADDTCPIFC Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 43 command will be launched for you and you will see the prompt as shown in Figure 3 A Add TCP IP Interface ADDTCPIFC N Type choices press Enter Internet address gt 10 1 2 3 Line description TRNLINE Name LOOPBACK Subnet mask e sae eo es Ge te G 255 255 255 0 Associated local interface NONE Type of service NORMAL MINDELAY MAXTHRPUT Maximum transmission unit LIND 576 16388 LIND AULOSTAEBE gt sia s w le Se See te YES YES NO PVC logical channel identifier Ea 001 FFF for more values X 25 idle circuit timeout s 60 1 600 X 25 maximum virtual circuits 64 0 64 X 25 DDN interface NO YES NO TRLAN bit sequencing MSB MSB LSB Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys DS Figure 3 Add TCP IP Interface ADDTCPIFC 5 Enter the na
177. MSVR Last Entries 10 In the case of an unsuccessful configuration search for suspicious error messages place the cursor on the message and press F1 to see more information 70 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Work with Domino Servers To find out about the status and to manage your Domino for AS 400 servers a new command was introduced with Domino for AS 400 4 6 2 The Work with Domino Servers WRKDOMSVR command Type the following command in any AS 400 command line WRKDOMSVR You will see the Work with Domino Servers list panel like the one shown in Figure 19 This command is basically the starting point to reach all AS 400 CL commands necessary to manage all Domino for AS 400 servers on your AS 400 system without actually having to type the name and it also shows you some important information at a glance e The name s of the subsystem s on your AS 400 system used to run a Domino server e The server name related to each subsystem e The current status ended or started of each server Note that you see only one server in Figure 19 this is because only one server is configured so far If you configure more than one logical server that is partitioned servers refer to Configuring Partitioned Domino for AS 400 Servers on page 90 you will see up to nine servers Press the page down PgDn key to see more es Bie Renee Work with Domino Servers PN System S
178. N command on the AS 400 system to install the software Then you can use the Display Software Resources DSPSFWRSC command to verify which parts of the software are installed Using the Load and Run LODRUN Command The Load and Run LODRUN command is used to start the installation program for Domino for AS 400 directly from the Lotus CD ROM To load the software onto your AS 400 system perform the following steps 1 Sign on to the AS 400 system with a user profile that has at least the special authorities ALLOBJ and SECADM For LODRUN the special authorities ALLOBJ access to all AS 400 objects and SECADM security administration are sufficient However later for configuring the server you will need JOBCTL job control and IOSYSCFG device and communications configuration special authorities as well You assign special authorities to an AS 400 user profile when you create it using the Create User Profile CRTUSRPRF command or when you change it using the Change User Profile CHGUSRPRF command The AS 400 security officer has the required authorities If you are not the security officer 50 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration use the Display User Profile DSPUSRPRF command to determine if your user profile has the required authorities e Enter the AS 400 command DSPUSRPRF user id where user id is your user ID the name of your user profile e Press PgDn to display the
179. O NETWORK1 YES NONE NONE NONE BLANK YES YES NO YES NO NO YES NO NONE NONE HTTP NONE NNTP NONE ALL IMAP LDAP NONE ALL PARTITION notes data cert id More F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display Figure 208 Configure Transplanted Domino Server Prompt 2 348 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR Type choices press Enter Administrator ID notes data admin id Server ID s lt 2 en os fa ve Zen ce Zor A Ze notes data server id Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys Figure 209 Configure Transplanted Domino Server Prompt 3 For more information on configuring a Domino server see Using the Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR Command in Chapter 2 on page 61 Start the TCP IP Interface and the Domino for AS 400 Server You have migrated your files and have configured a Domino for AS 400 server with the same identity as the original server To start the AS 400 TCP IP interface use the Configure TCP IP CFGTCP command to display a menu Option 1 allows you to work with TCP IP interfaces and option 9 from the resulting display allows you to start the appropriate interface To start the Domino for AS 400 server use the Start Domino Server STRDOMSVR command the start option from the Work With Domino S
180. OS 400 intercepts the ODBC request and processes it by making direct calls to DB2 400 No ODBC driver or middleware communications layer is necessary This provides the benefits of a shorter path length for optimum performance It also eliminates the cost and work associated with installing configuring and managing an ODBC driver unless you have client based Domino applications or others that use ODBC functions directly Where to Find Information about Domino Application Development Several sources exist to provide information about Domino application development topics Printed Manuals Lotus Notes Designer for Domino 4 6 Programmer s Guide Part 1 describes scripts and formulas using LotusScript including LS DO Part 2 describes all functions including the DB functions Online databases Lotus Notes C API Lotus Notes C API Lotus Notes Designer for Domino 4 6 Java Programmer s Guide Lotus LSX Toolkit LotusScript Data Object LS DO Information on the Internet There is also information available from the Lotus User Assistance Web site at http www2 lotus com services notesua nsf AS 400 information is available from the AS 400 Online Library Web site at http as400bks rochester ibm com Chapter 1 Overview of Lotus Domino for AS 400 23 Packaging of Domino for AS 400 Currently Domino for AS 400 is shipped by Lotus on a separate CD from other Domino platforms In future Domino releases it may be packaged o
181. P 1 EDITIMP2 Microsoftword RTF O IRTF DOC RTF 2 OK Cancel Help cma Heo Figure 140 Initialization File Click the Edit button to change the NOTES INI file If you do not see the Edit button you cannot change the file Caution Changing the NOTES INI file is recommended only for experienced administrators Changes to the NOTES INI file can introduce errors into the file and impair the operation of the Domino server Make sure you want to change the file before continuing 264 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Tip When you click the Edit button the Windows WordPad application will be called If you receive an error message instead WordPad may not be installed on your workstation Launching the Notes Administrative Client To launch the Notes administrative client do one of the following e Right click the server icon and select Server Administration e Click once with the left mouse button and then click this button The Notes client on your workstation will be called and you will see the server administration dialog box Figure 141 Server Administration Registering a Notes User Based on an AS 400 User Profile Operations Navigator allows you to manage all components of the AS 400 system This includes creating changing grouping and deleting AS 400 users that is user profiles Chapter 6 The Graphical User Interface of Operations Navigator 265 The Oper
182. P 1995 1998 Io Figure 241 Send Document User ID Enter the name of the system distribution directory entry that you created earlier In our example the user ID is PRENNEDY Appendix A Using Facsimile Support for AS 400 391 Address Enter the name of the Address In our example this is SYSASD2V Press Enter to create the routing entry The entry is then created and you can return to the Work with Routing Entries display You can either add more routing entries or press F12 to return to the Work With TSI Routing display Now when a fax is received from 5079871234 it is filed as a document in a folder That document is then mailed to the Lotus Notes user PRENNEDY Note For this to happen you need to configure the Configure Fax Services CFGFAXSRV command and set the Start Fax Routing parameter to YES Refer to the Facsimile Support for AS 400 Programmer s Guide and Reference for more information about the CFGFAXSRV command Also make sure to start Facsimile Support and Enhanced Services with the STRFAXSPT command File to TIFF Class F for Viewing in Lotus Notes If you file a fax using the shipped V4R2 Facsimile Support for AS 400 File Fax FILFAX command and then route the document to a Lotus Notes user via Domino for AS 400 using the Send Document SNDDOC or Send Distribution SNDDST command the fax is shown as an attachment in Lotus Notes Presently the only way to view a fax that is routed this way is
183. PMTA inbound transport tell SMTPMTA start inbound transport from the Domino console This change will allow MSF to process data for Domino and the inbound session handlers ISESHLR will no longer fail trying to process mail from Office Vision 400 running on the same AS 400 system as Domino is running on No Host Names in Domino Mail Log for MTA Entries This is not an error Because Domino for AS 400 uses the SMTP support of OS 400 for sending and receiving messages the SMTP MTA does not have access to host names As a result the SMTP log entries have blank host names Chapter 4 Mail Integration Through the SMTP MIME MTA 199 Percent Sign in the User Part of the SMTP Address Normally when a percent sign is used in an SMTP user address sent to an AS 400 the is used to indicate that the string to the right of the is an SMTP route and is treated this way by the OS 400 SMTP support Domino uses the character to optionally indicate to a Domino server domain path in SMTP to return addresses it generates when sending SMTP MIME mail from Domino using the Domino SMTP MTA A PTF was developed so that the OS 400 SMTP function can support the use of in SMTP addresses in Domino To allow to be used in SMTP addresses and not have these addresses handled as an indicator of an SMTP route load and apply the PTFs listed below If you wish to take advantage of this change follow the instructions below After applying these
184. Public Address Book PAB Tip Be careful with the End TCP IP Server ENDTCPSVR command the default is to end all TCP IP server applications Therefore do not press the Enter key after keying ENDTCPSVR either press the F4 key or key in SMTP 200 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Note This will not work when the data area QUSRNOTES DOMINOSMTP is created The implication is that if is used in OV 400 SMTP alias addresses then it cannot be used in Domino users addresses on the same AS 400 system Again this is caused by a problem in the Domino Mail Server Framework snap in The PTFs that fix this in V4R2 are for 5769TC1 PTF SF47371 and PTF SF47805 and for 5769SS 1 PTF SF47375 Problems With Sending Large Messages or Large Attachments When sending mail the AS 400 SMTP MIME support breaks up messages that are above 126KB Unfortunately some mail clients do not follow the SMTP MIME recommendations for allowing to reassemble split messages This would result in a problem situation that small messages can be sent to a particular mail server while bigger ones cannot You have two options available to avoid problems with these types of clients e To change maximum message size to be sent without splitting use the Change POP Server Attributes CHGPOPA command as follows CHGPOPA MSGSPLIT 2048 e If you want to totally disable the message split function you may use t
185. R command with the option REMOVE Note The entire data directory is deleted when you delete a Domino server See also Chapter 2 for information on removing a Domino server Starting and Stopping Domino Servers After creating a Domino server through the graphical user interface of Operations Navigator you can use also start or stop the server with the same interface After you click the Domino icon in the left pane you see all your servers in the right pane of the Operations Navigator window To the right of each icon you can see the status of the server The following table shows the possible states Chapter 6 The Graphical User Interface of Operations Navigator 261 Status Meaning Stopped All server tasks are stopped The server is not active Start submitted The request to start the server tasks was submitted Starting The primary server tasks are beginning Started The server is running Started and active The server is running and can be accessed from a workstation If only the icons and names of each server appear but not any status you may have selected the wrong view large icons small icons or list To switch to the Details view do one of the following e Click the toolbar icon showing a small table e Choose View Details from the menu bar You may start or stop a server using one of the following methods e Right click the icon and then select Start Stop or Stop Immediately from the pul
186. RG Network name 3 NETWORK1 Country ID e lt 6 cs a ee BLANK Log replication events YES YES NO Log client session events FYES YES NO Replace configuration NO YES NO Web browsers NONE NONE HTTP News readers era eae NONE NONE NNTP Internet mail packages NONE NONE ALL IMAP LDAP for more values Advanced services se e k e gt PARTITION NONE ALL PARTITION Certifier ID notes data cert id More F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More kevs z Figure 54 Reconfigure First Server 3 Prompt When you reconfigure a Domino server and specify RPLCFG NO if all the ID files are provided and the PAB already exists then the information in the PAB and ID files will not be changed This means that the Administrator s names time zone and similar information in PAB and IDs remain the same as before However you do need to enter the administrator s password to authenticate the cert id and user id during reconfiguration Va Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR Type choices press Enter Administrator ID Server ID notes data user id notes data server id Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F13 How to use this display C F24 More keys F5 Refresh F12 Cancel Figure 55 Reconfigure First Server 4 Prompt Installing a New Version of Lotus Domino for AS 400 Before installing a new release of Domino for AS 400 mak
187. S 400e series System Builder SG24 2155 02 or a later edition o Getting Your AS 400 Working for You SC41 5161 e TCP IP Configuration and Reference SC41 5420 e Communications Configuration SC41 5401 e AS 400 Client Access for Windows 95 NT Setup V4R2 SC41 3512 04 Changes in this Chapter The following changes and additions have been made for the second edition of this redpaper On page 298 Configuring the Remote PC Workstation for PPP Dial in contains more complete examples on how to set up a Windows 95 workstation to connect to a Lotus Domino for AS 400 server through a dial up connection On page 324 Server to Server Dial Connections with Remote LAN Service explains how to set up the Lotus Domino for AS 400 server to initiate the dialing process to connect to another server for replication or mail routing using OS 400 Version 4 Release 2 or later 273 Many minor corrections have been made in this chapter therefore the changes are not marked Protocols for Lotus Domino for AS 400 Switched Line Support There are two common scenarios with client dial up e LAN based connections and e Host based connections In the LAN based scenario a Notes workstation connects to an access point on a remote LAN and thereby gains access to IP resources on that remote LAN This scenario allows a Notes workstation to have access to multiple IP based Domino servers and hosts through a single connection In the host based e
188. SC41 0656 00 e Use the Add Fax Card ADDFAXCRD command to separately declare each telephone line that is attached to the fax controller Depending on whether you have an external fax controller or an internal fax controller you need to provide information relating to that specific controller e For external fax controllers Provide information that defines each fax controller and fax card that is located in the controller See Chapter 3 Installing and Configuring the Facsimile Support for AS 400 Product on the External Fax Controller in the Facsimile Support for AS 400 Installation Guide SC41 0654 00 for instructions e For internal fax controllers Provide information that defines the controller and ports that are associated with the controller This includes the 7852 400 modem See Configuring the Facsimile Support for AS 400 Product in the Facsimile Support for AS 400 Installation Guide SC41 0654 00 3 Install the necessary hardware and software Refer to the publications listed below for installation options e To use the 7852 400 modem see Installing the 7852 400 Modem on page 3 through 28 of the Facsimile Support for AS 400 Installation Guide SC41 0654 00 e To use an external fax controller see Chapter 3 Installing and Configuring the Facsimile Support for AS 400 Product on External Fax Controller in the Facsimile Support AS 400 Installation Guide SC41 0654 00 4 Use the Create Fax Profi
189. SHLRn tasks will only appear when mail is being sent or received a Work with Domino Console gt Previous subcommands and messages Transactions 140 Shared mail Not enabled Pending mail 0 Dead mail 0 Task Description Database Server Perform console commands Database Server Listen for connect requests on TCPIP Database Server Server for Wilfried Blankertz Rochester IBM on TCPIP Database Server Idle task Database Server Idle task SMTPMTA drt Idle SMTPMTA isesctl Idle SMTPMTA imsgcnv Idle SMTPMTA osesctl Idle Enter a Domino subcommand gt F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Print F9 Retrieve h Eiio F18 Bottom F21 Command line J Figure 77 Show the MTA Tasks on the Domino Server The easiest way is probably using the Work with Domino Servers WRKDOMSVR command Key the following command in any AS 400 command line and press Enter WRKDOMSVR You will see a list of all servers defined at your system Enter a 9 Work Domino jobs next to the server having the MTA installed and press Enter You will see a panel like the one shown in Figure 78 When the AS 400 SMTP MIME MTA is operational the following tasks must all be active e DRT e ISESCTL e IMSGCNV e OSESCTL e OMSGCNV e SMTPMTA 174 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration m Work with Active Jobs SYSTEMO1L 05 31 98 13 08 51 CPU Ss Lo 7 Elapsed time 00 00 08 Active jobs r91 Type options press Enter 2 Chang
190. SI code press Enter You return to the Work with TSI Routing display as shown in Figure 235 ye Work with TSI Routing N Position to Type option press Enter l1 Work with entries 2 Edit TSI Code Opt Destination Name TSI Code LABAMA A amp M LABAMA BIRMINGHAM LABAMA HUNTSVILLE LABAMA STATE LASKA ANCHORAGE LASKA FAIRBANKS LBANY 5079871234 LBANY PHARMACY LBANY STATE LBERTSON ALBERTUS MAGNUS A A A A A A A A A A More F3 Exit F5 Refresh F10 Display Messages F1ll View 2 Fiz Cancel yA Figure 235 Work with TSI Routing Now that the TSI code is updated you can create your routing entries Select option 1 Work with Routing Entries and press Enter The Work with Routing Entries display appears as shown in Figure 236 388 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration work with Routing Entries N Destination ALBANY Identifier Entry GREAT DANES DEFAULT TSI code 5079871234 Type option press Enter 2 Edit entry 4 Remove entry Opt Routing Type Description TSI FILED File received fax as GENERATE in RCVFAX TSI SNDDOC Send fax as document to PKENNEDY SYSASD2V Bottom F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Create F12 Cancel C COPYRIGHT TBM CORP 1995 1998 A Figure 236 Work with Routing Entries Press F6 to create a routing entry The Work with Routing Entries display appears as shown in Figure 237 work
191. SMTP address is called Internet mail address We prefer to call it SMTP address because it is not only used to exchange mail via the Internet 10 The term SMTP domain is not at all related to a Notes or Domino domain nor is it the same as the TCP IP domain although the TCP IP domain can be a part of the SMTP domain name Chapter 4 Mail Integration Through the SMTP MIME MTA 177 Hans_Neugebauer system01 domland acme com Neugebauer system01 domland acme com Hans system01 domland acme com hneugeba system01 domland acme com i ct so es Hans_Neugebauer Acme system01 domland acme com However if tomorrow a new employee with Hans as his first name were added to the Public Address Book any incoming mail using the address given in line 3 would be returned as non deliverable Now if all those addresses listed above will be accepted why is there a parameter the field Local part formed from see Figure 71 on page 174 in the Global Domain Document to specify which part of the name is to be used The answer is this configuration parameter defines what will be shown in the return address of any note sent by this user This allows you not to enforce but to encourage people sending mail to the Notes users to use a certain form of address The default for parameter Local part formed from after configuring the MTA on Domino for AS 400 is the common name which is the first and last name separated by an underscore _ sign that is lis
192. Solaris 2 5 1 e Microsoft Windows 95 or Microsoft Windows NT 4 0 Earlier versions of Lotus Notes clients can also connect to the Domino for AS 400 server However some Domino administration functions may require the Notes 4 6 client Those parts of AS 400 Client Access mentioned here are all free of charge If you plan to use other Client Access functions such as 5250 emulation which is not free you also have to order AS 400 Client Access Family for Windows 5769 XW1 Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 39 Client for Notes Administrator Workstation You should install at least one Notes client workstation in your organization to administer a Domino server on an AS 400 system This Notes client should have the following e An operating system supported by the Lotus Notes Release 4 client e TCP IP installed and configured e Lotus Notes 4 1 client or later however to make sure all administration functions are supported it is recommended that you use the same Notes Release as the Domino server that is for Domino Release 4 6b a Notes client 4 6 should be used Make sure that you install the full administration functions For Lotus Notes 4 6 the Notes Designer for Domino license needs to be selected during installation See the Installing the Administrator s Workstation section on page 88 Note A Lotus Notes Designer client is now shipped with Domino for AS 400 To use the AS 400 Operations Navigato
193. Sync database to allow deletions Alternate Mapping There may exist one or more field mapping documents for the same target field When more than one field mapping exists for the same target field this is referred to as an alternate mapping Additional field mapping for the same target field is used to provide a backup mapping to a field if the first mapping does not provide a value Directory synchronization function processes the mappings in the order listed and uses the first mapping that produces a value 24 Back in the view called Field mappings AS 400 to Domino Figure 102 on page 231 click the Return button to return to the form called AS 400 to Domino Directory Synchronization Configuration as shown in Figure 100 on page 230 25 By clicking one of the two radio buttons you can choose whether you want to do one of the following e Synchronize all users not recommended e Define criteria for synchronizing specific users recommended 26 Click the Next button If you choose to synchronize all entries not recommended continue with step 32 on page 235 222 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration 27 If you choose to define criteria for synchronizing AS 400 users the following form appears Domino for AS 400 Directory Synchronization Figure 107 Selection Criteria for Synchronizing AS 400 Users to Domino Note that the form shown in Figure 107 only appears if you select
194. T CONFIG command from the Domino console For more details about the SET CONFIG command refer to the manual Installing and Managing Domino for AS 400 under the topic Starting the SMTP MIME MTA and the section titled Automatically as an add in server task Using Domino on the Integrated PC Server After Migrating After you migrated the SMTP MIME MTA from the Integrated PC Server you may still continue to use the Domino server on the Integrated PC Server This would be true for example if you migrated only selected applications including the MTA to Domino for AS 400 If this the case you also need to make sure the MTA will no longer be started on the Integrated PC Server To do so rename the file ISMTPMTA EXE in the k notes directory for Domino on the Integrated PC Server Renaming this file will disable the SMTP MIME MTA for Domino on the Integrated PC Server so that the Start Network Server STRNWSAPP command will no longer load it Additional Considerations When Migrating from Integrated PC Server There are some unique and additional considerations when migrating from the Domino implementation on an Integrated PC Server OS 400 Integration of Lotus Notes One reason is that special installation procedures are required for this Domino implementation due to the fact that an Integrated PC Server does not have a direct workstation interface to its operating system The other is that the Integrated PC Serve
195. TA work path Log level Enable daily housekeeping Perform daily housekeeping at Transport Configuration Host name mapping Retry limit Retry interval Transfer mode Outbound Configuration Number of processes Maximum outbound msg size 20 seconds F J Normal a T Enable a 01 00 AM a j Dynamic then local am TF 15 minutes 7 bit mode i j Used By This MTA Pia oz Specify preferences for the languages character sets header encoding methods and encoding methoi Figure 75 Internet Message Transfer Agent SMTP MTA Section The field Global domain name contains the nnme MTAGLOBAL thus linking to the global domain document The Fully qualified Internet host name is set based on the AS 400 domain name on the local host and domain as defined with option 12 of the Configure TCP IP CFGTCP menu Chapter 4 Mail Integration Through the SMTP MIME MTA 171 Language Dependent Character Set Conversions If the Notes clients are using a character set different from US ASCII you should modify the field Language parameters in the Internet Message Transfer Agent SMTP MTA section of the server document Depending on the language enter the following value into the Language parameters field LT for the Latin ISO 8859 1 through ISO 8859 9 this includes the character sets for the following languages e Western Europe e Central Europe e Baltic Rim e Cyrillic e Greek e Hebr
196. Text 3a DOMINO1 IPCS with Lotus Domino NTJAREK BACK Office Workshop residency TEST NTSIPCS Domino Intro Hands On Lab Bottom Parameters or command gt F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F17 Position to F23 More options F24 More keys C COPYRIGHT IBM CORP 1980 1998 Figure 202 Work with Network Server Descriptions 2 Find the Network Server name that matches your Integrated PC Server In our example it is DOMINO1 Tab down to the corresponding field under the Opt column and type a 3 to Copy the description Press Enter and the Create Network Server Description CRTNWSD prompt as shown in Figure 203 appears Create Network Server Desc CRINWSD Type choices press Enter Network server description LPCSL Name Resource name z CCO7 Name Network server type BASE Character value Online at IPL NO YES NO Vary on wait NOWAIT NOWAIT 1 15 minutes Language version 2924 PRIMARY 2963 2966 2980 Country code 1 LNGVER 001 002 031 033 Code page 850 FLNGVER 4377 8507 652 857 QNTBIBM Name QNTBIBM JOBLOG Name JOBLOG NONE NetBIOS description Server message queue fd Library ee ee ee Name LIBL CURLIB Configuration file NONE Name NONE Library Ne aaa ee a ae a Name LIBL CURLIB Start NetBIOS d al 2 6 ms ws YES YES NO Start TORI ae ae ae ee ae YES NO YES VVVVVVV VV More F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this displa
197. Up Domino for AS 400 75 Ending the Domino Subsystem With early releases of the product the DOMINOxx subsystem was also ended after all servers tasks terminated This behavior changed with the first QMU and later releases of Lotus Domino for AS 400 Caution Do not end the Domino subsystem using the End Subsystem ENDSBS while the server is still active This may cause the server to restart immediately after the End Domino Server ENDDOMSVR command has been executed Identify the AS 400 Jobs for Your Server The completion message shown in Figure 24 is no guarantee that the server jobs have actually been started For example if the AS 400 system has been set to restricted mode using the ENDSYS or ENDSBS ALL commands you may be able to successfully run the STRDOMSVR command and the necessary jobs have been submitted to a job queue but they will not start until the system has been started again either by performing an IPL or by starting the controlling subsystem again If you have Domino 4 62 or higher installed the fastest way to find out if the server jobs are actually running is to use the Work with Domino Servers WRKDOMSVR command and press the F5 Refresh key until the status shows STARTED Then type option 9 Work Domino jobs into the input field in the line showing the name of your server and press Enter C CPU Work with Active Jobs SYSTEMO1 N 07 05 98 11 48 10 3 Elapsed time 00 00 29 Active j
198. Windows NT Changes in this Chapter This chapter is completely new and not part of the published version of the redbook S G24 5181 00 Migration to the new database architecture of Lotus Domino 5 0 is beyond the scope of this book Please refer to product documentation 327 Additional modifications On page 345 The sequence of steps 4 and 6 within the migration process has been changed so that the step to copy the files from the existing Integrated PC Server to the new data directory for Lotus Domino for AS 400 described in detail on page 352 precedes now the task to create a new network server description General Approaches to Domino Server Migration Two possible approaches to meet the objective of migrating a Domino server are server transplantation and server consolidation The experience on which these guidelines are based comes from the IBM Rochester Information Services migration see Appendix B business partner experience migration services engagements and laboratory testing in the ITSO Server transplantation means moving a Domino server from one platform to another while keeping the same Domino identity and IP address The Domino identity includes the server s full hierarchical name and encryption keys as stored in its ID file The primary advantage of this method is that nothing is changed within the Domino configurations and no modifications are required to the Notes clients accessing the server A disadva
199. YSTEMA Type options press Enter 1 Start Domino server 5 Display Domino console 6 End Domino server 8 Work Domino console 9 Work Domino jobs 11 Change current directory 12 Work object links Domino Domino Opt Subsystem Server Status DOMINOO1 AcmeDS1 ENDED Parameters or command gt F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F9 Retrieve F1ll Display path F17 Top F18 Bottom F24 More keys J Figure 19 Work with Domino Servers Display Status After pressing the F11 key you also get information on the name of the data directory path for each server as shown in Figure 20 Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 71 Aa Work with Domino Servers N System SYSTEMA Type options press Enter 1 Start Domino server 5 Display Domino console 6 End Domino server 8 Work Domino console 9 Work Domino jobs 11 Change current directory 12 Work object links Domino Opt Subsystem Server Path DOMINOO1 AcmeDS1 Notes data Parameters or command gt F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F9 Retrieve Fll Display status C F12 Cancel F17 Top F18 Bottom F24 More keys J Figure 20 Work with Domino Servers Display Path As the name Work with implies this command is not only very valuable to display information about servers but it can also be used to perform certain actions upon each server These actions are as follows e Option 1 Start the Domino server e Option 5 Display the Domino console e Option 6 End the
200. _ ACCOUNTS FAX AS DSCHROED SYSASD2V sa FAXDLE FAX FAXGCS FAX FAXMLE FAX ae FAXMLE2 FAX _ FAXTELN FAX HOCKEY FAX a IZZY SYSASD2V AS KLUCK SYSASD2V a KPS SYSASD2V F3 Exit F5 Refresh F9 Work with nicknames 5 Display details 6 Print details 9 Add another description More F1l Sort by description F17 Position to F24 More keys s P Figure 213 Work with Directory Entries 370 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Select option 1 Add on the Work With Directory Entries display and press the Enter key The Add Directory Entry display appears as shown in Figure 214 F Type choices press Enter User ID Address ACCTS FAX Description 2 s 4 Scott Jones at ABC Accounts Receivable System name Group FAX F4 for list User profile F4 for list Network user ID Name Last First Middle Preferred Full Department F4 for list Job title Company F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F18 Display location details B Q nAAA nama Fan GTF A Add Directory Entry N More DTIN Cnani fer nanr Adafinad Finalda Figure 214 Add Directory Entry Complete the fields on the Add Directory Entry display as they are described in the remainder of this section All of the fields for the Add Directory Entry displays are shown Specify only the required fields as they are described
201. a Aaa g Users Not in a Group Nik Creates a new object based on the current selection Figure 142 Selecting AS 400 User Profile e To add an existing AS 400 user as a Domino user double click the user you want This brings up the user s properties You can also use the right mouse button and select Properties e To create a new AS 400 and Domino user at the same time right click All Users and then select New User e If the new user is similar to an existing user it may be easier to right click the existing user and then choose New Based On This brings up the User Properties box as in Figure 143 or the New User dialog box which allows you to define an AS 400 group as well as personal 266 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration security and job information When you are ready to register add the new user as a Domino server user and proceed to the next step 2 x User name EBENDER Description Test User for Wilfried Blankertz 3 5225 107 2 G107 Password Use same password M I User must change password at next logon r MV Enable user for processing AAA Groups Personal Security Jobs Networks Figure 143 AS 400 User Properties 4 Click the Networks button and the Networks dialog box appears Note The front page of the Networks dialog box showing the tab Notes is not the correct page to register a Notes user on the Domino for AS 400 server This p
202. a SLIP connection profile differs depending on whether you use an asynchronous line description or a PPP line description PPP line descriptions can only be used for certain communication adapter types as described in Prerequisites for Using PPP on an AS 400 System on page 288 The following sections describe the configuration for each line type SLIP with an Asynchronous Line Description These are the parameters that should be used for an asynchronous line that is attached to a modem CRTLINASC LIND ASCDOM RSRCNAME CMN0O1 CNN SWTPP LINESPEED 19200 SWTCNN DIAL AUTOANS NO AUTODIAL YES DIALCMD OTHER INACTTMR NOMAX MAXBUFFER 1500 Tip As an alternative to typing the entire command syntax you may type CRTLINASC on an AS 400 command line and press F4 to request parameter prompting Then you may request help information by positioning the cursor on any parameter and pressing the F1 key In our example ASCDOM is the name of the line description to be created and CMNO1 is the resource name referring to a hardware resource on your AS 400 system The resource name can be identified by using the Work with Hardware Resources WRKHDWRSC command To set up the AS 400 SLIP configuration use the Work with Point to Point TCP IP WRKTCPPTP command to define a point to point connection profile of type answer Type the following command on any AS 400 command line WRKTCPPTP Press Enter and the display shown in Figure 175 appears
203. a local Distribution List database We found that by having the end users add these large databases to their desktops prior to the Monday morning peak load which always follows a migration we were able to balance the load on the new Domino server As explained earlier on Friday morning we flipped the switch to the new mail server by updating the Public Address Book documents for each migrated user Once this update was complete we sent out a second memo to the affected users including a button and some detailed instructions The button caused their location document in their personal address book to be updated and added an icon to their workspace for the new mail database The instructions explained how to manually replicate their new mail database with the old one in case they have been manipulating their old mail file after the Public Address Book changes were made and the final replication was performed Over the weekend we would send out a third and final note to our users It simply congratulated the users on making the move More importantly by sending this final note we were able to quickly identify if any users were experiencing mail routing problems It is important to note that the client workstation modifications are needed only with server consolidation moving the users to a server with a different identity In the case of server transplantation the migration for those users was completely transparent to them To keep these users
204. a maximum of ten key mappings to different fields However you can have additional mappings to any of those ten key fields Note There is no verification done on configured mappings For instance the user may specify a mapping from SDD field LSTNAM to NAB field LastName and a mapping from PAB field LastName to SDD field FSTNAM This may or may not be what the user intended Either way no verification is done to restrict the user from doing this Synchronize All AS 400 Users or Selected Users You can choose to synchronize all user entries or specific user entries that meet selection criteria Only user entries that satisfy the selection criteria are mapped during synchronization For example you may want to synchronize only users who have specific names or users who are in a particular department 214 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Directory Synchronization Configuration Steps Access to create or modify documents in this Directory Sync Configuration NNDIRS YC NSF database should be limited to Notes administrators only The Access Control List ACL of this database should be modified to reflect this restriction If you do not change the ACL the default access is manager The following sections contain a step by step description of the necessary tasks to configure directory synchronization 1 Open the directory synchronization configuration database on the Notes desktop W Select
205. abase integration and that for bulk data shadowing the supplemental product NotesPump may be appropriate for your environment Backup and Recovery The Integrated PC Server implementation of Domino offers granular backup and recovery utilizing the optional product Adstar Distributed Storage Manager ADSM With Domino for AS 400 Domino databases and files are stored as separate stream file objects in the Integrated File System IFS whereas the NWS storage space is a single object representing the entire virtual disk attached to the Integrated PC Server A key advantage of the IFS implementation of Domino for AS 400 is the ability to integrate Domino backup into your usual AS 400 backup procedures These could incorporate the appropriate Save Object SAV and Restore Object RST commands into your strategies for full or incremental backup and recovery For more details about Domino for AS 400 backup and recovery please refer to Chapter 3 on page 135 of this book Note For installations that have large amounts of data or require unattended backup the Backup and Recovery Management Services BRMS software and a tape library system provide a good solution Some considerations to think about in moving from the ADSM backup recovery method to native AS 400 IFS backup recovery tools include approaches for backup of active files and recovery at the document level Some Domino databases for example the Domino Directory formerly called P
206. ach entry is actually referring to USRDFNELD The two user defined fields SMTPAUSRID and SMTPDMN are used to store the SMTP address of the Notes user These fields exist only after converting the directory If you do not convert the SDD you cannot supply the SMTP address as part of the Add Directory Entry ADDDIRE command and have to use option 1 and F19 of the Work with Directory Entries WRKDIRE or the Work with Names for SMTP WRKNAMSMTP command instead The SMTP address must be unique otherwise you will receive an error message CPF89A4 MSFSRVLVL The value DOMINO for the mail service level indicates that mail sent to this address goes directly to the Domino SMTP MIME MTA via a plug in in the AnyMail mail server framework rather than sending it via the Internet or intranet PREFADR The preferred address of SMTP indicates that the SMTP address needs to be used to reach this user rather than the user ID address pair or the X 400 O R address for example Another consequence from this is You cannot write a CL program to associate an SMTP address with the SDD entries unless you convert the SDD Chapter 4 Mail Integration Through the SMTP MIME MTA 191 Instead of using the Add Directory Entry ADDDIRE command you can also use option 1 Add or option 2 Change of the Work with Directory Entries WRKDIRE command The displays are slightly different but the contents of the necessary parameters are the same a
207. ader should be included in the Domino server configuration A news reader enables the Domino server to send messages to and receive messages from Internet news groups It also enables Internet news readers to access the Domino server Example NNTP Default NONE Internet mail packages Specifies which if any Internet mail packages should be included in the Domino server configuration The mail packages enable the Domino server to send mail to and receive mail from the Internet Unless ALL or NONE is entered one or more keywords can be entered Possible Values ALL IMAP LDAP POP3 SMTPMTA Default NONE Advanced services Specifies which if any features of the Lotus Domino Advanced Services should be included in the Domino server configuration Unless ALL or NONE is entered one or more keywords can be entered If you plan to use clustering or billing for this server you need to select the appropriate key word If you plan to configure multiple logical partitioned servers you need to select PARTITIONfor all servers even if you only configure one at this time Possible Values ALL PARTITION BILLING CLUSTER Default NONE Certifier ID Specifies whether the certifier ID file by the name of CERT ID should be created GEN within the data directory as defined in parameter DTADIR or whether it already exists Example GEN Default GEN Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400
208. age allows you to register a Notes user on a server on the Integrated PC Server 5 Click the Domino Registration tab Ebender Networks 2 x Notes Remote Servers Domino Registration DOMSRY1 0ORG1 Retrieving status domino01 ITSO Org Unknown OlympicO1 AWorkflow01 Unknown d4srv00 0rg00 Unknown AcmeDS1 4CME Unknown AcmeDS8 OrgC Unknown Rch4SM021 ITSO_Test Unknown Rch amp Sm0241TSO_Test Unknown AcmeDS3 Org4 Unknown Retrieving status Add View A Server Administration Figure 144 Networks Dialog Chapter 6 The Graphical User Interface of Operations Navigator 267 The registration automatically searches each of the servers for the name of the user you selected based on the existing personal information The registrations display as they are found one per line In the list the server name appears on the left and the user s registration name appears on the right If you want to see registrations for the current user on a particular server immediately double click the server name Searching starts on that server Tip If you are not currently signed onto the server you will be prompted for your password The dialog box asking for your password may be hidden by other boxes On Windows 95 you may want to use the Alt Tab keys to switch between windows and enter the password 6 Select the server where you want to register the user Click the Add button and you will see the Domino User Regi
209. al entries as described above 360 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Differences in Default Port Names Default Domino port names are not the same between the Integrated PC Server implementation of Domino and Domino for AS 400 For example the default Domino port for the TCP IP protocol is called FSNOTES_TCPIP on the Integrated PC Server and TCPIP in Domino for AS 400 and other platforms If you use the server transplantation method of migration manual configuration changes to any existing connection documents in the Public Address Book will most likely be required As a result of the migration process described in this chapter the port FSNOTES_TCPIP will be enabled in the server document and possibly referenced in connection documents because the NAMES NSF was copied from the Integrated PC Server However the NOTES INI file of the Domino for AS 400 server will only define the port TCP IP This may result in a conflict There are three potential alternatives to resolve this situation listed below w Disable the Domino port called FSNOTES_TCPIP and modify your connection documents to use the port TCP IP instead w Assign unique network addresses to the two Domino ports You could either use unique IP addresses or a port mapping scenario in which the server acts as its own port mapper The technique would be comparable to the one used in setting up partitioned servers described in Chapter 2
210. ally instead See chapter 7 of the book OfficeVision for AS 400 Supplement SH21 0915 00 or the redbook New E mail Capabilities for AS 400 SG24 4703 for more information on Internet Addressing Storing Foreign SMTP Addressees in AS 400 System Distribution Directory The disadvantage of the first method using SDD entries for SMTP addressees is that end users normally do not have the authority to add directory entries to the SDD However if the administrator is able to create and provide maintenance for those entries this is the most flexible and most convenient method For SMTP addresses of Domino for AS 400 users Directory Synchronization can be used to create and maintain those entries 1 This is not restricted to users on Domino for AS 400 it also includes any users on other servers in the PAB or even a master address book covering multiple Notes domains 188 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration If you want to add a directory entry for an SMTP user you want to send mail to you do not need to create an AS 400 user profile to be associated with that entry unless the person would use the OS 400 POP3 server not the Domino POP3 server That is the entry can be a remote entry although it may sound strange that a Domino for AS 400 user on the same AS 400 system is added as a remote SDD entry Remote just means not a user of this AS 400 system s mail support Again we a
211. ame Domino domain as the source although that is not always the case Use the LAN port s Type the name of an existing Domino port that is used by the source server for TCP IP LAN connectivity If you have made no changes to Domino port configuration the default is TCPIP You can verify enabled port names by looking at the Network Configuration section of the server document for the source server in the Public Address Book 7 Inthe Remote LAN Service Information section click the down arrow next to Choose a Service Type and you will see the Remote LAN Services dialog box as shown in Figure 192 Remote LAN Services x Choose Remote PEE EN m Een Lan Service Microsoft Remote Ac vice moi Figure 192 Remote LAN Services Dialog Box 8 Make sure that Microsoft Remote Access Service is selected and click OK The Microsoft Remote Access Service dialog box as shown in Figure 193 appears e Cancel Login name Ss Phone number 9 111 2233 Figure 193 Microsoft Remote Access Service Window Chapter 7 Dial Up Connectivity 321 9 Fill in the appropriate information into the Microsoft Remote Access Service dialog box as described below Remote connection name Type the name of the DIAL PPP profile you created on the calling system In our example itis PPPDIAL Login name and password Leave these fields blank These parameters are ignored by the Domino for AS 400 remote LAN service implementation The
212. ame for the User ID as for the AS 400 user profile but this is not necessarily the case In many cases the Address is chosen to be same as the AS 400 system name The pair User ID Address can be thought of as the key for the user s entry in the System Distribution Directory SDD If the Office Vision 400 user wants to receive SMTP based mail which includes mail from users of Domino for AS 400 an address conforming to the SMTP standards must be used instead That is an SMTP alias is assigned to the user s SDD entry The same is true for a user of a POP3 client connecting to the OS 400 POP3 server However a POP3 user needs an SMTP address in any case while Office Vision users can send and receive among themselves without ever having an SMTP address assigned There are two ways to assign an SMTP alias to a directory entry e Automatically based on the user s User ID Address and the AS 400 system s local host name 2 To see the help text place the mouse pointer on the title of the field and click and hold the left mouse button However not all fields in the Public Address Book have field level Help text Chapter 4 Mail Integration Through the SMTP MIME MTA 179 e Manually using the Work with Names for SMTP WRKNAMSMTP command or the Work with Directory Entries WRKDIRE command Both methods are described in the following topics Default SMTP Address for OS 400 Based Mail Users An SMTP address will be automatically
213. and gt Work with Domino Console y 1352 kuk F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Print F9 Retrieve Rober F18 Bottom F21 Command line ef Figure 30 Show TCP IP Port Status on the Domino Console The response Local Address 1352 indicates that the Domino server is listening to all local IP interfaces on port 1352 the default for Notes clients If you see only the first two lines TCP IP Port Driver Transport Provider TCP it indicates that the Domino server is not able to connect to OS 400 TCP IP This can have many causes e TCP IP Support for OS 400 was not configured or not started The TCP IP interface is not active e Another application already listens to port 1352 e A partitioned Domino server was already started and is listening to all interfaces see Verify the Server Is Listening to Only One IP Address on page 96 for more information Press F3 to Exit the Domino console Do not type the Quit command unless you want to end the server session F3 just ends the Domino console but leaves the server running Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 81 Verify TCP IP Connectivity for Your Administration Client Once you know that the Domino for AS 400 server is listening to an AS 400 IP interface make sure that TCP IP on the administration client workstation is able to connect to that interface on your AS 400 system This can be done by performing the following steps 1
214. and accept incoming mail for e Is there a Domain Name System DNS in place to allow name servers to resolve host names to IP addresses e Are mail routers being used to forward SMTP mail to the destination host Your Mail Server s SMTP Domain Any SMTP mail address has the form username SMTPdomain The part on the left of the sign describes the user s name or better the user s mail box name and is defined by the mail application being used The SMTP domain name on the right side of the sign must be a valid host name for the receiving system that is it must be possible to resolve this name to an IP address assigned to a network interface at the receiving system In the case of OS 400 SMTP support this means it is not enough to define the AS 400 TCP IP host name and domain name you also have to make sure it appears either in a domain name system DNS or in the local hosts table What is a Domain Unfortunately the term domain is used multiple times with different meanings depending on the context Throughout this book and specially in this section make sure you understand exactly what domain we are talking about There are three different environments where we talk about a domain name e SMTP Domain This is the partial SMTP address on the right of the sign describing the IP host name of the computer where the SMTP user s mail application is running e TCP IP Domain This is the right part of the fully qualified
215. and is not designed to configure multiple servers at the same time Therefore do not perform this command in parallel from more than one AS 400 job If you do need to configure multiple servers for example while teaching a class with hands on exercises you may be successful by allowing multiple configurations up to the point when the message Press ENTER to end terminal session appears but only one person at a time should perform step 6 described above Verify the Configuration by Checking the AS 400 Job Log After a couple of seconds you will see the AS 400 command line again and a message indicating the server was successfully or not successfully configured will be shown on the bottom of the screen or above your command line if you use the Command Entry as shown in Figure 15 68 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration i Previous commands and messages gt gt gt i Command Entry SYSTEMA Request level 1 CFGDOMSVR SERVER AcmeDS1 OPTION FIRST Command prompting ended when user pressed F3 wrklnk notes data CFGDOMSVR SERVER AcmeDS1 OPTION FIRST DTADIR Notes AcmeDS1 ORG ACM E ADM Blankertz Wilfried N 6 TIMEZONE CST DAYSAVTIME NO ADVSRV PARTITION Command CFGDOMSVR ended successfully Bottom Type command press Enter gt F3 Exit F4 Prompt F9 Retrieve F10 Include detailed messages Fl1 nisntay ful F12 Cancel F13 Tnformation A
216. appears as shown in Figure 233 a Position to Type option press Enter 1 Work with entries 2 Edit Opt Destination Name AA ABC OFFICE FURNITURE CO ABC OFFICE FURNITURE CO ABILIENE CHRISTIAN ACE ACE2 ADAMS STATE ADELPHI ADRIAN AKRON ALABAMA F3 Exit F5 Refresh F10 Di F12 Cancel eo COPYRIGHT IBM CORP 1995 Work with TSI Routing TSI Code TSI Code FAX TEAM 123 955555 5071237890 5071234567 5071239876 splay Messages Fll View 2 T998 3 More ey Figure 233 Work with TSI Routing Edit the TSI Code for the Master List Entry from which you receive faxes In our example we edit the TSI code for the Master List Entry ALBANY by selecting option 2 Edit TSI code Select option 2 and press Enter The Edit TSI Code display appears as shown in Figure 234 Appendix A Using Facsimile Support for AS 400 387 oe TSI Code N Destination information Name a aw wee we we a a GA LUBANY Identifier GREAT DANES Entry 6 DEFAULT Contact Telephone ee Gee axae east shea as ce Fax number 57577 To change TSI Code change New TSI Code and press Enter Current TSI Code New TSI Code 5079871234 5079871234 Faery P12 Canrna J Figure 234 Edit TSI Code In our example we enter a TSI code of 5079871234 Another example is Albany Office if that is the TSI from the sending fax machine After inputting the T
217. are mapped for synchronization from AS 400 to Domino Note The field mappings are defined separately for each synchronization direction that is AS 400 to Domino and Domino to AS 400 To edit the field Chapter 5 Directory Synchronization 219 mappings for Domino to AS 400 see step 35 on page 236 Directory Sync Configuration Field Mappings AS 400 to Domi PI E3 File Edit View Bt Actions Window Hee LSTNAM FSTNAM MIDNAM FSTNAM TITLE CMPNY DEPT Loc TELNBR1 TELNBR2 FAXTELNBR ADDR1 ADDR2 ADDR3 ADDR4 TEXT LSTNAM LastName FirstName Middlelnitial FullName JobTitle CompanyName Department Location OfficePhoneNumber PhoneNumber OfficeFAXPhoneNumber StreetAddress City State Zip Comment O HomeT erm Figure 102 View Field Mappings for AS 400 to Domino Synchronization You can change existing mappings remove existing mappings or insert new mappings Directory synchronization processes the mappings in the order in which they are listed Therefore if you choose to add a mapping you must specify whether it should be inserted before or after an existing mapping To create a new AS 400 to Domino field mapping definition do the following 14 Highlight a field mapping definition where you want to add a definition by single clicking it ae Retum Fi Insert New Mapping Before AT Insert New Mapping After Figure 103 Insert New Mapping Before or After the Selected Mapping 220 Lo
218. art If you are using the MTA for the first time or if you have doubts the MTA was started correctly the first thing to do is to look for messages on the Domino console immediately after the MTA was started Z Book gt Previous subcommands and messages Domino9 nsf 5 Team7 User7 WrkShp domino7 nsf 4 Team2 User2 WrkShp domlab2 nsf 5 gt load smtpmta gt load smtpmta 06 25 98 11 03 06 AM SMTPMTA MIACFGetConfigData line 786 file mta mta_pi lib s mtactx c 1I 13274 Unable to get Global domain in the N amp A 06 25 98 11 03 06 AM SMTPMTA SMTP MTA Configuration Data starts Enter a Domino subcommand Work with Domino Console N F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Print F9 Retrieve __ F17 Top F18 Bottom F21 Command line p Figure 85 Attempting to Start MTA with Incomplete Configuration The example in Figure 85 shows the situation where an attempt was made to start the MTA without having it configured correctly Unable to get Global domain in the N amp A Book Even though the MTA does start most likely it will not work properly because it could not open the global domain document and therefore had to use defaults for the configuration parameters Chapter 4 Mail Integration Through the SMTP MIME MTA 193 Possible reasons for this are e The SMTP MTA was not configured that is parameter MAIL SMTPMTA was not specified when the Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR command was performed or if
219. as shown in Figure 12 Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR Type choices Time zone Seen E Daylight savings time Domain name Network name COUNTE ID e eee ei Ye te Log replication events Log client session events Replace configuration Web browsers News readers ey te nternet mail packages for more Advanced services for more Certifier ID F3 Exit F4 Prompt F24 More keys press Enter YES NO ORG NETWORK1 BLANK YES YES NO YES YES NO YES YES NO NONE NONE HTTP NONE NONE NNTP he So NONE NONE ALL IMAP LDAP values Bag win A NONE NONE ALL PARTITION values GEN More F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display PN GMT EST CST MST PST CET YES Figure 12 CFGDOMSVR for a First Server 3 Prompt 2 Whenever you see the word More at the bottom right of the display you can press the PgDn key to see more parameters Do not press the Enter key at this point since you may miss an important parameter Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 63 Keyword Description TIMEZONE DAYSAVTIME DOMAIN NETWORK CNTRYID LOGREPEVT LOGSSNEVT Time zone Specifies the time zone to be used by the Domino server Daylight savings time Specifies whether the server time stamp should be adjusted for daylight savings time DST Default YES Domain name Specifies the domain
220. ased agents using DB commands or LotusScript Data Object LS DO have direct access to DB2 for AS 400 data without ODBC drivers Ww Lotus Notes client users can dynamically run a DB2 for AS 400 query and import the results into a Domino document w Application programming interfaces provide access to Domino data and services from AS 400 application programs W Bidirectional batch transfer of data between Domino and DB2 for AS 400 is available without programming using the companion product NotesPump which is purchased separately NotesPump can be used in many cases to provide the shadowing capability of DataPropagator 400 and eliminate the need for user exit programs w NotesPump real time support provides the capability to define form based field mapping between Domino and DB2 for AS 400 for interactive real time data access without the need for programming With Domino for AS 400 4 6 3 there is a function similar to NotesPump real time support integrated with the core server under the name Domino Enterprise Connection Services DECS 362 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Thus much function and flexibility is available with Domino for AS 400 If you are using database integration today with Domino on an Integrated PC Server one or more of these integration tools must be incorporated into your migration plans You need to be aware that DataPropagator 400 is not used with Domino for AS 400 for dat
221. at you clear the internal links pointers which were set for the fields between SDD and PAB during population to improve performance For more information about population see the section Populate Directories in Directory Synchronization Configuration Steps on page 226 Edit the configuration first and change its status to Disabled Then edit the configuration again and change the key fields e Do not replicate the Directory Sync Configuration database When you change a configuration you must open the database on the Domino for AS 400 server e Directory synchronization is a stand alone application Synchronization continues even when you shut down the Domino server You can stop the directory synchronization jobs QNNDI running in the QSYSWRK subsystem by issuing the following AS 400 command call qnotesint qnndiend Alternatively you can enter the following Domino command on the Domino console command line load qnndiend It may take 4 to 5 minutes to end the jobs However this will not end the job called QNNDILCK in subsystem QSYSWRK This job prevents more than one server from enabling a configuration so it behaves as a never ending program An undocumented method to end this job is to use the following AS 400 command call qnotesint qnndiend ALL You can restart the jobs by issuing the following command call qnotesint qnndistj Alternatively you can enter the following Domino command on the Domino console
222. ated PC server IP_Address should be the internal bus port TCP IP Address of your Integrated PC Server for best performance Tip To find out the IP address of the internal bus port you can use the Display Network Server Description DSPNWSD command DSPNWSD NWSD_name where NWSD_name is the Network Server Description name of your Integrated PC Server 4 An AS 400 File Transfer Protocol display appears In response to the prompts enter the FTP user ID and password you obtained in step 1 on page 352 FTP indicates the user is logged in and prompts you for an FTP subcommand Tf your Integrated PC Server resides on a different AS 400 system it may be on a release older than V4R2 Note that in V3R2 or V3R7 the file TRUSERS SMP was provided in a different directory Therefore the correct command would be in this case SBMNWSCMD COPY D MPTN BIN TRUSERS SMP E MPTN ETC TRUSERS NWSD_name SVRTYPE BASE 336 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Change the mode of transfer to binary On the AS 400 FTP command line type binary or the short form bin Press Enter and FTP issues a confirmation message 200 Type set to I Image Binary Toggle off passive data connection transfer mode if the original system does not support it Integrated PC Server for example does not support passive data connection which is on by default If you don t change the transfer mode you ll see an error message e g
223. ategies for Domino e Lotus Domino 4 6 Configuring the Domino Network shows network administrators how to configure specific network operating systems to work with Domino and how to configure Domino to work with their network operating systems e Lotus Domino 4 6 Install Guide lists platform specific instructions on installing and setting up Domino servers The Install Guide for Servers is also available online as a database file named SRVINST NSF e Lotus Domino 4 6 Getting Started with Domino explains how to roll out and set up Domino servers and users It also covers security replication the Public Address Book server connections server commands and other administration related topics e Lotus Domino 4 6 Extending the Domino System explains how to set up Notes mail Internet mail Web server features calendar and scheduling functionality Advanced Services and other administration related topics e Lotus Domino 4 6 Maintaining the Domino System explains how to manage and maintain Domino servers users databases and tools and other administration related topics e The Release 4 6 Administration Help database provides online Help and documentation for system and server administration tasks deployment planning and network configuration The What s New view lists new features for administrators who are already familiar with Release 3 x The information is also available in Planning the Domino System Getting Started with Domino
224. ations Navigator extension to manage Domino servers also enhances your capability to manage users because you can register Notes user IDs at the same time when you create a new AS 400 user profile or based on an existing AS 400 user profile Use the following steps to authorize an existing or new AS 400 user to use a Domino server 1 In the AS 400 Operations Navigator click the icon next to Users and Groups in the left pane of the Navigator to expand this section 2 Click All Users to view a list of all users 3 You can either add an existing AS 400 user as a Domino user or you can create a new AS 400 and Domino user at the same time AS 400 Operations Navigator OO x File Edit View Options Help allo Sale xja af O minutes old Primary Environment System All Users Ba AS 400 Network Description SlinsO1m1 SlinsO1m2 cy E Database Slimusrt 08 File Systems a scxg028 Aa Jobs test user for brian cragun A Mesane tav UserObects gt E a ammm E Printer Output a ye New Based On H S Printers 8 elit H System fa Gir Copy oe Gif Delete rofile object Sg Users and Groups a ject amp All Users a ee Properties E Pe Groups M Bis er profile for QLIRNMO API testing a lisarnm2b gt lt PF LI User profile for QLIRNMO API testing a listress1 XPF LI user profile for LINEPMO1 test a shstress2 gt PF SH user profile for SHNEPMO2 test
225. attributes 4 Work with TCP IP port restrictions 5 Work with TCP IP remote system information 10 Work with TCP IP host table entries 11 Merge TCP IP host table 12 Change TCP IP domain information 20 Configure TCP IP applications 21 Configure related tables 22 Configure point to point TCP IP Selection or command Sey Ne F3 Exit F4 Prompt F9 Retrieve F12 Cancel ey Figure 1 Configure TCP IP CFGTCP Menu 3 Now you can use option 1 Work with TCP IP interfaces to add a TCP IP interface to your TCP IP configuration That is you associate one or more Internet addresses with an existing line description representing a physical network interface Type the number 1 in the command line at the bottom of the menu and press Enter 42 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration You will see the Work with TCP IP Interfaces panel as shown in Figure 2 on page 44 Note It is possible that TCP IP has already been set up on your AS 400 system Look for an Internet address that does not have a line description of LOOPBACK If you don t see an Internet address other than the address associated with the LOOPBACK description you must configure TCP IP Otherwise TCP IP is already configured For more information see the book Getting your AS 400 Working for You SC41 5161 a Work with TCP IP Interfaces N System SYSTEMO1 Type options press Enter 1 Add 2 Change 4 Remove 5 Display 9 Start 10 End
226. ave Disk Figure 157 Add Remove Programs Properties Windows Setup 5 Click on Details and place a check mark next to Dial Up Networking To add or remove a component click the check box A shaded box means that only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details Components 5 Dial Up Networking M 3 Direct Cable Connection 0 5 MB M S HyperTerminal 0 6 MB A amp Phone Dialer 0 2 MB f Space required 0 4 MB Space available on disk 722 2 MB Description Enables you to connect to other computers by using a modem Details oT owes Figure 158 Communications Window Chapter 7 Dial Up Connectivity 285 Click OK to close the Communications window Click OK to close the Windows Setup dialog box If prompted to reboot to activate you need not do so until you get to the step described in Reboot the Workstation on page 306 Add Dial Up Adapter Support After activating the support for Dial Up networking you now need to enable the software driver for a Dial Up adapter Follow the steps described below 1 Double click the icon My Computer 2 Double click the icon Control Panel 3 Double click the icon Network You will see the Network Configuration dialog box as shown in Figure 159 4 Look at the list box called The following network components are installed If you see a line called Dial Up Adapter you may
227. ax profile PKENNEDY Routing Code 4567 Type choices press Enter Document coe amp GENERATE Name GENERATE Folder RCVFAX Document type RFTDCAFAX RFTDCA MODCA RFTDCAFAX MODCAFAX Paper size te eos amp 4c SELBTTER LETTER LEGAL A4 B4 Mapping value POSITION POSITION CENTER SCALE Delete fax 6 2 1 Yes 2 No _ F3 Exit F12 Cancel y Figure 229 File Received Fax You can change any of the parameters for your environment For this example select the default parameters by pressing Enter The Work with Routing Entries display appears with the entry created as shown in Figure 230 384 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration work with Routing Entries N Fax profile PKENNEDY Routing code soh ou 8 A 4 BOT Type option press Enter 2 Edit entry 4 Remove entry Opt Routing Type Description TONE FILED File received fax as GENERATE in RCVFAX Bottom F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Create F12 Cancel Len COPYRTGHT TRM CORP 1995 1998 J Figure 230 Work Routing Entries Display for Changing Parameters Press F6 to create a second routing entry The Select Routing Entry Type display appears as shown in Figure 231 eo Work with Routing Entries X Select Routing Entry Type Select one of the following Print received fax File received fax Send notificat
228. bases You might need to recover a specific Domino database or a group of databases Use the Restore Object RST command Following is an example of the steps for recovering all the files to the HRDPT subdirectory 1 Sign on your AS 400 using a user profile that has SAVSYS and JOBCTL special authorities 2 Stop the server that contains the databases that you want to recover Use the End Domino Server ENDDOMSVR command You can restore a database when the server is running However you need to make sure that no one is using the database Stopping the server is the best way to ensure that no one is using the database 3 Mount the tape that has the most recent backup of the databases Use the appropriate Restore Object RST command for the mail files that you want to recover For example to recover all the files to the HRDPT subdirectory from device TAPO1 use the following command RST DEV qsys lib tap01 devd OBJ notes data hrdpt nsf 146 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Note You cannot restore a database that is in use All users must close the database before you can restore a backup copy The best way to ensure that databases are not in use is to stop the server Restoring Changed Objects to a Domino for AS 400 Server To reduce the length of your backup window your backup strategy might include backing up only changed objects from your Domino server during the business wee
229. basic assistance level the WRKSPLF command will not show any job logs or other system output like dumps To get to intermediate assistance level enter the WRKSPLF command and when it displays the list of spool files press F21 shift F9 and then select assistance level 2 126 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration An example of the output from the WRKSPLF command is in Figure 57 p gt Type options press Enter 1 Send 2 Change 3 Hold 4 Delete 5 Display 6 Release 7 Messages 8 Attributes 9 Work with printing status Device or Total Cur Opt File User Queue User Data Sts Pages Page Copy QP JOBLOG QNOTES QEZJOBLOG DRT RDY _ QP JOBLOG QNOTES QEZJOBLOG OMSGCNV RDY _ QP JOBLOG QNOTES QEZTJOBLOG IMSGCNV RDY QP JOBLOG QNOTES QEZTJOBLOG OSESCTL RDY _ QP JOBLOG QNOTES QEZJOBLOG ISESCTL RDY QP JOBLOG QNOTES QEZJOBLOG SMTPMTA RDY _ QP JOBLOG QNOTES QEZTJOBLOG EVENT RDY e QP JOBLOG QNOTES QEZJOBLOG REPLICA RDY _ QP JOBLOG QNOTES QEZJOBLOG ADMINP RDY QP JOBLOG QNOTES QEZJOBLOG UPDATE RDY More Parameters for options 1 2 3 or command Work with All Spooled Files N T F3 Exit F10 View 3 F1l View 2 F12 Cancel F22 Printers F24 More acer Figure 57 Work with Spooled Files of QNOTES Note in Figure 57 that the User Data column is the name of the Domino tasks As a general rule when in problem determination look at the job logs that are more than one pag
230. be performed At this time the AS 400 specific part of the configuration will be performed That is a subsystem name of the form DOMINOxx will be associated with the additional server and the subsystem description an object of type SBSD will be created in library QUSRNOTES Reconfiguring the Domino Server After you set up a Domino server on the AS 400 system you may find it necessary to change a particular characteristic of the server For example you may need to change from a non partitioned server to a partitioned server or you may want to add other capabilities such as billing or the SMTP MTA You can reconfigure the Domino server by using the same procedure you used originally to set up the server When you reconfigure the server use the same values except Specify the exact location of the existing Certifier ID administrator ID and server ID files for the server Specifying the location of the ID files avoids creating new ID files Specify NO in the Replace configuration field Specify any values you want to add or change The main change in our example is to select PARTITION rather than NONE for Advanced Services 116 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration For example to reconfigure the first Domino server we set up earlier in this book as a partitioned server run the Configure Domino Server CFGDOMS VR command again and specify the parameters as shown in Figures 53 through 55
231. book a name gt Server Location Information gt Network Configuration Server routing task names Figure 74 Basic Section of the Server Document The Internet Message Transfer Agent SMTP MTA Section Tip If you see the message Feature not installed under the title Internet Message Transfer Agent SMTP MTA the public address book is based on a template before Domino 4 6 This can happen easily if you added the Domino for AS 400 server to an existing Domain and the Public Address Book of that domain was not yet refreshed See Server Document Shows Feature not installed on page 204 170 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration w Internet Message Transfer Agent SMTP MTA General Global domain name Fully qualified Internet host name MTA administrator Conversion Options Header handling Attachment encoding method Message content Support return receipts Language parameters Use character set detection routines Message typeface Message point size Outbound Macintosh attachment conversion Inbound Configuration Number of processes T MTAGlobal System01 domland acme com P lal T Store with Delivery Information JE Base64 Jii Users without Lotus Notes a Yes id la Noat T Courier Monospaced a1 19E T AppleD ouble base64 only 9 J Used By This MTA Pia Control Poll for new messages every M
232. by the SMTP MIME MTA it should appear first in that field The requirement to make these changes depends on how the SMTP mail behavior is defined on your system For more information about configuring OS 400 SMTP mail behavior and changes which may be required to SMTP MIME MTA configuration documents please refer to the sections entitled Set Up a Domino for AS 400 Server with the SMTP MIME MTA on page 171 and Open and Save the MTA Configuration Documents at Least Once on page 173 in Chapter 4 of this book 13 End the Domino for AS 400 server and restart it 14 Start the SMTP MIME MTA if it is not configured to automatically start The SMTP MIME MTA can be started from the Domino for AS 400 console You can access the console by using any of the following methods P Work with Domino Console WRKDOMCSL command P Work with Console option of the Work with Domino Servers WRKDOMSVR command P Operations Navigator P Lotus Notes client administration interface P Web browser administration interface To manually start the SMTP MIME MTA type the following command on a Domino console command line LOAD SMTPMTA 356 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Once the SMTP MIME MTA has been successfully tested you may choose to enable it to automatically start whenever the Domino server starts This can be done either by editing NOTES INI and adding SMTPMTA in the ServerTasks line or by issuing a SE
233. ca is created automatically during the configuration of an additional server W The ID files do not need to be copied here The ID file for the new server will be created during the process of registering the new server You need to be careful that this ID is not overwritten during the copy process by an existing server ID Technically replication could be used for this purpose as well since the servers have different Domino and network identities IBM Rochester used FTP for their migration because they found it much faster and more straightforward for bulk copying mail files for selected users or large numbers of users One tradeoff for the speed benefit of using FTP versus replication is that in order to FTP open files from the existing Domino server while it is still active a trick may be required In the IBM Rochester migration a Domino console command dbcache flush followed by a drop a11 was used to temporarily close all databases and copy as many files as possible without having to take the Domino server down for any length of time With this technique the IT support of IBM Rochester was able to accomplish their goal with minor side effects as opposed to a server outage For example if a user interacted with the server at the exact moment the DROP ALL command was issued they might receive an error message but if they immediately retried the function it would be successful Users not actively communicating with the server at that mome
234. cases the potential confusion may be further complicated by the fact that the Domino server name may be the same as the NWSD name Hence we expect most organizations will prefer to simply create anew NWSD for their Integrated PC Server with a new name for example IPCS1 and then create new line descriptions for the new NWSD Note If you do not plan to use the Integrated PC Server for other Network Server implementations like a firewall or a LAN server you may also use it as a normal LAN adapter for your AS 400 applications If you decide to do so you still need to follow the instructions give below to move the IP address from the Integrated PC Server to an AS 400 IP interface even if you plan to use the same physical adapter The following section shows how to create anew NWSD If you prefer to use the existing NWSD go to Using the Same Network Server Description on page 362 Creating a Network Server Description with a New Name To create anew NWSD for the Integrated PC Server with a new name and external IP address follow these steps 1 Onan AS 400 command line type WRKNWSD 342 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Press Enter and the Work with Network Server Descriptions display as shown in Figure 202 appears Work with Network Server Descriptions System SYSTEMO1 Type options press Enter 1 Create 2 Change 3 Copy 4 Delete 5 Display 6 Print 9 Retrieve Source Network Opt Server
235. ch as your Domino databases Domino for AS 400 takes advantage of the AS 400 single level store architecture Domino databases and programs are spread across all the AS 400 disk units along with other AS 400 objects The OS 400 operating system automatically manages the allocation of disk space so that you do not have to decide which databases to store on a particular disk drive To back up information on AS 400 you back up logically by library or directory not physically by disk unit To plan a backup strategy you need to understand the logical location of your Domino for AS 400 databases and programs Note For more information about planning an entire backup strategy including other applications for your AS 400 system see the book AS 400 Backup and Recovery SC41 5304 It comes with your OS 400 software and is also available in the softcopy library and on the Web Changes in this Chapter The following changes and additions have been made for the second edition of this redpaper On page 147 Ending the Domino Subsystem contains a warning not to end the Domino subsystem 131 What is the Integrated File System Domino for AS 400 stores all Notes databases as stream files in a directory structure within the Integrated File System IFS The IFS is a part of OS 400 that supports stream input output and storage management similar to personal computer and UNIX operating systems while providing an integrated structure over
236. chronization Therefore you must fill or populate the AS 400 directory with entries from the Domino Public Address Book or populate the Domino Public Address Book with entries from the AS 400 directory For bi directional synchronization you must do both During population internal links pointers are set between the fields of the SDD and the fields of the PAB In this way the entries point to each other and subsequent synchronizations for that entry will be much faster Use of population is not a requirement for directory synchronization to occur but populated directories will synchronize faster than non populated directories When directories are not populated a synchronization event will require a search of the target directory 212 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration in order to find the corresponding entry rather than having direct access to the entry via the pointer Once the directories are populated the internal links for all subsequent changes for example insertion of a new entry will be set automatically Therefore after running a population the configuration will default to Populate No If a connection is disabled the internal links are cleared If you enable synchronization again without running population from now on the internal links are set when entries are changed However in order to reflect all of the changes that were performed while synchronization was stopped i
237. cial handling Use server to server replication to keep the old and the new mail files synchronized until complete cut over to the new server has taken place Change users information in Public Address Book to reflect the mail server change Change location documents on the users workstations to reflect the home mail server change Success with server consolidation requires administrator focus in the following key areas Our findings and techniques are discussed in the Challenges section of this paper Ww Ww Ww Managing impact on customers users This is the most important aspect of any migration Developing and testing methods for moving mail without integrity problems or long server outages Managing mass changes to the Public Address Book The Public Address Book for the IBM U S domain has over 150 000 entries Mass changes are a very big issue By the end of December 1997 we had used this method to move the first 400 users to AS 400 servers in a couple of iterations These were a pilot group which actually consisted of a handful of users from many servers in varying departments and geographies Mail Server Transplantation Method As we completed the first several phases of our migration and felt comfortable with our Domino for AS 400 servers we wanted a faster way to move the rest of our population to AS 400 servers We began creating AS 400 versions of existing Domino servers For example we would
238. cify a Host Codepage of 5035 e Use Graphical Access 400 a part of Client Access for AS 400 and sign on using a user profile that has a CCSID value of 5026 Restrictions on Double Byte Database File Names on AS 400 Systems PC and UNIX platforms support double byte files names for Domino databases but Domino for AS 400 does not support double byte file names If you replicate a database with a file name that uses a double byte character set from a PC or UNIX platform to AS 400 you must change the file name to a single byte character set Otherwise full text indexing cannot be created Setting Up the First Server in a New Domino Domain After you have installed the Domino for AS 400 software on your AS 400 system you can set up a Domino server In this section we describe the simplest scenario a first server We also recommend that you try this scenario on your AS 400 system before you attempt to implement partitioned servers see Configuring Partitioned Domino for AS 400 Servers on page 90 or adding a server to an existing Domino domain see Configure an Additional Server in an Existing Domino Domain on page 106 Two methods are available to configure a Domino for AS 400 server e Use the Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR command an OS 400 CL command This method is sometimes referred to as the green screen method since it can only be done from a 5250 terminal or display emulation session e Use the Operations Nav
239. command line load qnndistj 210 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration e Do not use the Set Secure command to password protect the server console If you do the directory synchronization jobs will fail If the server console is password protected use the Set Secure command to remove password protection and then restart the directory synchronization jobs Directory Synchronization Concepts When you set up directory synchronization by creating a configuration in the Directory Sync Configuration NNDIRSYC NSF database on the Domino server you need to specify several options that are used during directory synchronization Synchronization Type As shown in Figure 93 the synchronization can be either one way unidirectional or two way bi directional With unidirectional synchronization you specify whether the AS 400 directory is used to update the Domino address book or the Domino address book is used to update the AS 400 directory With bi directional synchronization both the AS 400 directory and the Domino address book are used to update each other Synchronization Type Synchronization Status Bidirectional Enabled AS 400 to Domino unidirectional Disabled Domino to AS 400 unidirectional Suspended Figure 93 Types and Status Values for Directory Synchronization Synchronization Status While the configuration is enabled directory synchronization actions occur as d
240. command line type option 2 next to the entry to be changed and press Enter You will see the Change Directory Entry display as shown in Figure 210 358 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Change Directory Entry User ID Address WBLANKER NTSIPCS Type changes press Enter D SCEIPELON e 2 4 aw Wilfried Blankertz on IPCS Notes System name Group NISIPCS F4 for list User profile F4 for list Network user ID WBLANKER NTSIPCS Name BaS Arre Ga oe ee wee Se g Blankertz BUCS ce ud ae a ee a Wilfried Middle Preferred aon ELL e a ee hee Sei ee he 2 Blankertz Wilfried More F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F18 Display location details F19 Change name for SMTP F20 Specify user defined fields F24 More keys Figure 210 Change Directory Entry Press the PageDown PgDn key four times and you will see the panel shown in Figure 211 Change Directory Entry User ID Address WBLANKER NTSIPCS Type changes press Enter Mail service level 1 User index 2 System message store 4 Lotus Domino 9 Other mail service For choice 9 Other mail service Field name i gt ib ip Be QYNMMATLTY QNOTES F4 for list Preferred address 3 1 User ID Address 2 0 R name 3 SMTP name 9 Other preferred address Address type F4 for list For choice 9 Other preferred address Field name F4 for list More F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Ref
241. commands are used to manipulate environment variables e Work with Environment Variables WRKENVVAR allows you to see the list of current environment variables and their values It also allows you to add or change an environment variable e Add Environment Variables ADDENVVAR allows you to add a environment variable On the AS 400 system the environment variable is set as long as a job is active For interactive jobs it is active until you sign off the job The AS 400 system does not have an autoexec bat or login file that is used every time a new job is set The way to do this on the AS 400 is a two step process Whenever you start a Lotus Domino for AS 400 server the environment variables being defined for your job at the time when you perform the Start Domino Server STRDOMSVR are used by Domino to change default settings for the server For example if you want to change the size of the Domino console you can do the following 1 Add an environment variable for your job by entering the following command on any AS 400 command line ADDENVVAR ENVVAR NOTES_ AS400_CONSOLE_ENTRIES VALUE 100000 If the variable already exists you would change it CHGENVVAR ENVVAR NOTES_AS400_CONSOLE_ENTRIES VALUE 100000 124 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration 2 Now you can start the server by either entering option in the Work with Domino Servers WRKDOMSVR display or by using the Start
242. connect using port 80 Unlike Notes and Domino communication the Internet protocols do not have an automatic port mapper Additional Configuration to Support a TCP IP Port Mapper Using the port mapper approach you have to declare one of the partitioned servers on your AS 400 system as the port mapper server See also Configuring partitioned servers using unique TCP IP port numbers in the Domino Administration Help database doc helpadmn nsf or the Extend the Domino System book The port mapper server listens on the default Lotus Domino TCP port 1352 and directs connection requests to other servers that share the same IP address All other servers on this system who listen to the same IP address have to use unique port numbers different from 1352 The port mapper knows via a definition in its NOTES INI file the TCPIP_PortMappingOx statement which port each of the other servers is listening to and reroutes each session to the appropriate server 96 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration That is the port mapper NOTES INI file needs to specify the IP address to be used for all servers along with the standard port number 1352 For example TCPIP_TcpIpAddress 0 10 6 70 217 1352 In addition you need to add in the port mapper s NOTES INI file a port mapping statement for each of the other partitioned servers specifying their name and port numbers For example TCPIP_PortMapping00 CN
243. continue with Add TCP IP Protocol Support for the Dial Up Adapter on page 303 You may see additional tabs for example Identification or Access Control Make sure the Configuration tab is selected Network RAE Configuration The following network components are installed 3Com Etherlink Ill PCMCIA 3C589 30589B Dial Up Adapter IBM Token Ring Credit Card Adapter Il and compatibles TCP IP gt 3Com Etherlink III PCMCIA 30589 3C589B TCP IP gt Dial Up Adapter zj E Efapertes Remave Primary Network Logon Windows Logon hd Blbend Prat Shanna Description Figure 159 Network Configuration Dialog Box 286 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration 5 If Dial Up Adapter is not already listed in the Network Configuration window click on Add You will see the Select Network Component Type dialog box as shown in Figure 160 6 Inthe Select Network Component Type dialog box highlight the line Adapter and click the Add button Select Network Component Type 27 x Click the type of network component you want to install network adapter is a hardware device that physically connects your computer to a network Figure 160 Network Component Type Selection Window 7 Highlight Microsoft highlight Dial Up Adapter and click OK You will see the Select Network adapter dialog box Select Network adapters x Click
244. core _ sign The first parameter after the equal sign must be 0 zero There must be a colon between IP address and port Wrong IP address according to our example Spelling error in __TcpIPAddress one d missing 94 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Note None of the mistakes shown above will cause an error message to be given when the server is started End this server correct any errors in the NOTES INI file and start the server again before you start any other partitioned server The port TCPIP Is Not Listening to Any Interface e In this case the response to the show port tcpip command is two lines only TCP IP Port Driver Transport Provider TCP This response indicates that the port named TCPIP was activated but it failed while listening to an IP interface By paging backwards in the Domino console you may find additional error messages shown in bold in Figure 39 fe Work with Domino Console N Previous subcommands and messages gt sh port tepip 05 22 98 02 34 45 PM Error on Listen function The TCP IP port used by the Notes server is still in use on this system 05 22 98 02 34 45 PM Error on Listen function The TCP IP port used by the Notes server is still in use on this system 05 22 98 02 34 45 PM Error on Listen function The TCP IP port used by the Notes server is still in use on this system 05 22 98 02 34 45 PM Listener task for port TCPIP is suspending for
245. cpip Press the Enter key followed by the F5 key You should get a response similar to the one shown in Figure 37 Tip After starting the server especially for the first time it may take 5 minutes or more until the server responds to the show port command Work with Domino Console N Previous subcommands and messages 05 22 98 01 52 55 PM Periodic full text indexer terminating 05 22 98 01 56 18 PM The Administration Request database admin4 nsf on acmedsl acme is currently a wildcard replica 05 22 98 01 56 18 PM The Administration Process on acmedsl acme will not work until an Administration Server has been designated for this domain s Public Address Book gt sh port tepip gt sh port tcpip TCP IP Port Driver Transport Provider TCP Notes Session Local Address Foreign Address 026D0001 10 1 2 217 1352 eee Enter a Domino subcommand gt F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Print F9 Retrieve F17 Top F18 Bottom F21 Command line nh Figure 37 Show TCPIP Port Listening to Specific IP Address If a user is already connected to the server at the time you use the show port command you will see one or more additional lines showing a foreign address different than The line to look at however is the one showing as a foreign address which must show a specific address under a local address You should not see the following Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 93 e The server is listening t
246. cribe how information is mapped from the fields in one of the directories to fields in the other directory Field documents describe the fields that can be synchronized in the AS 400 system distribution directory and in Person documents of the Domino Public Address Book The Directory Synchronization function runs as a stand alone application It does not end when you shut down the Domino server To simply end the jobs you should enter the following command in any AS 400 command line or include in a CL program CALL QNOTESINT QNNDIEND More information is provided in the Synchronization Status section of Directory Synchronization Configuration Steps on page 226 later in this chapter The Directory Synchronization function does co exist with the Domino replication function the Directory Shadowing function between multiple AS 400 systems and the Directory Synchronization function of Domino running on the Integrated PC Server IPCS in the AS 400 system However in such an environment it is the administrator s responsibility to ensure that no endless loops occur refer to Figure 116 on page 250 for an example Directory Synchronization Configuration Tips The following items should be considered before you create or change a directory synchronization configuration e Itis recommended that you make backup copies of the Domino Public Address Book and the AS 400 directory before using directory synchronization in a production envir
247. cs 28800 Sportster BM Default H A Systema Md 92Z00M 14400 BM Default d E E 1 15 of 17 object s Figure 170 AS 400 Operations Navigator Modems 294 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration 9 From the list of modems right click on the IBM 7857 017 modem A dialog box appears Select the item New Modem Based On from the context menu This will open a new window with the title New Modem Based on IBM 7857 017 In this new modem window specify a unique new value for the Modem information name field for example User Defined 7857 017 Change the value of the Modem answer command field from ATSO0 2S7 30 to ATSO 2 That is remove S7 30 10 Click OK to create this new modem information entry 11 Skip to Change the PPP Connection Profile to Use the New Modem Entry on page 313 Use a 5250 Display to Create Customized Modem Information If you have Operations Navigator Version 3 Release 1 Modification Level 3 the function to create a new modem entry based on an existing one is not available To create the customized modem information using a 5250 interface perform the following steps 1 Start the Work with Point to Point TCP IP VRKTCPTP command by entering the following in any AS 400 command line WRKTCPPTP Press F8 Work with modems Use option 3 to copy the modem information entry called IBM 7857 017 to a new entry a Type option press Enter 1 Add 2 Cha
248. ct to the end user Appendix B The IBM Rochester Experience 399 Moving the Data Our server consolidation process involved using FTP early in the week of a migration to copy mail data from the original Domino server to its new home on AS 400 Technically replication could be used for this purpose as well We used FTP because we found it to be much faster and more straightforward for our purposes in bulk copying mail files for selected users or large numbers of users We discovered one tradeoff though for the speed benefit of using FTP vs replication In order to move open files with FTP from the existing Domino server we occasionally needed to use a server trick We would execute a dbcache flush followed by a drop all from the Domino server console to try to gain access and copy as many files as possible without having to take the Domino server down for any length of time With this technique we were able to accomplish our goal with minor side effects as opposed to a server outage For example if a user interacted with the server at the exact moment the DROP ALL command was issued they might receive an error message but if they immediately retried the function it would be successful Users not actively communicating with the server at that moment may have experienced a little bit longer connect time the next time they accessed the server We found that since the new Domino server has a completely different identity including encrypt
249. ctory Synchronization can do for you It automatically copies the information from the AS 400 system distribution directory to a Domino Address Book either the Public Address Book or another address book based on the same template which then can be combined with the Public Address Book into a master address book Storing Foreign Mail Users Addresses in the Personal Address Books If individual Notes users send mail frequently to other users who do not have a person document in the PAB the Notes users can also store the recipient s mail addresses in the personal local address book Storing a foreign mail user s address in a personal book is basically the same as storing it in the PAB except Chapter 4 Mail Integration Through the SMTP MIME MTA 185 e This entry is only available to a single mail sender e In Notes 4 6 the person documents in Personal Address Books based on the template person documents have been renamed business cards To enter a business card in your personal address book open your local address book usually identified by an icon showing an open book with a red cover by double clicking the icon on your workspace Then click on the Add Card button You see the New Business Card form as shown in Figure 82 New Business Card Lotus Notes _ 5 x File Edit View Create Actions Text Window Help Name Erika Bender 2d Job title 7 a Company a Address J ZIP Postal code Country
250. d additions have been made for the second edition of this redpaper On page 170 Change the Distribution Attributes describes an additional step needed when setting up the SMTP MTA in combination with Office Vision 400 On page 179 Language Dependent Character Set Conversions describes how to configure the MTA to convert character sets different from US ASCII On page 209 Mixed Address Lists Not Sent to Every Recipients addresses a problem when sending mail from OfficeVison 400 to Domino Domino and AS 400 Mail Capabilities Overview Before looking in detail at the Domino for AS 400 mail integration you should have an understanding of the e mail environment on AS 400 as well as Domino before these two worlds of e mail are integrated AS 400 Mail Capabilities The traditional mail application on an AS 400 system is Office Vision for AS 400 OV 400 allowing users of 5250 and 3270 terminals to exchange mail besides other functions like word processing maintaining calendars and others Exchange of mail with other systems was originally only accomplished through Systems Network Architecture Distribution Services SNADS The format of the mail being handled by OV 400 is based on the Document Content Architecture Document Interchange Architecture DCA DIA The implementation of the AnyMail 400 Mail Server Framework MSF in OS 400 V3RI1 now also allows OV 400 users to exchange mail with other e mail applications
251. d as shown above You should substitute values as appropriate for your received faxes Using the above example parameter values are defined as e QAFFRCV FILE Facsimile Support for AS 400 receive file name e F123456789 MBR The file member containing the received fax you want to store as a TIFF Class F document e ACCOUNTS Folder to store document e TIFFDOC1 Document name must be unique and no more than 8 characters e t tse t to file as TIFF Class F to be viewed by the Lotus Notes viewer and most other viewing software Use f to file as TIFF Class F to be viewed by the System Application Program SAP AL Viewer Once you have filed the received fax in a TIFF Class F format you could use the SNDDOC or SNDDST command to route the document to Lotus Notes Domino Your Lotus Notes viewer can be used to view the fax the fax will show up as an attachment in your viewer The command shown above could be incorporated into an application written by the end user Appendix A Using Facsimile Support for AS 400 393 This page intentionally left blank Appendix B The IBM Rochester Experience A Report by Todd Grube IBM Global Services Rochester In a bold decision to eat its own cooking the IBM Rochester Development laboratory became a huge experimental kitchen a k a Beta site for Domino for AS 400 At the time of this writing May 1998 IBM Rochester is by far the largest Domino for AS 400 instal
252. d into the Domino command line and press Enter sh port tcpip sh is a short form for show Wait a couple of seconds and press the F5 Refresh key to see the response Note If you started the server and then immediately started working with the console it may take longer for the server to respond to your command Press F5 repeatedly and you will see more informational messages telling you what functions are being started until you finally see the command that you entered with a greater than sign gt on the left and 2 spaces indented and the response to it The example in Figure 30 shows two lines with the sh port 80 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration tcpip command The first one is displayed immediately after being entered and the second one appears together with the response If the server is very busy there may be many informational messages shown between both commands 7 Previous subcommands and messages replication from AcmeDS2 AS4FOR98 NSF 04 24 98 01 38 16 PM Finished replication with server AcmeDS2 04 24 98 01 50 00 PM Periodic full text indexer starting performing hourly full text indexing 04 24 98 01 50 04 PM Periodic full text indexer terminating 04 24 98 01 54 12 PM Searching Administration Requests database gt sh port tcpip gt sh port tcpip TCP IP Port Driver Transport Provider TCP Notes Session Local Address Foreign Address 1ECA0001 Enter a Domino subcomm
253. d not be configured but we get some clues on the job name QZRCSRVS and user name QUSER to search for more information To do so you can use the Operations Navigator or an AS 400 CL command from a 5250 session In our example we show how to use Operations Navigator The job you have to look at has already ended and the job log should exist as a spool file In the left pane of the Operations Navigator window click the icon named Printer Output In the right pane you will see spool files created by your user ID However the configuration job ran under the profile QUSER Therefore you have to look at other job logs To do so click Options Include and you will see the Include dialog box Type the following values User QUSER User specified data QZRCSRVS Even though the job runs under QUSER it adopts the authorities of the user profile you used to sign on to Client Access Chapter 6 The Graphical User Interface of Operations Navigator 257 Then click OK You will see a list of spool files If you don t see any spool files with the specified selection criteria you should refer to the instructions given in Before You Start Ensure Full Message Logging on page 265 Also make sure that your user profile has the special authorities All Object ALLOBJ In the list of spool files search for the correct one according to the time stamp when it was created Having found the correct one you can double click to displa
254. database icon from your Notes client desktop or click File Database Open from the menu bar 3 Delete the Global Domain Document created by the original SMTP MIME MTA configuration process The name of the global domain consists of the name of the Domino domain in which the SMTP MIME MTA is installed followed by the character string _SMTP 4 Delete the Foreign SMTP Domain Document created by the original SMTP MIME MTA configuration process The name of the foreign SMTP domain document is 5 Delete the SMTP MTA connection document created by the SMTP MIME MTA configuration process This connection document specifies the Domino server name as the source server and SMTP MTA as the destination server 6 Open and edit the server document for the Domino server to make the following modifications 354 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration 10 11 12 P Remove SMTP Mail Routing from the Routing Tasks field P In the Internet Message Transfer Agent SMTP MTA section blank out the contents of the following fields Global Domain name Fully Qualified Internet Host Name MTA Work Path Save your changes End the Domino for AS 400 server Change the Domino for AS 400 server configuration to add support for the SMTP MIME MTA This involves specifying SMTPMTA in the Internet Mail Packages parameter This will allow Domino for AS 400 to configure the SMTP MIME MTA by recreating the docum
255. day Tuesday and Wednesday nights Recovering a Specific Domino Database from an Incremental Backup To recover a specific database named HRINFO to the HRDPT subdirectory folder do the following 1 Start an AS 400 session with a user profile that has JOBCTL and SAVSYS special authorities 2 To ensure that no one is using the databases stop the Domino server for example use the End Domino Server ENDDOMSVR command 3 Locate the most recent tape that has the database Do one of the following W Consult the log that the system creates during the save operation W Use the Display Tape DSPTAP command to display the contents of the tape Mount the tape in the tape unit To recover the database use the following command RST DEV qsys lib tap01 devd OBJ notes data hrdpt hrinfo nsf Substitute your tape device name for TAPO1 148 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Recovering Changed Objects to a Specific Domino Subdirectory To recover all the Domino databases to the CUSTSVC subdirectory use the same approach that you use to recover the entire server Do the following 1 Sign on your AS 400 using a user profile that has JOBCTL and SAVSYS special authorities 2 To ensure that no one is using the databases stop the Domino server for example use the End Domino Server ENDDOMSVR command 3 Locate the tapes from your most recent complete backup Mount the correct tape
256. des guidelines for using the Java programming language to interact with Notes applications and databases LotusScript Programmer s Guide provides guidelines for programming in the LotusScript language LotusScript Language Reference Manual provides a complete reference for the LotusScript language Lotus Notes Designer for Domino 4 6 Install Guide lists platform specific instructions on installing and setting up Notes workstations The Install Guide is also available online as a database file named WKSINST NSF Lotus Notes Designer for Domino 4 6 Release Notes provides end of release information about new Notes features software platform requirements known limitations and restrictions interoperability issues and updates for the documentation set The online database file name for the Release Notes is READMEC NSF Documentation for End Users Lotus Notes 4 6 Step By Step is a beginner s guide for learning how to perform common tasks Notes Help is a Notes database that provides context sensitive information on all Notes client features including information on designing and managing databases and using LotusScript This information is also available in the Programmer s Guide the Application Developer s Guide and the Database Manager s Guide The database file name for Help is HELP4 NSF Notes Help Lite is a Notes database that provides context sensitive information on most Notes client features This database is a subset
257. dexes can easily be identified by an extension of ft For example if the name of your Domino database is EUTALK NSF then Domino data directory would could contain a subdirectory called EUTALK ft An example is shown in Figure 197 where we used the Submit Network Server Command SBMNWSCMD command to a Domino database together with the index directory on the K drive of an Integrated PC Server 330 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Command Entry SYSTEMO1 Request level 1 All previous commands and messages gt Type gt Command submitted to server NTSIPCS SBMNWSCMD CMD dir K Notes data EUTALK SERVER NTSIPCS CMDTYPE OS2 The volume label in drive K is NTSIPCS_K The Volume Serial Number is FB23 BO000 Directory of K Notes data 5 16 97 12 36p lt DIR gt O EUTALK ft 11 12 98 9 54p 573440 0O EUTALK NSF 2 file s 573440 bytes used 56493056 bytes free Command submitted to server NTSIPCS command press Enter F3 Exit F4 Prompt F9 Retrieve F10 Exclude detailed messages Fll Display full F12 Cancel F13 Information Assistant F24 More keys Figure 197 Directories for Databases with Full Text Index Since it is very easy to create a full text index from scratch using a client accessing the server after the migration it is probably not worth the effort to copy the entire subdirectory structure for each database with full text index If you are currently ru
258. dial into the AS 400 system This script will be used by the server The remote system that dials in must have a compatible script See Creating and Changing Connection Scripts on page 319 for information on how to use customized scripts ASCII character set identifier The ASCII CCSID is used to translate ASCII to EBCDIC and EBCDIC to ASCII connection script data Press page down PgDn again to see the third configuration display The Figure 178 shows the parameters changed to our specific environment 302 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Name WIN95DOM Text Add TCP IP Point to Point ANS Profile System RCHASMO1 Type choices press Enter Local system security Allow IP datagram forwarding Shyer S N Y Yes N No System access authorization list DOMSLIP NONE Name Bottom F2 Change modem information F3 Exit F4 List F9 Command line C F12 Cancel Figure 179 Add TCP IP Point to Point ANS Profile Panel 3 Local system security section Allow IP datagram forwarding When a remote client connects to the AS 400 system this value determines whether the TCP IP stack allows IP datagrams originating from the remote host to be forwarded on to IP addresses other than the local IP address defined for the AS 400 system for this connection Note If IP datagram Forwarding is set OFF at the system level through the IPDTGFWD parameter on the CHGTCPA command then the value f
259. different Domino identity changes are also required on user 352 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration workstations The user s location document which defines how the user s mail is sent and received must be modified to reflect the home mail server change When an application database moves from one server to another icons on the users desktops must be modified to reflect the new location This may be done by adding a new database icon and removing the original These modifications can be accomplished without visiting each desktop or asking the users to perform manual tasks In the IBM Rochester migration the updates were handled in conjunction with end user communication by sending a series of memos Each e mail notification contained some information and instructions but more importantly contained a button with code behind it that would automatically make the appropriate client workstation changes For example if the migration process took place over a calendar week a memo could be sent on Wednesday including an announcement of the imminent migration who what where when and why A button in this memo could be set up to add icons for key databases on the new Domino server such as the Public Address Book This can also offer the benefit of load balancing by adding larger databases to user desktops well in advance of the Monday morning peak load that typically follows a migration On Friday morn
260. directory synchronization configuration document If you want these changes to take effect immediately for all AS 400 directory and Domino Address Book entries choose Yes to Populate Directories when editing the enabled directory synchronization configuration document Configuring Directory Synchronization Configuration of directory synchronization is done using a Notes client interface A Notes database called Directory Sync Configuration NNDIRSYC NSF is shipped with the function The Domino administrator must configure directory synchronization between the AS 400 system distribution directory and a specified Domino Public Address Book PAB at the Domino server by opening that database and filling in several Notes forms Messages related to directory synchronization are written to the Domino for AS 400 Log database NNDILOG NSF Default Field Mappings Directory Fields Logging Entries View Address Book Figure 92 Directory Synchronization Configuration Main Menu There are three types of documents in the Directory Synchronization Configuration database Configuration documents describe the Domino Public Address Book being synchronized the type of synchronization desired which directory entries should 208 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration be synchronized and whether entries in one directory should be used to populate the other directory Field mapping documents des
261. down menu Chapter 6 The Graphical User Interface of Operations Navigator 253 2 Select New Domino Server The Notes client starts for you at this point and you should see a form showing the first of 4 panels needed to enter the parameters for setting up a Domino for AS 400 server as shown in Figure 127 Tip Depending on your display size and settings you may not see the complete form If you need to scroll the window horizontally choose View Show Horizontal Scroll Bar Most of the parameters to be entered are the same as the ones used for the Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR command explained in Chapter 2 of this book Some differences exist in the sequence and the form in which the parameters have to be entered The Operations Navigator setup also provides a Quick and Easy Setup with a limited number of parameters to be entered Only the Advanced Setup gives you the capability to enter all the possible parameters Note You must select Advanced Setup to create partitioned or clustered servers New Domino Server Lotus Notes File Edit View Create Aoine Text Window Help 1 Create a New Domino Server Welcome to Is this the first or additional Domino server Domin First Domino Server Server Setup Additional Domino Server O Which 45 400 system is the Domino Server being created on SYSTEMOI y 4s button First Domino Server Select this option if this is the first server you are
262. dress Book as new or changed Person documents This population operation occurs at the specified day and time A synchronization of user fields occurs if an entry in the Domino directory has the same key field values as the entry in the AS 400 directory Otherwise a new entry will be added first Note Creation of a Person document in the PAB does not register this person as a Notes user and does not create a user ID file If you want an AS 400 user to become a Notes user you will still need to register that person in Domino For Domino to AS 400 unidirectional synchronization When any entry that satisfies the selection criteria is added to deleted from or changed in the Domino address book the corresponding entry is immediately added to deleted from or changed in the AS 400 system distribution directory The key mapping fields in the configuration document define the corresponding entry in the AS 400 system distribution directory If you chose Yes for the Populate Directories option entries from the Domino Address Book that satisfy the selection criteria and have a value in every key field are copied to the AS 400 system distribution directory as new or changed entries The population operation occurs at the specified day and time A synchronization of user fields occurs if an entry on the AS 400 directory has the same key field values as the entry in the Domino directory This process does not create a user profile on the AS 400 If a
263. ds and messages tm Server Release 4 6b Intl 20 February 1998 1985 1998 Lotus Development Corporation All Rights Reserved 06 AM Billing started 12 AM Database Replicator started 17 AM Mail Router started for domain ACME 17 AM Router Internet SMTP host SYSTEMA ACME COM in domain TID eX 0 22 AM Index update process started 0 28 AM Stats agent started 0 39 AM Agent Manager started 0 39 AM No Administration Server has been designated for the Public Address Book 0 39 AM Administration Process started Enter a Domino subcommand F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Print F9 Retrieve catia F18 Bottom F21 Command line J Figure 29 Work with Domino Console Top Page 4 5 Press the PgDn key to page through all the messages and check for potential problems You can type some Domino console commands for example show server or show Tasks and press Enter Wait a couple of seconds and press the F5 Refresh key to see the response It is a good idea at this point to verify whether the server is actually listening to an IP interface You can do so in two ways e Use the Notes command show port tcpip e Use the OS 400 interface and issue the Work with TCP IP Network Status WRKTCPSTS command also known as NETSTAT along with the parameter CNN or menu selection 3 Since you are already looking at the Domino console the Notes command may be most convenient at this time Type the following comman
264. e When you press F11 you will see the data and time when the job log was spooled in other words when the job was ended this may help you identifying the failing job if there are many job logs on your system Note You will find the job log as spooled file only if the related AS 400 job already ended If the job is still active you have to use option 10 of the Work with Job display as describe in the following section Discovering Server Restarts Note By default job logs and other system out put written to the output queue QEZJOBLOG are not automatically printed However this may be changed by customers in such a case you will not be able to display the spooled file If not printed spooled files containing job logs are deleted after 7 days by the automatic cleanup procedure unless the time interval was changed by the customer using the Change Cleanup CHGCLNUP command Discovering Server Restarts Another unique feature in Domino for AS 400 is the auto restart capability This feature consist of listening for errors to occur in your Domino server If an error occurs then the server will gracefully turn itself off clean up all of it s storage and internal structures and then re start itself There are some cases where the restart will fail but these are infrequent Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 127 Sometimes it is difficult to know if the server has restarted itself One way to find out is to
265. e used anymore In any case the SMTP alias table allows you to assign a full SMTP address consisting of SMTP user ID and SMTP domain to each SDD entry representing a local mail user Caution If you use an SMTP domain name different from the AS 400 system s local host name you have to make sure OS 400 SMTP support accepts incoming mail for that SMTP domain See A Single AS 400 Known by Multiple SMTP Domain Names on page 166 for more information S On most keyboards this is Shift and F7 Difficult to remember Tip of a colleague 7 PM equals 19 00 in 24 hour time format Chapter 4 Mail Integration Through the SMTP MIME MTA 181 For example assuming you have converted your SMTP names you would assign a more meaningful SMTP address to the person with user profile EBENDER by using the Change Directory Entry CHGDIRE command CHGDIRE USRID EBENDER SYSTEMO1 USRDFNFLD SMTPAUSRID SMTP Erika_Bender SMTPDMN SMTP system01 acme com If you use the option 2 and then F19 of the Work with Directory Entries WRKDIRE command it is easier to change the address since you don t have to remember the names of the user defined fields SSMTPAUSRID and SMTPDMN however the example above has to be used if you want to write a CL program to assign the address So we used the example above for reference Sending Mail Across the Border Now that you know what the SMTP addresses are to reach a user of Domino for AS 400 or any oth
266. e 3 Hold 4 End 5 Work with 6 Release 7 Display message 8 Work with spooled files 13 Disconnect Opt Subsystem Job User Type CPU Function Status DOMINO18 QSYS SBS 0 DEQW ADMINP QNOTES BCI ok SELW AMGR QNOTES BCI 0 TIMW ar DRT QNOTES BCI A DEQW EVENT QNOTES BCI 29 SELW IMSGCNV QNOTES BCI mal DEQW n ISESCTL QNOTES BCI 32 DEQW 2 OMSGCNV QNOTES BCI a2 DEQW aan OSESCTL QNOTES BCI mel TIMW More Parameters or command gt F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F10 Restart statistics FlisDisplay elapsed data F12 Cancel F14 Include F24 More keys D Figure 78 Work with Domino Jobs Verify that all of the tasks listed above appear You may have to press the PgDn key to see all of the active jobs for example the job SMTPMTA is not shown in Figure 78 The MTA is not full operational if one of the jobs is missing See Additional Information for Troubleshooting on page 200 for more information Sending Mail Between Unlike Mail Applications Now that you have successfully started the SMTP MIME MTA on your Domino for AS 400 server and verified that OS 400 SMTP support is active see Figure 65 on page 168 you can try to send mail in all required directions that is to and from all mail platforms Tip While testing you can very easily confuse yourself by not understanding exactly from which test user you want to send mail to Make sure to set up a well defined test scenario with completely distinct names Enroll those
267. e AS 400e series System Handbook GA19 5486 17 or a later edition More information on AS 400 support for Point to Point TCP IP can be found in Chapter 4 of the book AS 400e series TCP IP Configuration and Reference Version 4 SC41 5420 01 For more information about remote connections for Domino read Setting up a remote LAN server connection in Helpadmn nsf or the book Getting Started with Domino The PPP line description supports SLIP connections as well as PPP connections gt WAN Wide Area Network IOA Input Output Adapter 276 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration PPP Dial In Example This section guides you through the AS 400 configuration needed to allow a remote PPP client to connect to your AS 400 system Beginning with OS 400 V4R2 you can create a new type of line description object the PPP line description This new line description must be used to establish a connection using PPP To use this PPP line description your AS 400 system must have one of the I O adapters described above If you have a new AS 400 system or installed a new one in recent years it is likely that one of these adapters is present Appropriate modems and modem cables are also required If you have not yet made an investment in modem hardware it may be possible to use your AS 400 system s Electronic Customer Support ECS modem temporarily for testing purposes Once you have determined that your AS 400
268. e Installing the software which is basically copying the software from the distribution medium CD ROM to the AS 400 system disk storage Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 49 Setting up one or more servers which is creating an environment on your system where the server will run You need to provide some basic configuration information for example the name of the server whether or not ID files are to be created FIRST server or will be obtained from an existing Domino server and others While the Lotus Notes and Domino documentation refer to this task in many places as setup the command to do this on an AS 400 platform is called Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR Configuring the server is a task which can be done after the initial setup and even after the server is in use for some time It involves changing parameters in the NOTES INI file the Public Address Book and other configuration databases This chapter concentrates on the tasks to install the software as well as setting up the server Other configuration tasks are beyond the scope of this book Refer to the Lotus Domino books and education material Installing the Domino for AS 400 Product on Your AS 400 System This section guides you through the installation process Installing the Domino software on the AS 400 system involves the following tasks Decide which options of the software you want to install Use the Load and Run LODRU
269. e Support for AS 400 379 Select option 1 Add on the Work With Directory Entries display and press Enter The Add Directory Entry display appears as shown in Figure 222 You must complete the fields on the Add Directory Entry display as they are described in this section All of the fields for the Add Directory Entry display are not shown You need to specify only the required fields as shown in this section Depending upon your needs you may choose to enter optional information C Add Directory Entry N Type choices press Enter User ID Address PKENNEDY NAMEXXX Description Pat Kennedy System name Group SYSTEMA F4 for list User profile F4 for list Network user ID Name Last First Middle Preferred Full Department F4 for list Job title Company More F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F18 Display location details er 9 Add name for SMTP F20N Snecifv user defined fields B Figure 222 Complete Add Directory Entry User ID Address Enter the user ID and address for this entry In our example the user ID is PKENNEDY at Address SYSTEMA where SYSTEMA is the name of the AS 400 system Description Enter a description for the user for whom you are adding this entry In this example this is Pat Kennedy System Name Group Enter the system name and group in the same format as you entered the User ID and Address Network User ID Enter the network user ID in the
270. e User and database management is mainly done from a Notes client For example you would use the Notes client to create users replicate databases change database security and add a server connection You can also use Operations Navigator to create an AS 400 user profile and register the user for Domino at the same time Using Operations Navigator to manage Domino users is discussed in more detail in Registering a Notes User Based on an AS 400 User Profile on page 278 Chapter 1 Overview of Lotus Domino for AS 400 19 Domino for AS 400 Users A Domino server on AS 400 can have different types of users e Domino only users These users connect to the Domino server from a Notes client or a browser They do not use any AS 400 functions except the Domino for AS 400 server These users do not need an AS 400 user profile e Domino and AS 400 users These users connect to the server from a Notes client or a browser They also access your AS 400 in others ways such as with 5250 workstation emulation or Client Access These users need both an AS 400 user profile and a Domino registration e Domino users who need DB2 400 access These users might never appear to run an AS 400 application However they might use a Notes application that accesses DB2 400 data Whether they need an AS 400 user profile depends on how you design your Notes application Setting Up Domino for AS 400 Users When you set up a new Domino user on a server the serve
271. e directory synchronization function provides default field mappings which include the most commonly used fields such as name address telephone and company You can remove mappings specify additional mappings or change the default mappings You can also specify more than one mapping to a particular target field If the first mapping does not contain a value directory synchronization continues processing the mappings in the order listed until one of the mappings produces a value You can also create a mapping that inserts a specified character string rather than the value of a field into a target field For example you might create a mapping to insert the character string xxx in the department name field of the Domino Public Address Book entry if the same field in the system distribution directory is empty Key Mappings You must designate at least one field mapping as a key mapping When you specify that a particular field mapping is a key mapping the mapping target field is used by directory synchronization as a key field to distinguish one target directory entry from another In the default set of field mappings last name and first name are used as key mappings If you have more than one person in your system distribution directory or Public Address Book with the same first name and last name use additional key mappings to distinguish between them For example you could add a key mapping for department name Be sure that you have enoug
272. e discipline and a Certified Lotus Professional Application Development Her 21 year IBM career has included technical sales support as a midrange system specialist and office specialist as well as a 2 year assignment to Lotus as a host messaging migration coexistence specialist and prototypist Michelle Zolkos is a technical writer for IBM User Technologies specializing in Domino for AS 400 In addition to her writing responsibilities Michelle conducts useability tests for Domino Her previous experience includes serving as a Notes Administrator and using Domino to create the IBM Printing Systems Company PSC Web site A number of people provided support and guidance throughout the production of this book We especially want to thank the following people in alphabetical order Ww Robert Boutault IBM France Ww Terry O Brien Rochester Programming Laboratory w Fiona Collins ITSO Lotus Cambridge w Bridget Dunford IBM UK w Todd G Grube IBM Global Services Rochester Ww Deabra Landon IBM Partners in Development Rochester Preface 11 Paul Marchessault IBM Rochester Mike Mullenmeister Rochester Programming Laboratory Bj rn Nilsson IBM Denmark Joseph H Peterson Rochester Programming Laboratory Lee Recknor IBM Partners in Development Rochester George Romano Rochester Programming Laboratory Thomas Schneider IBM Lotus Integration Center B blingen Germany Jeff Tenner Rochester Programming Laboratory Wendy Thomson IBM
273. e name of the Domino domain where the server with the MTA installed belongs assuming you have set up the connection documents and domain documents in your Public Address Book on your server to allow mail routing between the domains Click OK to enter mail address into the business card click Save and Close to save the document and then close the address book At this point Notes users connected to the Domino for AS 400 server may send mail to and receive mail from Internet mail users whose mail servers have a TCP IP connection to the AS 400 system However if mail integration between Office Vision for AS 400 and Domino for AS 400 is your main topic you should understand how OfficeVision users can send mail to SMTP addresses and therefore to Domino for AS 400 users Specifying SMTP Addresses When Sending From OfficeVision 400 When sending mail an Office Vision 400 user can only address recipients by specifying a pair of fields the user ID and the address Both fields being limited to a maximum length of eight characters there is no way to key a SMTP address into those fields since those are typically much longer Furthermore and this is the most important point each of those 8 by 8 addresses must resolve to an entry in the system distribution directory Note this is neither the SMTP domain nor the TCP IP domain Chapter 4 Mail Integration Through the SMTP MIME MTA 187 There are several ways that an OfficeVi
274. e queue OSYSOPR GADPARY gt i ce E cel cele lex Ch oii QSYS Bottom Press Enter to continue V F3 Exit F12 Cancel p Figure 66 Display Message Details Copy the full job information job name user number to your clipboard or write it down and press Enter three times to leave the message display Now on the AS 400 command line key in the command WRKJOB and press F4 In the prompt panel paste or key the full job name and SPLF for the option parameter as shown in Figure 67 and press Enter Work with Job WRKJOB N Type choices press Enter JOD NAME do OS QOTSMTPSRVR Name USS Os lt ce pus Did gad 68 SE gh ne eT agg QTCP Name DOO Ha rs ae Fa Pera ae FE idian ee 048813 000000 999999 OQUEDUG A 3 4 we ee a we ae eS X PRINT OPtLON SoG 4G ee ee ee Se PR SPLE SELECT STSA DFNA Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F10 Additional parameters F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys J Figure 67 Work with Job WRKJOB You will see the job s spool files use option 5 Display with the file QPJOBLOG and search for any error messages If you find the message ID TCP2074 it clearly indicates the system s host name is not found on the name server or in the local host table but you may find also different causes 162 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Change the Distribution Attributes On all AS 400 systems where OfficeVisi
275. e queues device descriptions and user profiles OS 400 treats each object type uniquely even though the control language CL commands are consistently simple and easy to use The AS 400 operating system OS 400 and the objects it controls have proven immunity to viruses However the AS 400 server can be a carrier for a virus introduced from the Internet or e mail However because of the structure of the AS 400 operating system it is very unlikely that the operating system or objects contained within it would be exposed to the virus 30 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Typically objects are accessed via a file system Under the Integrated File System there are multiple ways to store and manage objects The Integrated File System allows the use of multiple logical file systems on a single AS 400 system Each logical file system has its own structure and rules and a common set of user interfaces and application programming interfaces The AS 400 logical file systems of most interest for Domino users are the root files system and library file system Containing a hierarchical directory tree structure the root file system allows for the storage of stream files These files potentially contain long strings of data PC files are an example of stream files The Domino server s data directory on AS 400 is a subdirectory in the root file system For example NOTES DATA is a subdirectory in the root file s
276. e reason is that this format is most likely to be a unique address and does not require an SMTP alias to be defined in OS 400 There must be at least one combination of the several name fields which can be used to uniquely identify this person document Note The person document you are creating here has a different purpose than the one being created when you register a Notes user Here it is just a convenient and not mandatory pointer to a mail recipient who is not a user in this Notes domain The rules for defining an SMTP address are e For a mail recipients outside of the Notes domain you must specify that person s mail address in field Internet address e Fora Notes user to be able to receive foreign mail you either use the automatically assigned address see Automatically Assigning an SMTP User Name for a Notes User on page 184 or specify the address in field Short name and or Internet address Make sure not to confuse the two different roles the person documents in the Public Address Book can have Storing foreign mail users information into the PAB makes the most sense if you can do that for many users at once and since the users information is maintained on a different system automatically synchronize with the place where the users information is managed In the case of coexistence between OS 400 based mail users and Domino for AS 400 users this is exactly what Domino for AS 400 Dire
277. e recommend using the name of the server in the path instead of the word data since the Domino data directory must be unique for each partition 1 Onan AS 400 command line type the following command CRTDIR notes Press the Enter key 2 Onan AS 400 command line type CRTDIR notes data Or if you decided to use the suggested naming convention you may type CRTDIR notes servername Press the Enter key 3 Create any subdirectories you may have in your existing environment For example mail databases are usually in a subdirectory called mail To create a directory for it on an AS 400 command line type CRTDIR notes data mail Or if you decided to use the suggested naming convention you may type CRTDIR notes servername mail Press the Enter key In order for Domino for AS 400 to access Domino databases and manage access by users the newly created directory structure must be owned by the user profile QNOTES Thus you must change the ownership of these directories To change the ownership of a directory you use the Change Owner CHGOWN command In our example the Domino data directory is called notes data CHGOWN notes data QNOTES Note This command changes the ownership for the specified directory but does not affect subdirectories You must issue a change ownership command specifically for each of the directories and subdirectories you have created for Domino for AS 400 Changing ownersh
278. e shown in Figure 9 Press the PgDn key until you find the Resource ID 5769 LNT Display Software Resources N System SYSTEMA Resource ID Option Feature Description 5763XG1 5 2924 Client Access 400 Graphical Access for OS 400 5763XK1 BASE 5050 Client Access 400 for Windows 3 1 5763XK1 BASE 2924 Client Access 400 for Windows 3 1 5769JV1 BASE 2924 AS 400 Developer Kit for Java 5769LNP BASE 5050 Lotus NotesPump 5769LNT BASE 5050 Lotus Domino For AS 400 5769LNT BASE 2924 Lotus Domino For AS 400 5769LNT 1 5050 AS 400 Integration 5769LNT 1 2924 AS 400 Integration 5769LNT 3 5050 C API 5769LNT 4 5050 C API 5769LNT 5 5050 LotusScript Extension ToolKit 5769LNT 6 5050 HiTest C API 5769LNT 7 5050 Advanced Services More Press Enter to continue F3 Exit Fll Display libraries releases F12 Cancel F19 Display trademarks E Figure 9 Display Software Resources DSPSFWRSC Note Once Domino for AS 400 has been installed on the AS 400 system it is known to the operating system as licensed program 5769 LNT This appears like an order number for an IBM Program Product However in this particular case it is not an order number at all because Domino for AS 400 is a Lotus product and Lotus has a different scheme of order numbers Note The base option as well as option 1 of the product appears in two lines in Figure 9 The reason for this is that the AS 400 system stores the executable objects differently from the language depe
279. e sure to read the Lotus Domino for AS 400 Release Notes A printed version is provided with the CD 118 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration ROM You may also refer to the online version on the CD ROM in form of a Domino database called readme nsf It is also a good idea to verify the if your CD contains the latest available version by consulting the Web at the following URL Http notes net notesua nsf Click on What s New and then on Lotus Domino for AS 400 4 6 2 Release Notes To update your installed Domino for AS 400 software to release 4 6 2 do the following 1 Use the Display Software Resources DSPSFWRSC command to determine which Domino for AS 400 options you have installed On the display locate 5769LNT The display shows one or more lines for each option of Domino for AS 400 that is installed on your system The option numbers appear in the Option column Write down each option number for Domino for AS 400 that appears on the display 2 Ensure that you have current backup copies of all the Domino servers on the AS 400 system where you plan to install the new release Back up both the Domino data directories and all the Domino libraries For information about backing up your Domino for AS 400 servers see Chapter 5 in Installing and Managing Domino for AS 400 3 End all Domino servers on the AS 400 system Use the End Domino Server ENDDOMSVR command or Operatio
280. eam of specialists from around the world working at the International Technical Support Organization Rochester Minnesota USA Wilfried Blankertz is an Advisory International Technical Support Specialist for the AS 400 system and a Certified Lotus Professional at the International Technical Support Organization Rochester Center He writes extensively and teaches IBM classes worldwide on all areas of AS 400 Groupware solutions and AS 400 Systems Management Before joining the ITSO in 1995 he worked as a systems engineer in IBM Germany supporting customers with the AS 400 system and its predecessor systems IBM System 3 32 34 36 and 38 for over 20 years Rosana Choruzy is a consultant who has been working for Thebas S A an IBM Business Partner and a Lotus Qualified Business Partner in Buenos Aires for more than 2 years She develops Lotus Notes applications for customers and internal usage provides customer support and plans customers business solutions with Domino technology She is a Certified Lotus Professional CLP in Application Development Her previous experience includes installing configuring and administering Domino servers on different platforms such as NT UNIX Novell and Windows Joanne Mindzora is a Consulting Market Support Representative in IBM Software Group currently responsible for worldwide technical marketing deliverables for Domino for AS 400 Joanne is both an IBM Certified I T Specialist in the groupwar
281. ectory Synchronization Configuration form you can choose whether you want to synchronize all person documents in the Domino address default or if you want to define criteria for synchronizing the Domino users by clicking the appropriate radio button Click the Next button If you did not click the radio button titled Define criteria for synchronizing the Domino users continue with step 48 226 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration 46 You should now see the form called Selection Criteria for Synchronizing Domino Users to AS 400 To define selection criteria follow the description given after Figure 107 on page 234 except that the base for the comparison is now one or more fields of the Domino Address Book rather than the AS 400 SDD 47 When you have finished defining the selection criteria click the Next button 48 You should now see the form titled Mail Related Information Figure 113 Specify whether or not mail addressing information should be automatically synchronized If you choose to maintain mail information you may need to provide additional information e For bi directional synchronization select either the AS 400 system distribution directory or the Domino Public Address Book as the master mail directory When an AS 400 system distribution directory entry and a Domino Public Address Book entry are synchronized for the first time the information in the mas
282. ectory for databases on the server for example NOTES DATA Saving the Entire AS 400 System After you install the Domino for AS 400 software product including its optional features you should save a copy of the product You should also save a copy of the product periodically for example when you update to a new release or apply fixes The following are two options for backing up the libraries and directories that contain the relatively static information for your Domino for AS 400 server If your AS 400 is already running other applications you probably already use one of these options End All Domino Servers The procedure described below requires that all AS 400 applications including all Domino servers have to be ended In order to avoid corrupted Notes databases you should end all Domino servers in a controlled manner before saving the system To do this on an AS 400 command line enter the following command ENDDOMSVR SERVER Myserver OPTION CTLD Chapter 3 Backup and Recovery 133 The advantage of using the command shown above is that it can also be coded as part of a CL program that ends the server automatically without operator intervention See also the example in Figure 60 on page 147 A convenient way to end all Lotus Domino for AS 400 servers manually provides the Work with Domino Servers WRKDOMSVR command which was introduced with version 4 6 2 of the product Ensure All Domino Jobs are Ended Bef
283. ecurity to keep all Domino databases within the default directory path for the Domino server With this approach you need to back up only the data directory and the directory that contains customization information QIBM UserData Lotus Notes Following is an example of the steps to back up the data directory for your Domino for AS 400 server and the directory with customization information Substitute the name of your tape device for TAPO1 and the name of your Domino server data directory for NOTES DATA 1 Start an AS 400 session with a user profile that has JOBCTL and SAVSYS special authorities 2 To ensure that you get a complete copy of your server you must stop the server before you start the backup operation Use the following command ENDDOMSVR SERVER servername where servername is the actual name of your Domino server 3 If you are using directory synchronization stop the directory synchronization jobs Use the following command call qnotesint qnndiend 4 To back up the directories use the Save Object SAV command Substitute your directory name for NOTES DATA SAV DEV qsys 1lib tap01 devd OBJ notes data QIBM UserData Lotus Notes Note If you already use option 21 or option 23 from the SAVE menu regularly you do not need to back up your Domino server separately 5 If you are using directory synchronization back up the AS 400 system distribution directory files so they are at the same
284. ed Mail Not Sent from OV 400 to Domino No Host Names in Domino Mail Log for MTA Entries Percent Sign in the User Part of the SMTP Address Problems With Sending Large Messages or Large Attachments Notes with Mixed Address Lists Not Sent to Every Recipients Chapter 5 Directory Synchronization What Is Directory Synchronization Why Store the Same Information in Multiple Directories The Concept of Directory Synchronization Directory Synchronization Concepts Prerequisites for Directory Synchronization Configuring Directory Synchronization Directory Synchronization Configuration Tips Directory Synchronization Concepts Directory Synchronization Configuration Steps Create New Directory Fields for the Directory Fields List Fields in the System Distribution Directory and Address Book Fields in the Domino Address Book Enabling Disabling or Suspending Directory Synchronization Starting Directory Synchronization Stopping or Suspending Directory Synchronization What Happens After Enabling Directory Synchronization 203 204 204 205 207 208 209 209 213 213 213 214 215 217 218 220 221 226 241 243 244 244 244 245 247 Coexistence of Directory Synchronization Replication and Shadowing Never Ending Updates Questions and Answers Problem Determination Chapter 6 The Graphical User Interface of Operations Navigator Setting Up a Workstation for Operations Navigator for D
285. ed PC Server These reasons include w Higher reliability and availability of an AS 400 system compared to a PC server W Consolidation of smaller capacity servers to a single highly scalable environment w Enhanced integration with AS 400 services and DB2 for AS 400 data w Announced lack of future support for Domino on your existing server implementation w Low total cost of ownership Since there are as many issues and approaches to migration as there are motivations and unique environments this chapter is not meant to be a step by step cookbook Rather it is a set of tips and techniques to assist you in planning and to educate you about common issues and pitfalls based on experience The AS 400 implementation of Lotus Domino on an AS 400 Integrated PC Server is officially called OS 400 Integration of Lotus Notes OS 400 V4R3 is the last AS 400 operating system release to support this implementation This specific Integrated PC Server platform offers some unique integration and functions in comparison to an outboard OS 2 Domino server or a Domino server installed on the new Integrated PC Server with Windows NT This uniqueness provides special migration challenges which will be discussed in this chapter separately from the general migration considerations Note In this chapter the phrase Integrated PC Server implementation refers to OS 400 Integration of Lotus Notes rather than a Domino server installed on an Integrated PC Server with
286. ed from user profile QNOTES to the user profile you were using when storing the modified file on the AS 400 system Therefore you must change the ownership back to QNOTES before you can start the server 7 You can use the Change Owner CHGOWN not CHGOBJOWN command to change ownership of an IFS object Type the following command in any AS 400 command line and press the Enter key chgown notes data server id qnotes 108 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Note that the entire process described above has to be performed after you have configured the additional server on the AS 400 system as described in Setting Up the Additional Server on the AS 400 on page 114 In contrast if you choose not to attach the ID file to the address book as described in the following section you need to perform some steps before configuring the server Store the ID in a File on Disk Without Password Protection If you do not attach the ID to the server document in the Public Address Book you have the advantage that no password needs to be specified when registering the additional server The disadvantage is that you need to copy the ID file from your workstation disk to the Domino data directory within the AS 400 IFS before configuring the server This procedure is much shorter compared to the one described earlier with the ID file attached to the address book 1 Before you can copy the new server ID file you need
287. ed since Saturday night On Monday night you back up everything that has changed since Sunday night On Tuesday night you back up everything that has changed since Monday night And so on The advantage to this strategy is that the size of your incremental backup is smaller both in media usage and duration The disadvantage is that recovery is more complex When you need to recover you need to use your tapes from your full backup and your tapes from each incremental backup Backing Up Changed Objects from Your Domino for AS 400 Server Following are examples for backing up changed objects from your Domino server Substitute your server directory name for NOTES DATA Substitute your tape device name for TAPO1 Backing Up All Changes Since Previous Full Backup To perform a nightly incremental backup of all changes that have occurred since that last full backup do the following 1 On Saturday evening perform a complete backup for example by using option 23 from the Save menu Make sure that you specify UPDHST YES on the SAV command so that the system updates the object information with the time and day of the most recent backup 2 On Sunday evening use the following command 140 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration 3 SAV DEV qsys 1lib tap01 devd OBJ notes data CHGPERIOD lastsave updhst yes On Monday evening use the following command SAV DEV qsys 1lib tap01 devd
288. ed the radio button Define criteria for synchronizing AS 400 users in the previous form as shown in Figure 100 on page 230 28 You don t need to remember all of the field names of the AS 400 system distribution directory Instead of entering the field name you can click Find and select the field see Figure 108 Then click OK As 7400 Directory Fields User Defined SMTP Userl IBM Defined Office phone IBM Defined Phone numb IBM Defined Text IBM Defined Job title IBM Defined User addres IBM Defined User Descrip IBM Defined UserID r Figure 108 Select AS 400 Directory Fields We have selected all entries where the address field contains the AS 400 systems name SYSTEMO1 as shown in Figure 109 Chapter 5 Directory Synchronization 223 29 A pull down dialog allows you to select the comparison operator In our example we chose Equal Directory Synchronization Configuration FORUMO1 wbl testsync nsf Lotus Notes Foose Domino for AS 400 Directory Synchronization Not Equal Less Than Greater Than Less Than or Equal Figure 109 Choosing the Logical Operator for the Selection Criteria 30 Type the comparison value SYSTEMO1 The comparison values are not case sensitive 31 You may add up to two more comparison conditions just by clicking the AND or the OR button If you do so an additional line of input fields appears Clicking the AND or the OR button again brings up
289. eded for Transferring the Data The speed of data transfer is certainly dependent on many factors like size and utilization of your AS 400 system the network speed the CPU speed of the existing server For an example with a small amount of data transferred between an Integrated PC Server and OS 400 see the FTP log shown in Figure 201 1 71 Browse NOTESLAB QCLSRC FTPOUTPUT 200 200 50 226 587 200 50 226 335 200 50 226 26 200 50 226 621 CODANDUBPWNE Exit l 6 Repeat Pia ol anarika 2 en that So the as sanaaa ee E N a ee OF Type set to I Image Binary PORT command successful Opening BINARY IMAGE mode data connection for HELPADMN NSF 5870592 Transfer complete 0592 bytes transferred in 8 793 seconds Transfer rate 667 646 KB se PORT command successful Opening BINARY IMAGE mod ata connection for INTERNET NSF 3351040 Transfer complete 1040 bytes transferred in 4 seconds Transfer rate 811 221 KB se PORT command successful Opening BINARY IMAGE mod connection for MIGRATE NSF 1261056 Transfer complete 1056 bytes transferred in 2 seconds Transfer rate 628 075 KB se PORT command successful Opening BINARY IMAGE mode data connection for SRVINST NSF 621056 b Transfer complete 056 bytes transferred in 0 894 seconds Transfer rate 695 040 KB sec F5 Refresh F9 Retrieve F10 Cursor F11 Toggle F12 Cancel find F24 More keys Figure 201 FTP Performance Bet
290. eed to restart your workstation now Configure the Connection to the AS 400 System Now that you have set up a dial up configuration you need to define the connection to the specific system or systems to which you want to communicate 1 Double click the icon My Computer and you will see the My Computer folder 2 Double click the icon Dial Up Networking 3 Double click Make New Connection 4 In the Make New Connection dialog Figure 167 assign a name to the definition you are creating here In our example we use PPP Connection to AS400 The name you assign may not contain any special characters Make New Connection Type a name for the computer you are dialing PPP Connection to A5400 Select a modem L Pcmcia 28 8 Int l Modem x Configure Lea Figure 167 New Connection Window 5 Click on Next and type the phone number of the modem attached to the AS 400 system 6 Click on Next Click on Finish A new icon is available in the window with the connection name you specified Right click on the icon and select Properties from the context menu Chapter 7 Dial Up Connectivity 291 PPP connection to AS400 12 x General 29 PPP connection to A5400 r Phone number Area code Telephone number fin z 2222 3333 Country code United States of America 1 z IV Use country code and area code r Connect using PF JPCMciA 28 8 Int l Modem x Configure Server Type
291. efined in the NOTES INI file by adding the following statement TCPIP_TcpIpAddress 0 10 1 2 217 1352 The number 10 1 2 217 is this server s IP address Note that 1352 is the standard port number used by Notes clients and servers to connect to a server The name TCPIP at the left of the underscore _ is the standard name for the TCP IP port within the NOTES INI file 90 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration The NOTES INI file was created when you performed the Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR command it is stored as a stream file containing ASCII text characters in the IFS directory you specified for the Data directory DTADIR parameter The NOTES INI file can be edited using one of the following methods e From an AS 400 interface use the new Edit File EDTF command Remember that in order to use this command you need to apply PTF SF45296 and follow special instructions see Apply and Activate the PTF to Support EDTF and DSPSTMP on page 41 Tip When you use the Work with Domino Servers WRKDOMSVR command you can use option 11 to change your current directory to the server s data directory After that enter the following command in the command line to edit the NOTES INI file EDTF notes ini You don t need to remember and type the full path of the data directory e From a Client Access 400 client having the IFS directory assigned as virtual drive mapped network drive
292. efined in the configuration You can only have one configuration enabled on your AS 400 at a time Configuration enabled When the configuration is disabled or suspended directory synchronization does not occur for this configuration A suspended configuration retains internal links pointers between the entries in the AS 400 directory and the Domino address book These links improve the startup performance if you later change the status to Chapter 5 Directory Synchronization 211 enabled Configuration suspended A disabled configuration does not retain those internal links For more information about internal links see Populate Directories below Configuration disabled Because the internal links are not cleared for a suspended configuration entries that have those links are reserved for use only by that configuration If you create another configuration that uses a different address book to update the AS 400 directory the reserved entries are not used in directory synchronization Therefore if the other address book has an entry that maps to a reserved entry in the AS 400 directory directory synchronization creates a second duplicate entry in the AS 400 directory Populate Directories When you first set up a configuration for directory synchronization the AS 400 directory and Domino address book probably contain different entries however you will need them to have the same entries when you start directory syn
293. efore we began our migration to Domino for AS 400 our Rochester site supported approximately 7 000 e mail users on 40 Domino PC servers with a total of 87 Intel processors i e some of the machines were multi processors 2 way 4 way etc WwW WwW 23 PC servers running OS 2 Warp SMP 17 AS 400 Integrated PC Servers After we completed the migration of our Notes e mail infrastructure to Domino for AS 400 our Rochester site is supporting approximately 7 000 e mail users with 3 AS 400 systems w WwW WwW WwW WwW WwW Model S40 12 way 10GB memory Up to 16 partitioned Domino servers on each AS 400 CPU utilization of approximately 25 700 800 users per partition 1 hot backup partition on each AS 400 72 For those new to Lotus Notes and Domino a QMU is roughly equivalent to an AS 400 cumulative PTF tape QMUs are available for download via the Web and provide fixes to known problems QMRs are delivered on a scheduled basis once per quarter to customers who buy Lotus software subscription for Domino and they often include new function as well as fixes 396 Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization Administration As the migration progressed our site initially used more than 10 partitioned Domino servers on each of the 3 AS 400 s After the mail migration was complete we consolidated logical servers as well as physical processors and currently have 14 partitioned Domino servers spread across the 3 system
294. egistered Those entries are automatically modified specifically for the Integrated PC Server implementation of Domino This is particularly important if the SMTP MIME MTA is in use on the Integrated PC Server When mail integration is installed on the Integrated PC Server the behavior of the ADDNTSUSR command is changed to add specific user defined fields to the System Distribution Directory entries If you have Notes users who were registered using the ADDNTSUSR command and you now wish to migrate them to Domino for AS 400 some AS 400 System Distribution Directory entry changes need to be made in order for those users to successfully receive SMTP mail These changes can be made interactively using the Work With Directory Entries WRKDIRE command Alternatively they can be made in batch from a CL program using the Change Directory Entries CHGDIRE command Your CL program would need to read through the System Distribution Directory to identify which user entries must be modified and then use CHGDIRE to modify each appropriate entry The required changes are Ww Change the Mail Service Level from 9 other to 4 Lotus Domino w Edit the user defined fields to blank out the contents of all the fields for which the first part of the name begins with QYN and the second part of the name is QNOTES If you want to change a directory entry interactively from an AS 400 interface enter the Work With Directory Entries WRKDIRE command on any AS 400
295. ely For example to install the base software type rstlicpgm licpgm 5769LNT dev savf savf mylib dominob 8 If necessary use the Change User Profile CHGUSRPRF command to set the locale for the QNOTES user profile chgusrprf usrprf qnotes locale newlocale Note For information about setting the locale parameter see National Language Considerations on page 55 Removing a Domino for AS 400 Server Unlike the Domino implementation on some other platforms you do not have to delete the entire Lotus Domino for AS 400 software if you just want to remove the server instance Use the Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR command to delete a Domino server from your AS 400 system Caution Deleting a Domino server also deletes the data directory for the server The data directory contains server files such as the Public Address Book and all Notes databases created by users Before removing a server you should make sure that you end the server in an orderly manner otherwise locks on one or more Notes databases may prevent the data directory from being deleted Also if you enabled directory synchronization for that server make sure that you disable it before you end the server To remove the server called AcmeDS1 from your AS 400 system type the following command on any AS 400 command line and press Enter CFGDOMSVR acmeds1l REMOVE Note Removing a server does not remove the Domino for AS 400 product from your system 12
296. em Configure Lotus Domino on the AS 400 system Install and configure Lotus Notes on the PC workstation Start Lotus Domino on the AS 400 system Start the QMSF subsystem on the AS 400 system For this step to work you may need to end the QMSF subsystem and then restart it Steps for Installing and Configuring Facsimile Support for AS 400 Before using the Facsimile Support for AS 400 product you need to install configure and customize the product to meet the needs of your business The following steps explain how to install and prepare the Facsimile Support for AS 400 product 1 Use the Restore Licensed Program RSTLICPGM command to install the Facsimile Support for AS 400 licensed product 5798 TBY on your AS 400 system For information on installing this product see Chapter 2 Managing the Facsimile Support for AS 400 Product on the AS 400 System in the Facsimile Support for AS 400 Installation Guide SC41 0654 00 If you have an AS 400 9401 Model 150 the Facsimile Support for AS 400 product is pre installed Define each fax controller to the AS 400 system To do so complete the following steps e Use the Create Fax Description CRTFAXD command to create a description that identifies the fax controller on the AS 400 system You 367 must specify the LINKTYPE parameter LAN TDLC FAX or ASYNC e For details on the CRTFAXD command see the Facsimile Support for AS 400 Programmer s Guide and Reference
297. ent to use Loopback Interface Tip Make sure to enter the distinguished name full hierarchical name for both servers in the connection document In our example that is AcmeDS1 Acme and AcmeDS2 OrgA rather than AcmeDS1 and AcmeDS2 Also both server names should be part of the LocalDomainServers or OtherDomainServers group Lotus suggests to define the servers group as Access Control List Only rather than Multi Purpose Not following these suggestions may result in the servers not replicating and you will see the following error message in LOG NSF Access Control is Set in names nsf to Not Allow Replication from AcmeDS1 names nsf Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 101 It is likely that you will want each of the servers to be able to establish a connection To do this you need a second connection document to define the direction from AcmeDS2 to AcmeDS1 If both servers were part of the same domain you still need two connection documents however they would be in the same Public Address Book If the server is part of a different organization or different Domino domains you also need to e Cross certify their IDs e Add an adjacent domain document on both servers e Specify the other server mail domain as an adjacent mail domain name This document makes it possible to route mail to the specified domain via the server connection document Configure an Additional Server in an Existing Domino Domain If yo
298. ents and fields you deleted or blanked out With Domino for AS 400 4 6 2 making this change involves rerunning CFGDOMSVR with Replace Configuration NO and along with specifying the new parameter entering again the other parameters that were specified the first time CFGDOMSVR was run To avoid reconfiguration of anything except adding the SMTP MIME MTA you should specify OPTION FIRST and specify paths to the id files regardless of how the server was initially configured Beginning with Domino for AS 400 4 6 3 the Change Domino Server CHGDOMSVR command can be used for changing the configuration of a Domino server previously set up Initially however it is only available in English End and restart AS 400 Mail Server Framework ENDMSF and STRMSF After setting up a Domino for AS 400 server that includes the SMTP MIME MTA you must reset the AnyMail function once by stopping and then restarting it Restart the Domino for AS 400 server Open in edit mode and save even if you make no changes the newly created global domain document foreign domain document and connection document Do the same with the server document At minimum it is important to verify the information in the new configuration documents In the server document specifically inspect the Routing Tasks field and the information in the Internet Message Transfer Agent SMTP MTA section Under some conditions it is a requirement to edit and save the documen
299. er SYSTEMA A 041967 gt gt CFGDOMSVR SERVER AcmeDS1 OPTION FIRST DTADIR Notes AcmeDS1 ORG ACME ADM Blankertz Wilfried N 6 TIMEZONE CST DAYSAVTIME NO ADVSRV PA RTITION Directory created Object changed Object changed Object changed Link added Link added Link added Link added Link added Object name is a directory Object copied More Press Enter to continue raqexit F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F17 Top F18 Bottom Figure 17 Display the Job Log After Performing CFGDOMSVR 9 Since the job log shows very detailed information starting with the time you entered the command it is usually helpful to show the most recent messages first by pressing F18 Bottom which is Shift F6 on most keyboards The following figure shows the job log after a successful configuration Display All Messages System SYSTEMA Job QPADEVO0007 User WBL Number 041967 Object copied Object copied Object copied Object copied Object copied Object copied Object copied 389 objects copied 0 objects failed Routing entry sequence number 1 already exists Routing entry with compare value of ANY already exists Entry exists for job queue DOMINOO7 in library QUSRNOTES Object changed Object changed Command CFGDOMSVR ended successfully Bottom Press Enter to continue C F3 Exit F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F17 Too F18 Bottom iy Figure 18 Display the Job Log After Performing CFGDO
300. er Notes user in the same or connected Notes domain as well as those for the users of OS 400 based mail POP3 or OfficeVision for AS 400 we can look at the reverse situation how you can send mail from each of the two mail applications to the other That is how you can specify a foreign mail address Again we look first at the Notes users when sending mail to OV 400 users and then we describe the opposite direction Specifying SMTP Addresses When Sending Mail From Notes When a Notes user sends mail to another Notes user the address to be specified has the following form Common Name Organizational Unit Organization Notes Domain Organization and Organizational Unit can be omitted as long the name of the recipient is unique within the public address book Likewise you can also use only the short name first or last name instead of the full common name provided that name is unique The domain name which may or may not be identical to the organization can also be omitted if the recipient is in the same Notes domain or an entry for that user exists in the public or cascaded address book Each name part can contain spaces Now an SMTP address has the general form User_Id SMTPDomain If you want to send mail to an SMTP address Notes must be able to identify the address as a foreign mail address The rule for this is e The address must contain an sign and on the right side of the sign there must be at least one period
301. er shutdown 04 22 98 01 26 54 AM Periodic full text indexer starting performing hourly full text indexing 04 22 98 01 26 56 AM Periodic full text indexer terminating 04 22 98 01 31 18 AM The Administration Request database admin4 nsf on vieasfsc wrkshp is currently a wildcard replica 04 22 98 01 31 18 AM The Administration Process on AcmeDS1 wrkshp will not work until an Administration Server has been designated for this domain s Public Address Book Enter a Domino subcommand gt F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Print F9 Retrieve Fii Top F18 Bottom F21 Command line a Figure 28 Work with Domino Console WRKDOMCSL The messages shown in Figure 28 are probably different from those you will see on your system What you will see are the most recent messages logged by the Domino server If you started the server for the very first time it is a good idea to look at all the messages beginning at the point when you started the server 3 Press the F17 Top key for most workstations this is Shift F5 to see the oldest messages of the Domino console as shown in Figure 29 1 Note that this is not an AS 400 job log Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 79 J 04 04 gt Lotus Domino Copyright c 22 98 02 22 98 02 22 98 02 22 98 02 ACME COM 22 98 02 22 98 02 1 22 98 02 22 98 02 22 98 02 Work with Domino Console N Previous subcomman
302. ers Ea lea T eee Internet mail packages for more values Advanced services Ga ean ieren e for more values F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F3 Exit F24 More kevs Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR notes acmeds2 server id YES YES NO YES YES NO YES YES NO NONE NONE HTTP NONE NONE NNTP NONE NONE ALL NONE NONE ALL F12 Cancel F13 How IMAP LDAP PARTITION Bottom to use this display y Figure 52 CFGDOMSVR for Additional Server 3 Prompt Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 113 Keyword Description ADSVRID Additional Server ID ID file NAB specifies the server ID file is retrieved from the Name and Address Book for the Domino domain in which the new server was registered Otherwise specify the path name that identifies the server ID file to be used for the new server Example notes data server id Default NAB ID file password For the ID file s password specify the password that is associated with the new server when it is created A password is required only if the new server ID file is password protected Remember if the ID file is attached to the server document in the Public Address Book it must be password protected LOGREPEVT Log replication events Specifies whether the replication events should be logged in the Notes log LOG NSF for this Domino server Default YES LOGSSNEVT Log client session events Specifies whe
303. ers and software for example a North American ID file server or user cannot use the International software Because of United States government restrictions on encryption technology it is illegal to take a North American license or user ID file outside of North America When you travel outside of North America you must use an international license Domino Documentation The Domino server and Notes workstation come with documentation databases and many printed books for specialized tasks and individual situations The following list will help you determine which documentation to read Note Lotus Domino for AS 400 is a Lotus product which means that all the books directly related to this product are published by Lotus and cannot be ordered from IBM Documentation about the AS 400 system that is not related to Lotus Domino has to be ordered from IBM Domino and Notes Administration e Installing and Managing Domino for AS 400 Lotus Part No 12999 also available as Domino for AS 400 Help database AS400HLP NSF provides instructions for installing and managing Domino for AS 400 e Lotus Domino 4 6 Documentation Roadmap provides an overview of Domino administration documentation Chapter 1 Overview of Lotus Domino for AS 400 25 e Lotus Domino 4 6 Planning the Domino System provides information for planning deploying and integrating a Domino system in all types of organizations It also discusses Internet intranet and extranet str
304. erver you may also want to install additional software on your AS 400 system The Edit File EDTF Command The Edit File EDTF command is an AS 400 user interface editor for stream files residing in the OS 400 Integrated File System IFS for example the Domino initialization file NOTES INI This command is provided in the separately ordered PTF SF45296 that is it is not part of any CUM tape for OS 400 V4R2 The appropriate PTF for OS 400 V4R3 is SF49052 Note See the special instructions needed to implement this PTF the Apply and Activate the PTF to Support EDTF and DSP STMF on page 41 Operations Navigator If you plan to use the graphical user interface Operations Navigator to configure or administer Domino for AS 400 servers you need to install the following AS 400 licensed products or product options on your AS 400 system e OS 400 Hosts servers option 12 of 5769 SS1 e AS 400 Client Access for Windows 95 NT 4 0 5769 XD1 e AS 400 Client Access 5763 XD1 V3R1M3 Cumulative Service Pack Supported Networks and Protocols The Domino server for AS 400 uses the TCP IP network protocol to connect to Notes clients or other Notes or Domino servers Supported Notes Workstations The Domino for AS 400 server can connect to any Lotus Notes client or Domino server running on any operating systems supporting TCP IP Below are some examples e AIX 4 1 5 or 4 2 1 e HP UX 10 20 e Sun Solaris Intel Edition 2 5 1 or Sun SPARC
305. erver Description 360 CRTDIR 350 351 cumulative PTF package minimum for V4R2 38 CVTNAMSMTP 188 198 395 Cyrillic Character Set for SMTP MTA 179 D Data Directory 64 70 137 partitioned servers 91 Database backing up 143 recovery 151 Database Integration on IPCS 381 DataPropagator 16 DateOrder 58 Daylight savings time 66 116 DB2 400 17 20 dbcache flush 147 DECS 382 delete Domino software 128 Demo amp Evaluation package 39 Destination domain 176 Dial on Demand 324 Directory customization information 137 data 137 product 137 Directory shadowing 16 IPCS 381 directory synchronization 53 backing up 139 concepts 215 configuration 215 disabling or suspending 245 Ending 246 field mapping 215 key mapping 215 populate 215 Restarting 246 stopping 245 what happens when enabled 247 Why to use 192 196 Display Stream File 134 Distribution Attributes 170 DNN 66 110 DNS 47 48 Documentation 26 domain 48 60 62 63 66 70 106 115 Domino 48 60 62 63 66 70 106 107 109 111 115 119 163 SMTP 163 164 TCP IP 48 66 163 164 Domain name 66 Domain Name System 48 Domino domain 48 60 62 63 66 70 106 107 109 111 115 119 163 Domino Console changing the size 130 Domino Directory 114 Domino domain 106 Domino Enterprise Connection Services 382 Domino for AS 400 16 Domino Jobs ensure all are ended 138 Domino Named Network DNN 110 Domino so
306. ervers WRKDOMSVR command or Operations Navigator Once you start your new Domino for AS 400 server your users should be able to connect to it from Lotus Notes clients without making any changes on the client workstation Server Consolidation Process Outline The server consolidation method offers the benefits of minimized down time during the migration and as the name suggests offers the potential for a smaller number of servers at the completion of the process It involves a new server identity as well as the associated administrative challenges to manage impact to the users Note The name server consolidation method is used to denote migration to a server with a different identity from the original A true consolidation of multiple servers will involve using either the server transplantation or server consolidation process to migrate the first of the identified servers to Domino for AS 400 Migration from the other existing servers to that same server can then be accomplished using the server consolidation process outline except for step 2 since the target Domino for AS 400 server will already exist at that point Chapter 8 Migration from Other Domino Platforms 349 The planning and copying phases are identical to the server transplantation process Beyond that there are significant differences in the procedure and user impact The overall process is as follows Identify the Domino databases to be migrated 2 Configure a new Dom
307. ery careful to avoid confusion between the true production files and the ones created by the configuration process that are essentially invalid in your live environment You would also need to remember that FTP does not automatically replace existing files of the same name in the target directory It also does not notify you that a file of the same name exists In order to use the original Public Address Book rather than one automatically generated you would need to overtly specify the replace parameter on the FTP command Thus for simplicity and control it is usually safer to manually create the Notes data directory before copying the files and configuring the new Domino server and use it as the repository for the ID files as well as the Public Address Book Below are the steps to create the directory structure in the root of the AS 400 Integrated File System Our example uses notes data which is the default for most Domino servers Note The path delimiter for AS 400 Integrated File System is a forward slash not a backslash Chapter 8 Migration from Other Domino Platforms 333 It is best to use the same naming convention as your existing Domino server An exception to this rule is if there is already a Domino for AS 400 server on the target AS 400 system that already uses the existing naming convention and this new server is another partitioned server or you are planning to implement partitioned servers in the future In this case w
308. es 2 Create Fax Profile 3 Edit Fax Profile Selection or command gt F3 Exit F4 Prompt F9 Retrieve F12 Cancel F13 Information Assistant V F16 Svstem main menu p Figure 225 Fax Profiles Menu Select option 1 to Work with Fax Profiles and press the Enter key The Work with Fax Profiles display appears Locate the Fax Profile that you want to modify or press F6 to create a new fax profile In this example we modify the PKENNEDY profile that has already been created Select 2 edit next to the profile that you want to edit and press Enter The Edit Fax Profile display appears as shown in Figure 226 382 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Bait Fax Profile A Type choices press Enter Profile Information Profile name e PKENNEDY Description Pam Kennedy AOMANESEMAEOR e ie te Yenta Lata Ye va HE 1 Yes 2 No Bnvaronments 9 Fue Ad Ae teh Eee Aude ate 22 1 Basic 2 Enhanced ROUGING COAG oe eer tee tote tee ee ADOT Cover Page Information Create cover page 41 1 Yes 2 No Fax title From lines 40 0 6 4 4 oe 4 es Pam Kennedy Comment line Printer FLLS cear e gre gh ee oera OP Pet QPFFCVP Name Ti MAYS Cs lew nes chase inet heya cele ley hecdin alee cele we QFAX QFAX CURLIB Name FaF xit F12 Cancel More yw Figure 226 Edit Fax Profile On the Edit Fax Profile display input or modify the Routing code field In our example
309. es of a specific type in the MAIL subdirectory use the following command SAV DEV qsys 1lib tap01 devd OBJ notes data mail nsf e To back up a specific user s mail database such as GNELSON s mail database use the following command SAV DEV qsys 1lib tap01 devd OBJ notes data mail gnelson nsf Save Specific Databases You might want to back up a specific Domino database to tape for several reasons For example e To create a backup copy before you make programming changes or test a new agent e To create an archive copy at the end of an accounting period To back up a specific database or group of databases from your Domino for AS 400 server do the following 1 Start an AS 400 session with a user profile that has JOBCTL and SAVSYS special authorities 2 Ensure that no one is using the database You want a copy at a known point when no changes are occurring to the database 3 Mount a tape for the backup operation Use the Save Object SAV command for the database For example to back up a database called CUSTINF NSF in the NOTES DATA directory use the following command Substitute your tape device name for TAPO1 SAV DEV qsys 1lib tap01 devd OBJ notes data custinf nsf Incremental Backup AS 400 provides the capability to back up only objects that have changed either since a specific date and time or since the last backup operation This type of Chapter 3 Backup and Recovery 139 backu
310. ess etc as shown in Figure 95 Chapter 5 Directory Synchronization 213 A default set of common field mappings is shipped with the product for example name address telephone company You can change the existing mappings add other mappings to the default set or delete mappings from this set The field mappings in each configuration must have at least one key field A key field is used to identify find directory entries in the other directory It allows directory synchronization to distinguish one AS 400 directory entry or Domino Person Document from another In the default field mappings the last name field is a key field However be sure that you have enough key mappings to clearly distinguish all entries For example you may need to add key mappings for the first name and middle initial to distinguish entries that have the same last name Only those user entries that produce a value in the key fields are mapped A value must exist in every key field in order to be synchronized with the other directory Key AS 400 Field Mappings Domino Field LSTNAM LastName x FSTNAM FirstName MIDNAM Middlelnitial FSTNAM LSTNAM FullName TITLE JobTitle CMPNY CompanyName DEPT Department LOC Location TELNBR1 OfficePhoneNumber TELNBR2 PhoneNumber FAXTELNBR OfficeFAXPhoneNumber ADDRI StreetAddress ADDR2 City ADDR3 State ADDR4 Zip TEXT Comment Figure 95 Default Field Mappings for Directory Synchronization You can have
311. ew e Turkish JP Japanese ISO 2022 JP EUC JP ShiftJIS CN Chinese GB 2312 KR Korean KSC5601 EUC KR ISO 2022 KR For more information refer to section Language parameters in chapter 4 of the book Extending the Domino System or the document Details Editing the Server document for the SMTP MTA in the Domino Administration Help database doc HELPADMN NSF Restart the AnyMail Mail Server Framework After you set up a Domino server that includes the SMTP MIME MTA you must reset the AnyMail function one time by stopping it and then restarting it 1 You use the End Mail Server Framework ENDMSF command to stop the AnyMail function Enter the following AS 400 command on an AS 400 command line ENDMSF 2 You use the Start Mail Server Framework STRMSF command to start the AnyMail function again Enter the following AS 400 command STRMSF 3 It is a good idea to verify that the AnyMail function was actually started Enter the following command to display a list of jobs WRKUSRJOB gqmsf Verify that there is at least one job listed 172 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Start the MTA on the Domino Server There are two ways of starting the SMTP MIME MTA on the AS 400 system after it is installed and configured e Manually from a Domino console e Automatically as an add in Server task Starting the MTA Manually You can start the MTA by issuing the following command
312. ew Line Properties Connection Tab 8 On the Link tab specify the maximum line speed supported by your hardware New Line Properties System01 gt Allowinonseturnto zera invert Moder fe cop AvE Figure 153 New Line Properties Link Tab Chapter 7 Dial Up Connectivity 281 9 Click the Modem tab and select the appropriate modem from the Name pull down box If you are using an IBM 7857 017 modem a customized modem information entry may need to be created Refer to Special considerations with the 7857 017 modem on page 308 for details New Line Properties System01 Figure 154 New Line Properties Modem Tab 10 Click the OK button to close the New Line Properties box and return to the Point to Point Profiles Properties box 282 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration 11 Click the TCP IP Settings tab and fill in the necessary information New Point to Point Profile Properties System01 0 1 23 f Dynamical assan 2 Figure 155 Point to Point Profile Screen TCP IP Settings Tab Local IP address Select JP address and specify the address of the Domino for AS 400 server to be contacted with this connection In our example the local LAN address 10 1 2 3 is used Remote IP address Select JP address and specify an address for the calling system or client In our example we specified 10 1 2 200 for the client Note The remote IP address specified i
313. ext USRID This parameter consists of two mandatory parts called user ID and address NGB and DOMINO in our example You can freely choose the values for this parameter provided that combination is unique within the system distribution directory It is a common standard to use the AS 400 system name as the address for local users however since a Domino user cannot use OS 400 based mail we chose the word DOMINO as the address to easily distinguish Domino users from OfficeVision and other OS 400 based mail users SYSNAME For the system name we purposely did not choose the AS 400 system name Doing so would require an AS 400 user profile to be associated with the directory entry but in order to use solely Domino for AS 400 there is no need to have an AS 400 user profile USRD The description of the entry is mandatory even though the value of this parameter is not used in this context For documentation purposes it is a good idea to enter the person s name as shown in our example LSTNAM FSTNAM An entry in the AS 400 system distribution directory does not require the person s real first and last name to be entered but there are good reasons to do so e If you are planning to use directory synchronization you need a key field by default this is the first name and the last name e An OV 400 user sending mail can search the system distribution directory for the recipient s real name e You may want to document what person e
314. f directories is indicated by slashes not by backslashes Example notes data ORG Organization Specifies the organization name for the Domino server Most likely this is the name of your company If you are setting up the first server as in this example you should not choose the name of an existing Notes organization here Example Acme 1 The contents of parameter OPTION controls which additional parameters will be prompted after you press the Enter key For this example we chose FIRST that is a complete new Domino domain will be created 62 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Keyword Description ADM Administrator This parameter has five parts The first name middle initial last name password and minimum password length for the administrator ID to be created Last name Specifies the last name of the person who is the administrator for this Domino server This name will appear in the Server document in the Address Book access control list ACL and in the USER ID file created in the data directory if GEN was specified for ADMID First name Middle initial Password Use the Password value to specify the administrator s password This will also be the password protecting the certifier ID file CERT ID This password is case sensitive Minimum password length 2 Press the PgDn key to see and fill in the next set of parameters in the prompt
315. f the Notes client administration interface Administrators also have the unique ability to edit the server s NOTES INI file from anywhere in the world using the Operations Navigator interface As long as you have access to the AS 400 you have complete control of your servers Try making a TCP IP change to a remote system on any other platform this is a real AS 400 advantage In fact we administer the Domino for AS 400 environment from our desks in buildings 34 of a mile from the physical server location The experiment in our test kitchen has been highly successful and we are happy to share our recipes with you our customers via briefings papers and contract services Stay tuned for new recipes on DB2 400 integration as we complete the migration of our non mail applications Hopefully we ve given you plenty of food for thought and have whet your appetite to enjoy the fruits of a successful implementation of Domino for AS 400 in your own environment 404 Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization Administration Special Notices This publication is intended to help you deploy Domino for AS 400 Release 4 6 References in this publication to IBM products programs or services do not imply that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM operates Any reference to an IBM product program or service is not intended to state or imply that only IBM products programs or services may be used Any functio
316. fic information about Chapter 5 Directory Synchronization 205 the user such as last name first name middle initial telephone number postal mailing address and e mail address AS 400 System Distribution Directory The AS 400 system distribution directory SDD is similar to Domino s Public Address Book in the sense that it contains entries to describe people using the AS 400 system s mail capabilities excluding Domino as well as information about mail recipients on other systems including Domino for AS 400 For example an AS 400 directory entry contains fields for the user s last name first name middle initial telephone number postal mailing address and information on routing e mail An entry in the AS 400 distribution directory is required in order to use AS 400 e mail capabilities Only one SDD exists on any AS 400 system Field Mappings Because the fields in the Domino Public Address Book contain the same type of user information as the fields in the AS 400 system distribution directory you can define relationships mappings between specific fields in the Domino address book and the AS 400 directory Each field mapping is a link between a specific field in the Domino address book and a specific field in the AS 400 directory During directory synchronization the field mappings determine which information from the source directory or address book should go into which field in the target directory or address book Th
317. following steps 1 From the Windows desktop choose Start Settings Printers 2 From the Printers window double click Add Printer 3 The Add Printer Wizard appears To begin installing your printer click Next Choose Network Printer and click Next From the Add Printer Wizard window click Browse In the Browse for Printer window double click the AS 400 system that you want to print to A list of printers appears Double click QFQFS4PRTD If a message appears click OK If no message appears go to the next step 9 In the Printer window a name appears in the format xxxx qfqfs4prtd xxxx is equal to the system name to which you are connecting 378 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration 10 The Add Printer Wizard window appears Under the Manufacturers heading select IBM Under the Printers heading select IBM AFP Facsimile Support 400 and click Next 11 On the Add Printer Wizard window click Next Return to the Printers window and verify that the IBM AFP Facsimile Support 400 printer is added Be patient as this may take some time You can close this window Now you can fax Lotus Notes output Routing Received Faxes to Domino for AS 400 You can use Enhanced Services routing to route faxes that are received through Facsimile Support for AS 400 to Domino for AS 400 If you have the necessary hardware you can use the Transmitting Subscriber Identifier TSI or routing tones
318. for the first time Any parameters may be modified except those on the General tab If the General tab is not configured correctly you must create a new line description New Line Properties System01 71x General Connection Link Modem Security The settings on this page affect the settings available on the rest of the property pages Name pom PPP Description m Hardware resource Interface type Connection type Switched line answer Framing Asynchronous C Synchronous T Inactivity timeout 15 65535 fi 5 seconds Cancel Help Figure 151 New Line Properties General Tab 6 On the page with the General tab select one of the listed Hardware resources The Interface type must be RS232 V 24 The PPP protocol supports either synchronous or asynchronous framing depending on your modem type and setup Since framing type must be the same for both client and server and asynchronous modems are typically more common with client workstations our example uses Asynchronous framing If you wish to keep the line active during a longer idle time period you may specify an higher inactivity timeout value higher than the default of 15 seconds 280 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration 7 On the Connection tab accept the default values as shown in Figure 152 New Line Properties System01 Renate GrsWen timecut somi z Figure 152 N
319. formed for the new server Note that when you configure an additional server on your AS 400 system no administrator will be registered as opposed to configuring a first server Minimum password length Specify 0 zero to allow you to clear the password later This also allows you to keep the password field in this panel empty if you select not to attach the ID file to the address book see step 14 Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 105 Click the Other icon You will see the dialog box for the Other options for registering the new server as shown in Figure 49 IR egister Servers Domino Skrver to support Redbook Development Wiled Brkt 12 Server Title This long title will be visible in the Public Address Book to identify the server 13 Network A Domino Named Network DNN defines the network to be used by the Domino server 14 Store Server ID You have the choice of storing the new server ID as an attachment to the server document in the Public Address Book or in a file on your workstation s disk drive or both If you do not want to specify a password deselect the check mark for In Address Book The default disk for storing the ID file is the diskette drive A If you want to store the file on your hard drive click Set ID File Previously that is with Domino Release 4 5 and earlier DNN was called Notes Named Network NNN 106 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installati
320. ftware delete 128 Domino Doc 349 DOMINOSMTP 172 208 209 data area 172 174 DRT 202 DSPSTMF 134 E editing notes ini 96 End Domino Server 77 Domino Subsystem 78 147 ENDDOMSVR 77 ENDMSF 373 ENDSBS 78 147 Enterprise Server License 18 Environment variable AS400_DOMSVR_RESTART 134 NOTES_AS400_STSDEBUG 134 Environment Variables 129 Error 425 can t open data connection 353 Error on Listen function 96 99 EUC JP 179 EUC KR 179 EverGreen 400 324 Examples backing up changes objects 144 backing up mail 143 recovering changed objects 151 recovering mail 150 Exit console command 78 F F3 Work with Domino Console 78 Feature not installed 204 File Server Input Output Processor FSIOP 15 File Transfer Protocol 87 first server definition 107 Foreign Domain document 175 FSNOTES_TCPIP 380 FTP 87 88 94 112 113 automating 355 Full Text Indexes migrating 346 fully qualified host name 164 G Global Domain 173 Global Domain document 173 Global Domain name 173 Greek Character Set for SMTP MTA 179 H Hebrew Character Set for SMTP MTA 179 host name fully qualified 164 173 Host based connections 286 HOSTS 49 example for Windows 49 HOSTS SAM 49 ID files 86 IFS 136 354 IMAP clients 15 IMSGCNYV 202 Incremental backup 144 Integrated File System 136 Integrated PC Server 15 343 International English 25 Internet domain suffix 173 174 Internet Mai
321. g an asynchronous line description e A SLIP connection using a PPP line description 274 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration A PPP connection always requires a PPP line description while SLIP connection can use either a PPP or an asynchronous line description A PPP line description can only be used in combination with a PPP capable communication adapter For information about required hardware see the section entitled Prerequisites for Using PPP on an AS 400 System on page 288 An alternative to a direct connection between client and server is the use of an external dial concentrator to funnel multiple dial connections to one direct AS 400 LAN adapter These devices may offer additional value in terms of routing capabilities and enhanced security options Two examples of supported dial concentrators are the IBM 2210 Nways Multiprotocol Router and the Digi PortServer II When setting up such a device two separate connections must be configured one between the client workstations and the dial concentrator and the other between the dial concentrator and the AS 400 Below are some guidelines for the basic configuration of PPP and SLIP connectivity types This information is meant to be a roadmap based on test cases not a comprehensive reference manual For further details on PPP and SLIP please refer to the OS 400 TCP IP Configuration and Reference V4R2 SC41 5420 01 and AS 400 Client Access for Windows
322. gement of user directory information However as with any powerful tool be sure that you take the time to understand its capabilities and to plan carefully so that the integrity of your directories is maintained Be sure to This can be the Public Address Book PAB or any other address book based on the same pubnames ntf template 204 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration consider how you are already using other similar functions For example you may already be using one or more of the following capabilities e Shadowing AS 400 system distribution directories between multiple AS 400 systems e Shadowing the AS 400 system distribution directory to a Notes or Domino server on an AS 400 Integrated PC Server e Replicating the Domino Public Address Book between Domino servers For more information about managing the AS 400 system distribution directory see the AS 400 book SNA Distribution Services SC41 5410 Information on the Domino Public Address Book can be found in many places of the Domino Administration Help helpadmn nsf database especially Chapter 3 in Getting Started with Domino which is also available as a printed book You can set up directory synchronization through the Directory Sync Configuration database NNDIRSYC NSF on the Domino server Messages related to directory synchronization are written to the Directory Synchronization Log database NNDILOG NSF If you have more than
323. gt vACMEDS1 TestSync nsf LastName Middlelnitial JobTitle CompanyName Department Location OfficePhoneNumber TELNBR1 PhoneNumber TELNBR2 OfficeFAPhoneNumber FAXTELNBR StreetAddress ADDR ADDR2 ADDR3 ADDR TEXT Figure 111 View Field Mappings for Domino to AS 400 Synchronization To create a new AS 400 to Domino field mapping definition do the following Chapter 5 Directory Synchronization 225 37 38 Highlight a field mapping where you want to add a mapping by clicking on it Click either Insert New Mapping Before or Insert New Mapping After and you will see the form shown in Figure 112 Mapping Domino Fields to AS 400 Field Lotus Notes hal Enter Domino address book fields or press Add Domino Fields iy 2 Gj Figure 112 Mapping Domino Fields to AS 400 Field 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 You will now proceed as was described in the sections following Figure 104 on page 232 except that you now define the mapping from Domino fields to AS 400 fields rather than vice versa After adding the field names click Save and then click Close Back in the view called Field mappings Domino to AS 400 as shown in Figure 111 on page 236 press F9 to refresh the view Click the Return button to return to the form called Domino to AS 400 Directory Synchronization Configuration as shown in Figure 110 on page 236 Back in the Domino to AS 400 Dir
324. gure it Directory synchronization is also similar to directory shadowing which allows you to synchronize the system distribution directories on two AS 400 systems Note that directory synchronization only updates the directory information it does not affect information stored in the AS 400 user profile or the Notes user ID file such as the password or object authorities To determine whether directory synchronization is right for you consider how you plan to use each directory Here are some points to consider e Many AS 400 system functions use the AS 400 system distribution directory You may have more entries in the directory than you realize For example Client Access and AS 400 OfficeVision users always need to be included in the system distribution directory Use the Work Directory Entry WRKDIRE command to check the list of entries in the system distribution directory e Your AS 400 system distribution directory may already include entries for people in other locations with whom you exchange electronic mail By synchronizing directories you make it easy for your Domino users to also send mail to those people e The Public Address Book on your Domino server may contain a large amount of information Perhaps it was replicated from another Domino server Directory synchronization can make this information available to AS 400 users Domino for AS 400 directory synchronization is a powerful function that can help simplify the mana
325. h Notes user who should be able to receive OV 400 or SMTP mail The easiest way to do so is to use Domino for AS 400 Directory Synchronization Chapter 4 Mail Integration Through the SMTP MIME MTA 165 If you want to return to the original behavior you have to delete the data area by entering this command DLTDTAARA DTAARA QUSRNOTES DOMINOSMTP Open and Save the MTA Configuration Documents at Least Once For internal reasons you should open the global domain and the server document at least once for edit and then save without changing anything using a Notes client before starting the SMTP MIME MTA to ensure all values in those documents are actually used by the MTA It is also a good idea to verify and understand the settings in the other documents created by the Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR command for you Provided the OS 400 TCP IP and SMTP configuration was done correctly no manual changes are needed to be able to exchange mail between the Domino server and OS 400 based mail for example OfficeVision 400 Depending on your network environment there may be reasons to change some of the settings of the MTA configuration for example e The MTA should accept incoming mail for more than one SMTP domain e Outgoing mail should be restricted to specific SMTP domains e You want the Notes domain name to appear on the right side of the sign The Global Domain Document The Global Domain document is shown in Figure 71 with the
326. h key 206 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration mappings to clearly distinguish all entries You can specify up to ten key mappings with unique target fields Fields that are used as the target of key mappings should always be filled in when a directory entry is created If any key mapping field in an entry is empty that entry is ignored during directory synchronization Remember that a directory entry may be created directly by you or it may be created by directory synchronization as a result of an addition to the other directory To help make sure that a target field for a key mapping is not left empty you can provide multiple field mappings for the same target field as described earlier When you provide multiple mappings to the same key field you must designate all of the mappings to that field as key mappings You can create as many key mappings as you like using the same target field but there can only be ten unique fields that are the target of a key mapping Prerequisites for Directory Synchronization The design of directory synchronization configuration is based on the following requirements and assumptions e To use directory synchronization product option one AS 400 Integration and product option six HiTest C API of the Domino for AS 400 software must be installed on the AS 400 system For details see Installing the Domino for AS 400 Product on your AS 400 System in Chapter 2
327. h may not yet be set up on your workstation To activate these functions you must Add Windows 95 Dial Up Networking see page 299 Add support for a Dial Up Adapter see page 301 Add TCP IP protocol support for the Dial Up Adapter see page 303 and configure the connection to the AS 400 system see page 306 The necessary steps are described in detail in the following sections 284 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Add Dial Up Networking to Windows 95 Dial Up networking is an optional part of Windows 95 which enables you to connect to other computers by using a modem 1 Double click the icon My Computer 2 Double click the icon Control Panel 3 Double click the icon Add Remove Programs 4 Click on the tab labeled Windows Setup and highlight Communications Add Remove Programs Properties 12 x Install Uninstall Windows Setup Startup Disk To add or remove a component click the check box A shaded box means that only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details Components E Accessibility Options T Accessories Communications amp Disk Tools 0 0 MB 3 Microsoft Exchange 0 0 MB xl Space required 0 4 MB Space available on disk 723 5 MB Description Includes accessories to help you connect to other computers and online services 4 of 4 components selected Details H
328. han sign lt to return to panel 2 16 In panel 2 click Advanced Setup 258 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration 17 Click the greater than sign and you see the third configuration panel Figure 135 now with more parameters than before Figure 129 on page 268 3 Save amp Quit Server Audience Advanced Setup ae F E z Ad d S In addition to Notes users who else will be the audience for this server SPER stich mi Y features of the Lotus Services Domino Advanced Standard default Senora shoud be Administration Process included in i e Domino Agent Manager Indexer Reporter server configuration Calendar Connector Mail Router Schedule Manager Gen Eeausers Event Manager Replicator Statistics Titaani j your Domino Server to BETEK be accessible by Web browsers IX partition 7 serune 7 ciuster Internet Mail Packages This feature enables Web Browsers for example Netscape Navigator or MS Explorer joir Domine Sefverto Putte host mailboxes for Internet mail packages and to send and recieve Internet Mail Packages for example Lotus Mail or Eudora mail from the Internet map IX oap IX rors sme muta News Readers This feature enables your Domino Server to News Readers for example Netscape Navigator or MS Explorer send and receive E unt messages from Internet Newsgroups and to be accessible by Internet News readers Figure
329. hares an IP address and assign one of these servers to be the port mapper server The port mapper server listens on the default Lotus Domino TCP port 1352 and directs connection requests to other servers that share the IP address You must enter the unique port number of each partitioned server in the NOTES INI file of the port mapper server The port mapper server uses this information to redirect requests to the other servers that share its IP address The port mapper server must be running in order for the partitioned servers that share its IP address to receive new connections from workstations If the port mapper server is down new sessions cannot connect Existing sessions however remain connected This is because each Notes workstation maintains information in memory about recent server connections including those redirected by the port mapper If this information is available a workstation can reach a partitioned server even when its port mapper server is down You can use port mapping only for Notes and Domino communication If you want to set up IMAP LDAP NNTP POP3 or the Web server to use unique ports for communication the user must specify the port on which they want to communicate For example if you specify port 12080 for the Web server as the default port to listen for HTTP requests users must enter the port number as part of the URL for example http servername domain com 12080 index html otherwise Domino tries to
330. hat each unique POP3 mailbox is associated with one and only one AS 400 user profile Therefore in the above example of three SMITHs on the same AS 400 all three CANNOT have a user profile of SMITH They had have to be different say SMITH1 SMITH2 and SMITH3 Start and Verify the OS 400 SMTP Server By default the SMTP server is started whenever you start TCP IP using the Start TCP IP STRTCP command However the default may have been changed or the server may fail when attempting to start Therefore it is a good idea to verify if the SMTP is running You can do so using the Work with TCP IP Network Status NETSTAT command On any AS 400 command line key the following command and press Enter NETSTAT cnn You will see a panel like the one shown in Figure 65 Make sure you see a row with local port showing SMTP or the number 25 7 Each physical line has a line description Use the Work with Line Descriptions WRKLIND command to display or change the existing or create new line descriptions 160 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration C Work with TCP IP Connection Status System SYSTEMO1 Lo al internet address po sk de cd Re ee e ol ALL Type options press Enter 4 End 5 Display details Remote Remote Local Opt Address Port Port Idle Time State _ ftp con gt 013 54 54 Listen Ses x telnet 002 07 03 Listen _ x ia smtp 013 54 34 Listen _ a 7 domain 013 54 54 Listen i
331. he Create Data Area CRTDTAARA command to create the data area QTMSNOSPLT of type CHAR in the QUSRSYS library The content of the data area is not important the existence of the data area will prevent outgoing mail from being split When the data area exists the CHGPOPA MSGSPLIT parameter setting is ignored Outgoing SMTP messages are no longer split regardless of their destination AS 400 SMTP MIME support will continue to reassemble any split incoming messages Notes with Mixed Address Lists Not Sent to Every Recipients If an Office Vision 400 user sends the same piece of mail to a mixed list of recipients for example a POP3 client using the AS 400 POP3 server and a user of the Lotus Domino for AS 400 server mail item may not be delivered to the POP3 client This applies for mixed distribution lists as well as specifying the individual addresses directly with the note In such a case you will see the error messages TCP9676 and CPFAF98 in the job log of the QMSF job The complete message text for TCP9676 is shown in Figure 91 Chapter 4 Mail Integration Through the SMTP MIME MTA 201 Additional Message Information Message ID 3 TCP 9676 Severity e s s e s f 40 Message type Diagnostic Date sent 3 09 23 98 Time sent 3 1321 39 Message SMTP distribution not sent Unable to parse data Cause SMTP message forwarding was stopped because bad data was detected in NO EOH CRLFCRL
332. he AS 400 single level store architecture Domino databases and programs are spread across all the AS 400 disk units along with other AS 400 objects The OS 400 operating system automatically manages the allocation of disk space so that you do not have to decide on which disk to place each single database To back up information on the AS 400 system back up logically that is by library or directory rather than physically that is by disk unit To plan a backup strategy you need to understand the logical location of your Domino for AS 400 databases and programs For more information see the Domino for AS 400 Help database as400hIp nsf or Chapter 5 in the book Installing and Managing Domino for AS 400 Lotus Part No 12999 22 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Note For details about planning a backup strategy for your AS 400 system using the Save menu and the SAV and RST commands see the book AS 400 Backup and Recovery SC41 5304 Application Development and Add ins Regardless of your platform Lotus Notes Domino application development tools allow access to relational data using ODBC Many existing applications use LotusScript Data Object LS DO or include Db function statements with an ODBC parameter specified What is different about the AS 400 system is what OS 400 does with the database request after it leaves Domino When the application is running on the Domino for AS 400 server
333. he previous step originated on the same system and therefore updates the person document in the Domino Public Address Book with the same values Chapter 5 Directory Synchronization 237 7 The process continues indefinitely by starting over with step 3 ae Directory CHGDIRE Change Entry SYSTEMO1 SYSTEMO2 AS 400 System Distributio Directory 2 Domino for AS 400 Directory 4 Domino for AS 400 Directory Synchronization Synchronization Domino for AS 400 AS 400 System Distributio Directory 5 08 400 Directory Shadowing L 3 Domino Replication Domino Public Address Book PAB Domino Public Address Book PAB Figure 116 Loop Situation for Directory Synchronization and Shadowing To avoid the possibility of endless updates make sure not to setup your network in a closed loop For example disabling directory synchronization in SYSTEM02 would solve the problem in our example scenario 238 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Questions and Answers Q What happens if there are two different user entries with the same key fields in each of the directories one in PAB one in SDD before you enabled configuration For unidirectional synchronization A synchronization
334. here TCP IP 2 Later in this paragraph The TCP IP port number provides a way for multiple applications on the same host system to share the same IP interface by distinguishing through the port number 100 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Next after starting the servers you need to modify the server document for each server SERVER AcmeDS1 Acme w Network Configuration Port Notes Network Net Address Enabled TCPIP NETWORK1 acmeds1 ENABLED DISABLED LOOPBACK NETWORK1 127 0 0 1 13530 ENABLED DISABLED Figure 44 Server Document to Define Port for Loopback Interface Since all the servers must be known in the network via DNS or host tables by their external IP addresses you need to make sure that for a server to server connection the loopback interface is used This can be done by adding a connection document to the Public Address Book The following example defines the connection from server AcmeDS1 to AcmeDS2 SERVER CONNECTION AcmeDS1 to AcmeDS2 Basics Connection type Local Area Network Usage priority Normal Source server AcmeDS1 Destination server AcmeDS2 Source domain Acme Destination domain Org Use the port s LOOPBACK Optional network address 127 0 0 1 13531 Scheduled Routing and Connection Replication Schedule ENABLED Tasks Replication Mail Routing Call at times 08 00 22 00 each day Route at once if 1 messages pending Figure 45 Connection Docum
335. hods using CL commands from an AS 400 command line or using the graphical user interface of the Operations Navigator supplied with Client Access 400 clients for Windows 95 NT Useful Publications The following books are useful for setting up your AS 400 system o Getting Your AS 400 Working for You SC41 5161 is included with each AS 400 system e TCP IP Fastpath Setup SC41 5430 e TCP IP Configuration and Reference SC41 5420 o Client Access for Windows 95 NT Setup SC41 3512 e The Welcome Center CD which also comes with your AS 400 system e The complete library of AS 400 books can also be found on the World Wide Web at http as400bks rochester ibm com A great source for technical tips is the AS 400 Technical Studio Web page at http www as400 ibm com techstudio The Domino Administration Help database HELPADMN NSF for Domino 4 6 provides all information on installing configuring and administering Domino servers but excludes AS 400 specific topics The content of this database also exists as printed versions in different books e Planning the Domino System Part No 12949 o Getting Started with the Domino Mail Server Part No 12947 o Getting Started with the Domino Server Part No 12948 e Configuring a Domino Network Part No 12950 e Extending the Domino System Part No 12953 e Maintaining the Domino System Part No 12954 In future releases AS 400 information may be included with the documentation covering all other p
336. iate data directory The following commands can be entered on the command line and they will enable a Domino administrator to have a Domino task run without the server up and running This particular set of instructions will run the FIXUP task against the names nsf file of the server for the subsystem DOMINOO1 and has the data directory at notes data ADDENVVAR ENVVAR PATH VALUE QIBM PRODDATA LOTUS NOTES QIBM USERDATA LOTUS NOTES notes data ADDENVVAR ENVVAR NOTESPARTITION VALUE 01 CHGCURDIR DIR notes data SBMJOB CMD CALL PGM QNOTES FIXUP PARM names nsf USER QNOTES CURLIB USRPRF INLLIBL NONE CPYENVVAR YES Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 125 Tips for Problem Determination Problem determination is an unfortunate but inevitable part of every Domino administrator s job With Domino for AS 400 you will be familiar with some of the problem determination techniques that are the same as other Domino platforms Other techniques are unique to the AS 400 The Notes Server Dump Tool First the more common problem determination techniques Domino for AS 400 does have the Domino console and supports all of the Domino console commands that are useful in problem determination ie show task show statistic etc Also Domino for AS 400 supports the Notes Server Dump NSD tool NSD is supported on many of the Unix platforms and provides information when a problem occurs When a pan
337. ic occurs the NSD tool will write to the server s data directory all the pertinent information that it has prior to ending This information includes call stacks and a copy of the current state of the console entries The name of the file is of the format nsd_all_os400_19980211_ 13 06 46 where 19980211 is the date of the dump and 13 06 46 is the time of the dump This dump file can be viewed with either the Display Stream File DSPSTMF or the Edit File EDTF commands Domino Server Job Logs Now onto some problem determination techniques that are unique to the AS 400 The first is job logs In the previous section we touched on how to view job logs of running jobs Job logs contain AS 400 messages that indicate if something has gone seriously wrong Each message in the job log has a severity associated with it If the severity is above 40 then the job has terminated When a job has terminated because of an error the job log is saved on a spool file based on userid For the Domino servers all spool files will be found under userid QNOTES The command Work with Spool Files WRKSPLF will let you look at spooled job logs Enter the following from the command entry line to see the job logs of all the Domino servers WRKSPLF QNOTES Important It is best to look at the spool files while in intermediate assistance level However the default on an AS 400 system is basic assistance level unless otherwise specified in your AS 400 user profile If you
338. ical Access 4833 K _ Graphical Access Fonts 0K v AFP Workbench Viewer OK _ 5250 Display and Printer Emulator OK _ PC5250 Fonts OK Data Transfer 1343 K zj Description Use 45 400 Operations Navigator to manage your 45 400 server from the Windows Explorer Space Required 0K Space Available 35648 K lt Back Cancel Figure 120 Component Selection Window 17 Click the Change button Even if you already have Operations Navigator installed you still need to click the Change button to add the sub component 246 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration plug in for Lotus Domino Select Sub components Select the components you want to install clear the components you do not want to install Sub components M Operations Navigator Base Support C Ultimedia Systems Facilities v _JIBM Java Description Lotus Domino support for 45 400 Operations Navigator Operations Navigator Base Support is required Space Required OK Space Available 32768 K Figure 121 Select Sub components dialog box 18 19 20 21 22 23 In the Select Sub components dialog box select Lotus Dominoas shown in Figure 121 Click Continue In the Component Selection window click Next In the Start Copying Files window click Next In the Install Completed window you may deselect View the README file and Add program folder shortcut to desktop options Click Next
339. ical server e Verify with a handful of test users to ensure that they can access the new server without any changes to their Notes client We used this method to move the balance of the 7 000 users in 10 business days We became so comfortable with this technique that the last night we transplanted four servers with a total of 800 users Since then we have used the server consolidation technique to gradually consolidate these users into fewer partitioned Domino servers to simplify our server management job However the server transplantation method worked wonderfully to accomplish our original objective rapidly moving a large number of users to Domino for AS 400 with minimal disruption to the user community Migrating to Domino for AS 400 the Challenges The server consolidation method offers the benefits of minimized down time during the migration and as the name suggests a smaller number of servers at the completion of the process Our experience brought to light some administrative challenges which led us to the transplantation method as a desirable first phase in moving users to the AS 400 hardware platform followed by consolidation of logical servers Understanding and managing these challenges is critical to success in server consolidation regardless of whether you choose a one step or two step process Td like to share our experience and the techniques we devised for meeting the challenges particularly in minimizing the impa
340. idual mail databases are in a dedicated subdirectory such as NOTES DATA MAIL To back up mail do the following 1 Start an AS 400 session with a user profile that has JOBCTL and SAVSYS special authorities 2 From a command line use the following command to stop the Domino server ENDDOMSVR SERVER servername where servername is the actual name of your Domino server Note To back up a database the AS 400 must be able to lock the database so that no changes occur during the backup operation To successfully back up Notes mail you will need to stop the Domino for AS 400 server that contains the mail databases Mount the appropriate backup tape in the tape device Use the Save Object SAV command to back up the mail databases Following is an example Substitute your server directory name for NOTES DATA Substitute your tape device name for TAPO1 SAV DEV qsys 1l1ib tap01 devd OBJ notes data mail nsf 138 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Examples of Backing Up Mail from Your Domino Server Following are examples of using the Save Object SAV command to back up mail from your Domino server Substitute your server directory name for NOTES DATA Substitute your tape device name for TAPO1 e To back up a specific database such as the MAIL BOX database use the following command SAV DEV qsys 1lib tap01 devd OBJ notes data mail mail box e To back up all the fil
341. ield for the server name the underlined area and press the F4 Prompt key You will see a list of configured Domino servers underneath the underlined input area shown in bold in Figure 23 Type choice Type a Server name Specify Value for Parameter SERVER press Enter CHARACTER AcmeDS1 F3 Exit F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys j Figure 23 Field Prompt for the Server Parameter 3 Enter your server name and press the Enter key to return to the command prompt shown in Figure 22 Press Enter again to actually execute the Start Domino Server STRDOMSVR command The STRDOMSVR command will submit a new AS 400 job which runs independently of your interactive job Therefore you will return to the command line very quickly You should see a completion message on the bottom of your screen The completion message shown in Figure 24 LNT0925 provides you with important information about your new Domino server the name of the subsystem the server will be running in 74 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Marn Select rR gt POWOWMDANAUBWNE 90 AS 400 Main Menu System SYSTEMA one of the following User tasks Office tasks General system tasks Files libraries and folders Programming Communications Define or change the system Problem handling Display a menu Information Assistant options Clie
342. igator if you prefer a graphical user interface Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 59 In this chapter we focus on using the AS 400 user interface to set up the server Chapter 6 in this book explains how you can use the graphical user interface provided with Operations Navigator instead After describing the Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR command in depth we explain briefly how to start the server and verify that it is working Starting the Domino for AS 400 Server on page 75 We also describe how to transfer the administrator s ID file to your PC see Copy ID Files to Your Client Workstation on page 86 Changes with Version 4 6 2 of Domino for AS 400 Note that the sequence of parameters for the Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR command has changed with the Quarterly Maintenance Release QMR 4 6 2 The examples in this chapter are all based on version 4 6 2 Using the Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR Command The following steps describe the green screen method using the Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR command 1 Sign on to the AS 400 system with a user profile that has at least the following special authorities ALLOBJ Access to all AS 400 objects SECADM Security administrator JOBCTL Job control IOSYSCFG Device and communications configuration 2 Onan AS 400 command line type the Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR command and press F4 to prompt the command You wil
343. ile You will see the Point to Point Profiles Properties box with five tabs 3 For the General tab in our example we specified the following as shown in Figure 149 Profile Name WIN95PPP Description PPP Connection for Domino clients Type PPP Mode Switched line answer 278 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration WinS5ppp System01 12 x Connection TCP IP Settings Script Authentication PPP connection for Domino clients Figure 149 New Point to Point Profile Screen Using Operations Navigator 4 Click the Connection tab WinS5ppp System01 Remote prone HuMrueTs Mennan tarsiission Units Ere 00s M Figure 150 New Point to Point Profile Screen Connection Tab Specify a Name for the Line description We used DOMPPP in our example Note Ifa PPP line description already exists you may select it from the drop down list Chapter 7 Dial Up Connectivity 279 If you wish to maintain the connection during a longer idle time period you may specify an inactivity time out value higher than the default of 15 seconds 5 If you typed a new name for the line description click the New button A dialog box called New Line Properties will appear If you selected an existing line description from the drop down list click the Open button instead You will simply be referring to the next few steps to validate existing line properties instead of entering them
344. in the QSYSOPR message queue Using Operations Navigator to Start a SLIP Profile If you are using Operations Navigator expand the tree under your AS 400 system then the one next to Network then Point to Point and then click on Connection Profiles Find your profile name in the list right click on it and click Start To connect to the AS 400 system from a remote Windows 95 workstation double click the Dial Up Networking connection icon you created Server to Server Dial Connections with Remote LAN Service Automatic server to server dialing for Domino servers is accomplished with a function known as Remote LAN Service Domino for AS 400 supports the Remote LAN Service This capability allows a Domino server to establish a connection with a remote Domino server through a telephone line by initiating the dialing process Of course both servers must be connected to the phone line by modems 308 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration You can use the Remote LAN Service to perform tasks such as remote Domino server replication or mail routing between two Domino servers The servers may both be AS 400 systems or the answering system may be a Domino server running on another operating system platform Remote LAN Service supports replication of Domino databases and mail routing of Notes mail only Currently Domino for AS 400 does not directly support dial up to an Internet Service Provider ISP to send and
345. in the SDD For a quick path to view all user defined AS 400 fields the Change System Directory Attributes CHGSYSDIRA command can be used 1 Type the following command in any AS 400 command line CHGSYSDIRA do not press Enter Press F4 prompt Page down press the PgDn key one or more times to the User defined fields Fields in the Domino Address Book Below is a safe way to locate all of the fields that are contained in the Domino Address Book 1 Select the Domino Address Book by clicking its icon on your workspace 2 Choose File Database Design Synopsis 3 In the Design Synopsis window select Database and Forms 4 To obtain a list of the Persons fields only deselect all of the forms in the Forms window except Person 5 Click OK 232 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Enabling Disabling or Suspending Directory Synchronization Domino for AS 400 Directory Synchronization is fully managed via the Directory Sync Configuration database NNDIRSYC NSF This includes enabling disabling or suspending this function The following topics describe how to do so Starting Directory Synchronization Before you can enable directory synchronization you need to configure it as described in the previous topics see Directory Synchronization Configuration Steps on page 226 Enabling directory synchronization is done by changing the synchronization status field to Enable
346. in the tape unit 4 To recover the entire directory from the tapes from your last full backup use the Restore Object RST command For example to recover objects in the CUSTSVC subdirectory from the TAPO1 device use the following command RST DEV qsys lib tap01 devd OBJ notes data custsvc 5 If your incremental backup tapes are cumulative mount your most recent incremental backup tape Use the same command step 4 to recover the changes Otherwise if your backup tapes are nightly repeat this step for each incremental backup tape Start with the oldest tape and work forward using the RST command from step 4 Chapter 3 Backup and Recovery 149 150 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Chapter 4 Mail Integration Through the SMTP MIME MTA This chapter describes how Domino mail integrates with OS 400 based e mail The Internet standard Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP with its complement Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions MIME was chosen as the common mail protocol between Notes mail and AnyMail 400 the Mail Server Frame Work MSF in OS 400 Domino for AS 400 mail integration not only allows for exchanging mail between Notes mail users connected to the Domino for AS 400 server with Office Vison 400 Users on the same or other AS 400 systems but also with other users of SMTP MIME based mail applications either on or connected to the AS 400 system through the Internet or I
347. inate Server exiting The ID file is write protected Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 109 Now you can continue with the next task which is to configure the additional server on your AS 400 system Verify Connection to NAB Server During the setup process for an additional Domino server the Name and Address Book Server NAB server will be contacted to request a replica of the Public Address Book Therefore the NAB server must be reachable by the AS 400 system via TCP IP Note The term Name and Address Book NAB is no longer used for Domino Starting with Notes 4 0 the NAMES NSF database on a Domino server was renamed to Public Address Book PAB However with Domino 5 0 the new name will be Domino Directory It is a good idea to verify the connection by performing a ping from an AS 400 command line Note that a successful ping from your workstation to the NAB server does not guarantee that the AS 400 system can access that server too You must enter Verify TCP IP Connection PING command from an AS 400 command line rather than from a DOS command line For example to verify the connection to the server called AcmeDS1 enter the following command on any AS 400 command line and press Enter ping acmeds1 You must be able to ping by name If you cannot reach the server by specifying its name but you do get a positive response by using the numerical IP address the name along with the correct IP addres
348. ined here the procedure to follow is similar to Configuring the PPP Connection Profile on the AS 400 System described in the section beginning on page 290 8 Click on the plus sign next to the icon showing the name of your AS 400 system in the main tree of Operations Navigator 9 Click on the plus sign next to the icon named Network 10 Click on the plus sign next to the icon named Point to Point 11 Right click Connection Profiles to open a context menu Chapter 7 Dial Up Connectivity 305 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Choose New Profile to access the General Page In our example we specify the following Profile Name WIN95SLIP Description SLIP Connection for Domino clients Type SLIP Mode Switched line answer Click the Connection tab Line Name Select an existing PPP line description from the pull down list or specify a name for a new line description Maximum transmission units 1006 bytes If you specified a line name to create a new line description Click on the New button and continue with step 14 If you selected an existing PPP line description and clicked on the Open button skip to step 15 Follow this step only if you clicked on the New button to create a new line description From the New Line Properties General tab select one of the listed Hardware resources The Interface type must be RS232 V 24 and the framing must be Asynchronous Click the Link tab
349. informed we had notified them in advance that they would soon be moved to the native AS 400 version of Domino A few weeks later users began calling to ask When do I begin using the AS 400 Appendix B The IBM Rochester Experience 401 They had in fact been moved weeks earlier and never even knew it because they never experienced any downtime or interruption in service Implementing Backup and Recovery Strategies Backup and recovery are important considerations when migrating any application from one platform to another and Domino for AS 400 is no exception Functions and alternative methods tend to vary by platform While moving to the AS 400 we found there are a couple of different methods for backing up your Domino data The appropriate backup and recovery strategy for your environment primarily depends on whether you need 24 x 7 Domino server availability Certain key Domino databases such as the Public Address Book are always open while the Domino server is operational A save while active solution is not currently available on the AS 400 platform If you do not need around the clock availability you can simply take down your Domino server and use the AS 400 s built backup capabilities to back up your data directories For installations that have large amounts of data or require unattended backup the Backup and Recovery Management Services BRMS software and a tape library system provide a good solution If you do need 24 x 7
350. ing after updating the Public Address Book documents for each migrated user a second memo could be sent to the affected users This memo could include a button and some detailed instructions The button would cause their location document in their Personal Address Book to be updated and add an icon to their workspace for the new mail database The instructions could explain how to manually replicate their new mail database with the old one in case they have been manipulating their old mail file after the Public Address Book changes were made and the final replication was performed Over the weekend a third and final note could be sent to our users to simply congratulate them on making the move More importantly by sending this final note you can quickly identify if any users are experiencing mail routing problems Migrating the SMTP MIME MTA This section covers considerations for migrating an existing Domino Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Multi Purpose Internet Mail Extension Message Transfer Agent SMTP MIME MTA also called SMTP MTA to Domino for AS 400 Although the guidelines explained here apply largely to migration from the Integrated PC Server they may be helpful in the migration of the SMTP MIME MTA from other Domino servers particularly if they are running Release 4 5 or earlier Chapter 8 Migration from Other Domino Platforms 353 Important Before attempting to migrate the SMTP MIME MTA configuration from any other server
351. ino server on the AS 400 system with a TCP IP address and server identity different from the existing server 3 Use File Transfer Protocol FTP to copy the databases and files to be migrated from the existing server to the new 4 Change ownership of files and directories to QNOTES and change public authorities Start the Domino server on the AS 400 system Identify any databases with local encryption which require special handling Use server to server replication to keep the old and the new files synchronized until complete cutover to the new server has taken place 8 Change users information in Public Address Book to reflect the mail server change 9 Make appropriate changes on the users Lotus Notes client workstations For example location documents must be modified to reflect a home mail server change Database icons must be modified to reflect an application server change The following topics describe each of these tasks Identify the Domino Databases to be Migrated This topic is identical to the topic with the same name in the server transplantation process on page 346 However in this case you do need to transfer the Server ID file Configure a New Unique Domino Server on the AS 400 System You first need to configure TCP IP to establish and activate a new TCP IP interface on the AS 400 system with a unique IP address If there is no Domino for AS 400 server configured on your AS 400 system you can also use a
352. ion Send fax as a document Run user receive program OO BWNEF Selection 4 E3 Exit F12 Cancel J Figure 231 Select Routing Entry Type Select option 4 Send fax as a document and press Enter The Send Document display appears as shown in Figure 232 Appendix A Using Facsimile Support for AS 400 385 f cana Document N Document LASTFILED Folder 3 LASTFILED Type distribution list or addresses then press Enter Distribution LIST so eede de ae ee F4 for list Addressees User ID Address Description PKENNEDY SYSTEMA More F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel ie IC COPVRTGCHT TRM CORD 19008 1902 of Figure 232 Send Document Display User ID Enter the name of the system distribution directory entry that you created earlier In our example the user is PRENNEDY Address Enter the name of the address In our example this is SYSTEMA Press the Enter key to create the routing entry The entry is created and you can return to the Work With Routing Entries display Add additional routing entries or press F12 to return to the Work with Fax Profiles display Now when a fax is received with a tone value of 4567 it is filed as a document in a folder The document is mailed to Lotus Notes user PKENNEDY Note For this to happen you need to configure the Configure Fax Services CFGFAXSRV command and set the Start Fax Routing parameter to YES Refer to the Facsimile Suppo
353. ion keys it would be denied access to any copied mail files that had local encryption set Once we had all the mail files copied to the new server we used the FIXUP command from the new Domino server console to identify any mail files in this situation If results of FIXUP identified that the new Domino server did not have access to specific databases we would manually create a new replica of each of those databases on the new server using a Lotus Notes client interface Through the replication process Notes allows this encryption key to be rebuilt We then verified that all the mail data had been successfully copied and accessible by the new Domino server All that remained for data migration was to replicate the existing Domino server with the new Domino server once a day throughout the remainder of the week to keep the two versions of the mail data synchronized After updating the Public Address Book discussed in the next section to reflect the change in mail servers all that was required was one final replication of the old and new Domino servers From a data perspective this process provided uninterrupted service which was vital to our users Administering the Public Address Book When the location of a user s mail database is moved from one logical Domino server to another changes need to be made to the Public Address Book which the Domino mail router references to deliver the mail and to the user s location 400 Domino for
354. ion on configuring and using the MTA on a Domino server in general see the Domino Administration Help database doc HELPADMN NSF or chapter 4 of the book Extending your Domino Server for specific information on the MTA for Domino for AS 400 see the Domino for AS 400 Help database AS400DOC NSF The SMTP MIME MTA is based on Internet Request for Comments RFCs Among the RFCs supported are RFC821 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol RFC822 Standard for the Format of ARPA Internet Text Messages RFC1521 MIME Part I message bodies 154 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration RFC1522 MIME Part II message headers RFC974 Mail Routing and the Domain System RFC1123 Requirements for Internet Hosts Application and Support The contents of each RFC can be viewed from a Web browser For example the following Web sites describe RFC821 http info internet isi edu in notes rfc files rfc821 txt http www rfc editor org Setting Up the OS 400 SMTP Server The following tasks need to be performed before you can use Domino for AS 400 mail integration e Install the TCP IP Connectivity Utilities Licensed Product 5769 TC1 e Verify or complete the TCP IP configuration for SMTP e Start and verify the OS 400 SMTP server e Change the distribution attributes if you use OfficeVision 400 e Verify QSNADS Subsystem was started e Set up a Domino for AS 400 server with the SMTP MIME MTA e Open and save the MTA
355. ioned server without having added a TCPIP_TcpIpAddress statement it will listen to port 1352 on all IP interfaces defined to the AS 400 system This will allocate the port for each of the IP addresses to that server If you subsequently start another partitioned server it will not be able to open any TCP IP communication You will see the following error message Error on Listen function The TCP IP port Lotus Notes z used by the Notes server is still in use on this system A Server not responding The other server will be running it will respond to console commands but it does not have any access to 92 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration communication facilities Trying to connect to the server from a Notes client will result in a Server not responding error message as shown in the figure to the right Therefore you have to end the server which has been started first and modify the NOTES INI file before starting it again Assuming you configured the second server correctly it will automatically be able to open the interface 20 seconds after the first server has been ended In order to verify whether a server is listening to the correct IP interface look at the status of the port named TCPIP using the Domino console command show port To do so use the Work with Domino Console WRKDOMCSL command from any AS 400 command line and then type the following Domino subcommand sh port t
356. ip sets the appropriate authorities for the QNOTES user profile at the same time However to ensure data security and integrity you should gt You may also use the MD command which is a short version of the Create Directory CRTDIR command Except for the shorter name there is no difference between the commands 334 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration change the public data authority for these directories to EXCLUDE To do this you use the Change Authority CHGAUT command For example type CHGAUT notes data USER PUBLIC DTAAUT EXCLUDE OBJAUT NONE Press the Enter key A message appears at the bottom of the display indicating Object Changed As in the case of changing ownership you must issue a Change Authority CHGAUT command for each of the directories and subdirectories you have created for Domino for AS 400 Schedule an Outage of the Original Domino Server With the server transplantation method the original Domino server needs to be down for a period of time to copy the Domino data files and transfer the network identity This is to avoid updating of files particularly volatile mail files while the transfer is taking place Once the TCP IP network identity has been moved to the AS 400 system both servers cannot be concurrently active with the same address in the same network Copy the Domino Databases and Files to the Transplanted Server The next step is to actuall
357. is now an integrated component of all Domino 4 6 servers A Message Transfer Agent MTA is a program that runs under the control of a Domino or Notes server to exchange messages mail with mail applications using different mail protocols The Simple Message Transfer Protocol Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions SMTP MIME is a standard based on TCP IP and is often used to connect unlike mail systems On the other hand AS 400 based mailing applications such as Office Vision for OS 400 can also use the OS 400 SMTP support to convert from and to SMTP thus allowing direct mail exchange with a Domino for AS 400 server on the same or other AS 400 systems The MTA provides advanced messaging features and extensions to the Domino 4 6 server allowing it to transfer messages in SMTP MIME format via TCP IP networks which can be the Internet connecting to many other companies or the Intranet within just one company While the MTA implementation is similar for Domino servers on all platforms there is one important difference the MTA on a Domino for AS 400 server does not directly communicate with the TCP IP network It rather sends and receives mail through the OS 400 SMTP support and AnyMail the Mail Server Framework MSF This results in some differences with installation and configuration for the AS 400 system The AS 400 installation and configuration steps for the MTA are highlighted in the following sections For additional informat
358. is the case where the client machine accesses multiple systems some of which support only SLIP If you do have such an environment follow the outline below to set up SLIP using a PPP line description Configuring the SLIP Connection Profile on the AS 400 To open a connection to the AS 400 system using Operations Navigator perform the following steps 1 From the Windows 95 or Windows NT desktop start Operations Navigator 2 Click on the plus sign next to the icon showing the name of your AS 400 system Click on the plus sign next to the icon named Network Click on the plus sign next to the icon named Point to Point Open the list of connection profiles by clicking the icon named Connection Profiles 6 To check for existing Point to Point profiles look for icons with the Protocol type SLIP and a connection type of switched line answer If PPP line profiles exist you can view them by right clicking the individual names and selecting Properties from the resulting context menu Note If asynchronous line profiles exist you can only start stop or delete these Point to Point profiles by right clicking the individual names and selecting Start Stop or Delete from the resulting context menu 7 To create anew SLIP connection profile right click Connection Profiles to open a context menu Choose New Profile to access the General page of the New Point to Point Profile Properties dialog box Although there are some differences outl
359. isplay appears 2 Press the right arrow button until Select Factory appears Then press the Enter button 3 Press the up arrow button until option 4 appears Then press the Enter button This sets the modem to factory option 4 which is the asynchronous configuration for this particular model To reset the IBM 7857 017 to the synchronous mode of operation after testing is completed follow the previous steps again but this time select factory option 3 4 Depending on the country where you ordered your AS 400 system you may get different modems Refer to the user s manual for the modem on how to switch to asynchronous mode for your modem Chapter 7 Dial Up Connectivity 293 If you use the 7857 017 modem the AS 400 default modem information may need to be modified depending upon the country setting The range of valid carrier time out settings in register S7 varies by country For example the valid range for the US is 41 to 50 The default modem answer setting for the 7857 017 in some versions of OS 400 incorrectly attempts to change register S7 to 30 Thus if your country setting is US or any other country in which 30 is not a valid selection for that parameter you may need to change the settings as described below Use Operations Navigator to Create Customized Modem Information If you are using Operations Navigator Version 3 Release 2 you can create the required customized modem entry using a graphical interface Otherwise
360. it is not enough to define a true Notes user It is still necessary to register the Notes user ID before it can be successfully used by a person If you ever change the AS 400 SMTP user ID delimiter the AS 400 host name or the AS 400 domain name or select Domino SMTP MTA configuration fields you must edit and save the enabled directory synchronization configuration document If you want these changes to take effect immediately for all AS 400 directory and Domino address book entries choose Yes to Populate Directories when editing the enabled directory synchronization configuration document Create New Directory Fields for the Directory Fields List You may also want to add new fields or literal fields to the list of predefined AS 400 or Domino fields This can be done by using the Create AS 400 Directory Field or the Create Domino Address Book Field button in the Mapping AS 4400 Directory Fields to Domino Address Book Field form Figure 104 on page 232 or the Mapping Domino Address Book Fields to AS 400 Directory Field form Figure 112 on page 237 You can also do this by clicking the Directory Fields button in the Directory Synchronization Main Menu Important No verification occurs by the addition of a field if the field really exists in the SDD or PAB A non existing field causes the synchronization to fail Therefore be sure that the fields really exist before you enable the synchronization When you add a user defined AS 400 SD
361. ize can be a challenge In our pre Domino for AS 400 environment replication of the Public Address Book needed to be scheduled for an overnight run because of the Appendix B The IBM Rochester Experience 403 amount of time required up to 6 hours In fact the number of changes needed to be limited to 3 000 at a time or the replication would not complete within the 6 hour window In an initial Domino for AS 400 replication test we allowed a server to take on over 6 000 changes to its Public Address Book It finished the replication in about 40 minutes and finished the re indexing task in about 50 minutes If we weren t already sold on Domino for AS 400 that definitely sold us In general on our large AS 400s we have been able to scale the number of replicators indexers and routers to truly meet the needs of our enormous environment A final point on performance even with the Domino load which we have put on our AS 400 s the average CPU utilization hovers around 30 Besides scalability reliability and performance another significant benefit is the ability to perform true remote administration of your Domino servers Since Domino for AS 400 is running as an AS 400 application the Domino server console is also running on the AS 400 Therefore from an AS 400 emulation session you can work on the true console even when the server is starting and stopping a big advantage over the limitations of the remote server console function o
362. k When you need to use these backup tapes to recover you must decide on your recovery sequence and determine the location of the most recent copy of each database Examples Following are examples of different recovery scenarios and an overview of the recovery steps for each Substitute your server directory for NOTES DATA Substitute your tape device name for TAPO1 Recovering All Changed Domino Objects from a Cumulative Backup Assume that your strategy for backing up changed objects is cumulative each night you back up everything that changed since the last complete backup To recover your entire Domino data directory do the following 1 Start an AS 400 session with a user profile that has JOBCTL and SAVSYS special authorities 2 To ensure that no one is using the databases stop the Domino server for example use the End Domino Server ENDDOMSVR command 3 Locate the tapes from your most recent complete backup Mount the correct tape in the tape unit 4 To recover the entire Domino data directory use the Restore Object RST command For example RST DEV qsys lib tap01 devd OBJ notes data 5 Locate and mount your most recent backup tapes from backing up changed objects 6 To recover all the changed objects on the tape everything that has changed since your full backup use the following command RST DEV qsys lib tap01 devd OBJ notes data Substitute your Domino data directory for NOTES DATA a
363. k SYSTEMS SYSTEMOT Lotus Domin Figure 147 Registry Editor Window to Search for Lotus Domino String 6 The right pane shows a value of Supported Double click Supported and change the value from 0 to 1 270 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Chapter 6 The Graphical User Interface of Operations Navigator 271 Chapter 7 Dial Up Connectivity In many cases you may want to connect a client or another server to your Domino for AS 400 server where there is no Local Area Network LAN connection between the two systems A solution for this is to use a remote dial up connection over a switched telephone network Since Domino for AS 400 supports only TCP IP this is done using the Point to Point Protocol PPP or the Serial Line Internet Protocol SLIP Support for both protocols is provided with the no charge AS 400 TCP IP Utilities 5769 TC1 licensed product After providing some basic information on Domino dial up connectivity this chapter first describes how to configure the Domino server and a Notes client to connect over a switched line PPP Dial In Example on page 289 and later how to connect two servers using remote LAN services Server to Server Dial Connec tions with Remote LAN Service on page 324 Useful Publications The following books are useful for setting up communications on your AS 400 system e AS 400e series System Handbook GA19 5486 17 or a later edition e A
364. l see the prompt as shown in Figure 10 4 Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR gt Type choices press Enter Server name AcmeDS1 OPEL tee ie oye da ies ey he es Shee S es oe FIRST FIRST ADD REMOVE Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display C F24 More keys J Figure 10 CFGDOMSVR for a First Server 1 Prompt The CFGDOMSVR command supports selective context sensitive prompting Depending on what keyword you enter for the OPTION parameter different parameters will be prompted when you press Enter 60 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration The following steps describe the least complicated scenario Configuring a first server for a new Domino domain and organization thus the Public Address Book the Certifier ID file a User ID file for the administrator and a Server ID file will be created from scratch Note The term first server has nothing to do with the fact that you are installing the first server on this AS 400 system It only relates to the fact that a new Domino domain and organization will be created rather than adding the new server to an existing domain Tips for Users with Little or No AS 400 Experience This command like most other OS 400 CL commands provides context sensitive Help text for each parameter Position the cursor on the parameter and press F1 Help Once the Help document is displayed you can pre
365. l address 184 418 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Internet mail gateway domain 194 Internet Message Transfer Agent SMTP MTA Section 178 Internet Request for Comments RFC 161 IPCS 15 IPL the AS 400 starting the Domino server 77 ISESCTL 203 ISESHLRan 203 ISMTPMTA EXE 375 ISO 2022 JP 179 TSO 2022 KR 179 ISO 8859 1 179 J Japanese 60 Character Set for SMTP MTA 179 job log 132 Job logs of Domino servers 132 JustMail 17 K Katakana 60 KEEPRCP 210 Korean Character Set for SMTP MTA 179 KSC5601 179 L LAN based connections 286 Language ID 2924 54 Language parameters 179 LDAP 15 Library product 137 QNOTES 137 QNOTESAPI 137 QNOTESCPP 137 QNOTESHTST 137 QNOTESINT 137 QNOTESLSKT 137 QUSRNOTES 137 LMBCS 134 LNTO0109 91 Load and Run 51 Load and Run CL command 36 Local part formed from 185 LocalDomainServers 105 111 369 locale in QNOTES user profile 55 LODRUN 36 51 52 Log client session events 67 Log replication events 66 Loopback 103 LotusScript Data Object 381 LotusScript Data Object 348 LotusScript Data Object LS DO 17 LS DO 17 348 381 Machine Readable Material 54 Mail backing up 142 paramter for CFGDOMSVR 171 recovery 150 Mail Server Frame Work MSF 157 Mail service leve 378 mail service level 199 Mapping field 215 key 215 MAXBUFFER 316 Maximum message size 209 Maximum number of servers e
366. l domain 013 54 54 UDP a bootps 000 01 07 UDP ba tftp 013 54 39 UDP E 7 www http 013 54 50 Listen pop3 013 54 37 Listen oe a x 119 004 37 16 Listen X 143 004 37 25 Listen More F5 Refresh Fll Display byte counts F13 Sort by column Fld Display port numbers F22 Display entire field F24 More keys y Figure 65 Work with TCP IP Connection Status If no application is listening to the SMTP port try to start the SMTP server You can do that using the Start TCP IP Server STRTCPSVR command On any AS 400 command line key the following command and press Enter STRTCPSVR smtp Check again if the SMTP server is listening to port 25 If it does not display the system operator message queue dspmsg qsysopr and look for this error message SMTP job QTSMTPSRVR ended abnormally If you find this message TCP2061 position the cursor on the message and press F1 and then F9 you will see the job number of the job which actually failed as shown in Figure 66 Chapter 4 Mail Integration Through the SMTP MIME MTA 161 a Display Message Details N Message ID 3 TCP2061 Severity 3 40 Date sent 05 27 98 Time SEn S h sn we at 8 Lee 21210 Message type Diagnostic CCSID Ss sate amp ts Sie Goo 65535 Erom aJo oe to Be ie SS te Be ta Se tas QTSMTPSRVR WISE et eva Gog Tom ete TE ed EO Se ET Oe Tee QTCP Number 2 2 048813 From program i QTMSSRCP To messag
367. l down menu e Click once on the icon with the left mouse button and then the appropriate button on the toolbar D e To start a server click the button with the green arrow e To stop a server click the button with the red symbol Administering a Domino Server Operations Navigator allows you to perform several administrative tasks for the Domino for AS 400 servers e Show several important configuration parameters properties in one place e Display or change the Domino initialization file NOTES IND e Launch the Notes administrative client The following section describes briefly those tasks Displaying the Server Properties To display the server properties do one of the following e Double click the server icon e Right click the server icon and choose Properties e Click the server icon once with the left mouse button and then click this button 262 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration If the server was not started or does not communicate you will see the following message 1AS 400 Operations Navigator Figure 137 Server Not Responding In such a case you cannot see all of the property values Click OK to continue You then see the server properties box Three tabs show different aspects of the server properties Basics This tab shows information such as the server name and title If the server is not active some of the information is displayed as not availab
368. l servers have been ended completely This may take several minutes If a server does not end within 10 minutes after performing the End Domino Server ENDDOMSVR command end the server with OPTION IMMED Jobs with names starting with the QNNDI are part of directory synchronization which may continue running after the server has ended To end those jobs enter the following command on any AS 400 command line CALL QNOTESINT QNNDIEND After making sure that all jobs under QNOTES are ended you can delete the code On any AS 400 command line type the following command and press the Enter key DLTLICPGM 5769LNT Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 123 The command shown above deletes the base and all options of the product If you want to delete a single option for example the C APIs specify option 3 only as shown in the following example DLTLICPGM 5769LNT OPTION 3 Note that servers and data directories are not removed when you delete the software If you want to delete everything you have to use the Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR command with option REMOVE before deleting the software see Removing a Domino for AS 400 Server on page 127 Miscellaneous Tips and Techniques The following sections contain various topics related to using Lotus Domino for AS 400 Environment Variables Environment variables are important for setting the Domino environment just like on other platforms Two
369. latforms however for Domino 4 6 the AS 400 specific information is covered in a separate book and Help database 35 The Domino for AS 400 Help database AS400HLP NSF contains all AS 400 specific information and is also available as a printed book e Installing and Managing Domino for AS 400 Part No 12999 The Domino for AS 400 Release Notes README NSF database contains last minute information specific to the AS 400 platform A printed version comes with the Domino for AS 400 CD ROM Changes in this Chapter The following changes and additions have been made for the second edition of this redbpaper On page 39 The PTF for the EDTF command in OS 400 V4R3 is SF49052 On page 52 Tips on problems with the LODRUN command On page 77 Ending the Domino Server On page 104 Mistake missing comma in example to setup loopback On page 105 A new tip on correctly setting the connection document for server replication On page 124 Installing a New Version of Lotus Domino for AS 400 On page 125 Batch Installation of Lotus Domino for AS 400 On page 129 Miscellaneous Tips and Techniques e Environment variables e Changing the size of the console e Running Domino Tasks while the server is not running Tips for problem determination Overview As with the implementation of Domino servers on other platforms the process of setting up a Domino for AS 400 server consists of two main phases 1 Installation of the Domin
370. lation in the world Here is the story of why we did it what we did how we did it and the results that we have seen Migrating to Domino for AS 400 the Rationale Late in 1997 two projects were going full tilt W the development of Domino for AS 400 the native AS 400 implementation of Domino in Rochester Minnesota and Cambridge Massachusetts W and the migration of the entire IBM internal e mail infrastructure from PROFS and Office Vision VM to Lotus Notes clients and Domino servers At the same time two groups got together and decided to throw another ingredient into the mix by making the entire Rochester Development Lab a Beta site for Domino for AS 400 The master chefs were the IBM Global Services team responsible for implementing and supporting Notes Domino in Rochester of which I am a part and the development team for Domino for AS 400 Here s the rationale behind the decision w Belief and a leap of faith The experienced Notes administrators in Rochester chose to implement a small Beta test We migrated thirty production mail users to Domino for AS 400 in November 1997 We rapidly began to see the Domino for AS 400 value proposition at work We had a vision of how the product would change and improve our role as Notes administrators And we believed the benefits we were already seeing would grow exponentially with a larger number of users We made a leap of faith and proposed migrating the entire Lotus Notes mail inf
371. le AcmeDS3 OrgA Properties System01 Figure 138 Basics Properties of Domino for AS 400 Server Network Configuration This tab shows network information for the server The values on this page are set in the Public Address Book You can only view this tab when the server is active Chapter 6 The Graphical User Interface of Operations Navigator 263 The server s Public Address Book must also be available to view this information 2 x Initialization File Port Notes Network Network Address Enabled TCPIP NETWORK1 AcmeDS3 Yes LOOPBACK NETWORKI 127 0 0 1 13523 Yes Figure 139 Network Configuration Properties of Domino for AS 400 Server Displaying or Changing the Domino Initialization File NOTES INI This tab shows a copy of the NOTES INI file that runs when you start this Domino server The system creates this initialization file automatically when you set up the server 2 x Directory Domino AcmeDS3 KitType 2 fal QNNDIHK CleanupS criptPath CALL GNOTES NSD Passthru_LogLevel 0 Console_LogLevel 2 VIEWIMP1 Lotus 1 2 3 Worksheet 0 _IWKSV WKS WK1_ WRL WRE WKS WK 4 VIEWIMP2 Structured Text 0 __ISTR LTA CGN STA 1 VIEWIMP3 T abular Text 0 _ITAB PRNL APT TXT TAB 1 VIEWEXP1 Lotus 1 2 3 Worksheet 0_ XWKS_ WKS_ WK1 WR1 WRK_4 VIEWEP2 Structured Text 0 _XSTR LTR CGN STR 1 VIEWEXP3 T abular Text 1 _TAB_ LTR APT CGN TAB_ 1 EDITIMP1 A4SCIl Text 0_ITEXT TXT PRN C H RI
372. le CRTFAXPRF command to create the necessary fax profiles for AS 400 users who use the Facsimile Support for AS 400 product For more details on the CRTFAXPRF command see the Facsimile Support for AS 400 Programmer s Guide and Reference SC41 0656 00 5 Use the Configure Fax Services CFGFAXSRV command to configure the enhanced services portion of the Facsimile Support for AS 400 product Enhanced services allows you to customize your fax operating environment See the Facsimile Support for AS 400 User s Guide SC41 0655 00 for more information about Enhanced Services To use the CFGFAXSRV command the user must be set up as a Fax Administrator 368 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration 6 Use the Start Fax Support STRFAXSPT command to start the Facsimile Support for AS 400 product 7 Use the Create Fax Master List Entry CRTFAXMLE command to add entries to the fax master list Include all of the destinations to and from which you plan to send and receive faxes For more information see the Facsimile Support for AS 400 Programmer s Guide and Reference SC41 0656 00 8 Use the Create Fax Distribution List CRTFAXDST command to create fax distribution lists Fax distribution lists contain entries from the Fax Master List and allow you to send faxes to specific groups of users For more information see the Facsimile Support for AS 400 Programmer s Guide and Reference SC41 0656 00
373. le Netscape Navigator or MS Explorer JX Internet Mail Packages for example Lotus Mail or Eudora T News Readers for example Netscape Navigator or MS Explorer Figure 69 Server Audience Quick and Easy Setup e Option SMTP MTA of the Internet Mail Packages in form 3 as shown in Figure 70 if you selected Advanced Setup in form 2 Web Browsers for example Netscape Navigator or MS Explorer arte Internet Mail Packages for example Lotus Mail or Eudora C mar C oap E Pors X smtp MTA News Readers for example Netscape Navigator or MS Explorer I wnte Figure 70 Server Audience Advanced Setup If you already configured a server without specifying this parameter you can reconfigure the server as described in Chapter 2 164 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration When you run the CFGDOMSVR command or create a server using Operations Navigator and select SMTPMTA some additional configuration is done for you under the covers Compared to other server platforms for Domino the AS 400 implementation of the Lotus Domino SMTP MIME MTA simplifies the setup process by automatically creating and configuring the required documents in the Public Address Book PAB The following documents describing MTA configuration parameters are automatically created during configuration of the Domino for AS 400 server e Global Domain document e Foreign Domain document e Connection document In addition the
374. le for Team00 Admin Acme Adding Team00 Admin Acme to the Name and Address Book Team00 Admin Acme successfully registered Press ENTER to end terminal session gt y F3 Exit F4 End of File F6 Print F9 Retrieve F17 Tovo zA Figure 14 Terminal Session Display for Last Phase of CFGDOMSVR Tip The content of the Terminal Session is kept during the duration of your AS 400 job until you sign off the AS 400 system If you perform the CFGDOMSVR command multiple times you may see the messages of the previous runs This may be confusing specially when the first attempt in an error message since you will see the error message again when you repeat the command Platform Independent Phase of Server Setup You will see messages moving up the screen showing you the progress of the setup process During this phase the certification keys will be created and stored in file CERT ID Based on this certifier the server ID SERVER ID and the administrator s ID USER ID as well as the Public Address Book NAMES NSF will also be created and stored in the data directory within the AS 400 Integrated File System IFS as specified in the DTADIR parameter in our example this is NOTES DATA This all happens only because we selected option FIRST as this is the first server within a new domain to be configured See Configure an Additional Server in an Existing Domino Domain on page 106 for information on how to add a new
375. llerod Raleigh NC 27626 0570 Canada Denmark w Fax send orders to United States toll free 1 800 445 9269 Canada toll free 1 800 267 4455 Outside North America 45 48 14 2207 long distance charges apply w 1 800 IBM 4FAX United States or 1 415 855 43 29 Outside USA ask for Index 4421 Abstracts of new redbooks Index 4422 IBM redbooks Index 4420 Redbooks for last six months w Direct Services send note to softwareshop vnet ibm com w On the World Wide Web Redbooks Home Page http www redbooks ibm com redbooks IBM Direct Publications Catalog http www elink ibmlink ibm com pbl pbl The current redbook Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration is also available in Adobe Acrobat format on the World Wide Web The URL is http www lotus com redbook w Internet Listserver With an Internet e mail address anyone can subscribe to an IBM Announcement Listserver To initiate the service send an e mail note to announce webster ibmlink ibm com with the keyword subscribe in the body of the note leave the subject line blank How To Get ITSO Redbooks 413 IBM Redbook Order Form Please send me the following Title Order Number Quantity O Please put me on the mailing list for updated versions of the IBM Redbook Catalog First name Last name Company Address City Postal code Country Telephone number Telefax number VAT number O Invoice t
376. llowing situation Two AS 400 systems SYSTEMO1 and SYSTEM02 are using AS 400 Directory Shadowing to synchronize their system distribution directories On each AS 400 system you also have a Domino for AS 400 server running each using directory synchronization to maintain the Domino Public Address Book and the AS 400 system distribution directory as well as replication to propagate changes to the address book A further assumption with this scenario is that synchronization shadowing and replication operate on the entire directory that is propagating local entries as well as entries describing users of other systems To keep the scenario simple all types of synchronization are only performed in the direction indicated in Figure 116 An endless loop can be initiated by changing an entry in the directory of SYSTEMO1 The following steps will occur 1 An AS 400 user changes a directory entry using the Change Directory Entry CHGDIRE command 2 The changed entry will be synchronized with a person document in the Domino Public Address Book 3 The person document will be replicated to the Domino for AS 400 server on SYSTEMO02 4 Directory synchronization will update the corresponding entry in the system distribution directory on SYSTEMO02 5 OS 400 directory shadowing will change the same entry in system distribution directory on SYSTEMO1 6 Directory synchronization on SYSTEMO1 does not recognize that the change performed in t
377. look at the job log of the QNNINSTS job Using Work with Active Jobs WRKACTIJOB go to the subsystem for the Domino server that you want to look at or the easiser way use option 9 of the new Work with Domino Servers WRKDOMSVR command Page down until you find the job QNNINSTS for that subsystem every Domino server partition that is running will have it s own QNNINSTS job running in it Look at the job log for the QNNINSTS job option 5 then option 10 For a restarted server the job log will look like this a Additional Message Information N Message ID LNT0929 Severity s s 3 20 Message type Diagnostic Date sent 09 13 98 Time sent 11 28 10 Message The Domino server has ended probably because of an error Trying to restart the Domino server Cause 7 The Domino server has probably encountered an unexpected error When this happens the Domino server tries to end any related Domino jobs and clean up any system resources that have been used Recovery Recovery may not be needed This job will try to restart the Domino server If the Domino server fails to start the console log TMP DOMINO18 NOTESHST 19980913112810366000000 and the current error returned by the restart request will be needed to diagnose any problems Technical description ets The completion code returned by the main Domino server job indicates that the Domino server jobs were ended More Press Enter t
378. lts to be automatically imported into a Notes rich text field Domino for AS 400 provides Notes applications with direct access to DB2 400 using DB functions or LotusScript Data Object LS DO to move and combine data When these functions are executed on the Domino server an ODBC driver or middleware communications layer is not needed for example when DB2 400 data is accessed from a Web browser or when running an agent In addition to the standard Domino database tools such as DBlookup and LS DO provided by Domino for AS 400 a separate product Lotus NotesPump 2 5 was also ported to the AS 400 system to allow replication with the DB2 400 relational database scheduled high volume data transfer as well as real time access or relational data new with NotesPump 2 5a Domino for AS 400 mail integration uses Simple Mail Transport Protocol SMTP and Mail Transport Agent MTA in combination with the AnyMail 400 framework to enable Domino to interact with other mail systems on an AS 400 system These systems include Office Vision JustMail POP3 and Internet e mail Domino for AS 400 also includes a directory synchronization function which allows you to propagate changes in the Domino Public Address Book PAB and the AS 400 system distribution directory in both directions Proven Security Integrated flexible security is a strength of both Domino and AS 400 architecture The AS 400 system has been enhanced with Firewall for AS 400 an i
379. may choose to keep those specific applications running on their existing platform Note Some Lotus companion products that run with Domino are written specifically to the services of a specific operating system and do require development effort to port to the AS 400 platform Some of these such as Domino Doc are now available on the AS 400 system Create the Domino Data Directory for the Domino for AS 400 Server Although it is not absolutely necessary to create the Domino data directory first since the Domino for AS 400 server configuration process can create it for you you may choose to do so for more control over what is adopted from the existing environment gt Domino for AS 400 tries to accommodate this difference as much as possible in accepting either of the two slash types in most cases However when retrieving a path name forward slashes will be delivered If an application specifically checks for a backslash it needs to be modified 332 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration In a migration scenario you will want to use existing ID files for your organization certifier the Domino server you are migrating and the administrator user This means that you need to copy those id files from your existing environment to a work area with path accessible to the Domino for AS 400 configuration process You also need to set up the configuration to use the existing Public Address Book NAMES NSF fo
380. me of the line description and the subnet mask for your new interface as shown in Figure 3 Contact your network administrator if you need more information about the values for your TCP IP configuration 6 Press Enter to add the new interface and to return to the Work with TCP IP Interfaces panel Figure 2 If you do not see F11 Display interface status at the bottom of the Work with TCP IP Interfaces panel you know that the TCP IP support on your AS 400 system was not started yet Continue with Step 7 If you do see F11 Display interface status at the bottom of the Work with TCP IP Interfaces panel you know that the TCP IP support on your AS 400 system was started Go to step 13 to verify that the interface is working correctly 7 Press Enter to return to the Configure TCP IP menu Figure on page 43 8 Start the TCP IP support on the AS 400 system using the Start TCP IP STRTCP command Type the following command in the command line STRTCP and press F4 44 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration a Type choices Start applicat Start TCP IP i F3 Exit F4 P era wes keys Start TCP IP STRTCP press Enter Additional Parameters ion servers YES YES NO nterfaces ke tren amp YES YES NO Bottom rompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display oy Figure 4 Start TCP IP STRTCP You will see the prompt as shown in Figure 4 P
381. ment The foreign domain document is shown in Figure 72 The field named Should be routed to Domain name is set to TheInternet as one word This field is used to link to the SMTP connection document The default content for the field Internet Domain is This means all outgoing mail addresses containing at least one Chapter 4 Mail Integration Through the SMTP MIME MTA 167 period to the right of the sign are considered as Internet addresses and will be routed to the MTA Lotus Notes DOMAIN Basics Restrictions Domain type Foreign SMTP Domain Allow mail only from domains Deny mail from domains Messages Addressed to Should be Routed to Internet Domain xx Domain name Thelnternet or Internet host gt Administration Figure 72 Foreign Domain Document 168 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration The SMTP Connection Document The SMTP Connection Document is shown in Figure 73 The name of the Source server is set to the name of your Domino for AS 400 server The default is kept for all other fields You may change the contents of other fields notice however that the following fields are ignored by the SMTP MIME MTA for AS 400 e Connect via e Destination domain e Relay host AcmeDS1 Acme to All Internet Hosts via Lotus Notes SERVER CONNECTION AcmeDS1jAcme to All Internet Hosts Basics Connection type SMTP Usage priority Normal
382. ministration PC for the installation process was removed e CD Drive on RISC used for installation CISC needs PC Some limitations of this solution were e ADSM is required for granular backup e DataPropagator is required for data movement e No real time access from Domino to DB2 400 data e Only one way directory shadowing e The Domino server running on a separate processor cannot take advantage of all the AS 400 system management functions Domino for AS 400 Solution After having done the first steps by implementing Domino on the AS 400 Integrated PC Server it became more and more clear that the AS 400 architecture would be able to provide much more benefit to groupware users if Domino were implemented directly as an AS 400 application rather than as an OS 2 application on the IPCS Therefore the UNIX version of the Domino product was ported to the AS 400 platform to run directly on an AS 400 system This new product named Domino for AS 400 became available for customers in February 1998 with many advantages over the previous coprocessor based implementation Domino for AS 400 is a powerful solution for building and deploying e Business applications As a server the AS 400 system provides reliability and scalability which are essential in the dynamic and often unpredictable e Business environment Domino for AS 400 has the power and tools to enhance existing business applications and reach new levels of collaboration and coordination
383. mmand specifically for each of the directories and subdirectories you have created for Domino for AS 400 Tip Use the F9 key to recall the CHGOWN command use F4 to prompt and then edit as appropriate Alternatively these commands can be included in a CL program Changing ownership sets the appropriate authorities for the QNOTES user profile at the same time However as an added security measure you will also want to change the public data authority for these files and directories to EXCLUDE To do this you use the Change Authority CHGAUT command For example type CHGAUT notes data USER PUBLIC DTAAUT EXCLUDE OBJAUT NONE Press the Enter key A message appears at the bottom of the display indicating Object Changed As in the case of changing ownership you must issue a change authority command for each of the directories and subdirectories you have created for Domino for AS 400 Modify the TCP IP Configuration of Both Servers You will need to add the original server s IP address as a new TCP IP interface on your AS 400 system and change the network identity of the original server For details about configuring an AS 400 TCP IP interface please refer to Configure TCP IP on Your AS 400 System on page 42 Before adding the original server IP address as a new AS 400 TCP IP interface you need to end the TCP IP interface of the original server If the original server is an Integrated PC Server this is done
384. mparable communications configuration on the answering system If the answering system is a Domino for AS 400 server that system requires a PPP connection profile of type ANS Before a successful connection can be made the ANS profile must be already active and the modem waiting for incoming call Domino for AS 400 does not automatically start the ANS profile You can do one of the following so that the profile becomes active e Use Operations Navigator right mouse click the connection profile and select Start in the pull down menu e Use option 9 in the Work with Point to Point TCP IP WRKTCPPTP display Use the Start Point to Point TCP IP STRTCPPTP command from an AS 400 command line or a CL program A CL program would be useful to start the connection profile automatically every time after an AS 400 IPL has been performed In this case you would have to modify the program referred to in the QSTRUPPGM system value Note If the same communications adapter on a single AS 400 system needs to serve as both a calling system and an answering system you would create 310 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration two PPP profiles referring to the same line description one for DIAL and one for ANS Create a Connection document in the Domino Public Address Book of the calling server Configure the appropriate Domino port in the Server document for the answering server in the Public Address Book
385. n 57 tae 25 system01 for more values Text description s s sre 6 s Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys Be Figure 63 Add TCP IP Host Table Entry ADDTCPHTE Make sure to enter the correct IP address as well as the same host name as you did with the Change TCP IP Domain CHGTCPDMN command Press the Tab key enter a plus sign into the small field and press Enter You will see the Specify More Values for Parameter HOSTNAME prompt as shown in Figure 64 158 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Va Type choices press Enter Host names Specify More Values for Parameter HOSTNAME N _ F24 More keys Name gt SYSTEMO1 Name system01 domland acme com Name More F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display Figure 64 Specify More Values for Parameter HOSTNAME Press the Tab key again to reach the second name field this field spans 4 lines on your display and enter the fully qualified host name that is both names shown in Figure 62 concatenated with a dot If you want your AS 400 to represent more than one SMTP domain you can even enter more names up to 4 per IP address see next paragraph A Single AS 400 Known by Multiple SMTP Domain Names A common requirement for setting up SMTP MIME for mail serving on an
386. n NLV of Client Access for AS 400 matches the NLV of Domino for AS 400 The same Client Access NLV must be installed on both the AS 400 host and the client workstation To determine if the NLV of Client Access on AS 400 matches the NLV of Domino for AS 400 1 Enter the following AS 400 CL command dspsfwrsc Press F11 to display the libraries and releases Verify that the value listed for the Feature of 5769LNT Option 1 with a Feature Type of LNG matches the value listed for the Feature of the IBM licensed product 5763 XD1 with a Feature Type of LNG Note Secondary languages for 5763 XD1 must be installed from a separate CD ROM To determine the languages that are available on the client use Windows Explorer to view subdirectories of the Client Access installation Find the Client Access directory and verify there is a subdirectory MRIxxxx where xxxx matches the NLV of Domino for AS 400 You must use the matching NLV on the client when you run Domino for AS 400 To select a national language for the client select Client Access Properties in the IBM AS 400 Client Access program group and then click the Language tab To install available secondary languages on the client use Selective Setup in the Accessories folder of the IBM AS400 Client Access program group Installing AS 400 Client Access for Windows 95 NT on your Workstation 1 Install and set up Client Access support on your AS 400 and workstation For more information about
387. n CD ROMs Order a subscription and receive updates 2 4 times a year at significant savings CD ROM Title Subscription Collection Kit Number Number Lotus Redbooks Collection SBOF 6899 SK2T 8039 Tivoli Redbooks Collection SBOF 6898 SK2T 8044 Application Development Redbooks Collection SBOF 7290 SK2T 8037 407 RS 6000 Redbooks Collection PostScript SBOF 7205 SK2T 8041 RS 6000 Redbooks Collection HTML BkMgr SBOF 7230 SK2T 8040 RS 6000 Redbooks Collection PDF SBOF 8700 SK2T 8043 AS 400 Redbooks Collection SBOF 7270 SK2T 2849 Transaction Processing and Data Management Redbook SBOF 7240 SK2T 8038 Collection Networking and Systems Management SBOF 7370 SK2T 6022 Redbooks Collection System 390 Redbooks Collection SBOF 7201 SK2T 2177 Other Lotus Related ITSO Publications The publications listed in this section may also be of interest AS 400 Electronic Mail Capabilities IBM form number SG24 4703 00 Mail Integration for Lotus Notes 4 5 on the IBM Integrated PC Server for AS 400 IBM form number SG24 4977 01 Using Lotus Notes on the IBM Integrated PC Server for AS 400 IBM form number SG24 4779 00 The Domino Defense Security in Lotus Notes and the Internet IBM form number SG24 4848 01 Lotus part number 12967 Lotus Solutions for the Enterprise Volume 1 Lotus Notes An Enterprise Application Platform IBM form number SG24 4837 00 Lotus part number 12968 Lotus Solutions for the Enterprise Volume 3 Using the I
388. n existing TCP IP interface For details about configuring an AS 400 TCP IP interface please refer to Configure TCP IP on Your AS 400 System on page 42 Then you configure a Domino for AS 400 server as a new and additional Domino server in your organization This process begins with registering the new server in the Public Address Book of your existing Domino domain It is completed by configuring the Domino for AS 400 server using the CFGDOMSVR command with option ADD Details of this entire process can be found in Chapter 2 under Configure an Additional Server in an Existing Domino Domain on page 106 350 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Since configuration of an additional server does not have the issue of potentially generating a new Public Address Book or ID files you may choose to let the configuration process create the Domino data directory for you However you may need to manually create any subdirectories needed to duplicate the original environment Please refer to the topic called Create the Domino Data Directory for the Domino for AS 400 Server under the server transplantation process on page 349 Copy the Domino Databases and Files to the Consolidated Server This step is very similar to the step described under Copy the Domino Databases and Files to the Transplanted Server on page 352 with two exceptions w The Public Address Book does not need to be copied because a repli
389. n existing server was configured as partitioned do one of the following e Check the server s NOTES INI for NPN 1 or e Check for the existence of sgf notespartition the name starts with a period in the server data directory notes data in our example wrklnk notes data sgf notespartition If the file sgf notespartition does not exist within the data directory this server was not set up as a partitioned server Note Each partitioned server needs to have its own data directory To avoid confusion it is a good idea to use the name of the Domino server as the directory name in one level of the hierarchy For example using the convention notes server would have all the data directories under the main directory called notes 3 Before starting any of the partitioned servers for the first time the NOTES INI file needs to be modified to define which IP address and port each server is listening to and if a port mapper should be used Two Options to Set Up Partitioned Servers for TCP IP Connections From the Notes client workstation point of view two partitioned servers look like two different systems that is two different IP hosts From the AS 400 system TCP IP configuration point of view there are two different ways to implement partitioned servers 88 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration e Each server has its own IP address If the servers use the same AS 400 communication adapter y
390. n the TCP IP Settings Tab of the Point to Point Profile Figure 155 must match the address specified in the TCP IP Properties dialog box Figure 166 on page 305 when you configure the client Dial Up Networking Chapter 7 Dial Up Connectivity 283 12 Click the Authentication tab Wind5Sppp Systemi1 7 x General Connection TCP IP Settings Script Authentication Local system identification I Enable local system identification CHAP only Allow PAP Validation list name v Hew CHAP only CP User name Password Cancel Help Figure 156 New Point to Point Profile Screen Authentication Tab Remote system authentication If you would like to use remote system authentication select the Require remote system identification box and select CHAP only Select a Validation list name from the list or specify a new name A validation list is a set of user names and passwords used for authentication when using a PPP profile 13 Click OK to finish the PPP profile configuration Configuring the Remote PC Workstation for PPP Dial in Although the use of TCP IP dial up is not limited to the Windows 95 platform this example is based on Windows 95 Setup of other 32 bit Windows environments such as Windows NT should be similar With OS 2 the TCP IP Network Dialer can be used To configure a remote Windows 95 workstation you must use several functions of Windows 95 whic
391. n the prompt shown in Figure 50 Keyword Description SERVER Server Name The name of your new Domino server When you configure an additional server you must type the full name that is the hierarchical name of the server Example AcmeDS2 acme OPTION Option Specifies whether you are setting up the first Domino server in a Notes domain FIRST adding an additional Domino server to an existing Domino domain or removing a Domino server from your AS 400 Example ADD 2 Press Enter and fill in the following additional parameters presented Note The contents of parameter OPTION controls which additional parameters will be prompted after you press the Enter key For this example we chose ADD so that the new server will be added to an existing domain Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 111 a Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR N Type choices press Enter Server name gt acmeds2 acme Option etss atoi ee ee we ee se a O OADD FIRST ADD REMOVE Data directory o e le te Ue fe le T notes acmeds2 Time zone e ser eR ee Se fe Se eS CST GMT EST CST MSL PSI CEI Daylight savings time NO AYES NO NAB server name acmeds1 More _ Factor F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys J Figure 51 CFGDOMSVR for Additional Server 2 Prompt Keyword Description DTADIR Data Directory S
392. n the same CD as other platforms Table 1 lists the Lotus SKU numbers used to order the English version of the product SKU Product 021135 DOMINO 4 6 SRVR for AS 400 North American RETAIL 021140 DOMINO 4 6 SRVR for AS 400 International English RETAIL 021145 DOMINO 4 6 SRVR for AS 400 Demo and Evaluation International English 021155 DOMINO 4 6 SRVR for AS 400 Documentation Pack G21920 DOMINO 4 6 SRVR for AS 400 North American Passport Media G21921 DOMINO 4 6 SRVR for AS 400 International English Passport Media G22215 DOMINO 4 6 SRVR AS 400 North American Passport Maintenance G22216 DOMINO 4 6 SRVR AS 400 International English Passport Maintenance Table 1 Packaging of Domino for AS 400 The Domino for AS 400 Release Notes are available on the product CD The database file is named README NSF and is stored in the directory identified for the server specified with the CFGDOMSVR command Select Domino for AS 400 Release Notes when you are viewing the list of databases under the server from a Notes Client The Installing and Managing Domino for AS 400 book is also included with the product CD in form of a Notes Help database viewable from any Notes Client The database file is named AS400HLP NSF and is installed in the directory identified for the server specified with the Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR command Select Domino for AS 400 Help when you are viewing the list of databases on the server from a Notes Client
393. nally equivalent program that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property rights may be used instead of the IBM product program or service Information in this book was developed in conjunction with use of the equipment specified and is limited in application to those specific hardware and software products and levels IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in this document The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents You can send license inquiries in writing to the IBM Director of Licensing IBM Corporation 500 Columbus Avenue Thornwood NY 10594 USA The information contained in this document has not been submitted to any formal IBM test and is distributed AS IS The information about non IBM vendor products in this manual has been supplied by the vendors and IBM assumes no responsibility for its accuracy or completeness The use of this information or the implementation of any of these techniques is a customer responsibility and depends on the customer s ability to evaluate and integrate them into the customer s operational environment While each item may have been reviewed by IBM for accuracy in a specific situation there is no guarantee that the same or similar results will be obtained elsewhere Customers attempting to adapt these techniques to their own environments do so at their own risk Any performance data contained in this document was dete
394. name for the Domino server If you leave this parameter with the default value ORG the Domino domain for the organization will be the name you entered in the organization ORG parameter If you select another name as the Notes domain the hierarchy of naming for users and servers will be user_name organization domain where organization name and domain are different Default ORG Network name Specifies the name of the Domino Named Network DNN in prior releases called Notes Named Network to which this Domino server belongs A named network identifies a group of servers that share a common protocol on the same physical network so they can communicate directly Default NETWORK1 Country ID Specifies a two character country ID that is added to the certifier ID for the Domino server Note this is not related to national language support It creates an additional organizational unit to be able to distinguish user and server IDs in different countries Default BLANK Log replication events Specifies whether the replication events should be logged in the Noteslog LOG NSF for this Domino server Default YES Log client session events Specifies whether the client session events should be logged in the Noteslog LOG NSF for this Domino server Default YES 3 The parameters TIMEZONE DAYSAVTIME LOGREPEVT and LOGSSNEVT define settings in the NOTES INI file They can be changed later by editing the NOT
395. nd your tape device name for TAPO1 Recovering All Changed Domino Objects from a Nightly Backup Assume that your strategy for backing up changed objects is nightly each night you back up only objects that have changed since the previous night To recover your entire Domino directory do the following Chapter 3 Backup and Recovery 147 1 Start an AS 400 session with a user profile that has JOBCTL and SAVSYS special authorities 2 To ensure that no one is using the databases stop the Domino server for example use the End Domino Server ENDDOMSVR command 3 Locate the tapes from your most recent complete backup Mount the correct tape in the tape unit 4 To recover the entire Domino database directory use the Restore Object RST command For example RST DEV qsys lib tap01 devd OBJ notes data 5 Locate and mount your first backup tapes from backing up changed objects For example if you back up everything on Saturday night locate your backup tapes from Sunday night 6 To recover all the changed objects on the tape everything that has changed since the previous night use the following command RST DEV qsys lib tap01 devd OBJ notes data Substitute your Domino data directory for NOTES DATA and your tape device name for TAPO1 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 for each nightly backup tape until your directory is current For example if you are recovering on Thursday you need to use the tapes for Mon
396. ndent objects called Machine Readable Material MRI The feature number 2924 in the second line for those two options indicates that language ID 2924 US English for Domino for AS 400 is installed on this AS 400 system However language ID 2924 does not imply that this is the Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 53 North American encryption version of the product Either version International English or North American English will appear with language ID 2924 What Happens When the Domino Server Is Installed After the administrator has entered the desired values into the menu shown in Figure 8 an installation program residing on the Lotus Domino CD ROM is started This program performs a Restore Licensed Program RSTLICPGM command under the covers for each of the selected program options which in turn copies and registers all objects for this product as a licensed program or a software resource in OS 400 This is basically what happens e The QNOTES library is populated with AS 400 objects such as programs PGM service programs SRVPGM message files MSGF and other object types e The QNOTES user profile is created for use by the Domino server e The QIBM PRODDATA LOTUS directory in the AS 400 integrated file system is populated with Domino resource files and other subdirectories e In the QIBM USERDATA LOTUS directory in the AS 400 integrated file system files with symbolic links to the objec
397. nection is active it may provide some good information Figure 196 shows an example of the PPP connection log i File Control Find ign seh eheas 30 AAAA NONNNNNNNNNNNNNN NY ol est e335 33 574 33 0 2310 3 6 336 3 6 23 EI eT FTN 2375 sls tea Un ie 207s Display Spooled File N PPPDOMSVR Page Line 1 6 Columns LS 8 derea keee nA ene kua Dranesa Stee ange ies ean ea eae Gaer She aig e O a etree a T a Sub Sh aces 930 Attempting modem reset 931 gt AT amp FS0 0 934 Reading modem response 699 lt AT amp FS0 0 69 9 4 45 OOK 708 Attempting modem initialization 708 gt AT amp SF1 amp D2 amp C1X4V100S7 70SBA0SMB33600 amp S1 723 Reading modem response 427 lt AT amp SF1 amp D2 amp C1X4V100S7 70SBA0SMB33600 amp S1 B27 a 3 OK 431 Attempting modem dial answer 436 gt ATDT56390 985 lt ATDT56390 987 Reading modem response 877 lt CONNECT 28800 LAPM COMPRESSED 881 Establishing point to point connection for profile PPPDOMSVR More wf F12 Cancel F19 Left F20 Right F24 More keys Figure 196 PPP Connection Log 326 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Chapter 8 Migration From Other Domino Platforms For a number of reasons you may wish to migrate to Domino for AS 400 Release 4 6 x from other platforms such as Windows NT or OS 2 or the implementation of Lotus Domino on the IBM Integrat
398. ng and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 55 Language Locale CCSID Date Date Time Decimal Sort Format Separator Separator Format Sequence Icelandic IS_IS 871 DMY I HEX Italian Italy IT_IT 280 DMY I HEX Japanese Latin JA_JP5035 5035 YMD BLANK HEX Korean KO_KR 933 YMD BLANK HEX Latvian LV_LV 1112 YMD I HEX Lithuanian LT_LT 1112 YMD I HEX Macedonian MK_MK 1025 DMY I HEX Norwegian NO_NO 277 DMY I HEX Polish PL_PL 870 YMD I HEX Portuguese Brazil PT_BR 37 DMY I HEX Portuguese Portugal PT_PT 37 DMY I HEX Romanian RO_RO 870 DMY I HEX Russian RU_RU 1025 DMY I HEX Serbian Cyrillic SR_SP 1025 DMY I HEX Serbian Latin SH_SP 870 DMY I HEX Slovak SK_SK 870 DMY I HEX Slovene SL_SI 870 DMY I HEX Spanish ES_ES 284 DMY I HEX Swedish SV_SE 278 DMY I HEX Thai TH_TH 838 MDY BLANK BLANK HEX Turkish TR_TR 1026 DMY I HEX Table 5 Locales Used for Supported Countries Changing the Date Format The date format for the Domino server is affected by e The locale for the QNOTES user profile e The Local Job Attributes values specified for the QNOTES user profile e Whether DateOrder is specified in the NOTES INI file e The QDATFMT system value The OS 400 processes jobs and threads that the Domino server runs under have a job attribute for the date format When DATFMT is specified on the Local Job Attributes for the QNOTES user profile the date format job attribu
399. nge 3 Copy 4 Remove 5 Display 6 Print Work with Point to Point TCP IP Modem Information i Opt Name Source Sgeneric hayes DEFAULTS GVC 28800 DEFAULTS _ Hayes 14400 Accura DEFAULTS Hayes 28800 Accura DEFAULTS _ IBM 9600 7855 DEFAULTS IBM 28800 7852 010 DEFAULTS _ IBM 28800 7852 013 DEFAULTS IBM 7852 400 DEFAULTS _ IBM 7852 400 2609 or 2612 EIA 232 V 24 adapter DEFAULTS 3 IBM 7857 017 DEFAULTS _ MaxTech 28800 DEFAULTS MultiTech 28800 Multimodem DEFAULTS USRobotics 14400 Sportster DEFAULTS USRobotics 28800 Sportster DEFAULTS More F3 Fxit F5 Refresh F9 Command line F12 Cancel F17 Position to at Figure 171 Work with Point to Point TCP IP Modem Information Chapter 7 Dial Up Connectivity 295 4 Type a name for the new entry to be created for example User defined 7857 017 Copy Modem Information N To copy modem information type New Name press Enter Name of source IBM 7857 017 New Name User Defined 7857 017 n F9 Command line F12 Cancel p Figure 172 Copy Modem Information 5 Press Enter to continue The resulting display contains a copy of the modem string settings from the JBM 7857 017 entry 296 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration A Copy TCP IP Point to Point Modem Information N Modem information name User Defined 7857 017 Type changes press Enter Modem initialization string AT amp MO amp AO0 amp
400. nity By reading this redpaper you are sure to obtain a solid technical understanding of how to deploy Domino for AS 400 Summary of Changes for the Second Edition The following changes and additions have been made for the second edition of this redpaper Chapter 2 On page 39 The PTF providing the EDTF command for V4R3 is SF49052 On page 52 Tips on problems with the LODRUN command On page 77 Ending the Domino Server On page 104 Corrected mistake in example to setup loopback On page 105 A new tip on correctly setting up for server replication On page 125 Install a New Version of Lotus Domino for AS 400 On page 125 Batch Installation of Lotus Domino for AS 400 On page 129 Miscellaneous Tips and Techniques for example e Environment variables e Changing the size of the console e Running Domino Tasks while the server is not running Tips for problem determination Preface 9 Chapter 3 On page 147 Ending the Domino Subsystem contains a warning not to end the Domino subsystem Chapter 4 On page 170 Change the Distribution Attributes describes an additional step needed when setting up the SMTP MTA in combination with Office Vision 400 On page 179 Language Dependent Character Set Conversions describes how to configure the MTA to convert character sets different from US ASCII On page 209 Mixed Address Lists Not Sent to Every Recipients addresses a problem when sending mail from
401. nly 3 check boxes in panel 3 which means Chapter 6 The Graphical User Interface of Operations Navigator 255 You cannot set up any of the advanced services such as partitioned servers clusters or billing Checking Internet Mail Packages selects all of the following e IMAP e LDAP e POP3 e SMTP MTA 9 Click the button with the greater than sign and you will see the fourth configuration panel 4 lt Finish Please review and complete the following information Most of the default values come from your For Help click on the machine settings Information you provided during installation supplies the rest blue labels Organization Identity For better security EI F please provide your Organization Name Acme j own passwords New Server Identity Once the information Si Name r pha eaii RomeDs4 1 is satisfactory click the Finish button above to create your Administrator s Identity new server Administrator s First Wilfried Me a Last Blankertz More Options For more specific j P aesanee Password E options return to Data files location screen 2 and choose Server s Directory 1 inotestAcmeDs4 Advanced Copy ID files to P danotesidata J Figure 130 Set Up Domino for AS 400 Panel 4 for Quick and Easy Setup 10 Refer to the description of the fields Organization Server Name and Administrator s Name in Chapter 2 of this book The field Server s Directory specifies the data direc
402. nning Domino on an Integrated PC Server you may submit the following command from any AS 400 command line to find out about all databases with full text index SBMNWSCMD CMD dir K ft s SERVER NTSIPCS CMDTYPE OS2 Where NTSIPCS must be replaced by the name of your Integrated PC Server Testing the Domino Applications Before Migrating Any applications that you plan to migrate should be tested with Domino for AS 400 prior to actual migration This testing may be accomplished by setting up a server using an IP address which is not registered on the DNS name server with the Domino server s name as IP host name The administrator or other persons who test the application would than add the IP address to their client s HOSTS file to be able to access the test server without connecting to the existing production environment Before starting the test you should disable all replication or mail routing in the connection documents on the test server To migrate Domino applications for testing purposes you should use the consolidation method as described in Server Consolidation Process Outline on page 367 even though you might use the transplantation method for the actual migration of the production environment after completing the tests and deleting the test server Chapter 8 Migration from Other Domino Platforms 331 Compatibility of Domino Applications Generally Domino applications are designed to be cross platform If the a
403. ns Navigator provides a graphical user interface which allows you to manage and administer an AS 400 system graphically Even if you decide to install and configure using the AS 400 user interface you must install a Notes client for some administration tasks This Notes client could be any Notes version However to fully support all administration functions we recommend that you use a client with the same version as the server When installing the Notes client make sure you select Notes Designer for Domino rather than the default version Notes desktop Starting in July 1998 the Domino for AS 400 product package also contains a CD ROM with a Notes client However the license that comes with this package is restricted for use only for administering a Domino server If you want to use other Lotus Notes functions you need to purchase additional client licenses from Lotus Prerequisites for Domino for AS 400 Before you install Domino for AS 400 you have to install the hardware and software necessary to support the Domino server on the AS 400 system AS 400 Hardware and Software Prerequisites These are the prerequisites for the Domino server running on an AS 400 system e An AS 400 RISC model Domino for AS 400 is not supported on CISC hardware e Operating System 400 5769 SS1 Version 4 Release 2 or later 3 In this case you must install and set up a Windows 95 or Windows NT 4 0 workstation Notes 4 6 designer client Client Acce
404. ns Navigator to end the servers 4 Ifyou use directory synchronization end the directory synchronization jobs Type the following call qnotesint qnndiend 5 After allowing at least 5 minutes for the servers and directory synchronization to end use the Work with Active Jobs WRKACTJOB command to verify that no DOMINOnn subsystems are active Also check the QSYSWRK subsystem to ensure that no jobs starting with qnndi are running 6 Load the CD for Domino for AS 400 4 6 2 in the CD ROM reader on the AS 400 system unit 7 Type the following command lodrun dev opt dir os400 8 Ifthe CD contains more than one language version you must select a language on the prompt display Type a 1 next to the language version that you want to install 9 On the prompt display type a 1 next to each product option that you want to install You must select each option that you already have installed on your Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 119 system You determined this in step 1 You may also choose to install additional options 10 D Press Enter The system loads the updated Domino for AS 400 programs to the appropriate libraries and QIBM directories You see status messages as the system installs each option that you selected In addition the system copies updated data files to the data directory for each Domino server on the AS 400 system The system requires approximately 3 minutes for this u
405. nt Access 400 tasks Sign off Selection or command F3 Exit F23 Set initial menu Startina Domino server ACMEDS1 in suhsvstem DOMTNOON1 F4 Prompt F9 Retrieve F12 Cancel F13 Information Assistant A Figure 24 Completion Message for Start Domino Server STRDOMSVR 4 If you see an error message instead use the F1 and then the F10 key as described in Verify the Configuration by Checking the AS 400 Job Log on page 71 to check the job log for the reason of the error Starting the Domino for AS 400 Server Automatically After IPL If you want to start the Domino server automatically after each OS 400 Initial Program Load IPL you need to modify the startup program defined in the system value QSTRUPPGM Ending the Domino Server Similar to starting a Domino server you have several ways to end a server e Use option 6 of the Work with Domino Servers WRKDOMSVR command e Use the End Domino Server ENDDOMSVR command e Use Operations Navigator This method is covered in Chapter 6 of this book Alternatively you may also end any Domino server using the console command quit or exit from the Work with Domino Console WRKDOMCSL command line or a remote Domino console from an authorized Notes client Important Keying the command exit is not the same as pressing the F3 key which is also described in the help line as F3 Exit F3 ends the console rather than the entire server Chapter 2 Installing and Setting
406. nt may have experienced a little bit longer connect time the next time they accessed the server Change Ownership and Authorities of Files and Directories This topic is identical to the topic with the same name in the server transplantation process on page 357 Chapter 8 Migration from Other Domino Platforms 351 Start the Domino for AS 400 Server To start the Domino for AS 400 server use the Start Domino Server STRDOMSVR command option 1 of the Work With Domino Servers WRKDOMSVR display or Operations Navigator Identify and Handle Databases with Local Encryption In most cases if the LocalDomainServers group is identified in a database s access control list and if the new server has been added to that group in the Public Address Book the new server should be able to access the copied databases An exception to that rule is databases with local encryption specified on the server for example for some mail databases Such databases would have been encrypted with an encryption key unique to the original server and the new server would be denied access to them The FIXUP command can be used from the new Domino server console to identify any mail files in this situation If results of FIXUP identify that the new Domino server does not have access to specific databases you can manually create a new replica of each of those databases on the new server using a Lotus Notes client interface Through the replication process Notes all
407. ntage is that since two servers with the same identity and IP address cannot both be active at the same time in the same network a server outage for some period of time is necessary Server consolidation involves changing the Domino and network identity of at least one server in the move from one platform to another often merging workload of two or more servers into one An advantage of this method even in migrating just one server is that the original and the new server can both remain concurrently active for a limited period of time A major disadvantage is that it involves change of user information in the Public Address Book formerly called Name and Address Book and changes to database icons and location documents on the users workstations to reflect the server change Also a different Domino identity means a different encryption key so locally encrypted mail files require special handling in order for the new server to be granted appropriate access Special considerations beyond the basic migration process may be involved if any of the following are a part of your environment Ww Migration from a server with Domino Release 4 5 or earlier w Migration of the SMTP MIME MTA w Use of connection documents for replication or mail routing on the Integrated PC Server 328 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration w Functions unique to the Integrated PC Server implementation of Domino w Domino applicati
408. ntegrated firewall that runs on the AS 400 Integrated PC Server Domino for AS 400 Advanced Services The Domino server on an AS 400 system provides the same functions as a Domino server on other platforms including some functions which are only available on selected platforms One example is partitioned servers which comes as a part of Advanced Services Chapter 1 Overview of Lotus Domino for AS 400 17 Formerly that is before July 1998 Lotus Domino Advanced Services required a separate license Now it is part of the Lotus Domino Enterprise Server That is even if your AS 400 system has four processors or less you need to purchase the Domino Enterprise Server License to be able to use Advanced Services as opposed to the Domino Standard Server License which would be sufficient for one to four processor system but does not include Advanced Services The Advanced Services provided as option 7 on the installation CD enhance the Domino for AS 400 server with the following capabilities e Partitioned servers e Clustered servers e Billing The following sections briefly describe these functions Partitioned Servers Partitioned servers allow multiple Domino servers to run on a single computer This feature is a part of the Lotus Domino Enterprise Server License and is available only for use on AS 400 NT and UNIX Note Domino for AS 400 supports up to 16 partitioned servers as opposed to NT or UNIX platforms which only suppor
409. ntranet To accomplish the integration between Domino and OS 400 mail two software components are involved e The SMTP MIME support of the TCP IP Connectivity Utilities licensed program 5796 TC1 For simplicity we will call this OS 400 SMTP support e The Lotus SMTP MIME MTA Message Transfer Agent In the rest of the chapter we refer to it simply as MTA The main focus of this chapter is on installing and configuring the SMTP MIME MTA on a Domino for AS 400 server Prerequisite for this is to have the TCP IP configuration on OS 400 set up correctly to support the OS 400 SMTP server We briefly describe this topic first and also how the MTA interacts with OS 400 SMTP via the AnyMail framework Finally we explain how to specify addresses and to send mail between these different e mail environments The AS 400 TCP IP function is divided between the OS 400 operating system and the TCP IP Connectivity Utilities for AS 400 Licensed Program LP When you purchase OS 400 the ordering system automatically places an order for the TCP IP Utilities LP The TCP IP Utilities LP is shipped with OS 400 at no additional charge However the TCP IP Utilities LP must be separately installed by using normal installation support 2 Note Domino also has other kinds of MTAs for example the X 400 MTA or the cc Mail MTA Only the SMTP MIME MTA is currently supported on Domino for AS 400 151 Changes in this Chapter The following changes an
410. nvironment a Notes workstation connects directly to a host through a single connection On some Domino platforms the LAN based scenario is accomplished using Remote LAN Service while the host based workstation connection is done with a proprietary protocol called X PC With Domino for AS 400 PPP or SLIP is used in either case Although access to IP resources other than the answering Domino server can be restricted Lotus Domino for AS 400 and the Notes client behave as if a LAN based IP connection would exist Other platforms may use a different Domino port for LAN based versus direct dial communications With Domino for AS 400 both LAN and WAN traffic may be accomplished using a single Domino port defined for the TCP IP protocol Note Do not confuse Domino ports with TCP IP ports For example port 80 is a TCP IP port used to listen for HTTP requests At least one named Domino port is defined for each configured protocol in the server document in the Public Address Book The default name for the Domino port used for the TCP IP protocol is TCPIP To use PPP or SLIP dial up connections the AS 400 system requires an appropriately configured communication adapter with a modem If the client workstation is Windows 95 Dial Up Networking capability is built in to the operating system and Lotus Notes can take advantage of it The options for a dial up connection are e A PPP connection using a PPP line description e A SLIP connection usin
411. ny different types of applications OS 400 also allows you to integrate multiple types of mail applications The AnyMail 400 Mail Server Framework MSF included with OS 400 made its debut two years ago to provide seamless connection to the Internet world from the AS 400 Systems Network Architecture Distribution Services SNADS environment without external mail gateways At this time the underlying e mail support for Office Vision 400 users POP3 users SMTP and other mail interfaces was integrated directly into OS 400 AnyMail 400 serves as an integration point for all mail and messaging services on the AS 400 system including the System Distribution Directory In addition AnyMail provides middleware that allows programmable extensions of the AS 400 e mail support by supporting application programs that snap into specific target points in the framework This allows mail integration with other AS 400 program products and allows vendors and customers to build custom functions into the AS 400 system s e mail support to address unique requirements One advantage the AnyMail framework offers Domino users is easy participation in an existing AS 400 mail environment This may include users of Office Vision and Chapter 1 Overview of Lotus Domino for AS 400 21 POP3 clients users of the AS 400 native POP3 server and SMTP capabilities Domino integrated Message Transfer Agent MTA interfaces directly with the AnyMail 400 mail server framework MSF
412. o Point Protocol 288 Point to Point TCP IP 287 POP3 17 Populate description 215 during synchronization 247 port mapping TCP IP 99 PPP 288 PPP Profile for remote LAN services 326 Problem Determination 131 Proxy ARP 316 PTF cumulative package 38 for EDTF 20 39 necessary for OS 400 38 SF45296 41 SF49013 411 SF49052 20 39 41 special instructions 39 Public Address Book 114 213 administering migration 419 description 215 PAB 50 62 70 82 83 97 103 105 106 107 110 111 112 117 119 120 121 122 127 recovering 149 replacing design 205 Public Data Authority of Domino data directory 351 PUBNAMES NTF 218 Q QDATFMT 57 QEZJOBLOG 133 QFAXSRVLVL 392 QMR 39 61 QMU 38 QNNDI2NA 251 QNNDI2SD 251 QNNDIEND 219 221 QNNDILCK 221 QNNDIMSG 251 252 qnndistj 246 INNINSTS 133 NOTES 131 345 active jobs 138 locale 55 User Profile 57 QSTRUPPGM 77 326 QSYSOPR 339 QSYSWRK 221 Q Q QTEMP 52 QTMSNOSPLT 209 Quarterly Maintenance Release QMR 39 Quarterly Maintenance Update QMU 38 Quick and Easy Setup 266 Quit console command 78 QUSER 265 269 QYNMFADDR 379 QYNMHOME 379 QYNMMAILTY 378 379 QYNMNTSDMN 379 QYNMORGU 379 QYNMSHORT 379 QYNMSVR 379 QZRCSRVS 265 269 270 QZRCVSRVS 269 270 R RAS400 339 Recovery authority required 148 changed objects 151 databases 151 entire server 148 incremental backup 151 mail 15
413. o all interfaces on the system e The server is not listening to any interface C Work with Domino Console D Previous subcommands and messages gt sh port tepip TCP IP Port Driver Transport Provider TCP Notes Session Local Address Foreign Address OCACOO001 1 1352 ok Enter a Domino subcommand gt F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Print F9 Retrieve eee F18 Bottom F21 Command line J Figure 38 TCPIP Port Listening to All IP Addresses The Server Is Listening to All IP Interfaces e As shown in Figure 38 the contents 1352 in column Local Address indicates that this server is listening to port 1352 on all IP addresses configured on the AS 400 system While this does not cause any problem for this server no other partitioned server will be able to connect to any TCP IP port The reason for this may be one of the following e The NOTES INI file has not been modified e The NOTES INI file has been modified but the server has not been restarted since the modification e The NOTES INI file has been modified but a typographic error has been made For example the following line is correct TCPIP_TcpIpAddress 0 10 1 2 217 1352 e Each of the following is incorrect TCPIP TcpIpAddress 0 10 1 2 217 1352 TCPIP_TcpIpAddress 1 10 1 2 217 1352 TCPIP_TcpIpAddress 0 10 1 2 217 1352 TCPIP_TcpIpAddress 0 10 1 2 117 1352 TCPIP_TcpIPAdress 0 10 1 2 217 1352 4 These are the mistakes A dash instead of an unders
414. o continue F3 Exit F6 Print F9 Display message details F12 Cancel F21 Select assistance level sy Figure 58 Job Log of Domino Server after an Automatic Restart When the server is automatically restarted the console is copied to a temporary file The name of the file can be found in the job log of the QNNINSTS job If you put the cursor on to the line that begins with Domino server has ended and press F1 then the second level message will appear This message will tell you where the console file has been copied to In Figure 58 the console file has been copied to TMP DOMINO18 NOTESHST 19980913112810366000000 Note the directory TMP is in the IFS root and not in the Domino data directory You can use the Display Stream File DSPSTMF command to view this file Since the content of the file is stored in Lotus Multi Byte Character Set LMBCS you have press F13 shift F1 to see the contents of the file The files in the TMP directory do not get erased automatically You will have to periodically display the TMP directory and delete the old NOTESHST files Domino for AS 400 has provided environment variables to assist in problem determination The first is AS400_DOMSVR_RESTART This environment variable will allow you to control how many times the Domino server should 128 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration attempt to auto restart The default value is 10 times If after
415. o customer number O Credit card number Credit card expiration date Card issued to Signature We accept American Express Diners Eurocard MasterCard and Visa Payment by credit card not available in all countries Signature mandatory for credit card payment DO NOT SEND CREDIT CARD INFORMATION OVER THE INTERNET 415 Index 0 Sign in SMTP Address 208 ALLOBSJ 41 42 51 128 DATFMT 57 FIRST 373 GEN 349 IOSYSCFG 51 JOBCTL 51 61 115 LIBL not found in Library List 52 OPT 52 SECADM 42 51 61 115 changing authority 21 login 129 DB 381 DB functions 17 _SMTP 372 2 2924 Language ID 54 5 5769 TC1 162 A Access Control is Set to Not Allow Replication 106 Add Environment Variables 129 Add Library List Entry 52 Add Notes User 377 ADDENVVAR 129 additional server definition 107 ADDLIBLE 52 ADDNTSUSR 377 Address Book synchronizing 247 ADMID 68 Administrator ID 68 ADSM 16 382 Adstar Distributed Storage Manager 382 Advanced Services 18 120 Advanced Setup 266 AnyMail 400 17 157 158 160 172 203 AS400HLP NSF 21 22 23 26 assistance level 132 Authority backing up 139 recovery 148 autoexec bat 129 Backup authority required 139 changed objects 144 data directory 139 databases 139 directory synchronization 139 libraries and directories 137 mail 142 143 specific database 143 stopping server 139 Backup and Recovery
416. o software 2 The initial setup configuration of the Domino server For the installation of the Domino for AS 400 software you need to use the Load and Run LODRUN command This OS 400 CL command calls a program on the Lotus CD ROM that prompts the user to select the options and components to Control Language CL is the language of OS 400 CL consists of a set of commands for performing system functions You enter CL commands from a command line on any system display The command line usually appears at the bottom of the display and has an arrow to prompt you A series of CL commands can also be compiled to create a CL program 36 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration be installed After the user has selected which options to install this command performs a Restore Licensed Program RSTLICPGM command which is invisible to the user and includes copying the code from the CD ROM onto the server s disk storage decompressing it and creating a certain storage infrastructure subdirectories libraries or other objects depending on the operating system For the second phase Domino server configuration you have two options e Use the AS 400 interface often called the green screen method executing Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR command e Use the Operations Navigator from a Notes client workstation You set up the Domino server by entering data into a Notes setup database The Operatio
417. obs 218 Type options press Enter 2 Change 3 Hold 4 End 5 Work with 6 Release 7 Display message 8 Work with spooled files 13 Disconnect Opt Subsystem Job User Type CPU Function Status DOMINOO1 QSYS SBS 0 DEQW e AMGR QNOTES BCI 0 TIMW CALCONN QNOTES BCI 0 DEQW a EVENT QNOTES BCI 0 TIMW ONNINSTS QNOTES BCH 0 PGM QNNINSTS EVTW REPLICA QNOTES BCI 0 TIMW SS REPORT QNOTES BCI 0 TIMW ROUTER QNOTES BCI 0 TIMW E SCHED QNOTES BCI 0 TIMW More Parameters or command gt F3 Exit F5 Refresh F7 Find F10 Restart statistics F11 Nisnlav elansed data F12 Cancel F23 More oantions F24 More kevs A Figure 25 Work with Domino Jobs You will see the Work with Active Jobs display as shown in Figure 25 This panel shows similar information to the one based on the Work with Subsystem Jobs 76 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration shown in Figure 27 on page 81 However the Work with Active Jobs Figure 25 displays additional information when you press the F11 key As an alternative or if you do not have Domino 4 62 installed yet you can use the Work with Subsystems WRKSBS command To do so perform the following steps 1 Type the following command on any AS 400 command line WRKSBS and press Enter You will see all active subsystems on your system Note that there may be more and different subsystems on your system than those shown in Figure 26 r Type options
418. obtained by selecting the AS 400 directory as the master directory for population If you do not a warning message will be posted which allows you to set the master directory for population to AS 400 Chapter 5 Directory Synchronization 229 If bi directional synchronization or Domino to AS 400 synchronization is configured you must indicate whether to maintain or reset the existing AS 400 SMTP information of an AS 400 directory entry You need to do this if the SMTP address of the synchronized Domino address book entry cannot be determined by the internal code of directory synchronization which is called to obtain the Domino SMTP address If you choose to maintain the existing AS 400 SMTP information none of the AS 400 directory entry mail information is changed if the SMTP address of the synchronized Domino address book entry cannot be determined The AS 400 directory entry mail information fields that remain unchanged are the Mail service level MSFSRVLVL the Preferred address PREFADR the SMTP user ID SMTPUSRID and the SMTP domain SMTPDMN However if you choose to reset these fields and the SMTP address of the Domino address book entry is unknown MSFSRVLVL and PREFADR are reset to the system defaults and SMTPUSRID and SMTPDMN are set to blank for the synchronized AS 400 directory entry Note If an SDD entry is set to Lotus Domino and directory synchronization creates a new PAB entry from it a person document is created However
419. ocument ADSRVID NAB e The server documents in the Public Address Book are searched for the name specified with the SERVER parameter using the full hierarchical name The password provided in the second part of the same parameter is used to open the ID file attached to the server document e A replica of the existing Public Address Book is created in the data directory of the new server Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 115 The ID file is detached from the server document and stored in new server data directory ID File Stored in IFS Directory e The ID file specified with parameter ADSRVID will be opened by Domino if necessary using the password provided in the second part of the same parameter e The server documents in the Public Address Book are searched for the name stored within the ID file Caution There will be no error message if the name specified with the SERVER parameter and the one stored in the ID file do not match e A replica of the existing Public Address Book is created in the data directory of the new server A completion message will indicate the successful configuration of your Domino server AS 400 Related Part of Server Setup After 5 to 15 minutes depending on size and workload of your AS 400 system the end of this configuration phase is indicated by the message Press ENTER to end terminal session Press Enter and the very short final phase of the configuration will
420. of Notes Help and is intended for mobile Notes users or users with limited disk space The database file name for Notes Help Lite is HELPLT4 NSF Chapter 1 Overview of Lotus Domino for AS 400 27 AS 400 System Architecture The AS 400 system is designed and built as a total system This means that facilities such as security a relational database and networking capabilities are fully integrated into the operating system and the machine The user communicates with all of these functions through a single control language CL or by using the system menus and prompts Below are some important system concepts e Layered machine architecture This architecture together with the high level machine interface insulates user applications from hardware characteristics It enables them to move to new hardware technology at any time without changing their application programs e Object based design Everything that can be stored or retrieved on the system is known as an object Objects exist to make user interfaces and applications independent of the internal structure of the machine e Single level storage Main storage and disk storage appear contiguous An object is saved or restored on the system through a device independent addressing mechanism This means that extra main storage or disk storage can be added to the system and used without affecting the application programs A user or a programmer is not concerned as to where a program or
421. of this book Ww Disable the Domino port called TCPIP Important This third option is not recommended The port named TCP IP may have other implications since it is the default name used by Domino for AS 400 Dial up Connectivity There are varied protocols for dial up connectivity to Domino on different platforms Virtually all of the platforms support TCP IP On some Domino platforms a proprietary protocol called X PC is also supported for dial up connectivity from client workstations The Integrated PC Server implementation of Domino supports X PC on its own modem port exclusive to the Pentium version and it can also take advantage of the TCP IP dial support PPP and SLIP provided with OS 400 Domino for AS 400 supports the TCP IP protocol exclusively and uses the AS 400 system s native communications hardware and software Dial up connectivity to Domino for AS 400 is available using PPP or SLIP Thus if you are using X PC with the communications hardware of the Integrated PC Server migration of your dial up connectivity environment to TCP IP dial will be a consideration For details on Domino for AS 400 dial up connectivity alternatives and configuration please refer to Chapter 7 of this book Chapter 8 Migration from Other Domino Platforms 361 Directory Shadowing versus Directory Synchronization The Integrated PC Server implementation of Domino supports one way directory shadowing from the AS 400 System Distribution Direct
422. ols include the following e For messaging Domino supports Post Office Protocol 3 POP3 Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP and Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions MIME e For Web use Domino supports Hyper Text Transfer Protocol HTTP Hyper Text Markup Language HTML and Network News Transfer Protocol NNTP e Domino Internet security includes support for the Secure Sockets Layer SSL protocol and X 509 certificates You can use your existing Internet infrastructure with Domino and be assured that your system works with other systems based on open protocols Domino is available on a number of platforms including IBM OS 2 IBM System 390 Microsoft Windows NT Novell NetWare and several types of UNIX operating systems Now with Domino for AS 400 Release 4 6 the AS 400 system is also a supported platform for Domino 13 Domino can actually work on any of the supported platforms as a server for clients with many different protocols Domino contains the original Notes server which has been extended by several Internet standards for client server relationships One probably the most important of those standards is HTTP Other Domino server functions include mail servers of various kinds Notes Mail POP3 IMAP4 Calendaring amp Scheduling Database Server Replication Workflow etc The excerpt below from Bob Tipton s Whittman Hart
423. omino Installing Client Access Operations Navigator and Domino Plug In Verifying Operations Navigator for Domino on Your Workstation Creating a New Domino for AS 400 Server Overview Before You Start Ensure Full Message Logging Steps to Create a Server Deleting a Domino Server Starting and Stopping Domino Servers Administering a Domino Server Displaying the Server Properties Displaying or Changing the Domino Initialization File NOTES INI Launching the Notes Administrative Client Registering a Notes User Based on an AS 400 User Profile Troubleshooting Chapter 7 Dial Up Connectivity Useful Publications Changes in this Chapter Protocols for Lotus Domino for AS 400 Switched Line Support PPP Dial In Example Configuring the PPP Connection Profile on the AS 400 System 248 249 251 251 253 253 253 259 264 265 265 265 273 273 274 274 276 277 278 282 285 285 285 286 289 290 Contents 5 Configuring the Remote PC Workstation for PPP Dial in Testing the PPP Connection SLIP Dial In Example Configuring the SLIP Connection Profile on the AS 400 System Configuring the Remote PC Workstation for SLIP Dial in Testing the SLIP connection Server to Server Dial Connections with Remote LAN Service AS 400 Requirements Setting Up Remote LAN Service Troubleshooting Chapter 8 Migration From Other Domino Platforms Changes in this Chapter General Approaches to Domino Ser
424. omino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Chapter 5 Directory Synchronization After giving a short overview of purpose and concepts this chapter describes the configuration and usage of the Domino for AS 400 Directory Synchronization which comes as part of the AS 400 Integration option of Domino for AS 400 What Is Directory Synchronization The Domino server as well as OS 400 based mail applications such as OfficeVision for AS 400 object distribution services or the POP3 server uses a directory to maintain information about the users of that mail application These directories contain information such as the first name last name department phone number address company and electronic mail address of an individual In addition to containing information about users of your system or server these directories also contain information about users on other systems or servers This makes it easier to send mail to those people without having to remember the exact mail address On the AS 400 system the information about all users of the OS 400 based mail applications is kept in a single directory the system distribution directory SDD Domino servers keep the user information in the Public Address Book PAB In addition to information about users the PAB also contains important configuration information for one or more Domino servers Note The configuration settings that are stored in the PAB such as serve
425. omino for AS 400 servers yet the right pane of the window will remain empty Otherwise for example if you already set up one or more servers using the AS 400 common interface you see each Domino server on your AS 400 system represented by an icon along with its status Stopped Starting Started Unknown amp S 400 Operations Navigator o x File Edit View Options Help 5 DIO z xls alt j 17 minutes old Environment f System0i Domno Bq AS 400 Network Status B SystemO1 E DOMSRV1 ORG1 Stopped E Database ie dominof1 ITSO Org Stopped File Systems E Olpmpicdt Avorkflow01 Started GH Intenet B d4srv00 0rg00 Stopped Jobs 8 AcmeDS1 ACME Started A Korora E AcmeD 8 0rgC Stopped ig Newark El Rich4SM021 ITSO_Test Started s3 Point to Point El RAch Sm02 1TS 0_Test Stopped FF Protocols E AcmeDS3 01gA Stopped im Servers B MailTest wshop Started El MailT est2 wshop Stopped f Client Access fal NetServer ff 05 400 FR TCPAP FY Printer Output ey Printers H A System Users and Groups oj 4 1 11 of 11 object s 4 Figure 126 List of Domino for AS 400 Servers At this point you are ready to use the Operations Navigator to configure or manage Domino for AS 400 servers The sections that follow show what you can do with Operations Navigator Creating a New Domino for AS 400 Server Once you have installed the Domino for AS
426. on Installing the Administrator s Workstation 36 36 37 40 41 42 46 50 51 51 55 58 59 60 61 73 75 77 78 81 85 86 88 Configuring Partitioned Domino for AS 400 Servers Two Options to Set Up Partitioned Servers for TCP IP Connections Connecting Partitioned Servers Through the Loopback Interface Configure an Additional Server in an Existing Domino Domain Reconfiguring the Domino Server Installing a New Version of Lotus Domino for AS 400 Batch Installation of Lotus Domino for AS 400 Local batch installation Remote batch installation without remote CD Removing a Domino for AS 400 Server Deleting the Domino Software from the AS 400 System Miscellaneous Tips and Techniques Environment Variables Changing the Size of the Domino Console Running Domino Tasks While the Server is Not Running Tips for Problem Determination Chapter 3 Backup and Recovery Changes in this Chapter What is the Integrated File System Backing Up Domino for AS 400 Objects AS 400 Libraries and IFS Directories for the Domino for AS 400 Product Saving the Entire AS 400 System Saving Domino Databases Incremental Backup Reduce the Downtime of Your Servers Avoiding Object Locks When Saving Notes Databases Recovery of Domino for AS 400 Objects 90 91 103 106 121 124 125 126 126 127 128 129 129 130 130 131 135 135 136 136 137 137 139 144 146 147 148 Recovering the
427. on Customization and Administration Tip If your workstation does not have a diskette drive or it is empty you will see error h 4 ne 4 is not accessible message A is not accessible after clicking the EES epee Set ID File button Click the Cancel button and i ahaa you will be able to select the disk drive and the Cancel directory where you want to store the server id file temporarily 15 Click the Register button During the next couple of minutes the actual registration process is performed by the registration server This includes e Creating a server ID for the new server and certifying it with a certifier based on the existing organization organizational unit certifier you selected in step 5 on page 108 e Creating a Server document for the new server in the Public Address Book and entering the administrator name in the Administrators field of the Server document e Encrypting and attaching the server ID to the Server document in the Public Address Book or saving the ID to a file on a disk of your workstation or both depending on the selection you made in step 14 e Adding the server name to the LocalDomainServers group in the Public Address Book e Creating an entry for the new server in the Certification Log CERTLOG NSF if you created one on the registration server After finishing this process the new server is already known to the existing Domino domain and organization H
428. on 400 will be used to send mail to Lotus Domino for AS 400 users you should use the Change Distribution Attributes CHGDSTA command and specify to keep all recipients addresses Type the following command in any AS 400 command line on each AS 400 system in your network where Office Vision 400 is used to send note to Domino users CHGDSTA KEEPRCP ALL Verify the QSNADS Subsystem Was Started The subsystem QSNADS needs to be active to allow SNADS based mail applications like Office Vision or object distribution services to receive mail On an AS 400 system with OfficeVision installed and being used QSNADS would be started at every system start and always be active However when trying to set up mail in a test environment it might be easily forgotten and the cause of unnecessary problem determination Therefore it is a good idea to check that QSNADS is active To do so you can use the Work with Subsystems WRKSBS command Key the following command in any AS 400 command line WRKSBS and press Enter You will see all active subsystems on your system Note there may be more and different subsystems on your system than those shown in Figure 68 The QSNADS subsystem is shown in bold i Work with Subsystems System SYSTEMO1 Type options press Enter 4 End subsystem 5 Display subsystem description 8 Work with subsystem jobs Total e ssSs s 5 Subsystem Pools Opt Subsystem Storage K 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 DOMINOO8 0
429. on how to install the client software To make sure that you install the full version of the software select Notes Designer for Domino in the Install Options dialog box as shown in Figure 33 this is not the default Select the features you want to install and the drive and folder for the application Options x Standard Install i Choose this option if you are installing Notes for workstation use Space Needed 49 MB FJ ON j Choose this option if you will be designing Notes databases for Domino Space Needed 76 MB C Customize features Manual install You select the features that you want to install Drive Notes program folder E C 228800 K x notes Browse Drive Notes data folder E C 228800 K inotes data Browse lt Previous Exit Install Help Figure 33 Install Options for Lotus Notes Client 2 The CD ROM containing Domino for AS 400 4 6 does not contain the Notes client code but a different CD ROM containing the client code will be part of the product package However the license is restricted to administration purposes only 86 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration After completing the installation you may want to start the Notes client If you do start the Notes client the dialog box shown in Figure 34 indicates that the program was started for the very first time Notes Workstation Setup xi r How are you
430. on is that the system distribution directory has three new user defined fields that contain the SMTP user name field name SMTPAUSRID SMTP Domain SMTPDMN and the mail router name SMTPRTE that used to be configured for the system alias tables Also as a result of the conversion the system alias tables as well as the personal alias tables function are disabled for that AS 400 system The advantages of converting are e Longer SMTP user IDs are available 64 characters after converting versus 24 characters before S Tt would not be a problem to use a local SDD entry however the AS 400 user profile associated with this entry cannot use Office Vision for AS 400 Chapter 4 Mail Integration Through the SMTP MIME MTA 189 e All the e mail addresses are in the same directory There is less chance of a problem that is caused when the alias table object or system distribution directory is restored independently and some entries that should be in both tables are not in one of the saved copies that was restored e SMTP aliases can be shadowed to other AS 400 systems as part of the system distribution directory shadowing e Updating changing or removing an SMTP address can now be done with a program using the following CL commands e Change Directory Entry CHGDIRE e Add Directory Entry ADDDIRE e Remove Directory Entry RMVDIRE The Disadvantages of Conversion are as follows e SMTP personal aliases are not converted and canno
431. one Domino server on your AS 400 partitioned servers each server has its own NNDIRSYC NSF and NNDILOG NSF However directory synchronization can be active on only one Domino server on the same AS 400 system at the same time To use directory synchronization you must select product option one AS 400 Integration and product option six HiTest C API of the Domino for AS 400 software when installing the software using the Load and Run LODRUN command For details on installing the Domino for AS 400 options see Installing the Domino Software in Chapter 2 Directory Synchronization Concepts In order to use directory synchronization you should understand several terms and concepts The following section describes the most important of these Public Address Book The Public Address Book plays a central role in the configuration maintenance and management of Domino servers A Public Address Book is the control and administration center for a group of Domino servers a domain Each Domino server must have a replica of the Public Address Book for the domain installed in its data directory This address book contains documents that provide information needed by the Domino servers For example the Public Address Book must contain a Person document for each user in the Domino domain and it may contain information about other people that you want to send mail to or simply work with Each Person document contains a group of fields with speci
432. ong address is not a problem when testing a new mail connection but is certainly cumbersome and error prone if users have to do this daily Chapter 4 Mail Integration Through the SMTP MIME MTA 183 To make it easier for the senders of SMTP mail or mail to other Notes domains you may store the recipients address in either the domain s public address book or in each user s personal address book Storing Foreign Mail Users Addresses in the Public Address Book If many Notes users often send mail to a defined group of mail users not using Notes or not being in the same domain you can make addressing mail much easier by creating person documents for the foreign mail users in the Domain s PAB A good example is where some people in your company use OfficeVision mail while others use Domino for AS 400 If you want to do so you should not register a Notes ID but just add a new person document to the public address book Enter the real name of the person to allow the Notes user to select the mail recipient by their names rather than mail addresses Select Other Internet Mail in the field Mail system and the layout of the form under the column Mail will change As shown in Figure 81 the foreign user s SMTP address must be entered into field Internet address Erika Bender Lotus Notes _ O x File Edit View Create nan Text windo Help E Save and Close RSON Erika Bender ebender system01 sys
433. onment Here is an example of using the AS 400 Save Object SAVOBJ command to back up the system distribution directory to a tape device called TAPO1 SAVOBJ OBJ qaok LIB qusrsys DEV tap01 OBJTYPE file Here is an example of using the AS 400 SAV command to back up the Domino Public Address Book to a tape device called TAPOL SAV DEV qsys 1lib tap01 devd OBJ notes data names nsf To create a copy of an existing Public Address Book choose File Database New Copy In the Copy Database dialog box specify the name of the Domino server and a name of the copy Remember that the Domino Address Chapter 5 Directory Synchronization 209 book must be in the Notes data directory or a sub directory on the Domino server and that it must have the same format as the Public Address Book that is it must be based on the template StdR4PublicAddressBook pubnames nsf It is a good idea to first test directory synchronization with a copy of the Domino Public Address Book After verifying that all of the entries as well as those that you want to be synchronized are shown in the target directory you are ready to use directory synchronization in a production environment You then can edit the test configuration change its status to disabled create a new configuration for the PAB and enable that one e Disable a directory synchronization configuration before changing key fields in the configuration This is to make sure th
434. onnection Document Using a Notes administrator workstation set up a Connection document in the Public Address Book of the calling Domino server 1 From the Notes workspace choose File Tools Server Administration 2 Click Servers and choose Servers View 3 Choose Create Server Connection to set up a new connection document as shown in Figure 190 Chapter 7 Dial Up Connectivity 319 SERVER CONNECTION AcmeAjAcme Basics Connection type Local Area Network a 1 Usage priority Normal J Source server T AcmeddAcme 4 Destination server P g Source domain P g Destination domain P y Use the port s rs Optional network address 4 Choose ports Scheduled Routing and Connection Replication Schedule ENABLED Ji Tasks Replication Mail Routing iJ Call at times 08 00 4M 10 00 PM each Route at once if 5 3 messages pending day Choose the type of connection you want to establish e g Dialup Modem Figure 190 New Server Connection 4 Inthe Connection Type field click on the down arrow and select Remote LAN Service from the drop down list 5 Click the OK button in the Select keywords dialog to enter your selection The appearance of the Server Connection form will change as shown in Figure 191 SERVER CONNECTION AcmeAjAcme Basics Connection type T Remote LAN Service J Usage priority Normal a J Source server T Acmed Acme 9 Destination server Source domain P y Destina
435. ons dependent on interfaces or functions specific to a particular operating system Guidelines to address some of these considerations are covered in this chapter In cases where details are beyond the scope of this book references to further information are provided Server Transplantation Process Outline The server transplantation method preserving the server s identity is desirable in many cases as a way to move a bulk of users rapidly with minimal user disruption It may be used as an initial phase even when consolidation of multiple servers is the final goal The overall process is as follows 1 Identify the Domino databases and other files to be migrated 2 Create the Domino data directory for the new Domino for AS 400 server 3 Schedule an outage of original Domino server long enough to transfer databases to be migrated 4 Copy the id files the Public Address Book NAMES NSF mail and other Domino databases to be migrated into the data directory using FTP the AS 400 network neighborhood capability or any other available copy method 5 Change ownership of files and directories to the QNOTES user profile and change the public authorities 6 Add the original IP address as a new TCP IP interface on the AS 400 system and change the network identity of the original server by creating a new network server description or changing the existing one 7 Configure the Domino for AS 400 server specifying FIRST server and
436. or IP datagram forwarding on any of the SLIP profiles has no effect since IP datagram forwarding is not allowed for any TCP IP interface System Access Authorization List If an authorization list is specified only the user profiles specified in the authorization list will be allowed to connect to this AS 400 system from a remote system The option NONE means that when a client is trying to connect to the AS 400 system no user ID or password needs to be specified If there is no authorization list that is you specified NONE it only means that there is no connection security If the client does pass a User ID and Password these values are ignored and the connection is allowed However there is still application level security such as Telnet USERID and password or as in our case a Notes ID that is needed If the user wants to validate that the remote client is allowed to connect then a valid system authorization list name can be entered here The authorization list is created by using option 1 of the Work with Authorization Lists WRKAUTL command Then you add one or more AS 400 user profile names that should be authorized to connect to the list using option 2 Edit and then F6 add new user Alternatively AS 400 authorization lists can be created using the Create Authorization List CRTAUTL command and user profile entries can be added to the authorization list using the Add Authorization List Entry ADDAUTLE command
437. or allow mail routing between those servers Since these servers reside on the same AS 400 system it is obviously desirable to exchange information between them without the need for an external communication network Domino for AS 400 servers use TCP IP for replication or mail routing A network interface is used between stand alone servers In the default configuration partition servers will use the external network interface for replication and mail routing This section describes how to connect partitioned servers without a physical interface using a special TCP IP function called the loopback interface The loopback interface is a special virtual TCP IP interface that allows socket connections without the use of a real hardware interface The TCP IP address of the loopback interface is 127 0 0 1 It is defined on every system using TCP IP as a networking protocol Assuming that you set up two or more partitioned servers as described in the previous sections either with unique IP addresses or using a port mapper you can do some additional configuration to allow those servers to connect via the loopback interface The following is what needs to be done Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 99 e Modify the NOTES INI file to define an additional Domino port which allows a connection only to other partitioned servers on the same AS 400 system via the loopback interface In our examples we call that port LOOPBACK e
438. or the MAXBUFFER parameter is 896 bytes The value specified for the SLIP Maximum Transmission Unit MTU must be less than or equal to the value of MAXBUFFER In this example we use 1500 bytes for MAXBUFFER Allow proxy ARP The default is N Set to Y if proxy ARP is to be used This field can only be set to Y if the Local interface address defined is a true local interface that is already defined and the Remote IP address is defined to be on the same subnet as the local address Physical line information Line description The name of the asynchronous line description created earlier A valid line description needs to be entered here Only lines of type ASYNC are supported Autocreate controller and device Y is usually a desirable option Then TCP IP creates the appropriate controller and device for the session When the session is completed the automatically created controller and device are deleted Press page down PgDn to see the second panel of the ANS profile configuration FigureFigure 177 shows the display after we filled in the specific parameters for our environment gt Proxy ARP is a technique that allows one machine the proxy agent to answer ARP requests that are actually destined for a different machine Proxy ARP is useful with SLIP because it allows a remote SLIP client to logically appear to be part of a local network or on the same subnet Chapter 7 Dial Up Connectivity 301
439. ore you continue saving the entire AS 400 system you should make sure no jobs related to Lotus Domino for AS 400 are active An easy way to verify this is to use the Work with User Jobs WRKUSRJOB command On any AS 400 command line enter the following command WRKUSRJOB USER QNOTES STATUS ACTIVE You will see all active jobs running under the QNOTES user profile Press the F5 key repeatedly until no jobs are shown To back up your entire AS 400 system including your Domino programs product files and databases you can use the SAVE menu by performing the following steps 1 Type the following command on any AS 400 command line GO SAVE Press Enter Press Page Down PgDn to see the second page of the menu Enter option 21 Save the entire system wr YS b amp b If your job is not running under the controlling subsystem you will receive an information message to tell you to transfer your job 134 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration save Select Save 20 214 22 5 23 Save 30 Fls 32s 33 34 Save System RCHASM01 one of the following System and User Data fine save system and user data defaults Entire system System data only All user data Document Library Objects All documents folders and mail New and changed documents new folders all mail Documents and folders Mail only Calendars More Selection or command gt
440. orter Notes FX Lotus Notes Phone Notes Lotus Notes ViP Phone Notes Mobile Mail Lotus SQL SmartIcons LotusScript Video Notes Notes Word Pro Notes HiTest 406 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Related ITSO Publications This section lists other Lotus related publications produced by the International Technical Support Organization ITSO For information on ordering these ITSO publications see How To Get ITSO Redbooks ITSO Lotus Publications Lotus Notes 4 5 A Developers Handbook IBM form number SG24 4876 00 Lotus part number AA0425 LotusScript for Visual Basic Programmers IBM form number SG24 4856 00 Lotus part number 12498 Secrets to Running Lotus Notes The Decisions No One Tells You How to Make IBM form number SG24 4875 00 Lotus part number AA0424 Enterprise Integration with Domino Connect IBM form number SG24 2181 00 Lotus part number 12913 Deploying Domino in an S 390 Environment IBM form number SG24 2182 00 Lotus part number 12957 Guide to Deploying Domino Go Webserver IBM form number SG24 2002 00 Lotus part number 12991 Developing Web Applications Using Lotus Notes Designer for Domino 4 6 IBM form number SG24 2183 00 Lotus part number 12974 The Next Step in Messaging Case Studies on Lotus cc Mail to Lotus Domino and Lotus Notes IBM form number SG24 5100 00 Lotus part number 12992 Redbooks on CD ROMs Redbooks are also available o
441. ory to the Domino Address Book Domino for AS 400 provides flexible and comprehensive bi directional directory synchronization that is available even if the Domino server itself is not running You will want to take advantage of the additional power and integration available with this feature For more details on Domino for AS 400 directory synchronization and its configuration please refer to Chapter 5 of this book One consideration is that if you have Lotus Notes users registered using the Add Notes User ADDNTSUSR command the same modifications required for mail integration apply when directory synchronization is used Refer to Add Notes User ADDNTSUSR Command on page 377 Database Integration With Domino on the Integrated PC Server integration with DB2 for AS 400 data is accomplished using the companion product DataPropagator 400 which needs to be purchased separately DB2 for AS 400 Integration for the Integrated PC Server allows data which resides on the AS 400 to be imported or shadowed to Lotus Domino databases User authorities to the DB2 400 tables can also be shadowed to the Domino database and translated into ACL settings Updates of shadowed data can be applied to DB2 for AS 400 tables only through a user written AS 400 exit program Domino for AS 400 significantly enhances the flexibility of real time bi directional data access Here are some examples of Domino for AS 400 data integration w Domino for AS 400 server b
442. otes client to determine the IP address associated with a given host name The DNS is similar to a telephone book The user looks up the name of the person or organization that he wants to contact and cross references the name to a telephone number It is a hierarchical client server based distributed database Name servers are programs which constitute the server site Name servers contain information about some segment of the network in a database and make it available to the clients Hosts File Configuration If you do not have a DNS for your TCP IP network or you don t want to use it use the TCP IP host table entries on your AS 400 system and the client workstations to associate the host name with the Internet address On Windows 95 clients the host table is implemented with an ASCII file called HOSTS usually in the WINDOWS directory FigureFigure 6 shows the HOSTS file being edited with the DOS Edit command If you don t find a file called HOSTS on your PC look for a file called HOSTS SAM rename it to HOSTS no extension and edit it to contain the name s of your Domino server s along with the appropriate IP address es 1 Note that there is no relationship between the Notes Domino domain and the TCP IP domain mentioned in this paragraph 48 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration File Edit Search View Options Help N RES Sa E A Cie NWENDOWS hOStSs menna a aa i This is a sam
443. otice that 02AN should be the last 4 characters of the Exit program data 198 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration A Display Exit Program System SYSTEMO1 Exit point SOc ney Ua Wes veh dey ve tua WexMe dara dey 5 QIBM_OZMFMSF_ENL_PSS Exit pole format a we wwe we we Ww Se 7 MSFF0100 Exit Program Number as we we we e we er we we we ow TE 1300 Exit progai ss Worm wow wom we wee we me ee QTMMENV Md TARY o gt Gets wae ate yee wae yee We yor Da yor We se Se ee A QTCP Text description a weis ste ee es wee cee Exit program data CESID s s wR wk we cm ee 37 Exit program data length s sso ss s woe w 16 Exit program data si sa peus ae eae A ee C SPCT 0100N2AF0A2AN A N Figure 90 Display Exit Program 7 The failed items should be removed from Domino This must be done manually Issue the OS 400 command cd qibm userdata lotus smtpmta inbound inprog Issue the OS 400 command wrklnk Remove each file listed by using option 4 before the file name It is important that MSF is still ended If not you may be deleting new mail Issue the OS 400 command cd qibm userdata lotus smtpmta inbound mail Issue the OS 400 command wrklnk Remove each file listed by using option 4 before the file name It is important that MSF is still ended If not you may be deleting new mail Now restart MSF STRMSF from an OS 400 command line to pick up the changes Restart the Domino SMT
444. ou need to assign more than one IP interface to the same line description Each server must appear with its correct IP address on a name server DNS or the clients host table See the topic called Configuring partitioned servers with unique IP addresses in the Domino Administration Help database doc helpadmn nsf or the Extend the Domino System book e All servers running on the AS 400 system use the same IP address Unique port numbers are used to distinguish between each partitioned server See the topic called Configuring partitioned servers using unique TCP IP port numbers in the Domino Administration Help database doc helpadmn nsf or the Extend the Domino System book Each method needs some additional configuration steps They are described in the following sections Each Partitioned Server has its Own IP Address For each partitioned server on the same AS 400 system you need to perform the following steps 1 Assign and configure a unique IP address for the server 2 Run the Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR command 3 Modify the NOTES INI file for this server by adding a statement defining the IP address and port typically the default 1352 to be used by this server 4 Start the server using the Start Domino Server STRDOMSVR command 5 Verify the server is listening to only one IP address The following topics describe each step Assign and Configure a Unique IP Address for Each Server A unique IP
445. ould generate the sender s SMTP address for Notes user Wilfried Blankertz Acme to be Wilfried_Blankertz system01 domland acme com MTAGlobal Lotus Notes loj x File Edit View Create Actions Section Window Help DOMAIN MTAGlobal Basics Members Domain type Global Domain Notes domains and ITSO_Test aliases Global domain name MTAGlobal Alias separator character Global domain role SMTP MTA Use as default Global L Yes Domain for use with all Internet protocols except HTTP SMTP Address X 400 Address Conversion Conversion Outbound mail restriction Unrestricted Outbound mail restriction Restrict to global domain Address format Address only Country name Tntemet domain suffix systemO1 domland acme com ADMD name ADMD single space Internet address lookup Enabled PRMD name H drahe a no match convert as PARR Localpartformedtrom Commonname StS Notes domain attribute None Notes domain s included None DDA type LD Notes domain s position Left of Notes domain separator period Address example JMD acme com gt Administration z ap l HomeTerm a Figure 71 Global Domain Document All other fields in the Global Domain document will contain the default entries For more details see the topic Details Creating a Global Domain document in the Domino Administration Help database hlpadmn nsf or the book Extending the Domino System The Foreign Domain Docu
446. ound Work Queue gt 86256624 002D7452 00 SYSTEMO1 acme com lt 8625663C 0049C24 SMTPMTA omsgeny Message 86256624 002D 7452 converted for WBL us ibm com message is queued for transmission SMTPMTA lt CN MailT est O wshop gt 86256625 002D81 7D lt 8625663C 0049C375 gt lt Server MailTest wshop gt lt N gt lt 135 SMTPMTA lt SMTP MTA Outbound Work Queue gt 86256625 002D817D 00 SSTEMO1 acme com lt 8625663C 0049C37 SMTPMTA omsgeny Message 86256625 002D817D converted for WBL us ibm com message is queued for transmissior SMTPMTA lt CN Maill est O wshop gt 86256626 002D8D38 lt 8625663C 0049C45D gt lt Server MailTest wshop gt lt N gt lt 13 amp SMTPMTA lt SMTP MTA Outbound Work Queue gt 86256626 002D8D38 00 SS TEMO1 acme com lt 8625663C 0049C4 SMTPMTA omsgeny Message 86256626 002D8D38 converted for WBL us ibm com message is queued for transmissior SMTPMTA lt CN Maill est O wshop gt 86256627 002D9C5C lt 8625663C 0049C5EC gt lt Server MailTest wshop gt lt N gt lt 13 SMTPMTA lt SMTP MTA Outbound Work Queue gt 86256627 002D9C5C 00 SYS TEMO1 acme com lt 8625663C 0049C5E SMTPMTA omsgeny Message 86256627 002D9C5C converted for WBL us ibm com message is queued for transmissior SMTPMTA isesctl Startup complete SMTPMTA MTA startup completed SMTPMTA osesctl Received message notification SMTPMTA imsgenv Startup complete SMTPMTA lt CN MailT est O wshop gt 86256628 002D4994 lt 8625663C 0049C742 gt lt Server MailT est wshop
447. owever it still needs to be configured set up on the AS 400 system using either the Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR command from a 5250 session or using the Operations Navigator Before having a closer look at the setup parameters we first discuss the two different ways to handle the new server ID file Handling the ID File for an Additional Server As pointed out earlier step 14 on page 110 there are two ways to create the new server ID when you register it e Attach the ID to the server document in the Public Address Book e Store the ID in a file without password on disk Each method has advantages and disadvantages We describe the characteristics of each method in the following sections Attach the ID to the Server Document in the Public Address Book The advantage of this method is that during the setup process on the AS 400 system while performing the Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR command the Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 107 ID file will automatically be retrieved from the registration server The disadvan tage is that a password must be specified for the ID file This is no problem during the configuration process since you can specify the ID file password with the ADDSVRID parameter of the CFGDOMSVR command However when you start the server after having configured it it will not start unless you use the Domino console on the AS 400 system using the Work with Domino Console WRKDOMCSL
448. ows this encryption key to be rebuilt You can then verify that all the mail data has been successfully copied and accessible by the new Domino server Use Replication to Keep Files Synchronized Until Cutover The final step in data migration is to replicate the existing Domino server with the new Domino server periodically to keep the data synchronized until after cutover After updating the Public Address Book discussed in the next topic to reflect the change in mail servers one final replication of the old and new Domino servers will complete the process From a data perspective this process provides uninterrupted service to the user community Change User Information in the Public Address Book When the location of a user s mail database is moved from one Domino server to another one with a different Domino identity changes need to be made to the Public Address Book which the Domino mail router references to deliver the mail Person documents in the Public Address Book must be modified to change the mail server and if necessary the mail file path for each user being migrated If you are migrating all users from a given server this could be done with a simple agent In the case of a pilot group of users migrating from different servers a manual approach might be more straightforward Make Appropriate Changes on User Workstations When the location of a user s mail database is moved from one Domino server to another one with a
449. p capability is sometimes called an incremental backup You might find a combination of complete backup and incremental backup particularly useful if your Domino server has many databases that do not change very often Strategies for Incremental Backup Following are the two most common strategies for incremental backups e Backing up changes since the last full backup With this strategy you back up everything that has changed since you last backed up all the databases from your Domino server For example assume that you back up your entire server on Saturday night On Sunday night you would back up everything that has changed since Saturday night On Monday night you would back up everything that has changed since Saturday night On Tuesday night you would back up everything that has changed since Saturday night And so on The advantage of this strategy is that it makes recovery simple When you need to recover you need to use only your tapes from your full backup and your tapes from your most recent incremental backup The disadvantage to this strategy is that your backups grow larger both in media usage and duration each day until your next complete backup e Backing up changes since the last incremental backup With this strategy you back up only objects that have changed since the most recent backup For example assume that you back up your entire server on Saturday night On Sunday night you would back up everything that has chang
450. paths to the copied id files If migrating the SMTP MIME MTA do not configure the MTA at this time See instructions in Migrating the SMTP MIME MTA on page 371 8 Start the TCP IP interface and the new Domino server on the AS 400 system Because it has the same name and TCP IP address the server change should be transparent to the users There may be variations of the steps and the sequence you may perform them which may be successful as well We found the steps as described above provide the most convenient and secure way to migrate a Domino server in most cases For a migration from an Integrated PC server it is important to copy the files step 5 before creating a new network server description in step 6 to allow access to the Domino data directory through FTP Chapter 8 Migration from Other Domino Platforms 329 The following topics describe each of the migration tasks Identify the Domino Databases and Files to be Migrated First you need to determine which databases and files will actually be migrated at this time This task may sound simple at first but it requires careful planning You should not blindly copy the entire contents of the Domino data directory In addition to containing Domino databases the Domino data directory also contains files specific to the existing operating system implementation and release of Domino for example modem files documentation and configuration databases and database templates
451. pdate process per Domino server During this process you see a status message like the one shown at the bottom of Figure 56 for each server that the system upgrades T Install Lotus Domino For AS 400 Licensed Program 5769LNT N Type options press Enter 1 Install Product Installed Option Option Status Description 1 BASE INSTALLED Domino 4 6 Server 1 I INSTALLED AS 400 Integration 1 3 INSTALLED C API Release 4 5 1 4 INSTALLED C API Release 4 1 1 5 INSTALLED LotusScript Extension Toolkit 1 6 INSTALLED HiTest C API Release 4 5 T 7 INSTALLED Advanced Services F3 Exit ENTER To Continue C COPYRIGHT IBM CORP 1980 1998 C COPYRIGHT LOTUS DEVELOPMENT CORP 1998 toarads na AcmeDS32 __ yp Figure 56 Install a New Version of Lotus Domino for AS 400 11 When the installation process completes you receive a message indicating whether the Load and Run LODRUN process completed successfully or encountered errors Batch Installation of Lotus Domino for AS 400 Beginning with release 4 6 2 you have the option to install Domino for AS 400 without responding to the prompt display that requires you to select which options to install This is particularly useful for multiple installations in remote locations that do not have skilled administrators or that require unattended installation during off hours Two methods for batch installation are available 120 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and
452. pecifies the path to the integrated file system directory where you want Domino data files to reside If the specified directory does not exist it is automatically created Note that you cannot specify any drive letter such as C here as you would on other platforms The hierarchy of directories is indicated by slashes not by backslashes Example notes acmeds2 TIMEZONE Time zone Specifies the time zone to be used by the Domino server DAYSAVTIME Daylight savings time Specifies whether the server time stamp should be adjusted for daylight savings time DST Default YES continued NABSVR NAB server name Specifies the name of an existing Domino server that has the Public Address Book to be used for this server The Name and Address Book NAB is copied from the specified Domino server to this new server Because the Public Address Book has a large amount of information the copy time could be extensive The name of the NAB server must not be specified in the hierarchical form It must be the valid IP host name for that server You must specify a server name when you specify an Option of ADD 112 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration 3 Press the PgDn key to see the next set of parameters C Type choices press Enter Additional server ID ID file ID file s password Log replication events Log client session events Replace configuration Web browsers News read
453. pecify how to handle unknown SMTP addresses in a Domino entry If you choose to maintain mail information see Maintain Mail Information on page 240 49 Click Next and you will see the Advanced Information form 50 On the Advanced Information display you can specify any advanced options as needed This display is intended to be used to activate further functional enhancements for directory synchronization which will ship in the future without the need to replace the entire configuration database If you type in anything which is not supported the text will be ignored 228 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration 51 Click the Save and Close button 52 If this is a new configuration for that server and you did not change the field mappings earlier the Create Field Mappings window is shown Create Field Mappings G Field mappings not found for directory N synchronization configuration Do you want to create new field mappings Figure 114 Create Field Mapping Window Click the Yes button This will add the standard field mappings of the starter set to your new configuration Maintain Mail Information When you choose to maintain mail information directory synchronization attempts to keep mail information synchronized between the AS 400 directory and Domino address book entries How this is accomplished depends upon what type of directory synchronization is enabled unidi
454. ple HOSTS file used by Microsoft TCP IP for Chicago This file contains the mappings of IP addresses to host names Each entry should be kept on an individual line The IP address should be placed in the first column followed by the corresponding host name The IP address and the host name should be separated by at least one space Additionally comments such as these may be inserted on individual lines or following the machine name denoted by a symbol For example 102 54 94 97 rhino acme com source server 38 25 63 10 x acme com x client host I 1127 0 0 1 localhost Kuli Seas acmedal p Figure 6 Example of a HOSTS file in a Windows 95 System To create or modify the host table on your AS 400 system use the Configure TCP IP CFGTCP menu option 10 FigureFigure 7 shows the host table on an AS 400 system je Work with TCP IP Host Table Entries N System SYSTEMA Type options press Enter 1 Add 2 Change 4 Remove 5 Display 7 Rename Internet Host Opt Address Name 2 IOL Zaa SYSTEMA ACMEDS1 127 0041 LOOPBACK LOCALHOST Bottom Kee F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Print list F12 Cancel F17 Position to P Figure 7 Example of Host Table Entries on an AS 400 System Installation Setup and Configuration The term installation is often referred to as the entire process of loading the software and getting it ready to be used To install Domino for AS 400 you need to distinguish three different tasks
455. ppear at the bottom of your screen confirming your change In our example the message states Network Server Description DOMINO1 changed 6 Vary on the Integrated PC Server again using the Vary Configuration VRYCFG command Note In either scenario you are changing the external IP address for the existing Integrated PC Server If you have a large TCP IP network with several subnetworks connected through routers or bridges it may be necessary to flush the ARP table on the router before the router recognizes the new MAC address as owning the IP address Configure the Transplanted Domino for AS 400 Server The next step is to configure the Domino for AS 400 server Since you will be preserving the Domino server identity and not creating a new and additional server you will configure the server as a FIRST server even though it is technically not the first Domino server in your organization Using the CFGDOMSVR command you will specify the paths to the ID files you have copied provide information from your existing Domino environment and specify Replace Configuration NO The three figures below show an example The server name should match the existing Domino server and if migrating from 7 A reason for using two ports would be one port connects to a Token Ring the other one to an Ethernet or you may have 4 MB and a 16MB Token Ring 8 For example if the Integrated PC Server is used to implement a firewall the internal port need
456. pplication is a standard Domino application it will usually run unchanged on the AS 400 platform However since there are exceptions to every rule testing is necessary Here are the general guidelines for cross platform portability without modification w The application has been created using only the tools that come as part of Domino no Visual Basic no C or C no outside influencing wrappers W The application consists only of Domino databases NSF files no external operating system related DLLs Ww The application is independent of the services of a specific operating system Some of the exceptions requiring minor modification are addressed in an article entitled Porting Domino Applications to AS 400 in the May 1998 Wellesley Information Systems Business Partner Special Report The text is available on the Web at the following URL http www eview com eview view nsf pages as400dev The special cases explained in the article include w Difference in path delimiter when accessing databases on the server the AS 400 syntax as well as UNIX uses a forward slash while PC operating systems use a back slash w Differences in the use of LotusScript Data Object LS DO instructions w Unsupported LotusScript instructions w Differences in C C and HiTest C APIs Applications significantly integrated with the services of a particular operating system will most likely require a significant amount of modification You
457. protects Domino databases from any access outside of Domino Domino security controls access within Domino for AS 400 If you plan to use a Domino application to access DB2 400 data you will need to control access at the AS 400 level and the Domino for AS 400 level Summary There is powerful integration with Domino for AS 400 This integration encompasses centralized administration and management universal mail framework airtight security direct access to DB2 400 data and integration Chapter 1 Overview of Lotus Domino for AS 400 31 with online transaction programs The architecture of Domino for AS 400 allows for simplicity through integration groupware workflow collaboration Internet enterprise applications data warehousing and more all on the same system The AS 400 system is one of the most reliable in the industry and can fit the budget and needs of both small and mid sized businesses Domino for AS 400 can scale high enough to support over 10 400 NotesBench mail users on a single machine and scale wide enough to accommodate a disperse geographic network Domino for AS 400 is easy to use and administer 32 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Chapter 1 Overview of Lotus Domino for AS 400 33 Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 This chapter describes how to install the Domino server on an AS 400 system and proceed with its configuration through two possible met
458. ption 12 or by keying the Change TCP IP Domain CHGTCPDMN command and pressing F4 In either case you will see the prompt as shown in Figure 62 N Change TCP IP Domain CHGTCPDMN Type choices press Enter Host name system01 Domain name domland acme com Host name search priority Internet address REMOTE REMOTE TO dg LO LOT LOCAL SAME KG F13 How to use this display VEOSTE TOIT Bottom F10 Additional parameters F12 Cancel F24 More keys D F5 Refresh F4 Prompt Figure 62 Change TCP IP Domain CHGTCPDMN Prompt Now you should enter a local TCP IP host name and the TCP IP domain name The combination of these two names is referred to as the fully qualified local host name and is the name by which this host is known to the network The host name whether by itself or fully qualified is sometimes referred to as the SMTP domain If a Domain Name System DNS exists you should also specify the IP addresses of your name server s and whether or not the local host table should be searched before the name server s tables Chapter 4 Mail Integration Through the SMTP MIME MTA 157 Tip The title of the last two parameters Internet address may be somewhat misleading It is not the Internet address for the AS 400 it is rather the address of one or more name servers for the DNS Pressing F1 for help gives you the correct explanation Include the Host
459. r connection domain and other documents are not part of the data that is handled by directory synchronization Why Store the Same Information in Multiple Directories Domino for AS 400 directory synchronization provides the capability to automatically synchronize user information in a Domino Public Address Book with the user information in the AS 400 system distribution directory By taking advantage of directory synchronization you can avoid manually updating information for the same user in two places 203 The reason why it can be useful to store information about the same users on more than one system is the fact that you not only have the mandatory information about people sending and receiving mail on the same system it is also beneficial to have information about the people that users are sending mail to That is when composing an e mail the sender can search for the recipient s common first and last name rather than needing to memorize an artificial mailing address Also the address can be verified on the sender s system rather than on the recipient s system or application The Concept of Directory Synchronization You can think of directory synchronization as a form of replication that updates a Domino address book with the changes being applied to the AS 400 system distribution directory SDD or updating the SDD based on changes being made in the Domino Address Book or both depending on the way that you confi
460. r Agents MTA for example the SMTP MIME MTA X 400 MTA or cc Mail MTA Domino for AS 400 only supports the SMTP MIME MTA as described in detail later in this chapter Thus Domino for AS 400 can exchange mail in two different formats e Notes mail with other Domino servers and Notes clients e SMTP MIME mail with any application supporting SMTP MIME and POP3 or IMAP4 clients Combining the Mail Environments of Domino and OS 400 e ovo ovi400 Mail POP3 Mailbox DB _ AS 400 Workstation fos E Client Other SNADS Nodes Internet or Intranet Any pops _ or g Z IMAP4 Notes j p l Client Client haii Token Ring LAN m i ee Notes Notes Client E Client L Z Z ee Figure 61 Combining the Mail Environments of Domino and OS 400 As a conclusion of the previous two sections you can see that AS 400 based mail applications and Domino for AS 400 support one common mail format SMTP MIME Chapter 4 Mail Integration Through the SMTP MIME MTA 153 Through SMTP MIME MTA and AnyMail 400 not only does the exchange of mail between Domino for AS 400 and OV 400 become possible but the OS 400 SMTP support also allows sending mail to and receiving mail from any Internet based mail application as long as there is a connection to the AS 400 system What Is the Domino for AS 400 SMTP MIME MTA Originally developed as a separate product the Lotus Notes SMTP MIME MTA
461. r application creates the following e A Person document in the server Public Address Book e An ID file for the user The ID file contains the certificate that the Notes client uses to authenticate with the server The user s workstation must have a copy of this ID file for the user to connect to the server successfully Two options are available for setting up Domino for AS 400 users e From a Notes client workstation connected to the Domino server use the administration function that is part of Domino to set up a new user This method does not create an AS 400 user profile for the Domino user However the directory synchronization function copies the user entries from the Domino Public Address book to the AS 400 system distribution directory e From an administrator workstation connected to the AS 400 system you can use Operations Navigator to create an AS 400 user profile and register the user for Domino at the same time Use this method to also register an existing AS 400 user as a Domino user An administrator workstation needs both a Notes client connection to the AS 400 system and an AS 400 Client Access for Windows 95 NT connection to the AS 400 system To create an AS 400 user profile your Domino administrator s AS 400 user profile must have SECADM authority To give a user SECADM authority change the authority field in the user profile You can use either the Change User Profile CHGUSRPRF command or Operations Navigator
462. r implementation of Domino offers some unique integration features that have been implemented differently with Domino for AS 400 The primary considerations are related to the following w Add Notes User ADDNTSUSR command w Differences in default port names w Dial up connectivity X PC versus PPP SLIP w Directory shadowing vs directory synchronization w Database integration DataProp versus NotesPump w Backup and recovery ADSM vs BRMS or OS 400 IFS backup recovery tools Ww Capability to submit Domino commands from a CL program The following topics describe each of the issues and offer suggestions for ways to address them Chapter 8 Migration from Other Domino Platforms 357 Add Notes User Command Add Notes User ADDNTSUSR is a command unique to the Integrated PC Server implementation of Domino It provides a method of registering Lotus Notes users from an AS 400 interface interactive or batch Domino for AS 400 offers the Operations Navigator interface for both Domino and AS 400 administration Notes user registration is available directly from a Notes client a Web browser or an Operations Navigator front end to the administration functions of a Notes client The ADDNTSUSR command or an equivalent has not been implemented with Domino for AS 400 With the Integrated PC Server implementation before you can add Notes users with the ADDNTSUSR command AS 400 System Distribution Directory entries must exist for users to be r
463. r the AS 400 system or your workstation it indicates that TCP IP was not set up or started or that it may have been configured incorrectly PING by Host Name If you were able to successfully ping from your workstation to the AS 400 system using the numerical address you should now try to ping by using the host name that is the Domino server name 82 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration ping acmeds1 Note You must be able to ping by specifying the Domino server name If the name of the AS 400 system is different from the name of the Domino server it is not enough to ping the host name of the AS 400 system Also you must specify the simple name only that is being able to ping acmeds1 acme com does not indicate that the Notes client can reach the server acmeds1 The server and the workstation may be in different subnetworks After having verified the TCP IP connection between your client and the Domino server running on the AS 400 system you may proceed to the next section Copy ID Files to Your Client Workstation Domino uses ZD files to secure the clients access to servers Every Domino server and Notes user must have an ID An ID is a unique binary file that identifies a legal Domino server and Notes user IDs are created at the time of user or server registration An ID file contains e The hierarchical name of its owner e A license number that indicates that the owner uses a legal Lot
464. r through TCP IP protocol it uses the common name that is the first part of the hierarchical name as the TCP IP host name Such a naming convention would require connection documents to translate between the Notes Domino name and the TCP IP host name or IP address A simple solution is to use a short name with no spaces in it for example AcmeDS1 The TCP IP host name and the Domino server name can then be the same 7 By creating a connection document in the clients local address book you could also assign an IP address directly to the name of a Notes or Domino server however this is not a very flexible solution 8 We always assume hierarchical names are used for Domino servers and Notes users 46 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Using the Same Name for the Domino Server and the AS 400 System The easiest way to name a Domino for AS 400 server is to use the existing host name of the AS 400 system If you have an existing TCP IP network the AS 400 TCP IP host name is probably already defined in the Domain Name System DNS server or HOSTS files of the clients see What Is a Domain Name System on page 48 This makes configuration much easier Use the Configure TCP IP CFGTCP menu option 12 or the Change TCP IP Domain CHGTCPDMN command to find out or define the host name of your AS 400 system Using Different Names for the Domino Server and the AS 400 System Even though it
465. r to manage the Domino server you must install the following software on the administration workstation e Microsoft Windows 95 or Microsoft Windows NT 4 0 operating system e Client Access for Windows 95 or Windows NT 4 0 5763 XD1 V3R1M3 Cumulative Service Pack e TCP IP installed and configured e Lotus Notes 4 5 client with full administration functions or Lotus Notes 4 6 client with Notes Designer Pre installation Tasks Before installing the Domino server on your AS 400 system you need to perform these tasks e Apply and activate PTF SF45296 e Decide ona name for the Domino server e Configure TCP IP on the AS 400 e Install and configure TCP IP on a PC the administrator s client e Install Lotus Notes on the administrator s client Optional Pre installation Tasks e Client Access installation and configuration on a Windows 95 NT 4 0 client PC if you plan to use Operations Navigator to configure the Domino for AS 400 server 40 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Apply and Activate the PTF to Support EDTF and DSPSTMF PTFs SF45296 for OS 400 VR2 and SF49052 for V4R3 provide the objects for the Edit File EDTF and the Display Stream File DSPSTMF commands In previous releases the source members for these tools were provided in library QUSRTOOLS Therefore you may have an older version of these tools in one or more libraries on your system However the functions of the older
466. r your Domino domain without registering an additional server This is because the transplantation method assumes the existing Domino server identity will be moved to the new server platform Thus you will perform Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR with the option FIRST even though this Domino for AS 400 server is technically not the first server in your organization Otherwise if you choose option ADD the configuration process will access the Public Address book on an existing server This may not be possible because Domino on the Integrated PC Server cannot be active at the same nor is it desirable because we already copied all databases including the Public Address Book By default CFGDOMSVR with option FIRST generates ID files and creates a new Public Address Book To override the default for generation of id files you can provide the path and file names of existing ID files in place of the keyword GEN That path can be any accessible path in the AS 400 Integrated File System However a new Public Address Book will be created unless one already exists in the specified Domino data directory This is why we recommend creating the data directory manually and copying the files prior to configuring the Domino for AS 400 server An alternative would be to let the configuration process generate the ID files Public Address Book or both and then replace them with selected files from the existing environment If you do this you need to be v
467. rage is very unlikely it can still happen due to external disasters fire flood and so forth While AS 400 disk units can be highly protected against loss of data through hardware failures by using RAID 5 or mirroring there is no 100 guarantee that even multiple disk units may not fail at the same time a very unlikely but not totally impossible case The most likely and common cause of data loss however is still user errors 132 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration AS 400 Libraries and IFS Directories for the Domino for AS 400 Product AS 400 libraries contain programs for the Domino for AS 400 server product programs that are available for your Domino developers to copy to their workstations and customization information such as subsystem descriptions The following table lists the Domino libraries AS 400 Library Content QNOTES Domino for AS 400 product QNOTESINT Directory synchronization QNOTESAPI C APIs QNOTESCPP C APIs QNOTESHTST HiTest APIs QNOTESLSKT LotusScript extensions QUSRNOTES Customization information such as subsystem descriptions Directories in the AS 400 integrated file system contain product information customization files and databases The following table lists the Domino directories IFS Path Content QIBM ProdData Lotus Notes Product information QIBM UserData Lotus Notes Customization information Specified when you set up the server Dir
468. rastructure for over 7 500 people in Rochester to Domino for AS 400 even before general availability of the product in February 1998 395 w An opportunity for thorough comprehensive testing The development team buried any apprehensions they had about their new product and welcomed the opportunity for such rigorous testing After all IBMers are notorious as very heavy e mail users What better way to test the performance limits scalability and messaging infrastructure of Domino for AS 400 than to let 7 000 users pound away at it This early testing was especially welcome in light of the development team s other bold initiative to have Domino for AS 400 provide the e mail infrastructure at Lotusphere in January 1998 a month before general availability of the product They believed in their efforts and were committed to trial by fire in the public eye An ongoing test kitchen Testing is always a challenge Even the best designed regression tests can t predict all the nuances of production use This large installation in their own backyard provides the Domino for AS 400 developers with the opportunity for production testing of quarterly maintenance updates and releases QMUs and QMRs before they become generally available We have set aside one Domino server with over 300 production users to be on the bleeding edge for trying out new function and code fixes Migrating to Domino for AS 400 the Configuration B
469. ration workstation Before You Start Ensure Full Message Logging The AS 400 Domino server setup program requests run under the QSYSWRK subsystem using pre started jobs that are submitted using the QUSER user profile AS 400 errors related to the setup function are written to QUSER job logs These job logs are put in spooled output files on the AS 400 The job name for these spooled files is QZRCSRVS which is the job name associated with the pre started jobs To to see the fully detailed messages resulting from the server setup program change the job description to increase the logging level You can use the Change Job Description CHGJOBD command to change the job description QZBSJOBD to have the following values for the maximum logging level Enter the following command on any AS 400 command line CHGJOBD JOBD QSYS QZBSJOBD LOG 4 00 SECLVL Note The change does not take effect for jobs already running at this time If you want to use the setup function immediately and ensure full message logging you should change the active jobs too You can find those jobs by entering the following command WRKJOB JOB QZRCSRVS Steps to Create a Server The starting point for creating a new server is the Domino icon in the left pane of the Operations Navigator window see Figure 125 on page 263 To set up configure create your Domino for AS 400 server perform the following steps 1 Right click the Domino Icon and you will see a pull
470. re talking here about the optional task of creating an entry for the recipient of SMTP mail rather than the mandatory local entry of the sender using OV 400 One important consideration is the fact that by default you can only store an SMTP user ID up to a length of 24 characters in the SMTP alias associated with the SDD entries Since the Domino for AS 400 MTA uses the common name in the user part of the sender s SMTP address if you accept the default a length of 24 characters is most likely too short We therefore recommend converting the directory to allow SMTP user IDs with a length up to 64 characters Directory Conversion Shipped with the TCP IP Utilities licensed program product on the AS 400 system SMTP MIME support defines its own system alias table and personal alias table objects This is a separate object from the System Distribution Directory The purpose of the alias table is to assign SMTP addresses to entries for local or remote mail users in the System Distribution Directory System alias table and system distribution directory are linked by a common User ID Address although not every entry in the system alias table has to appear in the system distribution directory It is possible to convert the system distribution directory and system alias table so that they are combined into the system distribution directory This can be thought of as a logical join on the User ID Address fields The result of the conversi
471. re to select Use the managing system Selective Setup Options Eg Select the source directory you want to install from There may be more components that are only on the managing system Select a different source directory a Ignore I m only going to uninstall components A network drive will be temporarily mapped to your managing system lt Back Cancel Figure 119 Selective Setup Options Window Chapter 6 The Graphical User Interface of Operations Navigator 245 Important The managing system must be an AS 400 system with Domino for AS 400 installed The name of the managing system is shown in parentheses If the name of your AS 400 system is not shown here you need to cancel the selective setup and select a managing system in the Client Access Properties Then start again with Installing the Domino for AS 400 Plug In on page 218 15 Click Next The messages Accessing managing system and Checking for components available on managing system is shown If you are not already signed on to your AS 400 you will see a dialog box asking for your AS 400 user profile and password to sign on to the AS 400 system 16 In the Component Selection window highlight AS 400 Operations Navigator and make sure a check mark is shown on the left as shown in Figure 120 Component Selection x Select the components of the product you want to install Components L Graph
472. rectional versus bi directional and whether population is configured If bi directional synchronization is configured you must indicate whether you want the AS 400 directory or Domino address book to be the master mail address directory Next whenever an AS 400 directory entry and a Domino address book entry are synchronized for the very first time the mail information located in the master mail address directory entry replaces any mail information in the synchronized directory entry Once the entries have been synchronized the mail information located in the directory entry being changed replaces any mail information in the synchronized directory entry even if the entry being changed is not located in the master mail address directory If bi directional synchronization or AS 400 to Domino synchronization is configured and you have chosen to populate you must indicate whether or not you want to map existing AS 400 SMTP addresses during population If you choose to map existing AS 400 SMTP addresses during population the existing SMTP addresses of AS 400 directory entries are inserted after any existing values in the ShortName field of the Domino address book entries with which the AS 400 directory entries are being populated Once population has finished this value is reset to not map existing SMTP addresses in subsequent populations Note If you want to map existing AS 400 SMTP addresses during bi directional population best results are
473. rectory and then copy the required documents using a Notes workstation Application programming interfaces as well as more complete backup restore solutions to allow more flexible and granular backup and recovery are planned for a future release of Domino for AS 400 Capability to Submit Domino Commands from a CL Program One benefit of the Submit Network Server Command SBMNWSCMD command for the Integrated PC Server is the capability to submit commands to the Domino console using a batch interface If you are using this feature to provide access to Domino commands from a CL program please note that this capability is not available with Domino for AS 400 4 6 2 or earlier versions Domino for AS 400 however provides programmatic access to Domino resources from AS 400 application programs using application programming interfaces APIs General Considerations When Migrating Your Domino Infrastructure The primary focus of this chapter has been migration from one Domino server platform to another specifically migration to the Domino for AS 400 platform Special considerations are involved when migrating from one major release of Lotus Notes and Domino to another Migration for any mission critical system requires careful planning therefore many of the steps required are also typical steps for migrating any mission critical system to a major new release When migrating from one release to another the recommended order for migration is firs
474. resh F12 Cancel F18 Display location details F19 Change name for SMTP F20 Specify user defined fields F24 More keys Figure 211 Change Mail Service Level You need to change the field Mail service level to 4 and then press F20 usually shift and F8 to see the user defined fields You need to erase the contents of all Chapter 8 Migration from Other Domino Platforms 359 Gl n fields having a name starting with QYN and having a second qualifier of QNOT Page forward to find those fields An example is shown in Figure 212 Specify User Defined Fields Type choices press Enter QYNMHOME QNOTES QYNMMATILTY QNOTES Notes F3 Exit F5 Refresh F12 Cancel Figure 212 Specify User Defined Fields If you want to write a CL program to change multiple directory entries you can use the Change Directory Entry CHGDIRE command as shown here CHGDIRE USRID amp USERID amp ADDRESS USRDFNFLD QYNMSHORT QNOTES NONE QYNMNTSDMN QNOTES NONE QYNMHOME QNOTES NONE QYNMSVR QNOTES NONE QYNMMAILTY QNOTES NONE QYNMFADDR QNOTES NONE QYNMORGU QNOTES NONE MSFSRVLVL DOMINO t eetteeet Note There may be also generic ANY entries in your system distribution directory directing all mail with a certain SNADS address or SMTP domain to the SMTP MIME MTA on the Integrated PC Server If this is the case those need to be removed or changed in the same manner as the individu
475. ress Enter to start the OS 400 TCP IP support You will see the Configure TCP IP menu again 9 Type the number 1 in the command line at the bottom of the menu and press Enter to return to the Work with TCP IP Interfaces panel as shown in Figure 2 on page 44 10 Start the new TCP IP interface by typing the number 9 next to the TCP IP address and pressing Enter 11 Press F11 Display interface status to see if the new interface has become active 12 Press Enter to return to the Configure TCP IP menu 0 13 To verify that your TCP IP connection is active you can use the Verify TCP IP Connection VFYTCPCNN command also known as PING The easiest way to see the results of the PING command is to use the OS 400 Command Entry screen To do so type the following command on the command line and press Enter CALL QCMD 14 Press F10 Include detailed messages 15 Type the following command PING and press F4 16 Enter the Internet address you defined in step 4 on page 44 and press Enter 17 The connection verification statistics should look like this screen Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 45 x PING PING PING PING PING Command Entry SYSTEMI Request level 4 Previous commands and messages gt PING RMTSYS 10 1 2 3 Verifying connection to host system 10 1 2 3 request 1 from 10 1 2 3 took 11 ms 256 bytes TTL 64 request 2 from 10 1 2 3 took 8 ms 256 bytes TTL 64 request 3 from
476. rm alias should not be confused with the personal or system SMTP alias tables Here we refer to multiple host names assigned to a single IP address 178 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration here would result in sending the mail back and forth between OS 400 SMTP support and Domino until the hop count exceeds its limit The Help text for the field Forwarding address as shown in Figure 79 may be somewhat misleading __ Erika Bender wshop Lotus Notes o x File Edit View Create Actions Window Help Last name Bender Mail server mailtest User name Erika Bender wshop Mail file mail ebender Erika Bender gi Short name and or ebender Forwarding address Internet addr F a Enter the user s complete mail address route including the domain name s for example John Smith Acme External This address ensures proper mail routing between domains especially ifthe user receives mail through a gateway server Internet pass Work Title Company City S You have new mail HomeTem E gt Figure 79 Context Help for Forwarding Address Assigning an SMTP User Name for an OfficeVision 400 User Users of Office Vision for AS 400 have mail addresses consisting of two fields each having one to eight alphabetical characters or numbers and no spaces or special signs The fields are known as User ID and Address In many cases AS 400 customers choose to use the same n
477. rmation about the different types of status see Synchronization Status of Directory Synchronization Configuration Steps on page 226 Stopping or Suspending Directory Synchronization Directory synchronization is terminated if you disable or suspend the directory synchronization configuration 1 Open the directory synchronization configuration database on the Notes desktop as follows e Choose File Database Open e Select the Domino server e Select Directory Sync Configuration NNDIRSYC NSF e Click Open Click Configurations Select the configuration document for the configuration that you want to terminate and click Edit Configuration 4 Change the status of the configuration to Disabled or Suspended 5 Click Save and Close Directory synchronization may take up to 5 minutes to terminate AS 400 environment In some cases you may want to stop or start the AS 400 synchronization jobs When you stop the synchronization jobs all directory changes are saved and will be synchronized when you restart the jobs This is useful if you want to temporarily stop synchronization during a period of heavy system workload but still want changes reflected in the other directory at a later time In addition if a Domino server error occurs the directory synchronization jobs may not restart automatically even if the configuration is still enabled You can stop the directory synchronization jobs QNNDIxxx that are running in the
478. rmined in a controlled environment and therefore the results that may be obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly Users of this document should verify the applicable data for their specific environment Reference to PTF numbers that have not been released through the normal distribution process does not imply general availability The purpose of including these reference numbers is to alert IBM customers to specific information relative to the implementation of the PTF when it becomes available to each customer according to the normal IBM PTF distribution process 405 The following terms are trademarks of the International Business Machines Corporation in the United States and or other countries IBM The following terms are trademarks of other companies C bus is a trademark of Corollary Inc PC Direct is a trademark of Ziff Communications Company and is used by IBM Corporation under license UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries licensed exclusively through X Open Company Limited Microsoft Windows and the Windows 95 logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Other trademarks are trademarks of their respective companies The following are trademarks of Lotus Development Corporation in the United States and or other countries DataLens Notes ViP InterNotes Notes Mail InterNotes Web Publisher NotesPump Lotus NotesSQL Lotus Notes Rep
479. rofile it also switches to name format 1 This is necessary to access any IFS directories other than QSYS LIB Installing the Administrator s Workstation To use the capabilities of a Lotus Notes workstation to administer the Domino server you must set up the workstation with the Lotus Notes client software Make sure you install the full set of administrative functions called Notes Designer for Domino 4 6 You can also use Notes client software with an earlier release than 4 6 but some administrator functions may not be supported 1 This happens only when you mention an object name in this case the root directory for the very first time during an FTP session to AS 400 and the object name starts with a slash Typing anything different would cause FTP to remain in name format 0 which means you can only refer to objects in QSYS LIB If you do not see the message 250 NAMEFMT set to 1 you can manually switch to name format 1 by entering the following command quote site namefmt 1 Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 85 To install the Notes client 4 6 from the Lotus Notes CD ROM on a Windows 95 or Windows NT workstation you usually need to run the following program E Notes_r4_ie Client W32INTEL INSTALL Install exe However the path may change in future releases of the software Refer to the Install Guide for Workstations Notes 4 5 or Lotus Notes Install Guide Notes 4 6 for more information
480. rt for AS 400 Programmer s Guide and Reference for more information about the CFGFAXSRV command Also make sure to start Facsimile Support and Enhanced Services with the STRFAXSPT command Routing Using the Transmitting Subscriber Identifier TSI In addition to routing by tone as described in the previous section you can use the Transmitting Subscriber Identifier TSI to route information Most fax machines are configured to send some kind of identification along as part of the fax transmission The identification may be the fax telephone number or the company name With Facsimile Support for AS 400 you can route faxes based on the TSI value You can route a received fax to Lotus Notes mail by configuring routing entries in Enhanced Services This section explains how to create routing entries for the TSI 386 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration value You also need to create a system distribution directory entry Earlier in this chapter a system distribution directory entry called PKENNEDY was created We refer to that system distribution directory entry in this section If you have not created a system distribution directory entry you need to do so To route using TSI configure the Facsimile Support for AS 400 Enhanced Services You also need to create routing entries To do this type WRKTSIRTG Work With TSI Routing at the command line and press Enter The Work With TSI Routing display
481. rver IDs If needed you can set up the Connection document that way that you do not allow database access across domain just sending and receiving mail only The only drawback here is that you are not very flexible in what SMTP domain the right side of the sign in the address can be used For example to send SMTP mail to a user residing in the MTA domain you can specify an address such as Joanne_Mindzora Myfirm com Now assuming the name of the other Domino domain would be OrgA to send mail to users use one of the following formats Kelly Schmotzer OrgA Myfirm com the default Kelly Schmotzer OrgA Myfirm com Kelly Schmotzer OrgA Myfirm com 192 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Decide on the format for all users on all servers when you set up the MTA If you have several partitioned servers on the same AS 400 system all of them needing to use the mail integration it may be a good idea to define one partitioned server exclusively to do nothing else but running the MTA thus providing protection against failures of other server functions Having a separate server would also allow you to run the MTA server under a lower priority or different storage pools than the other servers and traditional AS 400 applications Additional Information for Troubleshooting The following sections provide some information on how to solve potential problems Where to Look if the MTA Does Not St
482. rvers Domino for AS 400 supports partitioned servers on the same AS 400 system This function allows you to operate multiple logically distinct servers even representing different Notes domains on the same AS 400 system A Lotus Domino Advanced In some cases you might also be asked to boot your PC before you start the Notes client for the first time Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 87 Services license is needed to use partitioned servers Domino Release 4 6 supports partitioned servers only on AS 400 UNIX and Windows NT operating systems To be able to use partitioned servers on the AS 400 system you must do the following 1 Select Advanced Services product option 7 when you run the Load and Run LODRUN command 2 Set up all Domino servers on the AS 400 system as partitioned servers When you use the Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR command to set up a Domino server you must specify either ALL or PARTITION for the Advanced services ADVSRV parameter If you have already set up a single non partitioned server you need to reconfigure this server in order to include the support for partitioned servers see Reconfiguring the Domino Server on page 121 Tip If you see message LNTO109 Maximum number of servers exceeded this does not necessarily mean that you already configured 16 servers This message also comes up if you did not configure partitioning support To tell if a
483. s one AS 400 supporting nearly 3 500 mail users and the other two supporting roughly 2 000 mail users apiece In addition we are currently migrating all of our Notes Domino applications non e mail from other servers to these same three AS 400 servers This represents more than 2 000 databases By the end of June 1998 we will complete the consolidation of a total of 50 production PC servers into three AS 400 systems model S40 supporting approximately 7 500 production users over 3 500 of which are database users as well as mail When this process is complete the 36 AS 400 processors in three machines will have replaced a total of 102 Intel processors Migrating to Domino for AS 400 the Methods In the course of migrating our 7 000 e mail users we used two different migration methods mail server consolidation and mail server transplantation Whether the existing servers were on outboard machines or on Integrated PC Server cards within an AS 400 the approaches were essentially the same Following are descriptions of the two methods and their trade offs Mail Server Consolidation Method With this approach we moved users to a new logical mail server This means that not only did the server reside on different hardware AS 400 vs Intel processor but it had a completely new entity from a Domino standpoint For example during a weekend we moved users from Domino servers MAILO1 and MAILO2 on PC servers to Domino server MAIL23 on an
484. s 335 original system is an Integrated PC Server look for the file E MPTN ETC TRUSERS If you have not configured FTP on your Integrated PC Server this file will not yet exist However a sample file called TRUSERS SMP is provided This sample TRUSERS file has a sample user ID admin and password adminpwd already configured which can be used to log on the first time You can create the TRUSERS file on the E drive from this sample file by entering the following command on any AS 400 command line SBMNWSCMD CMD COPY F FSNOTES ADMIN TRUSERS SMP E MPTN ETC TRUSERS SERVER NWSD_name SVRTYPE BASE 2 Start the FTP server on the original system If the original system is an Integrated PC Server this is done by typing the following Submit Network Server Command SBMNWSCMD command on an AS 400 command line SBMNWSCMD CMD XFTPD ON SERVER NWSD_name SVRTYPE BASE where server_name is the name of your Domino server Press the Enter key Note You will not receive any confirmation message However if you do not see any error messages it indicates that FTP has been started on the Integrated PC Server You can verify that FTP is active by using the following command SBMNWSCMD netstat s NWSD_name SVRTYPE BASE 3 Connect to the original system to transfer your data On the AS 400 command line type the following command and press the Enter key FTP IP_Address Note If the original system is an Integr
485. s Enter to work with spooled files Then use option 5 to display each file to see the detailed messages If the profile is not in status Chapter 7 Dial Up Connectivity 325 OUTQ you may also use option 10 and then F10 to see the job log information of the job controlling the active point to point session It depends on the job description QTOCPPJOBD whether the job log is written to a spooled file or not Depending on that you will see the status OUTQ or INACTIVE after the connection was ended If you need to perform problem determination it is very helpful to keep the job log in a spooled file for analysis If the status always returns to INACTIVE and therefore you do not find any job log you may use the Change Job Description CHGJOBD command by typing the following in any AS 400 command line CHGJOBD JOBD QTOCPPJOBD LOG 4 00 SECLVL Vice versa you may disable the capability of printing job logs in a stable environment through this command CHGJOBD JOBD QTOCPPJOBD LOG 4 00 NOLIST However if you do so you may not be able to determine he cause of problems after the connection has ended The job log is not the only useful spool file produced by the connection job A spool file with the same name as the connection profile PPPDOMSVR in our example is written to the default system printer If the connection was successfully started and ended this spooled file will disappear however if the case of problems or while the con
486. s SYSTEMO1 04 22 98 01 47 37 DOMINOO8 Type options press Enter eee F4 Prompt 2 Change 3 Hold 4 End 5 Work with 6 Release 7 Display message 8 Work with spooled files 13 Disconnect Opt Job User LY De w SSS Status Function a ADMINP QNOTES BATCHI ACTIVE E AMGR QNOTES BATCHI ACTIVE AMGR QNOTES BATCHI ACTIVE C BILLING QNOTES BATCHI ACTIVE n CALCONN QNOTES BATCHI ACTIVE EVENT QNOTES BATCHI ACTIVE QONNINSTS QNOTES BATCH ACTIVE PGM ONNINSTS a REPLICA QNOTES BATCHI ACTIVE More Parameters or command gt F5 Refresh F9 Retrieve F1ll Display schedule data Pi Figure 27 Work with Subsystem Jobs WRKSBS option 8 If you only see the QNNINSTS job press the F5 Refresh key in case the SERVER job is still being started If the SERVER job does not appear within 5 minutes or if it comes up shortly and disappears again you may use option 5 Work with with the QNNINSTS job then option 10 Display job log Press F10 Display detailed messages to search for error messages Tip If you see no other jobs besides QNNINSTS and SERVER for more than 2 or 3 minutes you may be using a password protected server ID file In that case the server is waiting for the password to be entered through the Domino console See Working with the Domino Console on page 81 to learn how to access the Domino console Working with the Domino Console After verifying that all jobs making up the Domino for
487. s and Object Management Integrated Database Security and Authorization Single Level Store Process Management I O System and Client Server Computing are other concepts discussed in this book AS 400 System Concepts This section provides a brief overview of AS 400 system concepts It includes an explanation of Control Language commands the AS 400 Integrated File System and security Control Language Commands Control Language CL is used by system operators to perform functions such as monitoring the system performing backups or manipulating objects CL is much more than just a set of operator commands Control Language is an interface between the system user and the AS 400 This includes all menus high level languages program product and system utilities that use CL to perform various system tasks These tasks include creating files starting spooling files changing operational priorities and initiating work Designed for ease of use the consistency and structure of AS 400 CL command names makes them easy to learn Control Language command names consist of Verb and Subject abbreviations Domino for AS 400 users will need to become familiar with basic AS 400 CL commands To learn more about AS 400 CL commands see the book AS 400e series CL Programming Version 4 SC41 5721 and AS 400e series CL Reference SC41 5722 This information can also be found at the following AS 400 Web site http as400bks rochester ibm Table 3
488. s described above There are two differences with the user interface however e The message service level and the preferred address are entered in the form of numeric options that is option 4 and option 3 have to be entered in place of DOMINO and SMTP e Regardless whether or not the directory was converted you have to press F19 Change name for SMTP to enter the SMTP address In any case as mentioned earlier the easiest way to add the entries describing Domino in the AS 400 system distribution directory is to use directory synchronization Use the description given above to understand what these entries should look like Using the MTA for Multiple Partitioned Servers At any time the SMTP MTA can be active on only one Domino server on an AS 400 system However there are possibilities to send and receive SMTP mail through all partitioned servers on an AS 400 system As long as all servers are in the same domain it is the easiest thing in the world Just make sure the PAB can be replicated between the servers and it does not matter at all on which server your mail file is However you may define in a connection document which if any databases you want to allow to replicate and whether or not you want mail routing to take place If the servers are in different Notes domains you have to perform some more configuration steps Create a Domain document and a Connection document in each of the two PABs and cross certify the se
489. s needs to be added to a name server if any exists or to the AS 400 host table using the Configure TCP IP CFGTCP menu option 10 or the Add TCP IP Host Table Entry ADDTCPHTE command Setting Up the Additional Server on the AS 400 System The following steps describe the green screen method using the Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR command 1 Sign on to the AS 400 with a user profile having at least the following special authorities ALLOBJ Access to all AS 400 objects SECADM Security administrator JOBCTL Job control IOSYSCFG Device and communications configuration 2 Onan AS 400 command line type the Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR command and press F4 to prompt the command You will see the prompt as shown in Figure 50 110 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR Type choices press Enter Server name AcmeDS2 acme Opt LOnris a a IF h ADD FIRST ADD REMOVE Bottom F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys re Figure 50 CPGDOMSVR for Additional Server 1 Prompt Detailed Description of Parameters for an Additional Server The following section guides you through all the parameters which can or must be specified when you set up configure a server which is an additional server in an existing Domino domain 1 Fill in the following parameters i
490. s to be used If the Integrated PC Server is used a LAN adapter for AS 400 applications the internal port is no longer needed Chapter 8 Migration from Other Domino Platforms 347 Integrated PC Server the NWSD name In our example the server name is DOMINOO1 Note If you are migrating the SMTP MIME MTA do not configure the MTA at this time Configure a standard Domino server and then follow the instructions in Migrating the SMTP MIME MTA on page 371 of this chapter Configure Domino Server Type choices press Enter Server name CFGDOMSVR DOMINOO1 Option Data directouy Organization FIRST notes data FIRST ADD REMOVE Acme Administrator Last name First name Middle initial Password Minimum password Tength F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F24 More keys Admin Joe Character value kkkxkxkxkkxk 8 0 31 More F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display Figure 207 Configure Transplanted Domino Server Prompt 1 Configure Domino Server Type choices press Enter Time zone Daylight savings time Domain name Network name Country ID Log replication events Log client session events Replace configuration Web browsers News readers Internet mail packages for more yale Advanced services for more panes Certifier ID F3 Exit F4 Prompt F24 More keys F5 Refresh CFGDOMSVR CST GMT EST CST MST PST CET YES ORG YES N
491. server was changed from Lotus Notes to Lotus Domino In this context it does not matter whether you have Notes servers 4 1 or older or Domino servers 4 5 or later However the name of the client product remains Lotus Notes 8 Note the term Domino or Notes domain is absolutely not related to the TCP IP domain 102 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Lotus Notes Release 4 5 Administrator s Guide Part No 127755 or the book Getting Started with the Domino Server Part No 12948 Whenever we talk about configuring an additional server we mean adding a new server to an existing Domino domain that is registering it to an existing Public Address Book and at the same time including it in an existing organization that is creating its server id based on an existing certifier This is the main difference to a first server where both the Public Address Book and the certifier ID are created When an additional server is installed the server id file is created when you register the new server to the existing Public Address Book that is before you configure the new server No new administrator s ID is created You either use the existing one to administer the existing and the new server or you create a new user ID if a different person needs to administer the new server The procedure to register a new Domino server is similar to registering a new Notes user Registering an Additional Domino Server
492. setting up in your organization or if you are creating a new domain Additional Domino Server Select this option if this is anew server which has already been defined in an existing organization You will only need to supply a few key pieces of information This is the protected text area of the farm None E Figure 127 Set Up Domino for AS 400 Panel 1 3 Select First Domino Server to create a new Notes organization or Additional Domino Server to create a new Domino server in an existing Domino domain Important Remember if you want to set up an additional server you first need to register the new server in the existing Public Address Book 254 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration gt Note See Configure an Additional Server in an Existing Domino Domain in Chapter 2 of this book for more information on setting up additional servers 4 Type the name of the AS 400 system where the Domino server should be created into the second field of the first panel 5 Click the button with the greater than gt sign You will see the second configuration panel 2 lt gt Save amp Quit 2 Select a Setup Method Quick and Easy Setup Advanced Setup Quick and Easy Setup requires the least manual input Predefined default settings gathered during the installation process or from your machine streamline the setup process You can
493. sion 400 user can send mail to an SMTP address e Add a directory entry for each foreign mail user to the SDD and assign an SMTP alias to that entry e Add a generic directory entry for an entire SMTP That is the user ID has to be ANY This is a very convenient way to define the addresses of many SMTP addressees at once However the restriction is that the left side of the address SMTP user can only be up to 8 alphabetic or numeric characters e Use ad hoc Internet addressing a new function of OfficeVision for AS 400 Version 4 Release 1 Using Ad Hoc Internet Addressing Ad hoc Internet addressing can be used to send mail to infrequently used SMTP addresses on the Internet or Notes users not in an address book being synchronized with the AS 400 SDD You can use ad hoc Internet addressing to send mail to any SMTP user in your TCP IP network or the entire Internet if the system is connected as well as users on Domino for AS 400 if the SMTP MIME MTA is active Obviously the disadvantage of this method is that you have to key in the full sometimes very long address exactly correct rather than just selecting a name from a directory list Also there is no kind of verification on the sending system whether the address is correct or not Another not so obvious disadvantage is the fact that for incoming mail from an SMTP address the OV 400 user cannot use the Reply key to send a response The address has to be keyed manu
494. sion Problems for the Domino Server Console The Domino console on the AS 400 system displayed by using the Work with Domino Console WRKDOMCSL command or the Display Domino Console DSPDOMCSL command uses the character identifier CHRID of the job s device description to tag data that is entered and displayed on the console To avoid conversion problems such as the substitution of some characters make sure that the CHRID for the workstation device specifies a code page that matches the code page of the Domino server The code page used by the Domino server is based on the locale that is specified for the QNOTES user profile To determine the locale 1 Type this AS 400 command do not press Enter DSPUSRPREF QNOTES 2 Press the Page Down PgDn key until you see the line that begins Locale For information on what CCSID values are used for each locale see Table 5 on page 42 For details on how CCSIDs map to code pages and how to change the CHRID of a device description see the AS 400 International Application Development SC41 5603 book Additional Considerations for Double Byte Languages The following topics only apply to languages requiring double byte characters sets such as Japanese Chinese and others Starting a Domino Server that Runs Under a Double Byte User Profile Domino server jobs on an AS 400 system run under the QNOTES user profile If the locale specified for the QNOTES user profile has a double byte CCSID
495. ss F2 Extended help to show Help information on the entire command rather than a single parameter Position the cursor on a parameter and press F4 Prompt This will show a list of possible values for this command If you are using an AS 400 system with a different national language support NLS installed you may not be able to recognize the description of each parameter as shown in the figures and the following table In this case press F11 and you will see the parameter keywords which will not be changed when the product is translated to other languages Detailed Description of Command Parameters for a First Server The following section guides you through all the parameters which can or must be specified when you set up configure the first server in a new Domino domain 1 Fill in the following parameters in the prompt shown in Figure 10 on page 62 Keyword Description SERVER Server Name The name of your new Domino server When you configure a first server you just type the common name that is no organization The first 15 characters of this name must be unique across the organization For more information refer to Naming the Domino Server on page 46 Example AcmeDS1 OPTION Option Specifies whether you are setting up the first Domino server in a Notes domain FIRST adding an additional Domino server to an existing Notes domain ADD or removing a Domino server from your AS 400 REMOVE Example F
496. ss book as the master directory The master directory is used first to populate the other directory w Choose when the populate operation should be done either immediately or on a specific day and time Click Next If you chose Domino to AS 400 synchronization unidirectional only see Figure 98 on page 228 continue with step 34 on page 236 Note that the panel shown will be very similar to the one shown in Figure 100 but is not the same and actually defines the opposite direction of synchronization 218 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration New Directory Synchronization Configuration Lotus Notes l Domino for AS 400 Directory Synchronization Figure 100 AS 400 to Domino Directory Synchronization Configuration 12 You will see the form called AS 400 to Domino Directory Synchronization Configuration as shown in Figure 100 13 If you want to change the field or key mappings click the button Edit field mappings Tip In some cases an error message occurs at this point saying View or Navigator AS4ToNABMapView does not exist The reason for this is very likely a bug in your Notes client The solution is to obtain a more recent Notes client Lotus Notes Figure 101 Error Messages When Trying to Edit Field Mappings After clicking the Edit field mappings button you will see the view called Field mappings AS 400 to Domino Figure 102 showing you which fields
497. ss for Windows 95 or Windows NT Operations Navigator and the Domino plug in before setting up the server Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 37 e To be used with OS 400 Version 4 Release 2 Lotus Domino for AS 400 requires the cumulative PTF package C8045420 or later and C8202420 for V4R3 The web page http www as400 ibm com notes also contains latest information on necessary PTFs for OS 400 or other AS 400 licensed programs Click on the line Support QMU QMRs PTF in navigation frame on the left side of the page e TCP IP connectivity utilities for AS 400 5769 TC1 if you plan to use mail integration e Atleast 16MB base memory e 0 5MB to 1MB for each additional mail user is a good estimate to provide sufficient memory for the workload typically created by each user e 490MB disk space for Domino executables and data templates and help files e 50MB disk space for each registered and active mail user This is a very rough estimate the actual amount of disk space needed depends largely on the Domino applications and the data stored in the Notes databases e Lotus Domino for AS 400 version 4 6 or later software on a Lotus CD ROM Note The software appears on the AS 400 system as licensed program 5769 LNT which follows the same numbering scheme as IBM program products However 5769 LNT is not an IBM order number Domino for AS 400 can only be ordered from Lotus or Lotus authorized resellers
498. ssistant F24 More kevs A Figure 15 Completion Message for CFGDOMSVR Command Even if the message indicates a successful completion of the Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR command it is a good idea to check the contents of the AS 400 job log after your very first configuration If you do see an error message this should be the first step to start problem determination 7 Position the cursor exactly on the completion or error message in our example Command CFGDOMSVR ended successfully and press the F1 Help key Additional information on this message will be displayed If this is an error message don t forget to write down the Message ID C Additional Message Information N Message ID 3 LNT0997 Severity Sat wer LP yi nar St 00 Message type Completion Date Sent ta ite denie ter i 04 21 98 TIe gent ds var d aoa Si 00 02 42 Message Command CFGDOMSVR ended successfully Cause k The command indicated ended without errors Recovery l None required Bottom Press Enter to continue F3 Exit F6 Print F9 Display message details F10 Display messages in job log F12 Cancel F21 Select assistance level S A Figure 16 Completion Message of CFGDOMSVR Additional Information 8 In order to see the information in the AS 400 job log press the F10 key Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 69 eo Display All Messages System JOB pdo 8 QPADEV0007 User MYAS4USR Numb
499. stration on dialog box Domino User Registration on AcmeDS3 01gA Li Figure 145 Domino User Registration on AcmeDS3 8 Click the tabs to enter the information required on each of the four pages You must have the correct certified ID file on your workstation disk diskette or network drive and you need to specify the full path name to access the file in the Certifier ID field on the Server page along with the appropriate password Caution The Security Type field on the Server page defaults to North American You must change this to International unless the North American license is installed on both the Domino for AS 400 server and the Notes Client 268 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration The Other tab allows you to specify where to save the user ID file The default is to attach it to the person document in the Public Address Book and store it on your diskette A drive Tip For help on filling in the required fields click the Help button For additional information see the book Planning the Domino System or the Domino Administration Help database helpadmn nsf 9 Click OK to complete the registration Status messages display as the process continues which can take up to three minutes 10 A confirmation message appears to let you know that the user ID file has been created 11 You can register the user on another server or click Cancel to return to the Networks dialog
500. t 8625662C 002DE14F lt 8625663C 0049CC72 gt lt Server MailTest wshop gt lt N gt lt 135 SMTPMTA lt SMTP MTA Outbound Work Queue gt 8625662C 002DE14F 00 SYSTEMO1 acme com lt 8625663C 0049CC Figure 87 Example of Mail Routing Events with SMTP MIME MTA Installed Common Problems This section describes commonly seen problems configuring or using the MTA and their solutions Server Document Shows Feature not installed If you see the message Feature not installed under the title Internet Message Transfer Agent SMTP MTA in the server document after configuring the MTA for that server the reason is most likely that the public address book is based on a template older than Domino 4 6 This can happen easily if you added the Domino 196 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration for AS 400 server to an existing Domain and the design of Public Address Book of that domain was not yet replaced In such a case you may not see any error message during configuration nor when you start the SMTP MTA Even sending SMTP mail to Notes users may work successfully MailT est wshop Lotus Notes Ioj x File Edit View Create Actions Window Help Proxy Configuration Security Restrictions Agent Manager Administration Process Web Retriever Administration HTTP Server Internet Message Transfer Agent SMTP MTA i gt X 400 Message Transfer Agent X 400 MTA gt cc Mail Message Transfer
501. t be used any more This is only an issue if using OfficeVision 400 or JustMail 400 e The Work with Names for SMTP WRKNAMSMTP command can no longer be used e The Conversion is not reversible Converting SMTP Names A conversion function is available to merge SMTP Alias Table entries into the system distribution directory To determine if the conversion has already been performed run the Work with Names for SMTP NWRKNAMSMTP command If you receive an error message stating the WRKNAMSMTP command is disabled the SMTP alias tables have already been converted To Convert run the Convert Names SMTP CVTNAMSMTP command to start the conversion To verify that the conversion completed use the Work Name SMTP WRKNAMSMTP command The message WRKNAMSMTP command disabled TCP9610 should be shown Adding a Directory Entry for Domino for AS 400 Mail Recipients If you want to manually add a directory entry representing a Domino for AS 400 mail recipient you can use either the Work with Directory Entries WRKDIRE or the Add Directory Entry ADDDIRE command ADDDIRE USRID NGB DOMINO SYSNAME DOMINO USRD Hans Neugebauer LSTNAM Neugebauer FSTNAM Hans USRDFNFLD SMTPAUSRID SMTP Hans_Neugebauer SMTPDMN SMTP SYSTEMO1 DOMLAND ACME COM MSFSRVLVL DOMINO PREFADR SMTP 190 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Let us briefly discuss the important parameter in this cont
502. t is necessary to run population again This will also reset the internal links for unchanged entries resulting in faster synchronization If a connection is suspended the internal links are not cleared However in order to populate fill all new entries that were added to the directories while directory synchronization function was stopped it is necessary to run population again On the population screen you can specify a date and time for population to occur When the configuration has been saved the Work with Job Schedule Entries WRKJOBSCDE command on the AS 400 system can be used to both verify and to change the population job start date and time If you choose to populate directories for bi directional synchronization you must choose either the AS 400 directory or the Domino Public Address Book as the master directory The directory synchronization function first uses the entries in the master directory to populate the secondary directory and then uses the entries in the secondary directory to populate the master directory Population Information Populate Directories Master Directory for Populate Yes No Day to Populate Directories AS 400 C Domino Figure 94 Population Information for Directory Synchronization Field Mappings The field mapping describe relationships between SDD fields for example USRID USRADDR LSTNAM FSTNAM etc and PAB fields for example LastName FirstName MailAddr
503. t item 1 in our example above Manually Assigning an SMTP User Name for a Notes User Now with Release 4 6 of the Domino server in addition to assigning an SMTP user name automatically based on the contents of the name fields in the person document you can assign arbitrary value as the user s complete Internet mail address For example e Jean Dept0416 acme com The way to do so is to enter the full SMTP address that is including the sign into the field short name in addition to the existing short name While you can assign a totally arbitrary SMTP user ID and or SMTP domain to some or all users you have to make sure that OS 400 SMTP as well as the Domino for AS 400 SMTP MTA accepts incoming mail for that domain For OS 400 SMTP this means you have to define the SMTP domain name Dept0416 acme com as an alias host name see A Single AS 400 Known by Multiple SMTP Domain Names on page 166 for the MTA You also have to modify the global domain document and add this name to the field Internet domain suffix see page 173 Caution Do not enter the user s SMTP address into the field Forwarding address This field should only be used if the user s mail should be forwarded to another system Specifying a local user s SMTP address 1 Note if you create a global domain document manually default would be full name that is including the Domino organization name as shown in line 5 of our example 12 The te
504. t lists of redbooks tools sendto wtscpok tools redbooks get redbooks catalog tools sendto usdist mkttools mkttools get itsocat txt tools sendto usdist mkttools mkttools get listserv package W To register for information on workshops residencies and redbooks tools sendto wtscpok tools zdisk get itsoregi 1998 411 W For a list of product area specialists in the ITSO tools sendto wtscpok tools zdisk get orgcard package e Redbooks Home Page on the World Wide Web http w3 1tso ibm com redbooks redbooks html Note The Lotus Related ITSO Publications are listed on this site but not the ITSO Lotus redbooks which are available in Adobe Acrobat format from http www lotus com redbook e IBM Direct Publications Catalog on the World Wide Web http www elink ibmlink ibm com pbl pbl IBM employees may obtain LIST3820s of redbooks from this page e ITSO4USA category on INEWS e Online send orders to USIB6FPL at IBMMAIL or DKIBMBSH at IBMMAIL Lotus Employees e This redpaper and those listed in the ITSO Lotus Publications section of this book can be ordered from the Internal Orders Database using Lotus part numbers e In addition PDF versions of those books can be downloaded from http www lotus com redbook e The other ITSO publications listed can be accessed on the Redbooks Home Page on the World Wide Web at http w3 1tso ibm com redbooks redbooks html All Employees e Internet Listserver With an Internet e mail address an
505. t the servers then the clients and then the applications Please refer to Lotus product documentation for detailed release migration information 364 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Many migration scenarios also involve coexistence between the old and the new environments for some period of time However this dictates the consolidation method as described in Server Consolidation Process Outline on page 367 rather than the transplantation method as described in Server Transplantation Process Outline on page 345 Whether or not actual coexistence is involved comprehensive testing using a test environment prior to production migration is highly recommended In any migration process careful detailed planning and the well managed execution of that plan is critical to the success of the migration Chapter 8 Migration from Other Domino Platforms 365 This page intentionally left blank Appendix A Using Facsimile Support for AS 400 This appendix provides information about how to use Facsimile Support for AS 400 in combination with Lotus Domino for AS 400 It also explains the two different ways in which you can fax data from a Lotus Notes client and shows you how to route received faxes to Lotus Notes mail Setting Up Facsimile Support To use Facsimile Support for AS 400 with Lotus Domino complete the following steps 1 Die Re ee Install Lotus Domino on the AS 400 syst
506. t the locale for German use the following CL command CHGUSRPRF USRPRF QNOTES LOCALE qsys 1lib qnotes 1lib de_de locale SETJOBATR ccsid datfmt datsep decfmt srtseq timsep Default Locale For both the North American and International English versions of Domino for AS 400 the default locale is set to the value listed for English US For each National Language Version NLV release of Domino the default locale should be appropriate to the language Language Locale CCSID Date Date Time Decimal Sort Format Separator Separator Format Sequence Albanian SQ_AL 500 DMY I HEX Belgian English EN_BE 500 DMY I HEX Belgian French FR_BE 500 DMY I HEX Bulgarian BG_BG 1025 DMY I HEX Canadian French MNCS FR_CA 500 MDY 3 I HEX Chinese Simplified ZH_CN 935 MDY BLANK HEX Chinese Traditional ZH_TW 937 MDY BLANK HEX Croatian HR_HR 870 DMY I HEX Czech CS_CZ 870 YMD I HEX Danish DA_DK 277 DMY A I HEX Dutch NL_NL 37 DMY I HEX Dutch MNCS NL_BE 500 DMY i I HEX English UK EN_GB 285 DMY BLANK HEX English US EN_US 37 MDY BLANK HEX Estonian ET_EE 1122 DMY I HEX Finnish FI_FI 278 DMY 2 I HEX French France FR_FR 297 DMY I HEX French MNCS FR_CH 500 DMY i BLANK HEX German Germany DE_DE 273 DMY I HEX German MNCS DE_CH 500 DMY BLANK HEX Greek EL_GR 875 DMY I HEX Hungarian HU_HU 870 YMD BLANK HEX Chapter 2 Installi
507. t up to 6 partitions Partitioning a single computer into separate servers provides e Full Domino security for users of partitioned servers e Reduced number of computers to own and administer in order to support independent groups of users e Easy migration from partitioned servers to individual servers Clustered Servers A server cluster is a group of Domino servers in the same domain connected by a local area network Clusters provide high availability of data and services by allowing the services of a failing or over committed server to be taken over by a different server within the cluster To protect against software failures with the Domino product or to bypass planned downtime for example while saving the data to tape you may also use partitioned servers as part of a cluster Server Cluster on a Single AS 400 System The high availability of AS 400 systems makes it possible to implement more logical servers on the same hardware and even combine the concepts of partitioned servers and server clusters on the same hardware 18 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Billing The billing feature enables a Domino server to track specific Domino activities The billing server task collects the billing information provided by the server and records the data for billing purposes Domino servers can track specific activities for billing Each type of activity is designated by a billing class You select
508. te is determined from the locale Otherwise the job attribute is determined by the value in the QDATFMT system value In addition the Domino server keeps an internal date format setting Ifa DateOrder keyword is specified in the NOTES INI file the 56 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration internal setting will be the value specified for the DateOrder Otherwise the date format will be determined from the locale Normally the QNOTES user profile has a value of DATFMT specified on the Locale Job Attributes and the NOTES INI file does not contain a DateOrder keyword Therefore both the job attribute and the internal Domino date formats have the value specified for the locale The table beginning on page 42 lists the date formats for each locale shipped with the Domino server To specify a different value for the date format you can set the DateOrder value in the NOTES INI file for the server This will change the date format Domino uses internally However it will not change the date format for the job attribute which affects the format of data for various OS 400 interfaces Therefore you need to also change the date format for the OS 400 processes for the AS 400 system To do this change the Date Format QDATFMT system value on the AS 400 system using the Work with System Values WRKSYSVAL command to the same value that you specify for the DateOrder keyword and remove the DATFMT value from the Locale
509. te that the same SMTP domain name is used for all mail applications running on your AS 400 system Domino OV 400 POP3 server since they all use OS 400 SMTP support However you can define more than one SMTP domain name that your system will accept incoming mail for see A Single AS 400 Known by Multiple SMTP Domain Names on page 166 Likewise the MTA can accept mail for more than one SMTP domain This requires a modification in the Global Domain document see The Global Domain Document on page 173 In combination with assigning a specific SMTP address for individual users this allows you to have users with different SMTP domains see Manually Assigning an SMTP User Name for a Notes User on page 185 Automatically Assigning an SMTP User Name for a Notes User For the user part of the SMTP address you have the choice of automatically assigning a name based on the current enrollment or to define an arbitrary name on a user by user basis Obviously the method is different for Notes users and for users of Office Vision for AS 400 We explain both concepts in the following topics For receiving SMTP mail for a Notes user actually any part of the user s name as defined in the person document can be used as an SMTP user name mail box as long as this is a unique name For example to reach Hans Neugebauer you could use any of the following on the left side of the sign Tn many places in the documentation the
510. tem01 domland acme com Name Mail First name Erika Mail system Other Intenet Mail aiz Middle initial Last name User name Erika Bender Short name T ebender Internet address ebender system01 system0 Tetti 1 domland acme com y Personal title E Generational ae qualifier Internet password The forwarding address including domain names for this person eg John Smith Acme External Figure 81 Person Document for Foreign Mail User The SMTP address must have at least one period at the right of the sign even if the recipient s mail system would accept a partial SMTP domain name For example from the receiving system s standpoint OS 400 SMTP support if the AS 400 system s host name is SYSTEMO1 it would accept an incoming e mail addressed to ebender system01 however from the sending Domino mail router 184 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration point of view this address would be ambiguous because it could as well be a Notes address where system01 specifies a Notes domain You must key in the full SMTP address for the recipient In Figure 81 we used the example of an OfficeVision 400 user as defined on page 183 Note that you have a choice of address formats as described in Default SMTP Address for OS 400 Based Mail Users on page 187 We choose the format having the SDD user ID and address at the left of separated by a question mark Th
511. ter mail directory replaces the mail information in the other directory When changes are made to either of the directory entries at a later time the changed information replaces the mail information in the synchronized directory entry regardless of which directory is the master mail directory e For bi directional synchronization or AS 400 to Domino unidirectional synchronization with the populate option specify how to handle existing AS 400 SMTP addresses If you choose to map existing AS 400 SMTP addresses during the populate operation an existing SMTP address in an AS 400 directory entry is inserted after any existing values in the ShortName field of the corresponding entry in the Domino Public Address Book Once the populate operation is completed existing SMTP addresses are not mapped in subsequent populate operations Chapter 5 Directory Synchronization 227 _ New Directory Synchronization Configuration Lotus Notes Domino for AS 400 Directory Synchronization Figure 113 Mail Related Information If you want to map existing AS 400 SMTP addresses during a bi directional populate operation it is best to select the AS 400 system distribution directory as the master directory If you do not specify the AS 400 directory directory synchronization displays a warning and allows you to change the master directory to the AS 400 directory For bi directional synchronization or Domino to AS 400 unidirectional synchronization s
512. the servers was set up correctly See Using the MTA for Multiple Partitioned Servers on page 199 for more information Description of the SMTP MTA Tasks DRT or DRTask The Delivery Report task deletes all messages that have been successfully sent or received For messages that have experienced some kind of permanent failure the Delivery Report Task generates a Non delivery Report or Undeliverable Message Notification back to the sender and will also notify the administrator of any dead mail IMSGCNV The Inbound Message Conversion task converts messages received by the Inbound Session Handlers to a Notes format It also converts the destination 194 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration user address to a Notes format and checks that this address is deliverable If the message is not convertible or the address is not deliverable it will indicate the message has failed delivery so that a Non delivery Report can be generated If the message is not destined for Notes it will put the message into the work queue for the Outbound Transport SMTPMTA The Add in Controller the Notes task that is loaded on the Notes server It acts as the control point for all other MTA tasks OMSGCNV The Outbound Message Conversion task converts Notes messages into an SMTP MIME format ready for transmission OSESCTL The Outbound Session Controller task controls the transport of the converted messages to their
513. ther the client session events should be logged in the Notes log LOG NSF for this Domino server Default YES RPLCFG Replace configuration Specifies whether the existing Domino server configuration files in the directory that is specified in the Data directory DTADIR parameter should be erased and replaced with the new ones These files are NOTES INI NAMES NSF and the ID files in the data directory Default YES WEB Web browsers Specifies whether a Web server feature should be included in the Domino server configuration The Web server feature automatically starts the Domino HTTP server and enables Web browsers to access the Domino server Example HTTP Default NONE NEWS News readers Specifies whether an Internet news reader should be included in the Domino server configuration A news reader enables the Domino server to send messages to and receive messages from Internet news groups It also enables Internet news readers to access the Domino server Example NNTP Default NONE 114 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Keyword Description MAIL Internet mail packages Specifies which if any Internet mail packages should be included in the Domino server configuration The mail packages enable the Domino server to send mail to and receive mail from the Internet Unless ALL or NONE is entered one or more keywords can be entered Possible Values ALL IMAP LDAP POP3 SMTPMTA Defa
514. these two different worlds of electronic mail 8 The AS 400 system name is set through the Change Network Attributes CHGNETA command It does not have to be the same as the host name but it is certainly a good idea The AS 400 systems name shows on the upper right corner of many AS 400 displays 176 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration How Can We Reach You What Is Your Internet Mail Address Before trying to send mail make sure to understand exactly from each user s that is from each mail application s point of view what is the correct address to reach the user and based on which configuration parameters the address is formed Each mail system like Lotus Notes or OfficeVision for AS 400 has its own syntax and naming conventions to address mail users Since we are using the SMTP format for the mail between these unlike systems we first need to know each user s SMTP address that is the Internet Mail address On the Right of the Sign The SMTP Domain Name Any SMTP mail address always has the form username SMTPdomain The part on the left of the sign describes the user s name or better the user s mail box name and is defined by the mail application being used The SMTP domain name on the right side of the sign must be a valid host name of the AS 400 that is it must be possible to resolve this name to an IP address assigned to a network interface on your AS 400 system No
515. tion P E Modems Fr Protocols 6 Servers FY Printer Output E Printers H System E a Users and Groups f Systema 1 6 of 6 object s Figure 180 Connection Profiles in Operations Navigator Window 4 Right click on Connection Profiles to open a context menu Chapter 7 Dial Up Connectivity 311 5 Choose New Profile from the context menu You will see the New Point to Point Profiles Properties box with five tabs New Point to Point Profile Properties Systema Figure 181 New Point to Point Profile Properties 6 On the General tab specify a profile name of ten characters or less and provide a meaningful description as shown in Figure 3 312 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration 7 Choose type PPP and mode Switched line dial Figure 182 New Point to Point Profile Properties Systema BEI Connection TCP IP Settings Script Authentication Domain Name Server PPPDIAL Dial profile for Domino Figure 182 New Point to Point Profile Properties filled in 8 Click the Connection tab New Point to Point Profile Properti 9 1112233 Figure 183 New Point to Point Profile Properties Connection tab 9 Click Add and specify the phone number of the answering system Chapter 7 Dial Up Connectivity 313 Note Up to three phone numbers can be added in this fashion if the same PPP profile will be used to access multiple answering
516. tion domain Use the LAN port s 3 Optional network address Remote LAN Service Information aj Choose a Service Type Scheduled Routing and Connection Replication Schedule ENABLED Ji Tasks Replication Mail Routing id Call at times 08 00 AM 10 00 PM 3 each Route at once if 75 messages pending day Choose the type of connection you want to establish e g Dialup Modem Figure 191 New Server Connection after Remote LAN Service selected 6 Fill in the fields in the Basics section of the server connection document 320 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Source server Type the fully qualified name of the calling Domino server In our example this is AcmeA Acme A fully qualified name is made up of at least a common name and the organization In your environment it may contain organizational units as well You can verify the fully qualified name by looking at the Servers View under Server in the Public Address Book Source domain Type the Domino domain name of the source server Our Domino domain name happens to be the same name as the organization Acme This is the default case but may not be true in every situation Destination server Type the fully qualified name of the answering Domino server In our example this is AcmeB Acme Destination domain Type the Domino domain name of the destination server In our example the destination server is in the s
517. to assign up to four host names aliases to the same IP address within the OS 400 host tables or even more on DNS name servers If you decide that more than one Domino for AS 400 server will share TCP IP addresses distinguished by name and port number then just add aliases to the existing host table entries either in the OS 400 table a DNS name server database or the Notes clients host table If you do not have a DNS name server make sure that all clients and the OS 400 host table contain entries to translate the server non qualified host name to a Note the TCP IP host name of the AS 400 system may be identical to the AS 400 system name and this is recommended however those are two different parameters and totally independent Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 47 numerical Internet address For example the host name AcmeDS1 must be translated via host table or DNS to 10 1 2 3 Caution If the host name used for a Domino server is only added to the clients host table but not to the OS 400 host table most of the server functions may work perfectly However you may run into several problems later For example e OS 400 SMTP support will not recognize that host name as a valid local SMTP domain name e You will not be able to configure NotesPump What Is a Domain Name System The Domain Name System DNS is an application that enables a TCP IP host in our case either a Domino server or a N
518. to decide in which IFS directory you want to store the new ID file It is a good idea to use the same directory as the data directory for the new Domino server Normally the data directory is created when you execute the Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR command in this case however you need to create the directory beforehand Assuming you want to use notes data as you data directory you can enter the following two commands on any AS 400 command line to create that directory md notes md notes data Note that when you run the CFGDOMSVR command and the data directory already exists its contents will not be deleted 2 If you did not map a network drive use FTP to copy the ID file back to the AS 400 IFS Important After having changed the ID file in the AS 400 IFS no matter whether you copied it or used a network drive the ownership for this IFS object has changed from user profile QNOTES to the user profile you were using when storing the modified file on the AS 400 system Therefore you must change the ownership again before you can start the server 3 You can use the Change Owner CHGOWN not CHGOBJOWN command to change ownership of an IFS object Type the following command in any AS 400 command line and press the Enter key chgown notes data server id qnotes 4 If you do not change ownership of the ID file and attempt to start the server it will show the following message on the server console and will then term
519. tools are different than the ones provided with this PTF To make sure to use the correct version of the tools existing objects with the same name should be deleted before restoring the tools provided with the PTF After loading and applying the PTF the objects for the EDTF and DSPSTMF tools are provided in a Save file an object of type SAVE QGPTOOLS in library QGPL If you want to use these tools you should do the following e Sign on to the system with a user profile that has ALLOBJ authority e Delete any old objects that exist on your system for these tools This must be done to avoid incompatibilities Use the following commands to remove all the objects from your system before restoring from the save file All objects for EDTF DLTPGM PGM ALL EDTF DLTF FILE ALL EDTF DLTCMD CMD ALL EDTF Objects for DSPSTMF DLTPGM PGM ALL DSPSTMF DLTPGM PGM ALL HEXEDITOR DLTPGM PGM ALL HEXEDTATN DLTSRVPGM SRVPGM ALL HEXEDTSRV DLTF FILE ALL HEXEDITOR DLTCMD CMD ALL DSPSTMF e Determine which user library will contain the tools objects and create it if it does not exist CRTLIB LIB yourlibrary e Issue the following command to restore the tools RSTOBJ OBJ ALL SAVLIB QGPTOOLS DEV SAVF OBJTYPE ALL SAVF QGPL QGPTOOLS MBROPT ALL RSTLIB yourlibrary Configure TCP IP on Your AS 400 System In order to allow Notes clients or Web browsers to connect to Domino for AS 400 the OS 400 TCP IP support
520. tory within the AS 400 Integrated Files System IFS to be used to store all the Notes databases for this server If you want to have the server and administrator ID files as well as the certifier ID file for the new server copied to your workstation disk you need to specify a path in the field Copy ID files to Make sure this path exists it will not be created for you 11 Click Finish and after responding to the Continue message box Figure 131 the configuration job will be submitted to your AS 400 system If you made no mistakes you will see a success message see Figure 136 on page 273 after 5 to 20 minutes depending on the size 256 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration and utilization of your AS 400 system Continue Begin sending the request to SYSTEMO1 to setup the Domino server This requires 5 15 minutes of computation Would you like to continue Figure 131 Continue Our example however guides you through the case where mistakes have been made and you receive the following message x CPFOOOE Errors occurred in command Figure 132 Errors Occurred in Command 12 After you click OK you see a more meaningful message Error Ea Q See the joblog of the AS 400 job with the job name of QZRCSRYS and user QUSER for more information Figure 133 Error See Joblog 13 D This message still does not tell you the exact reason why the server coul
521. tral system To create a library for the save files that will contain the Domino software use the Create Library CRTLIB command Substitute the name of your library for MYLIB CRTLIB LIB mylib To create a save file to hold the Domino software us the Create Save File CRTSAVF command Substitute the name of your save file for dominob CRTSAVF FILE mylib dominob Note You need a separate save file for each Domino option that you want to save For example create save file dominob for the base software For example create save file DOMINO3 for Domino for AS 400 option 3 To save the base Domino for AS 400 software to the save file use the Save Licensed Program SAVLICPGM command Substitute your library name and save file name for MYLIB and DOMINOB Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 121 SAVLICPGM LICPGM 5769LNT DEV SAVF SAVF mylib dominob 5 For each additional software option that you want to save use the SAVLICPGM command and a new save file For example to save option 3 use the following command SAVLICPGM LICPGM 5769LNT option 3 DEV SAVF SAVF mylib domino3 6 Use the Send Network File SNDNETF command or FTP to move a copy of the save files to the remote system where you want to install Domino for AS 400 7 On the remote system use the Restore Licensed Program RSTLICPGM command to install Domino for AS 400 from the save files You need to install each Domino option separat
522. ts in the QNOTES library are created What does not happen during this initial setup is the creation of the data directory for the Domino server which would be the case on other server platforms for the Domino server Creation of the data directory will be done during the second phase of the installation of Domino for AS 400 when the server is configured using the Configure Domino Server CFGDOMSVR command or the setup function of Operations Navigator National Language Considerations The Domino for AS 400 Release Notes also in the database README NSF describe some limitations and considerations for using Domino for AS 400 in languages other than US English Note that all language dependent settings are taken from the locale defined in the QNOTES user profile The date format for the Domino server is taken from the locale associated with QNOTES The following table shows the attributes that are picked up from the locale for each language If you need to specify different settings than those chosen by the installation process based on the language of the CD ROM use the Change User Profile CHGUSRPRF command to specify all locale specific job attributes that should be picked up from the specified locale The locale name is 54 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration QSYS LIB QNOTES LIB xx_yy locale where xx_yy is the value specified in the second column of the following table For example to se
523. ts to initialize some default fields and other internal reasons even if no changes are made Thus it is a good idea to perform this action and also visually verify the configuration settings Make changes to the SMTP MIME MTA configuration documents if necessary Chapter 8 Migration from Other Domino Platforms 355 In some cases you may be required to make changes to the automatically generated configuration One of these is if the SMTP domain name used to address mail to your users is different from the AS 400 local host and domain and your OS 400 SMTP environment is set up to use the default SMTP mail behavior With Domino for AS 400 the AS 400 local host and domain as defined in option 12 of the Configure TCP IP CFGTCP menu is what will be configured by default for the Internet domain suffix in the SMTP MTA global domain document The name used in your existing Domino environment may in fact be different For example the default Internet domain suffix for the Integrated PC Server SMTP MIME MTA configuration is the TCP IP host name and TCP IP domain name of the NWS The TCP IP host name of the NWS will in fact be unique and different from the AS 400 local host name If you wish to continue to receive mail using the same SMTP mail addressing as before you may need to add that name to the Internet domain suffix field along with the AS 400 host and domain If you would like it to be used for the reply address for outgoing mail served
524. tus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration 15 Click either Insert New Mapping Before or Insert New Mapping After and you will see the form shown in Figure 104 Mapping AS 400 Fields to Domino Field Lotus Notes 5 x Enter AS 400 directory fields or press Add AS 400 Fields for list Figure 104 Add AS 400 Fields for Field Mapping 16 Click Add AS 400 Fields to display the AS 400 fields 17 Select an AS 400 field This field is the source for the mapping Click the Add button List of AS 400 Directory Fields Figure 105 List of AS 400 Directory Fields 18 You may select multiple fields and then click OK 19 Click Find to display the Domino fields Chapter 5 Directory Synchronization 221 20 Select a Domino field This field is the target for the mapping Domino Address Book Fields Select a Domino Address Book field Domino Field Name v Field Type Country Domino Defined Department Domino Defined FirstName Domino Defined FullName Domino Defined HomeFAXPhoneNumber Domino Defined JobTitle Domino Defined Domino Defined Location Domino Defined KdailAddrace Namina Nafinard Figure 106 Domino Address Book Fields 21 Click OK 22 Back in the form called Mapping AS 400 Directory Fields to Domino Address Book Fields click the Save button 23 Click the Close button Note To remove a field mapping you must change the access control list for the Directory
525. tus Notes Now that you have created your directory entry you can mail from Lotus Notes to that system directory entry To mail type information in the To field as shown in this example accts test name ibm com When the mail item gets to the AS 400 system the AnyMail snap ins determine that the directory entry has an address type of FAX The mail item is faxed to the Appendix A Using Facsimile Support for AS 400 377 fax telephone number the fax master list entry or the fax distribution list that is specified in the system directory entry Faxing From Client Access 400 Another option that you can use to fax from your Lotus Notes workstation is to install the Client Access 400 AFP Print driver and configure a printer as an IBM AFP Facsimile Support for AS 400 device When printing from Lotus Notes a dialog prompts you for fax destination information The following information describes how this option works Prerequisites Complete the following steps before you configure the PC workstation to fax PC output 1 Install Windows NT or the Windows 95 Operating System on the PC workstation 2 Install Client Access 400 on the PC workstation and select the AFP Printer driver to be installed Install the latest Service Pack for Client Access 400 4 Establish a session with the AS 400 system on the PC workstation Configuring the PC Workstation to Fax PC Output To configure the PC Workstation to fax PC output complete the
526. u already have one or more Domino or Notes servers installed in your organization you may want to add your Domino for AS 400 server to an existing Domino domain and organization This allows you to use the same organization certifier and use a replica of the existing Public Address Book Remember a Domino domain is not only defined by using the same domain name the correct definition is that all servers within a single domain use a replica of the same Public Address Book So all the configuration can be done in one place and all users and servers are known to all servers within the domain The second important concept here is the organization All Notes users and Domino servers within the same organization have an ID that is based on the same certifier which was created and stored in file cert id when the first server of the organization was set up An organization can also be split into organizational units The default and probably the most common way to structure a Notes network is to use a single organization within a single domain Note however that an organization can contain multiple domains but it is also possible but less likely that multiple organizations or organizational units can be in the same domain For the purpose of this book we have assumed that the domain contains the same set of users and servers as the organization For more information refer to the 7 With Release 4 5 the product name for the
527. u convert the SMTP names For this default implementation the following facts apply e Each SMTP user ID can only be up to 24 characters long e There are system wide SMTP names system alias table as well as personal entries only to be used by a single AS 400 user e The SMTP names can be maintained by one of the following The Work with Names for SMTP WRKNAMSMTP command The F19 key Change name for SMTP when using option 1 or 2 of the Work with Directory Entries menu You cannot enter or change an SMTP name with the Add Directory Entry ADDDIRE or Change Directory Entry CHGDIRE commands Optionally you may convert your SMTP alias table using the Convert Names SMTP CVTNAMSMTP command see Directory Conversion on page 196 for more information After doing so the SMTP names are stored in user defined fields directly with each entry in the System distribution directory In this case the following facts are true e The SMTP user ID can be up to 64 characters long e The personal alias table cannot be used anymore e The SMTP names can be maintained by one of the following The F19 key Change name for SMTP when using option 1 or 2 of the Work with Directory Entries menu The Add Directory Entry ADDDIRE or Change Directory Entry CHGDIRE commands can be used to enter or change the user defined fields containing the SMTP address The Work with Names for SMTP WRKNAMSMTP command cannot b
528. ublic Address Book or Name and Address Book are always open whenever the Domino server is running High availability requires minimal Domino server down time for routine maintenance such as backup If you require 24x7 availability you may choose to replicate to a partition which can be taken off line for backup while your primary Domino server remains available This is the approach used in production by the internal IS department at IBM Rochester See Implementing Backup and Recovery Strategies on page 420 for more information Another alternative is to use the Domino clustering capability available with the advanced services of the Domino Enterprise Server license Domino for AS 400 security has implications in a backup recovery strategy The Domino for AS 400 security implementation takes advantage of a combination of AS 400 security and Domino security AS 400 security protects Domino databases Chapter 8 Migration from Other Domino Platforms 363 from access outside of the control of Domino by setting public authority for all Domino objects to EXCLUDE Document Level Restore One advantage of the ADSM implementation on the Integrated PC Server is the possibility to restore single documents for example if one or more documents were accidentally deleted by a user The backup and recovery function for Domino for AS 400 does not provide such a possibility However you may restore the complete Domino database to a different IFS di
529. ult NONE ADVSRV Advanced services Specifies which if any features of the Lotus Domino Advanced Services should be included in the Domino server configuration Unless ALL or NONE is entered one or more keywords can be entered If you plan to use clustering or billing for this server you need to select the appropriate key word If you plan to configure multiple logical partitioned servers you need to select PARTITION for all servers even if you only configure one at this time Possible Values ALL PARTITION BILLING CLUSTER Default NONE Start the Configuration Process 4 Press Enter to start the configuration process Your keyboard will be locked and the display will not change for approximately the next 3 to 5 minutes Unlike setting up a first server you will not see the Terminal Session Display Figure 14 on page 69 unless errors occur Platform Independent Phase of Server Setup During this phase many Notes databases NSF files Notes templates NTF files and other files needed for this server are placed in the data directory Since you are setting up an additional server ID files and the Public Address Book will not be newly created Instead the NAB server registration server will be contacted via TCP IP and the following happens at the registration server depending on whether the ID was attached to the new server document NAB or stored as a file in an IFS directory ID File Attached to Server D
530. us Notes license and specifies whether the owner can run the North American or International edition of Domino or Notes You can t change a license number associated with an ID e A public key and a private key e At least one certificate from a certifier ID A certificate is an electronic stamp added to a user ID or server ID This stamp is generated using the private key of a certifier ID and verifies that the name of the owner of the ID is correctly associated with a specific public key e Optional One or more encryption keys created and distributed by users that allow users to encrypt and decrypt fields in a document If the owner of an ID creates a password for it the password generates a key that encrypts most of the data on the ID When the first server is configured three ID files are created and stored in the specified data directory The names of those ID files are e cert id e user id e server id The cert id file contains the organization certifier ID and is the base to create IDs for any users servers or certifiers for organizational units within the same organization Therefore you need access to the cert id file from a Notes client the administration client whenever you want to register additional users or servers Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for AS 400 83 The user id file is the administrator s ID file After having configured the first server of an organization the administrator is
531. use a PC based text editor Tip Do not use the NotePad editor The line ends are marked differently by NotePad than what is expected by the Domino server Important After saving the file you need to change the ownership of the IFS object so that QNOTES owns it again This can be done using the Change Owner CHGOWN command For example enter the following command on any AS 400 command line CHGOWN OBJ notes data notes ini NEWOWN QNOTES e Use File Transfer Protocol FTP to copy the NOTES INI file to a workstation then modify it with a PC editor and copy it back to the AS 400 IFS Important After copying the file back to the AS 400 IFS you need to change the ownership of the IFS object so that QNOTES owns it again This can be done using the Change Owner CHGOWN command For example enter the following command on any AS 400 command line CHGOWN OBJ notes data notes ini NEWOWN QNOTES e Open the server properties with Operations Navigator and click the tab called Initialization File You will see the contents of the NOTES INI file Then click the Edit button Tip When you click the Edit button the Windows 95 application WordPad will be started You will see an error message if WordPad is not installed on your PC To install WordPad perform the following steps on your Windows 95 desktop 3 You cannot use the Change Object Owner CHGOBJOWN command here Chapter 2 Installing and Setting Up Domino for
532. users only where needed For example e Do not enroll the same name in Lotus Notes and in Office Vision 400 this never works e Do not create an AS 400 user profile for a Notes user this works but is confusing in a test environment e Try to summarize in a table what the important configuration parameters are and what users you defined for testing and the values configured Chapter 4 Mail Integration Through the SMTP MIME MTA 175 Bad Example I want to send mail from my Notes ID to my OfficeVision ID basically means trying something almost impossible and asking for confusion The important parameters of the examples we have given so far are summarized in the following tables OS 400 TCP IP Configuration AS 400 System Name SYSTEMO1 AS 400 Host Names SYSTEMO1 TCP IP Domain domland acme com Domino Configuration Server Name AcmeDS1 Notes Organization OrgA Notes Domain OrgA We set up a Notes user with Domino for AS 400 as his home mail server with the following parameters Lotus Notes User Common Name Hans Neugebauer Last Name Neugebauer First Name Hans Short Name hneugeba Full Name Hans Neugebauer OrgA We set up an Office Vison 400 user with the following parameters OfficeVision 400 User User profile EBENDER User ID EBENDER Address SYSTEMO1 The following sections describe the addressing considerations you need to understand in order to successfully send mail between
533. users through an AS 400 interface e Database integration e Directory synchronization one way from OS 400 System Distribution Directory SDD to Domino Public Address Book PAB e Integration of Notes mail with AS 400 mail e Backup and recovery of Lotus Notes databases In May of 1997 the FSIOP became what we now call the Integrated PC Server IPCS The installation process was rewritten the number of users increased greatly the processor became a faster Pentium 166 and the Lotus Notes Server was renamed Domino The installation process was enhanced to support the AS 400 CD ROM drive to eliminate the administrative PC for the installation process More IBMers and Business Partners became aware of the value of this collaborative Web environment being managed by their AS 400 system Over 4 000 were sold in the first part of 1997 and numerous success stories can be found in the case studies section of our AS 400 home page Customers began using Domino on the IPCS for too many applications to mention and began realizing the integration points especially in the directory were a reason to make the AS 400 system their universal mail server in addition to their hub for client server groupware applications Chapter 1 Overview of Lotus Domino for AS 400 15 In 1997 a Domino server on the AS 400 system using the Integrated PC Server provided the following advantages e Pentium 166 processor e Improved installation e Requirement for ad
534. ver Migration Server Transplantation Process Outline Identify the Domino Databases and Files to be Migrated Create the Domino Data Directory for the Domino for AS 400 Server Schedule an Outage of the Original Domino Server Copy the Domino Databases and Files to the Transplanted Server Change Ownership and Authorities of Files and Directories Modify the TCP IP Configuration of Both Servers Configure the Transplanted Domino for AS 400 Server Start the TCP IP Interface and the Domino for AS 400 Server Server Consolidation Process Outline 298 308 314 314 322 323 324 324 325 339 343 344 344 345 346 349 351 352 357 358 364 366 367 Identify the Domino Databases to be Migrated Configure a New Unique Domino Server on the AS 400 System Copy the Domino Databases and Files to the Consolidated Server Change Ownership and Authorities of Files and Directories Start the Domino for AS 400 Server Identify and Handle Databases with Local Encryption Use Replication to Keep Files Synchronized Until Cutover Change User Information in the Public Address Book Make Appropriate Changes on User Workstations Migrating the SMTP MIME MTA Using Domino on the Integrated PC Server After Migrating Additional Considerations When Migrating from Integrated PC Server Add Notes User Command Differences in Default Port Names Dial up Connectivity Directory Shadowing versus
535. w to use this display Figure 206 Change Network Server Description CHGNWSD 2 Prompt 4 If an Internet address is defined for port 1 type in a new Internet address for TCP IP port 1 In our example the original Port 1 address is 10 5 67 71 and 346 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration we changed it to 10 5 67 73 The IP address must be unique within your network and conform to your subnet mask For a larger network you may need to consult your network administrator to obtain an appropriate new IP address for your installation If an Internet address is defined for port 2 type in a new Internet address for TCP IP port 2 In our example the original address was 10 5 67 72 and we changed it to 10 5 67 74 Note An Integrated PC Server configured for a Domino server always has one internal port showing INTERNAL in the Port parameter and one or two external ports There is no need to change the internal IP address depending on the future usage of the Integrated PC Server the internal port may or may not be needed If the Domino server uses both external ports you need to change each as in our example If only one port was used it will be port in most cases but could as well be port 2 Press the Enter key A message appears on your screen indicating Operation in progress please wait 5 The Work with Network Server Descriptions display will reappear A message will a
536. we input a routing code of 4567 Press Enter to make the change You will return to the Work With Fax Profiles display Select option 8 Routing entries and press Enter The Work with Routing Entries display appears as shown in Figure 227 work with Routing Entries D Fax profile da PKENNEDY Routing codec sr aos Sask sek FASS Type option press Enter 2 Edit entry 4 Remove entry Opt Routing Type Description No additional information found Bottom F3 Exit F5 Refresh F6 Create F12 Cancel tc COPYRIGHT IBM CORP 1995 1998 wy Figure 227 Work with Routing Entries Press F6 to create a routing entry The Select Routing Entry display appears as shown in Figure 228 Appendix A Using Facsimile Support for AS 400 383 Loik with Routing Entries gt Select Routing Entry Type Select one of the following Print received fax File received fax Send notification Send fax as a document Run user receive program OO BWNEF Selection F3 Exit F12 Cancel Bottom raerwit FPR Rafrach PA Craata FP1l Cancal Figure 228 Select Routing Entry Type From the Select Routing Entry Type display you can create as many routing entries as you want To mail a received fax to Lotus Notes you must create at least two routing entries For the first routing entry select option 2 File Received Fax and press Enter The File Received Fax display appears as shown in Figure 229 ae Received Fax N F
537. ween IPCS and OS 400 via Internal LAN Note The speed may very substantially on your system so you should test the transfer in order to be able to estimate the time needed Remember neither the old nor the new Domino server will be available for users during this period of time Change Ownership and Authorities of Files and Directories In order for Domino for AS 400 to access Domino databases and manage access by users the files must be owned by the specialized user profile QNOTES Thus you must change the ownership of the files just transferred and the directory structure in which they reside You may have already performed this step for the directory structure at the time you created it If not to change the ownership of a directory you can use the Change Owner CHGOWN command In our example the Domino data directory is called notes data CHGOWN notes data QNOTES You still need to change ownership and authorities of the files you just transferred To change the ownership of all files in a given directory you can use the Change Owner CHGOWN command syntax as indicated below In our example the Domino data directory is called notes data 340 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration CHGOWN notes data QNOTES Note This command changes the ownership for all files in the specified directory but does not affect subdirectories and the files they contain You must issue a change ownership co
538. wing functions e Domino Notes replication synchronizes the content of the Public Address Book or any other Notes database on different Domino servers and Notes clients e AS 400 Directory Shadowing allows you to synchronize entries in the AS 400 system distribution directories on two or more AS 400 systems For information about directory shadowing refer to the book AS 400 Advanced Series SNA Distribution Services SC41 5410 e OS 400 Integration of Lotus Notes Directory Shadowing applies changes to entries of the AS 400 system distribution directory to the Domino address book on a server running on the AS 400 Integrated PC Server For information about OS 400 Integration of Lotus Notes directory shadowing refer to the book AS 400 Advanced Series OS 400 Integration of Lotus Notes SC41 5431 You can use all of the functions mentioned above in combination with directory synchronization Be aware however that in certain environments synchronization loops may be created resulting in performing updates for an indefinite period of time It is the responsibility of the system administrator to avoid those loops when setting up the different synchronization functions The following section shows one example of how such an indefinite loop may occur and what you can do to avoid it 236 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration Never Ending Updates A simple example of a synchronization loop can be seen for the fo
539. with serial ports What is PPP Point to Point Protocol PPP addresses all of the SLIP deficiencies listed above provides enhanced security is more efficient supports higher line speeds and is easier to configure One goal of PPP is to allow inter operability among the remote access software of different manufacturers Another goal is to allow the same physical communication line to be used by multiple network communication protocols Prerequisites for Using PPP on an AS 400 System PPP is recommended over SLIP in environments that meet the following requirements e For PPP you must use OS 400 Release 4 Version 2 V4R2 or later OS 400 Client Access and Operations Navigator under Windows 95 NT must also be enabled to allow the configuration of PPP connection profiles e A connection must be established using either a switched line or a direct leased line e The correct communication ports and adapters must be installed on the AS 400 system PPP requires a special line description new to OS 400 V4R2 named PPP as well The PPP line description requires specific hardware and software In order to use the PPP line description your AS 400 system must have one of the following I O adapters e 2699 Two line WAN IOA e 2720 PCI WAN Twinaxial IOA e 2721 PCI Two line WAN IOA Which of the adapters can be installed depends on the model of AS 400 system you have To find out more about AS 400 hardware requirements refer to th
540. xceeded 91 Maximum Transmission Unit 316 MD 350 Message size 209 MRI 54 MSF Mail Server Frame Work 157 MSFSRVLVL 379 MTA 17 migrating 371 MTAGlobal 173 MTU 316 multi homing 48 N NAB 213 NAB Server 114 NAB server name 117 NABSVR 117 Name and Address Book 114 213 NAMEFMT 354 NAMES NSF 114 218 replacing design 205 National Language Considerations 55 National Language Version NLV 56 NetServer 87 Network name 66 Network Neighborhood 87 Network Server Description NWSD 359 NLV 56 NNDILOG NSF 215 218 219 245 251 252 NNDIRSYC NSF 215 NNTP clients 15 North American English 25 Notes Server Dump NSD 131 NOTES INI 50 editing 96 NOTESHST 134 NotesPump 17 48 NSD 131 O ODBC 17 OfficeVision 17 OMSGCNV V 203 Operations Navigator 35 37 39 40 41 53 55 61 253 254 258 National Language Version 254 OPT01 52 optical device 52 Organization 64 106 163 organization certifier ID 87 organizational unit 163 OS 400 29 V4R3 36 39 OS 400 command line 42 OSESCTL 203 OSESHLRan 203 OtherDomainServers 105 OUTQ 341 P PAB 114 213 Public Address Book 50 62 70 82 83 97 103 105 106 107 110 111 112 117 119 120 121 122 127 panic 131 Partitioned servers 18 connecting via loopback 103 data directory 91 Password for SERVER ID 112 Path Delimiter 348 Percent Sign in SMTP Address 208 Index 419 Point t
541. y F24 More keys Figure 203 Create Network Server Description CRTNWSD Chapter 8 Migration from Other Domino Platforms 343 3 Type in anew name for your Integrated PC Server In our example the new name for the Integrated PC Server is IPCS1 Page down and a second command prompt as shown in Figure 204 appears Create Network Server Desc CRTNWSD Type choices press Enter TCP IP port configuration POE 3a das ew eh ee ede ey as 1 NONE INTERNAL 1 2 3 Internet address ELOY O73 Subnet mask 25522552255 192 Maximum transmission unit 1500 Number POEs cy ett ee eG ee Se 2 INTERNAL 1 2 3 Internet address 10 25 67 74 i SUDMEE mask dyrgt a me ee as os 2552504299 0 I Maximum transmission unit 1500 Number POLC u ak ee ids ade ds aLe adi 44k 8 INTERNAL INTERNAL 1 2 3 Internet address 192 168 7 2 Subnet mask o sour e kenu cw OAAS TA E Maximum transmission unit 15400 Number More F3 Exit F4 Prompt F5 Refresh F12 Cancel F13 How to use this display F24 More keys Figure 204 Create Network Server Description CRTNWSD 2 Prompt 4 If an Internet address is defined for port 1 type in a new Internet address for TCP IP port 1 In our example the original address was 10 5 67 71 and we changed it to 10 5 67 73 The IP address must be unique within your network and conform to your subnet mask For a larger network you may need to
542. y Strategies Migrating to Domino for AS 400 the Results First Scalability Next Reliability Finally Performance Special Notices 387 387 394 395 396 396 396 397 400 405 410 413 413 414 415 415 417 418 418 419 419 420 421 421 421 422 425 Related ITSO Publications ITSO Lotus Publications Redbooks on CD ROMs Other Lotus Related ITSO Publications How To Get ITSO Redbooks How IBM and Lotus Employees Can Get ITSO Redbooks IBM Employees Lotus Employees All Employees How Customers Can Get ITSO Redbooks Index 427 427 427 428 431 431 431 432 432 433 437 Contents 7 Preface This redpaper describes Domino for AS 400 4 6 It provides information on how to install configure and use the product in a number of different environments Specifically this redpaper introduces you to Domino for AS 400 and guides you through the installation and configuration process step by step It also helps you prepare a backup and recovery plan for saving and restoring Domino data on the AS 400 system In addition this redpaper describes mail integration directory synchronization alternatives to configuring and managing and dial up connectivity as they relate to Domino for AS 400 The redpaper was written for technical specialists and programmers who are IBM customers and business partners It also serves as an education tool for the general IBM and Lotus commu
543. y V5 0 Database Support IBM form number SG24 4808 00 An Approach to ODBC Lotus Approach to DB2 IBM form number SG24 4685 00 Related ITSO Publications 409 How To Get ITSO Redbooks This section explains how both customers and IBM Lotus employees can find out about ITSO redbooks CD ROMs workshops and residencies A form for ordering books and CD ROMs is also provided This information was current at the time of publication but is continually subject to change The latest information may be found at URL http www redbooks ibm com redbooks How IBM and Lotus Employees Can Get ITSO Redbooks Employees may request ITSO deliverables redbooks BookManager BOOKs and CD ROMs and information about redbooks workshops and residencies in the following ways IBM Employees e PUBORDER to order hardcopies in the United States e GOPHER link to the Internet type gopher wtscpok itso ibm com e Tools disks W To get LIST3820s of the redbooks listed in the Other Lotus Related ITSO Publications section type one of the following commands tools sendto ehone4 tools2 redprint get sg24xxxx package tools sendto canvm tools redprint get sg24xxxx package Canadian users only Note The ITSO Lotus publications and this redpaper Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration are not available in LIST3820 or BookManager format However PDF format is available for those books from http www lotus com redbook W To ge
544. y copy the ID files Public Address Book mail databases and other Domino databases and files to be migrated The target will be the Domino data directory you created above This can be done using FTP or the network neighborhood capability provided by AS 400 Client Access FTP is usually the desired method for optimum performance when copying large amounts of data However FTP does not allow you to copy the contents of all subdirectories with a single put command Therefore a put command is necessary for each subdirectory which may be cumbersome and error prone if the server has a complicated subdirectory structure In such an environment it is very helpful that multiple FTP commands can be queued up in batch using a source file Also for individual files which may be stored on the administrator s workstation or diskettes such as the certifier ID and administrator user ID files the Client Access method may be more convenient Important If you used FTP many times you may already know all the steps described here However make sure to understand step 6 on page 353 needs to be included because of a modification of the FTP protocol which was introduced with V4R2 of OS 400 Here is the general process for setting up the FTP environment 1 Verify your FTP id and password on the original system the system from which you are migrating by accessing the TRUSERS trusted users file If the Chapter 8 Migration from Other Domino Platform
545. y its contents There may be many messages and you have to search for a cause of the problem Here is one example 30 07 09 98 15 39 48 ONNINVAL QNOTES STMT QZRCSRVS QIW D From module E 28 QNNINVAL From procedure Send_Message__FPcT1li Statement 3 288 To module 3 QZRCRMTC To procedure os 6 6 ee f RunCommand Statement 3 50 Message Maximum number of servers exceeded Cause 3 You can have only one non partitioned server or up to 16 partitioned servers on your system Recovery You must remove an C existing server before installing a new one 5 Figure 134 Maximum Number of Servers Exceeded This message appears if there is already a Server configured and either the existing or the new server or both were not defined as a partitioned server Since we used the Quick and Easy Setup in our example it is obvious that the newer server was not defined as a partitioned server In order to select any of the advanced services such as partitions you need to use the Advanced Setup Therefore the solution for this problem is to repeat the configuration this time selecting Advanced Setup in panel 2 and then partitions in panel 3 assuming that the existing server was already set up as a partitioned server otherwise it needs to be reconfigured too 14 Click the button with the less than sign lt to return to panel 3 15 In panel 3 click the less t
546. yone can subscribe to an IBM Announcement Listserver To initiate the service send an e mail note to announce webster ibmlink ibm com with the keyword subscribe in the body of the note leave the subject line blank A category form and detailed instructions will be sent to you 412 Lotus Domino for AS 400 Installation Customization and Administration How Customers Can Get ITSO Redbooks Customers may request ITSO deliverables redbooks BookManager BOOKs and CD ROMs and information about redbooks workshops and residencies in the following ways w Online Orders Do not send credit card information over the Internet send orders to IBM Mail Internet In United States usib6fpl at ibmmail usib6fpl ibmmail com In Canada caibmbkz at ibmmail Imannix vnet ibm com Outside North America bookshop at dkibmbsh at ibmmail bookshop dk ibm com w Telephone orders United States toll free 1 800 879 2755 Canada toll free 1 800 IBM 4YOU Outside North America long distance charges apply 45 4810 1320 Danish 45 4810 1020 German 45 4810 1420 Dutch 45 4810 1620 Italian 45 4810 1540 English 45 4810 1270 Norwegian 45 4810 1670 Finnish 45 4810 1120 Spanish 45 4810 1220 French 45 4810 1170 Swedish w Mail Orders send orders to IBM Publications IBM Publications IBM Direct Services Publications Customer Support 144 4th Avenue S W Sortemosevej 21 P O Box 29554 Calgary Alberta T2P 3N5 DK 3450 A
547. ystem Domino databases are stored in the root file system in the same format as on other Domino platforms Domino for AS 400 controls the access to each database stored in the root file system Access to these databases is limited to authorized client workstations The AS 400 library file system is a directory of object names types and storage addresses that point to the object DB2 400 tables physical and logical files and AS 400 programs are the primary objects supported by the AS 400 library file system Domino for AS 400 provides many ways of accessing DB2 400 data It also provides many ways for AS 400 programs to access Domino databases Both Domino for AS 400 and AS 400 programs are managed by the Integrated File System For more information on DB 400 integration see the book Installing and Managing Domino for AS 400 Security AS 400 security features protect the Integrated File System Security features such as AS 400 user profiles and group profiles control access to the system Special authorization is given to access specific resources such as libraries programs and files These AS 400 security concepts are similar to Domino security concepts AS 400 basic authority levels include READ CHANGE ALL EXCLUDE and USE There are additional special levels of authority for object management and more advanced administrative tasks AS 400 and Domino have security concepts that compliment each other The AS 400 security system
548. ystem Therefore you can bring down one of the servers while another server takes over serving the clients and you then save the other server s databases After that you do the same for the other server Use Save files If you have sufficient storage space on disk you can save the contents of your IFS directories to a Save file This can be much faster than saving directly to tape After saving to the Save file you can start the server again and the actual save to tape process can be started now or even at a later time Chapter 3 Backup and Recovery 141 To create a save file you use the Create Save File CRTSAVF command Assume you want to create a save file called DOMINOSAVF in library NIGHTSAVES You would use the following command CRTSAVF SAVF NIGHTSAVES DOMINOSAVF TEXT Domino Backup Then you would save all Domino databases in directory Notes AcmeDS 1 using the following command SAV DEV QYSS 1ib NIGHTSAVES 1ib DOMINOSAVF file OBJ Notes AcmeDS1 CLEAR ALL DTACPR YES Note To specify the name and library for the Save file a different syntax has to be used for the SAV command and the CRTSAVF command and all other commands dealing with Save files The reason is that the Save Object SAV command uses IFS object naming conventions The parameter CLEAR ALL ensures that the current content of the Save file is overwritten This means that you can use the same Save file every night The parameter

Lotus Domino for AS/400 R4.6: Installation

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents